VOL. 89 DECEMBER, 1965 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Price: Three Pounds Three Shillings THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VZTIS VINIFERA L.) THE COOL LIMITS OF CULTIVATION BY J. A. PRESCOTT Summary An examination has been made of the temperature conditions at the polar limit of the cultivation of the grape vine Vitis vinifera L. in Europe. The principal limiting factors are the mean temperature of the warmest monthly period which must be 111 excess of 66’ F. and of the coldest monthly period which must be hi excess of 30° F, These are associated with periods of approximately six months during which the mean monthly temperature is in excess of 50°. Where mean winter temperatures fall below 30° F. special precautions must be taken to protect the vines, The temperature characteristics have also been expressed in the harmonic form of annual mean, amplitude and phase and the use of temperature summations over the base level of 50°F. is discussed. Experience in Australia and California has been examined with reference to the temperature limits established above. In an appendix, the history of the use of temperature summations in agricultural climatology is briefly reviewed. THE CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE (VITIS VINIFERA 1.) THE COOL LIMITS OF COLTIVATION By J. A. Prescorrt [Read 8 April 1965 | SUMMARY An examination hus been made of the temperature conditions at the pola limit of the cultivation of the grape vine Vitis vinifera L. in Europe. The principal limiting factors are the mean temperature of the warmest monthly period which amist be i excess of G6? VF. and of the coldest manthly period which must be 1 excess of 30° F, These are associated with periods of approximately six months during which the mean monthly temperature is ju excess al BOF F, Where mean winter temperatures fill below 30° Fy special proeautions inust be taken te protect the vines. The temperature Characteristics hiave also been expressed in the harmonic form of dumual inean, amplitude and phaso aml the use of temperature sum- } ? I t ao J Y mations over the base Jevel of BO! Wo is discussed. Experienee in Australin and California has been examined with reference to the temperature Tinvits estiblished above, In an appends, the history of the use of temperature smmmutions in agrivullural climatology is briefly reviewed, re In an earlier communication (1947) it was demonstrated that the wave- form analysis of the annual temperature curve based on mean mowthly teni- peratures could be applied to the search in Australia for the temperature honiw- climes of species of pines native to the Mediterranean environment. Such it method is particularly successful when dealing with perennial species such as Pinus radiata and Pinus eanariensis which haye a geographically restricted native habitat. The march of temperature throughout the year takes care of adapta- bility to the summer heat and winter cold, Jeaving the question of moisture relations for studies of greater refinernent.? In the case of a long established cultivated perennial such as the grape vine (Vitis vinifera), the question is complicated by the deciduous character of the plant and by the historical factors involyed in the spread of its cultiyation from its place of origin in the Annenian region, to all parts of the civilised world. In most cases at some time or other. the limits of cultivation have been advanced beyond a reasonable range both in the polar direction and equatorially, but the present polar Jimits in Europe at least have: been stable for well over a centiry. *Seo for exumple Johnston (1964). Trans, Roy, Soe, §, Aust. (1965), Vol. $9. SCOTT PRE J A J *poliad ATYUOUE Jsopfoa ey JO oinyeieduteay, UPA OY} IOF SULEYOST JuasaIded Sault] UayOLy VY “SBame [RINAPMONLA JUepOduIE Funuasaider suoyeys jo uoyospes B UALR st ULsavUL SITY JO YNOG “payRorpul oP ULBIPUE siqy Suoye Sp10I9. Anywisdiusa] [NJOsN YAK suoyrys fo suoyBoo[, pur sowwN ‘edomng UL oUIA Ay JO LoRRAnTNS ay} Jo UTBreut WalzoU wy SuyRQSUTE dupe pL By uagesga(]o ~ ON a ae Pagjstiesgy| Layee ———" - ysjoRed z,auEWeYO 74 L S4Uasiagy sue, 1 Jonge? a CLIMATOLOGY OF THK VINE 7 the States of New York and Ohio in thy United States and of the Proyincee of Ontario in Canada. Such an hybrid, Brandt, of Canadian origin, has been used tu extend the Jimit of cultivation to Britain, while the Asian species V. anata is grown commercially in Egypt, particularly in the neighbourhoud of the Mediterrancan Sea. The purpose of the present study is to examine the temperature conditions which appeae to have determined the polar limits o£ the eultivation of the vine in Europe, to establish any generalisation which emerges and to test this veneralisalion against the newer experiences of Australia and California. The present northern limits of the vultivation of the vine in Rurupe ure the result of a process of trial and error extending back first to the Koman voeeupation and Jater to the spread of Christian establishments in northern Europe. In Britain at the time of the Nerman conquest, the Domesday Book has 38 references to vineyards. An LSE century report from a yplivsiouratte Vrench source on the English counties mentions only Gloucestershire as having vineyards. These are recorded as having been recently abandoned in favour af apple orchards, Generally sneaking. Gloucester, Sorrierset aud Kent are rigarded as the most favourable counties. In Germany during the middle ages the cultivation of the vine was extended to Litbeck, Steltin, Danzig, Konigsherg und Tilsit. Must of these northern vineyards were destroved, however, by the harsh winter of 1437. In 1592 there were 92 vinevards in Berlin, areas which subsequently reverted to orchards, Iv what is now Polish Silesia, the cultivation ol the vine was introduced by Mrankish and Mlemish migrants and remained Tmportiunt until the period of the 380 years’ war. The most famous wine district in the area is that based on Ziclona Géra (Grinberg), including arcas at Swie- budvin and Sulechow, The most prosperous period is said ta Jive been be- tween 1830 and 1890, when the area planted reached £400 hectares. In Saxony the most important area has been uear Meissen and Hofléssnite, advantage being tuken of the favourable climate of the valley of the Elbe, In the tate: 16th, century, 6,000 hectares are said to have been cultivated in this urea, but this had deereased by the end of the 10th century to 526 heetares. Porther gp the valley of the Elbe vineyards were established in Bohemia and these are enr- rently represented by vreas at Milnik und Litomernice The northern limits of cultivation in Czechoslovakia, Elungary and Rumania are much further soutl than in Germany and there is no doubt that this limit is determined by the calder winters, tn Russia, the limits have been set by experience gained in extending culti vation Into the Ukraine beyond the existing limits in central Europe. With the occupation of the Crimea acd its anuexation in 1783, a winemaking school was established in that vear at Sudak on the coast and this was moved in 1812 to the neighbourhond of Yalta, now one of the important centres mm the Soviet Union, Vinevards avere estiublished in 177 by the German settlers ona the Volga between Saratov and Tsuritsin (Volgagrad, Stalingrad) but these do not appear ta have survived, although mentioned by correspondents of Alph. de Candolle. An important surviving area cxtends along the banks of the Don. Vines have been grown in Kiev in gardens, but no wite can be made, The present northern limits. of the cultivation of the vine in Europe are shown on the map of Fig, 1. These limits ace verv similar to those shown on aimap by Leunis (1883) except that the Rugsign limit is shown on this eurlier map as extending to the northern margin vf the Caspian Sea. ‘Uhis map alsa shows the polar limits of the cultivation of the olive as well as of a number uf native tree species. He also plotted two sets of isotherms: isatheres or Vines J, A. PRESCOTT SMOLEHTS PUR ULZPO4arng rOF (FAOQmiLAsy) PIOY) LUOTEIT “ha lODaQiey pathy? SIP JO Shore UR qo¢s, olf} Loz edury ‘J pur oaryday. NOL’ , 0669 S] O1s*@ i §8+¢ GI OGLE i 00°94 81 NEL SE | $62 1 Oe Nees — 08S 1 BI OLE oe ee O86'l en a Uf OLLS 1 00-9 1 (SL'1 ; 0988 IT Oeo'T i OFS | 8 (HG | 1 6GE-€ gy OLLT | oF-e { g oor | gee Fay OfF'T Vee | Ht) rice GRE FI ORL‘I (eG Fl OOLT |; owe | ay OZR" | 1 cop | at QeL' | ee on ee aI OIL T ca-9 LT 00'S eg. g 9% O8S'T ; eed 9% Lo sqpproar | aeqaqag A-0¢ eAoqr Wisuary surpuyy Suiuuiseg] | sdalaop-SUp parepuaay | | | } uk TUIRYTOSSOIY PU WOSsHTY IOP Wopsatcy ‘sXayRA FNAISU-OfBRS BYA TOF yaVgAGT | at | POF UTE gee | 8-OF ere (Fa | 99F FE os 7a (OOP GT re re 1 POP 9-te UGE | OLF £-0€ oT | LSP a0 FOF . -E-6F | ORF [-8e Leb i eeep | Ug W680 GELT a en Q-LE Fe RT QF | 4 £-9e Sif | sp | of 08 LOL) FBR OT Fee UAT) ROR Wek LOT $4 , Bp P9E GOT LOG ; ft LOS | GFT ee LF | L WLR 7 Gey] gene | og LQG fl |) gae | 8 Re 9 GFL | 0g t 6G 1 SSE | gee | F FUE | ORE Feed z edeqr | a. : as P capnyydury |) uel OPUpLPeT ASVyT Wa 0G DAQKR TOsRoy SONSLojoRIBYy,) aM pea day, &-8F TeIpeaysy F6g jodospoy 9-3 uosi0y ST Gilg AOYLYDQ 108 | BSEPQ) 6-62 | ALUBULy 9-9 | Opo g-zyeueUTe sy Gee porosyz 9.9] | ourg: Gey FRAO’) BUOTAIZ, EFT | eedrry “2 ST pearday, Leer pUepsaicy Orel rangagy Nee | WNW Y Veg : cuTAqMs ay 9-9 Jen y, OF | SUTIGyY Te sled Gl of saaQeyy 90 M | srotiy 9-T AM soquu nN : , = Z apnqiarory t NarpReys Surpaoaayy cadoang] WL Atta, Of] JO TORarypNs oY JO SPMIT UaOTPPAON, OYA AnOPE sevypRor] Jo HONSHTAPQWVIRY,) diy wT, ‘WHEW CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE of] vl equal summer temperatures and isocheims or lines of equal winter tempera- lures, Commenting on the interpretation of this map, Leunis remarks on the complications associated with the problems involved. The map of Fig, 1 gives the locations of the temperature stations which provide the most useful available information associated with the limit of culti- vation under discussion, In addition, the isotherms of the coldest month are plotted as these obviously play a part in determining the limit. For each of the stations listed and for others in the vicinity the temperature characteristics of each station have becn calculated by wave-form analysis, and in each case a smooth curve has been drawn from. the values calculated from the first three larmonics, From these curves has been estimated the length of season over 50° F. and the accumulated “day-degrees” aboye this limit, These data have been brought together in Table 10” It is now possible to swmmarise the data in the form of mean annual temn- perature and of lemperature amplitude. This has been done in Fig. 2 where temperature characteristics have been plotted agamst longitude across Europe, as it is obvious that the degree of continentality of the temperature regime as determined by longitude is more important than latitude in determining the limit, The German climatologists have observed that a mean lemperature of the warmest month of 20° CG, (68° F,) is the probable requirement together with a mean temperature of the coldest month not below 0° C, (32° F.) with a mein annual temperature of at least 48° F, oF oy Ta ~ a Pry a g eF® *% 6 FO o Q 0 O» « - "| Wet- —=e- #__y-0% =5- hot 60- 1 9 Oo 6 o « fe) be 50-LA = © ses m o Oe se” 6 e 7 = e ee . . fe L ° aH er 40 cte ral ul ef 40 . = oO © os Oo = 30+ e Fe, “| Lol * e O% e bd 7 tas att 204 . “| hg | ' | | r | ( [ ' dite iW Lp bt — W Oe To) 20 30 40 50° LONGITUDE Fig. 2. Whustrating the relationship between temperature and longitnde along the northern martin of the cultivation of the vine in Europe. W. Temperature of the warmest monthly period. The broken line is the calculated regression of temperature on longitude over the range 2°W to 16°. A. Mean annual temperature. C, Temperature of the coldest monthly period, Open circles are for well-established stations well within the northern limits. i) J. A, PRESCOTT hi Vig, 3, the vafeulated line of regression of teraperature ou longitnde has heen plotted for the warmest month over the range of Jougitude 2°W. ta 16°E- There ts no significant departure over this range from a mea temperature of 65-67 F. On the other hand, the mean temperature of the coldest month falls uver this range of longitude from 39° F. to about 30° F. At the lowest tem- peratures and generally speuking further east at the Ukrainian winter tempera- tures of about 23° B., it is recognised that protection of the vine in winter is very necessary. French observers regard an absolute minimum of — 15° C, tu —18° C. (say, 0° F. to 3° F,) as the ultimate limit of danger in witer. This northern limit vf cultivation is reasonably continuous from the coust of the Atlintic to the valley of the Rhine, but east of the Rhine the cultivation is less continuous, edaphic factors of soil and slope being sought as in the Rheingau, the valleys of the Saale and Unstrut and of the Elbe, on dune sands in Silesia sind on south-facing slopes at Tokaj in Hungary. The continuity is also inter- ripled by the mountain ranges such as the Erzgebirge, the Riesengebirge ane the Carpathians, LU will be noted that the eastern limit of this continuous cul- tivation is deterroined by 2 mean temperature of the coldest month of 32° F. Anuther temperatare factor whieh hes heen considered to be of importance is that controling the period of yegetative growth, The nineteenth century butanists agreed that for most woody species, bud burst in Spring began when the mean monthly temperature reached 10° C, (50° F.) and this temperature limit hus been extensively used in many climatie studies on the vine. Fran ‘Table 1 it will be noted that over practically the whole range of longitude from Chartres to Astrakhan, the peviod during which the temperature limit of 50° F- is exeeeded varies from appremimately 5:5 to 6-0 months. ln every cise the bewinning of this season is in April and the end in Octoher, mean cates being 21 April and 14 October, a perind of 4:8 months. ln order to provide some perspective the records of a aumber of well- ostahlished areas south of the uorthern linit have been examined and these are hronght together iu Table 2 as well as being plotted in Fig. 2. The length of seuyan over 50° FL is in general between six und seven months and sunnier teniperatures about 2° to 4” F, higher than on the northern limit. This northern limit of the cultivation of the vine is only valid for earls varieties, An historical experience in this connection is that of Boussingault (1837b), who recounts the establishment of a vineyard on the family estale in Alsace in 1818. The varieties first planted were those from the recion of Per- pignan, presumably Grenache, Carignan and similar varieties. These thrived. but the grupes did mot ripen and the vineyrd was replanted in 1825 with early varieties including Pinot, Sanaynon blanc, Tokay, Riesling and Treaniner. 0b is Of interest that the vintage was followed over x period of years und recorded quantitatively from 1833. ta 1936. Boussinygwule records his opinion that the temperature of the warmest month should be 4 ur 5 degrees higher than the recorded probable mean of 64° F., for the season to be favaurahle in Alsace It has been pointed out above that a temperature tactor which has heen eonsidered to be of vreat importatice is that controlling the period of vegetative vrowth. This temperature limit was established for a number of specics bs Alph. de Candolle (1855) and for the vine the limit was established at 10° C (50° F.), and was used extensively by him and adypted by the American workers Amerine and Winkler (1944, 1963) for detereniuiae the climatic regions fox the cultivation af wine grapes in California, 11 IGY OF THE VINE CLIMATOL OLE’ 066% o0g's oge's OGRE O08’ Obes A.0g vAoqe soalgap-Ap payenunooy i i fexyo, dAOJ Ura2 hor | L qysue'T surpugy 1 | i | | | | O0-L / G & ‘ §-&€ | Fe | L¢1P LFF IIL 08-9 6 eT ; 6&6 | {-ST : | L tPF 8-Lé SPSTSSO1- OA ON OG-L | LT Ul i 9- OF \ isi i CPF | e- FS BUPA | LeqWIEAON, | | | | OL-9 a | ft | ote | s-o8 | | gat | ete jtagerqaq Qe -9 OG | FI | 9-8é 6-06 i T-8F T-L1 VARTSIFRI CF-9 | OG 9 | L-8é ¢-ot i T-LP 6-F OF aunVveag gQ-L | Té T G1E 6°81 i 6° Pr 9-0 M XNBOPLOG a (ret datas ‘ | 7 { ae \ syjuour | deqopg | judy sAvq | tls We i 6 | : suruuidag aseyq flepnyyduy) rey | epnqnerp | opnyrsuory HORRY suUlpOsery Wo0G BAoqe 1wosvag | | | solystojouanyg oinyeroduiay, — | TOULA OT) JO UDIYBATYLN) JO SHWIT] WeYPION vlt) JO YJney Ajeyetpety wor JO spotagsiq, 9Ul Ay JURZLOdUU] JO sulpsrapUIRyL) OEPRULOP ) “e OTA 12 J. A. PRESCOTT Three examples have been selected from the range of stations in Table 1} so that a comparison may he made between the original use of this temperature limit by de Candolle and the current use by the Californian workers,” These examples are illustrated and explained in Fig. 3. De Candolle’s rule (1855 loc, cit. p. 365) with respect to the limits of cultivation of the vine may be quoted in full: “The cultivation of the vince, for the manufacture of wine. can be under- taken in Europe, on slopes with a favourable exposure, up to those localities which provide a sum of 2,900 day-degrees (Centigrade) from the day when the mean temperature first reaches 10° C, until the dav when the temperature falls below 10° C. in the shade, provided that at the approach of maturity, the number of days with rain does not exceed a dozen per month,” De Candolle’s choice of 10° C, was made only after he had satished himself that it was better than $° C. or 9 C. He was. moreaver, well aware that this temperature sara could be modified by other factors, the chief of which he regarded us the amount of solar radiation, but as he had no method of estimat- ing this, he noted the effect of latitude in influencing the length of day in summer ° Por a fuller account of the history of the development of this concept, see appendix yage 20, tiv. 5. Three selected examples, of teraperature curves of localities on the northern limit of the cultivation of the vine in Europe. "The curves are drawn from the calculated values based on the wuave-form analysis of the original nvean monthly temperatures following the equation: Wo. tly 7 ay HOSN -- ay Goa BN $ Fy GOS AX 4- hy sink + bg sin {x + hy sin Bx Four the three localities the constants ol the ecyuation are: with mid-Samuary as Oo mid-Kebrady Fb ete, ay ay thy a4 h, hy Vy Nantes abe 2) - [2-2 L()+ 44) +-12 AN TF 0-98 +0-08 Cirisen heim {+25 -16°30 (7-0 +40-33 SUNT —()-42 +0617 Astrakliuw) bR-7 235 G35 - fe Tb —1:67 —1:68 —) R2 For the first hannonic these correspand to the values: Armual mena Phase lag behind temperature Amplituile the sun “-¥ F days Nantes 42:2 13-4) g0-4 Geisenhoim . 4-2 16-3 26-4 Astrakhath 44-0 2944 i B03 ' ! The shaded areas correspontd io temperature surnmations, the whole area represents the original summation recommended by de Candolle (Centigrade) and the npper area (Fahren- heit) that currently (19635) adepied by Californian workers. These values are: day-degrees Cah fornia De Candolle Nantes IRT7 3034 Geisonheim | 1786 2886 Astrakhan 3162 \ 3541 CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE 13 in northern latitudes and he also made note as in the rule quoted above of the number of days without rain, Black (1960) has recently calculated values for solar radiation for northern Europe, The southern limit of Black's values coincides approximately with the northern limit of the cultivation of the vine so that a re-appraisal may become possible in these terms. ft will be noted from Pig. 3 that de Candolle, although confining his summations to periods with mean temperitures in excess of 10° C., added the achial temperatures in degrees centigrade so that a new base line of 0? C. was established. For regions, suel as Madeira, where the mean temperature of all months of the year excceds 10° C., he refused to commit himself, The Californian workers usiug the Fahrenheit scale have measured tem- peratures above the base line of 50° P. and where this temperature is excoedid throughout the year an arbitrary selection of the time period has been made, say, April to October, although it is recoumised that crop periods such as bud- burst to ripeness, or flowering to ripeness for each specific varicty would he inare satisfactory. Phenolowical observations are not sufficiently uumerous to give more thin a “eneral confirmation of the soundness of the concepts employed. In the German regions of the Palatinate, Bavaria and Franconia, the variety Riesling begins its vegetative growth about 25 April, begins flowering about LL June, and the berry begins to ripeu about 2 September. The time from bud- NANTES GEISENHE|M ASTRAKHAN Litsitaruitiy i JFMAMJJASOND JFMAMJJASOND JFMAMJJASOND se Se Fig, 3, 14 J. A, PRESCOTT burst to the bezinning of ripening has a mean value of 126 days. in the Nahe revion over a recent period of ten years. the mean dute of the beginning of ripening for this variety was 22 August and uf the completion of ripening 3 October (Hillebrand, 1963). In these observations the degree of ripeness was based un the specific gravity of the grape juice. In northern France varieties such as Camay begin veyetative growth fram 7-18 April. begin fowermy on 9 Jime and ripen frum 17-28 September. In the commnne of Beaune, Burgundy, the proclamution of vintage (Ben de cendange), over the years 1909 to 1933, ranged from 15 September ta 16 October with a mean date of 28 September. This is to be compared with 20 October, the date ending the mean period above 50° F. at Beane. De Candolle quotes a group of observations on the beginning of vegetative growth of the vine at Brussels, Over a period of ten years this is viven 25 April. These dates correspond well with the choice of 50° FP. perature, as the basal tem- EXTENSION OF EUROPEAN EXPERIENCE TO OTHER COUNTRIES From the observations made in Europe. it can be assnmed that the polar limits of cultivation of the vine are determined climaticully by the temperaturr limit of not Jess than 66° F. for the mean of the warmest month combined with a mean temperature for the coldest month of not less thun 30° PF, Below this mean For the coldest month provision has ty be made for the protection of dormant vines in winter. The rainfall limit may be taken ay au annual mean of 30 inches as a maximum with 20 inches as a possible mimimum below which irrigation is likely to be needed. Tnypertant areas, such as the Burdewnx region, do, in fact, have areas with an anneal rainfall as high as 40 inches, but in such revions fungoid diseases will become increasingly important, A further require ment will be that the length of tlie season above 50° F. must be iu the region wf six mouths and the temperature summation over 50° KF. within the perind must be of the order of 1.600 to L800 diav-degrees, corresponding approximately tu Alph. de Candolle’s original requirements of 2,900 day-deyrees on the Centi- wride scale. With a seasonal length of six months 1.500 duy-degrees corresponds tru de Candolle value of 2.830. An alternate approach would be the use of appropriate combinations of the harmonic characteristies of the temperature curve for the year, ‘This would mean seeking such appropriate combinations af the annual menn tenperatiare and amplitude as wauld correspond to the limits set above for the warmest and coldest months. Appropriate combinations would be mean annual values of 52! F, to 48° FL with amplitudes of 14° to 18" and phase values of 26 to 30 davs of lag behind solar radiation, Such combinations would be required to reproduce more precisely the temperature couditions along the main northeri homnckiuy of cultivation in Europe. The relevant areas of widest experience with Vo ciniferd uutside Kurope ure Likely te be found in South Armoerica (Argentina und Chile), in South Africa, im Australia and in California, Lt ts proposed to examine the conditions m Australia and California and to discnss briefly the conditions in Lnghind, Vine Crowines in Enelane It has. already been pointed out that English experience goes back for many centuries and that for sentimental and other reasons attempts are always being made to produce wine from grapes grown in Enghind, Generally speaking OLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE 15 the enthnsiastic wine-amaker is satisfied af he can produce wine, say, once in three or five years. Frequently the vines are grown on walls with a southern aspect as is also the case in Silesia, The varicties grown must be very early und according to Ordish (1953) include the Canadian hybrid: Brandt, Gulden Chasselas, Gamay Hatif and Meslier Précoce. Commercial wine production in Kngland, however, is based on concentrated grape juice imported principally fram Cyprus and Greece. Por an assessment of temperature conditions. Cardiff, Oxlord and Kew have heen selected as affording probable northern limits for Britain. Approprixte Gintatic information is given in the following table: Temperate \ Chargeterishics Temperatures. Length of | Station <= ~—-e— of warmest’ season | Aecumulared Mean Amplitude | Phasis monthly . aver G08 | day-degrens iy “F Days period “Fo omenths | above sek ada 448 10-7 thal 6L-(b 5-6 1,230 Oxford 44s 11-4 B2-4 62-1 o-3 1110 Kow ' ANB: Tho ag-2 62-4 a4 1.40) Using the accumulated day-degrves above 50° F. as the simplest eriterian, none of the values approaches the lower limit set at 1.600 for European con- linental conditions, Similarly. the mean temmperatare of the warmest monthly period is significantly below the established limit of 66° F. California The grape vine V. vinifera is the species commercially established in the western United States, almost entirely in California, although small areas have been noted in the States of Oregon and Washington. There is, of course, a Jong experience going back to the days of Spanish settlement, and the culti- vation of the vine has been adjusted through experience to the geographical limits imposed by climatic conditions, Amerine and Winkler (1944, 1963) have. on the basis of this experience. grouped the California areas into five regions based on accumulated temperatures over 50° F. Hore the ditfeulty arises that wis encountered by de Caudolle with respect to Madeirx in that either all months have mean temperatures above 50" FP. or a snbstantial number of months wwe oso placed. In their first paper they used as a criterion the period from full bloom to ripeness as indicated by a wiven specific gravity of the grape juice. This is of particular value in the comparison of varieties v1 different localities and seasons. They obtain as values for their coolest region (No. 1) 1,800 to 2.00%) day-degrees, In their second paper they chose the period April to October itclusive which gives a value of less than 2,300 day-degrees for the coolest region, On the map of California (Fig. 4) have been plotted the criteria mentioned eurlier, namely, 66° F., for the warmest month, 30° F. for the coolest month and 30 inches of annual rain. The urets considered climatically suitable for the cultivation of the vine within these limits have been margined, The counties included by Amerine and Winkler in Region No. 1 are indicated by hatching. Below an annul rainfall of 20 inches, irrigation is likely to be needed. above 30 inches special conditions are likely to he encountered. The map has heen constructed essentially from the data provided in “Climate and Man™ (1841) supplemented by data in the official reports of the U.S. Weather Bureau. 1G hE AL PRESCOTT It will be noted that the isotherm of 66° F. for the warmest month. is determined in the first place by proximity to the Pacifie Ocean and is parallel to the coast, and in the second place by the altitude in the mountains to the east of the central valley. As an example, Napa (lat. 38-3°N,, Jong. 122°3°W.) has been taken as a recording station in an established wine-growing district. Ps corm ° o we | cersteress JANUARY 30°F ~—-—=— JULY 66°F ANNUAL RAINFALL 3O INCHES —---—— ANNUAL RAINFALL ZO INCHES athercee® | 40- 4 COUNTIES OF REGION 1 en er ee ee Vig. 4. Map of California on which have been projected temperature limits for the cultivation of the vine established at the northern margin in Europe, The area within which favourable conditions can be expected is margined, Counties included by Amerine and Winkler in their coolest Region I are shaded- CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE 17 ae—==— JANUARY 66 F abatebtssleeee JULY 30°F ANNUAL RAINFALL 3O INCHES ae ct cme ANNUAL RAINFALL 20 INCHES Fig. 5. Map of south-eastern Australia on whieh have been projected temperature limits for the cultivation of the vine established at the northern margin of cultivation in Europe. The aret within which favourable canditions can be expected is margined. The temperatnre characteristics are viven below: Temperature Characteristics Temperature Length of Station = S$ oof warts HaSOn Accumulated Mean Amplitude © Phase © monthly over 0 F | day-degroes | Fk “F 2 Days period °F months above aver Ney ih ATA 1g. s0-2 66-7 yet 2,500 These temperature characteristies are obviously quite different from those of the European limits, due principally to the Jength of the seascn, If the criterion of seven months, April to October, be taken the temperature accumulation is 2,680 day-degrees corresponding to Region IL of Amerine and Winkler, the region regurded by them as most important for table wines. For the established viticultural area of California, criteria independent of northern European ex- perience must therefore be established if the summation of temperatures is to be used, A. PRESCOTT J. 18 Fe 6b If tI Br O9E'9 : RST 9-9§ JRoLOY JUBIL) ix’ evs L€ / 8I ie C86'E 9-611 Lele ' OPUEIONO Ty Le ett bis TI &¢ O0OTE 1-061 SLE 8 Xorpnq or p+ GE cl TY 009 O-Tel £68 A}LQ BpLaen us Eek it , 91 Oe i LEE E £061 C-6§ TEC WEA OF] CF Ler GE 91 oF O¢S'F 9: Tel OF Tetouryy: 81 ane Te RT OF eat 9° 0G] F-OF : ST TAGBE fl Ort Ve LI oe NFEE Tél TF STUN T8ATRT TTP FE yee ind : Lt Gt , SEER ‘cel fF : AIT) BISBYS “ATT el [+e tad : 6 SF CLyt ‘OGT Cop AT TTATe pe; ) ral [ee ck RI LF i OFF -O¢T CLF SeInqyy Sayoul eecica tatelre| SARp : . af jaa Ma x [peguer. AL OG tase OSPR] apn pyar? TROyTY OPTI opr isu] Spnyiyeryp UVOTPUS PUNT? TOS OK 7 Cael MS i Recta as Bh SOHISLLA Rey an pRIduqy, ie A I RL “TOAST ul SOUT A jo COTV ATELY) Wy po JLUdtr TEE OT PTO ND yy jo OSQl{y Bunpovodddy SALPSLL a peepee y adn PRTG OLS (dian VEULIOFILR) ui SOT TRIO" “OD TEEY LL CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE 1) The map reveals, however, a number of intersections between the isotherms of 30° F. and 66° F. for the coolest and warmest months respectively. These are inland areas and at some altitude. Recording stations near such intersections are given above (Table 3), togethcr with temperature characteristics, This Californian experience may be extended to the State of Washington Where approximately 8,000 acres of vines are grown, nearly all of which are under irrigation, in the south central portion of the State! Approximately $3 per cont of this acreage is planted to the Arherican variety Concord (V, labvusea) und most of the vinifera varieties have to be covered to survive the. severest winters, The inean temperature of the warmest month at the Irrigation Experiment Station at Prosser is 71° F. aad of the coldest month 29° F, The Jongth of the season over 50° I. is 6-4 months, Australia The appropriate temperature and rainfall Jimits have been plotted on the mip of Fig. 5 for south-eastern Australia, Tasmania is well outside the limit of 66° F. for the warmest month, and all of the rest of Australia west of Kangarou Island comes within tie limit. As with California, there is a tum- perature control imposed by proximity to the oceans snd away from these a further control imposed by altitude. The most interesting locality near the limit is that of Coonawarra (37-3°S., 140-3°E.) in South Australia which in recent years has become an area noted for red table wines, The temperature charactéristics of Coonawarra. based on interpolations from long-established recording centres in the general reyion are given below: ! ~ pe ‘ Temperature chavactaristics Tomponttine Lengih of -—— — — SS et wartrnineh SUELSUTE Stanton Mevo i) Amplituile | Phase °° omowthly | over 30 F “EF ! Days » period Tr months = ry erage wg eo e32e ep e — =O Coonawarne ‘ 47-5 \ So4 31-2 : 66-4 Wed These canditions are very similar to those at Napu in California recorded in the preceding section, but the conditions in winter are much milder than those in Huroape. In no locality in Australia dues the isotherm of 30° F. for the coolest month intersect that of 66° F, for the warmest month. Mean Sumner temperatures of 66° F. are reached at altitudes of approxi- mately 3,800 feet in the northern tablelands af New South Wales, at 3,000 feet in the central tablelands, at 2,500 feel in the southern tablelands and at 1,700 feet i Victoria. The Canberra region comes. just within the limit. In general, the conditions in Australia will need a separate study allowing for wider comparisons with the warmer regions of Europe, western Asia and California. ! Personally communicated by W. J, Clare, May, 1965, 20 J. Av PRESCOTT APPENDIX THE SUMMATION OF TEMPERATURES IN AGRICULTURAL CLIMATOLOGY Soon after his invention of the alcohol thermometer in 1730, Reaumur organised a series of temperature observations in Paris and overseas. We noted (Reaumur, 1739) that the agricultural season of 1735 was much later than in recent yeurs and that the wheat and grape harvests had been delayed by at least a month, He noted that this was associated with lower temperatures in spring aud early summer and proceeded to compare the conditions in the months of April. May and June in 1734 and 1735 on the basis of the “sum of the degrees of heat’, For each day he determined the mean temperature by taking half the sum of the maximum and minimum and proceeded to add them dav by dav for each of the three months. Sama ot temperature above freezing point Roan Pars Aji { Miiy' June for 1734 343 405 i 312 for 1735 i 27) 328 417 He suggested that by this means different countries and years could be campared. In view Of the fact that the same vrain crops can be harvested in countries with very different temperatures, one should be able to cumpare the sums of degrees of heat for the months during which the cereals made the greatest part of their growth and came to maturity in warm countries such as Spain and Africa, in temperate countries as in France, and in cold countries as in those of the north. This idea of treating temperature readings as measuring the quantity of heat appeirs to have been projected forward into the nineteenth century in spite of the discovery and naming of “quantity of heat” and “latent heat” by Joseph Black in 1760. The idea of “absolute temperature” was not to come until after 1550. The first notable application of this suggestion of Reaumur was made by Boussingault (1837), who compared the temperatures under which wheat, barley. maize und potatoes were grown both in Europe and in the Americas. He was able to make observations on lis own farm at Bechelbronn in Alsace. fle ex- pressed’ the requirement in the quantitative Form: “The inmber of days between the beginning of the growth of an annual plant and its maturation is inversely proportional lo the mean temperature during this period of growth, sia that the product of the nuraber of days by the temperature is constant.” Of seven examples which he wives for maize, two may be quoted: Medan rhantiient Moon temperature: 3 Nimber Taoeality Lora pe rat: Cutie Crops 1 al dees Procliuer ' Cc . Bechelbeoun (: Wes “MeO [22 ‘ > 440 Vatley of tho Magelsbera 7-4 27-40 2 2484 fffffHR TTT eee CLIMATOLOGY OF THE VINE 21 The principal contribution of the botanists who followed Boussingault was ta recognise that plant activities ceascd below certain temperatures: and_ this information was critically cxamined by Alph. de Candolle (1855) and applicd to a large number vf wild species —amual, perennial and woody —in Lurope. He then proceeded to extend the convept to cultivated species and established useful minimam temperatures for a number of crops. De Candolle’s table for cultivated species is worth quoting in view of the continued application of the concept to the present dav, Alphonse de Candolle’s table of temperature summation: | Extreme limit in Europe | Minimum = - Summation of temperatures ———.-——__———! nseful i oo wheve uaeful mininnun Croyi Country Latitude + Temperature | (hay -clagroos “N eu | oF (a Barley Norway TU | a : 41 1,250) Vine (for wine) | Gewniinay 53-3 Ia ! Au “900 Maize | Germiny BL 13 aa 2,500) Date palm {for trait) | Spaifi ee in | 64 5.100 De Candolle always insisted that mean daily temperatures below the freezing point of water (O° C,) were not to be taken into acemint, thus establishing a secondary base level below the effective minimum, De Candolle advocated the regular publication by official meteorological uepartments of mean temperatures and summation in excess of specified minima and this was, in fact, taken up by the London meteorological office and noted Iv de Cundolle (1584). At this period the London office was already publishing weekly a summation to temperatures above 42° F. These were recorded as “day- devrees”, a term invented by the Meteorological Offee in London, De Candolle (1886) attended the 69th Session of the Swiss Society for Natural Sciences in August of that year, at which J. H. Gilbert (1886) of Rot- hamsted gave an account of the relationship which exists between sums of tem- peratnres and agricultural production. ‘This paper is reported in full. Gilbert reported that in 1881, the London metcorological office on the supgestion of Lawes and himself began to publish weekly sums of tempcrature above a fred base, together with hours of sunshine and rain, for the information of agricul- turists, the base temperature chosen being 42° F. as stated above. Gilbert tabulated. the stim of temperatures From certain fixed dates until the time of harvest of wheat at Rothamsted for the vears 1852 to 1885. For the vears 1878 to 1885 these are basexl on the weekly publications of the meteoro- logical office. Gilbert recorded for winter wheat, over the full period, sums of temperatures of the order of 1,100 to 1,200 day-degrees,' The London Metevre- Ingical Office is still (1965) interested in accumulated temperatures, above ind below 42°F., and these are entered im the monthly returns from all crop-weather stations in Britain. The continned vse of accumulated temperatures 1s, how- ever, currently under discussion.” Modern applications in terms of this concept of temperature summation come mainly from North America, The bridge between the European work of the nineteenth century and the American work of the twentieth is provided 1 The responsible people at the Metearelogical Office in London were Ro He Seott aul General Strachey. * Personally communicated by H. L. Penman, za, Jo AL PRESCOT by Abbe (1905), Livingston (1916) compiured the sumination of direet ten peratores with the summutions of temperature efficiences based on the physico- chemical concepts of Arrhenius and Van't Hoff and with those of physiologic! eticioncies based ow experimental studies. He was a strong udvacate of the provision of experimental facilities to enable studies of plant growth to be made in controlled environments. OL more recent vears, Nutlonsen (1953, 1957, 1958) of the American Insti- tute of Crop Bealogy has upplice the summation of temperatures above a fixed! hase line to the study of the climatic requirements of wheat, barley ind ve and domed that a hese temperature of 40° F. yave the anost satistactory vahies. This temperature was selected after testing 32°, 36°, 40° and 45° F, Follownie Livingston, he refers ta the method as the remainder-index system, Amerive and Winkler (1944, 1963} have applied the method to the study ol the climatology of the erape-vine in Galiformia, and Amerine (1963) alsa vives references to war in the Soviet Union. They classify the vine areus of California into five regions from the coolest to the warmest on this basis, ln the earlier publication the phvsiological perind. blooming to harvest, was used: in the later publication a fixed calendar period, April to October inclusive, is emplovedt, Clore and Druminund (1963, 1964) also have applied he method to the interprelation of seasonal conditions for grape growing in the State of Washing- tun. iy view of the increasme use of the concept in horticultural practice in the United States, involving shorter periods and more accurate assessments of temperature summations, Arnold (1960) has proposed a convenient method for estimating devree-days [rom daily temperatures when the minimum temperature is below the base temperature, lt is evident from the long history ot the use of temperature sumnuttions in crop physiology. that it will find its most usefol applications when restricted to crop periods, such as the emergence of an annual crop ti its harvest period, ain the case of a deciduous perennial from bud-burst to leaf-fall or to ripeness vf the Iroit tn this connection heth de Candalle and Gilbert were aware id the uced to bring in solar radiation and Gilbert even noted the lay betwen the tine of greatest sunshine and the time of warmest temperature, As soonats the method is used over a fixed calendar period there is no advint tage too he guned aver quoting (he mean temperature during the period, The use of harmonic characteristics, moreover, cin be used to express mneh of the resi Information and can be used, if required, to culewdate the sunimation ot Wraps Sera over any specified period and more particularly the leniperatures at the warmest and coulest periods. ACKNOWLEDCMENTS Considerable help tas been reveived in the preparation of the diseusgsiurt from people who have supplied information. I meution Mr. 1. Kaye, Librarian of the Royal Society in London, for confirming carly 18th century literature, Miss CG, M. Bardley for locating in Australia the 19th century literature, Dr. H. Kichler for the loun of publicitions in his persemal library, Mrs. Jovce Collins whose collection of temperature data, now located ut the Waite Institute, was evlensively used, and Mr. B. C. Rankine for the loan of personal correspondence with Frencli oenological stations. To Mr. J. C. M. Formachon, Director of the Australian Wine Research In- stitute, | am grateful for bis general interest in the project and for making the facilities of the Institute available. CLIMATOLOGY Ol THE VINE SOURCES OF INFORMATION Buauer, J. (1940). Biographies des botanistus i Geneve de 1500 u 1931, Bull, Sue. Bot. Siisse., vol. 508, Kexprew, W.G. The Climates of the Gontinents, fourth ctlition, Oxtord, 1953, Liwunts, J. (1883), Synopsis der drei Naturreiclie, Part 2, Vol 1. Synopsis der Plame n- kande Allvemeiner Theil. 3rd. edition by A. B. Franz, Tanover. ; Uxirkn Staves DepartMest or Ackieuntrre Yearnoor, J94L. Climate and Man. Washing- ton DC. Todd, Wiisttau-Lexicon file Winger, Weinharidler, Kifer und) Gastwirte. Berlin, 1930. ta a REFERENCES Aun, C, 105. First Report car the Relations between Climates and Crops, U.S. Dept, Ac, Wether Baroy, Bull, 36. Ammnne, M.A. 1963, Villeultuwe and Eatologe in the Soyviee Cron. The Wine Districts af the Soviet Union. Notes on Wines Fasted iu the Soviet Union. Wine and Vines, Qet., 29-46, Now, 37-64, Dee, 25-29. Admins, M. A,, ancl Weyxnen, A, J., 1944. Composition and Quality of Musts and Wis of Calitornin Crapes, Hilgardia. 15, No. 6, pp. 493-673. Aanautiis, Ee A and Wingter, AL J. 1963. Cylifornmia Wine Grapes, Cal Nur. Expt, Sta, ull, 794. Aunouw, C.-Y. 1960. Maxinunanininnon Tenperatures as a Basis for Computing Hout Units. Proe, Amer, Sow Hort. Sci, 76, pp. 682-692. Brace, J. N.. £960. A Contribution to the Radiation Climatology of Northern Europe. Arch. Met, Geophys, Bioklim, B., 10, pp, 182-192, Boussingaeni, J. B,, 16374. Faamen eompurif des cireonslinees aiiétéoraloviqnes scars Tesynelles végetent Tes ceréalos, Tir amiais er les ponmnes de terre A Veéqhateur et seus aime temipérd. CR. 4. pp. 178-178, Bousyiacacer, J. B., L83Tb. Des infonces inétéoroloviques sur da eultuve de la vigue. C.R., 4. np. 371-375, Caspoune, Auem, Lo P. Par, 1855. Geopraphie botanigne raisonee. Paris, Geneva, 2 vol. {865 pp. particularly Chap, 4, Sec, 5, pp. 393-405. Cannone, Aura. L. P,P. pe, 1884. dndesud as: Notation des températires we point de vie de Pagricilttare ot des faits de vegetation. Arel, Sci, Pliys. Nat, Ser, 3. UL pe 32, Casnouir, Anvin T. PLP. ye, 1S86. Indexer as: Sir he valour des sommes des tenipéra- tures cn webdruphie, butanique ct en wericalture, Arch. Sci, Phys. Nat, Ser. 3, 16, pp. 325-326, Crore, Wy [and Buosarunp, V. BP. 1968. Sonus Aspects of Washington States Remarkithile 1963 Grape Crop. Wash. State Wort, Assac. Proo., 59, pp. 165-169. Crore, W. 7, and Brossaruvn, V, Po 1964. 19G4—a Onality Year fer Grapes. Wash. Stite Hort, Asseo, Proe,. 60, pp, 135-139, CGuneen, | A 1886, Remargues sur le rebition qui existe entre les sommes de tenmpeératire ot le production agricole. Arch. Sui, Phys, Nat. Sev, 3, 16. pp, 421-436. Hintewianis, W., 1963. Deutsche Wein Zeitiing, 99. p, 879. Jouxsror, R.13., 1964. Water Relations of Pines radiatiander Plantation Conditions, Aust. J. Bot, 12, py. LLL 124, Lavinesios, 6. By, 191i, Physiological Temperature Indives Jor the Study ol Plant Growth in RelaGion to Climatic Conditions. Phys. Res. 1, 8, pp. 399-420, Nuvrowson, M1. ¥. Amer. Inst, Crop Ecology ( Washington): Wheat-Chinate Relationships (1955), 385 pp. parley Saline Helationships (1937), 280. yp, Rye-Climate Relationships (1958), 219 pp. Onwisn, G., 1953, Wine Growing m Englanel. Trencdon, Prsscorr, J. A, and Lane-Poue, C, 1, 1947, The Climatalows of the Tntroduetion col Vines of the Mediterrancan Environupnt to Australia. Trans, Roy, Sue, 8, Aust, 71. pp. 67-0. RKeacmun, RL AL FL pp, 1735. Observations du thermometre, faits 2 Paris pendant Vanneée 1735. Comparées avec celles qui cot é faites sous Ta ligne, a VIsle de France, a Alger, ef en quelques-unes des nos [sles de VAmerique, Mein, Acad, Roy, Sei, pp. 545-576, particularly p. 559, THE DISTRIBUTION OF EUCALYPTUS SPECIES I[N PORTION OF COUNTY STANLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY MARY A. TODD Summary This paper reports the distribution of Eucalyptus species over an area of about 300 square miles in. part of County Stanley, South Australia, centred on the township of Clare, together with such information as to climate and is as is available. Eucalyptus leucoxylon var. pauperita, E. camulduleriais, E. odorata, E. mucrorrhyncha, E. elaeophora, and the mallee species E. oleosa, E. oleosa var. glauca (=E. transcontinentulis), E. calciculfrix, E. lansdowneana, and the mallee form of E. odorata occur. Tussock grassland, now greatly modified, is also present. THE DISTRIBUTION OF EUCALYPTUS SPECIES IN PORTION OF COUNTY STANLEY, SOUTHL AUSTRALIA by Mary A, Topp® [Read 13 May 1965] SUMMARY This paper reports the distribution of Eusulyptes species over an area uf about 300 square miles in part of County Stanley, South Australia, centred on the township of Clare, lovelher will, such information as to climate and svils as is available, Enedyptus leucoxylon var, panperita, FB. camaldulensis, E. odorata, BE. macrorrhynohe, E, clacophora, and the mallee species E. vleasu, E.oleasa var, glauca (=E, transcontinentalis), 1. ealetultrix, E. lansdowtneong, and the mallee fon of EL. adorata occur, ‘Lussock grassland, now greatly modified, is also present, The distribution of Eucalyptus species is here recorded over an area of 300 square miles in part of County Stanley, South Australia, incliding portion of the Nundreds of Upper Wakefield, Clare, Milne, Andrews, Yackamoorundie. Hart and Blyth, Boomsma (1948) had previously noted this for the western section of the Hd. Clare but much of his area was re-examined and some additional information obtained. Most of the detail recorded was obtained during field observations in 1948-50. Technique. Most of the available roads and some tracks were traversed and the linvits of cach species of tree were marked on the appropriate hundred maps. Further information ahout tree distributim was obtained from aerial photo- vraphs. Trees had been removed from much of the arca but fram the remnants still present some idea of the original distribution could be wained.** However, especially in the north and west, old survey records, at the Lands Department, Adelaide, show that natural grasslands occurred and today it is difflenlt to distinguish these modified grasslands from cleared areas. Soil profiles were examined at representative sites to enable their classification in great soil groups. Topography. The area includes the most southerly part of the Flinders Ranges, ‘Two mam ridges run north and south #long the eastern and western boundaries of Hds, Clare, Milrie, and Andrews and there are smaller, less continuons ridges between them, Most of the country is undulating, becoming hilly in the southern andl western parts of Hd, Clare, the northern part of Id. Hart, and the adjaceut part of Id, Yackamoorundie, It is mainly drained by the Hutt and Hill Rivers running northwards through Hds. Clare, Milne, and Andrews, while in the west numerous small streams run westwards from the ridve on the western side of Hds. Clare, Milne, and Andrews, and in the south are tributaries of the river Wakelield. Most of the streams are small and tend to dry up in summer. Sef Botiay Dept, University of Melbourne, Parkville, N.2, Victoria. Formerly (1948- A) research worker, Agronomy Dept., Waite Agricultural Research Justituie, Adelaide. "* Tn the south, round Wateryvale and Mintiro, there hay been much clearine and also much planting of trees, particularly Eucalyptus camaldulensis. so that the existing vevetation dues not always indivate the original vegetation, Such evidence as there is suggests that the bolk of that arca was originally covered with EB. léeucaxiylon var. pauperita with KE. adarata associated jn the drier parts. ‘Trans, Roy, Soc. §. Aust. (1965), Val. 59, 26 MARY A. TODD wa. 36. ji Die oe ae Ou 4 Bungaree i; 4 “i be é sa a KS A Ls / i ee } } "Mt Horrocks = / set ay gt ae) \ | t git nae _—F Leasingham : 4 wt —_~ ! ; a a ¢ HD. UPPER ra “. WAKEFIELD PS S M —— SCALE IN MILES { 0 j ‘5 ROADS TRAVELLED OVER TRACKS TAKEN APPROXIMATE POSITION = HUNDRED BOUNDARIES FUGALYPTUS LEUCGXYIGN FMualt) var PAUPERITA JE.Brown LT. CAMALDULENSIS Dehnhi, E MACRORRHYNCHA FMuel/ (fot detall of Wester boundary Seé Boomarna 1943), — ODORATA Behr & Schlechid. E ELAEOPHORA fF Muell MALLEES CE CALCICULTRIX EMuell. E. LANSDOWNEANA EMoell, & LE Brown E. OLEQSA FMuell E OLFOSA FMuel: var GLAUCA Maiden EF ODORATA Behr & Schlechtd, MALLFE FORM} CLFARED {AND OR NATURAL GRASSLAND (MARKED SURVEYS. PRESUMABLY, NATURAL "NO TIMBER" OR “OPEN' IN GRASSLAND EARLY CALLITRIS GLAUCA RB) CASUARINA STRICTA Air DISTRIBUTION OF EUCALYPFUS SPT. (20 STANLE? a= Climate. Meteorological data for almost all of the area mapped (excepting part of the Hd. Upper Wakefelil) is given in the Commonwealth Burean of Meteor- dlagy’s Climatological Survey, Region 14—Goyder. South Australia (Deceinbet 1956) trom whieh some of the following dita ure extructed, Temperature, The meen anoual temperate is 55-60" FL with an amplitude af ubout 25° BF, Maxima are fairly high in summer. minima in winter vetativels low, drosts heing common for several months, For the period 1906-39 the average frast free period at Clare was 195 days. Retnfall. The wettest part of the distriet is near the highest point, Mt. Worrocks. 1952 ft. about 2% miles east af Penwortham and Watervale, The highest local mean aoonal rainfall estimate was 29 in, for an arca between these tawaships; it may he more on the mount itself. Rainfall tends ta increase with increasing altitude locally, but falls away on passing northward, It decreases in all directions passing away from the Mt. ELorrocks urea — being 17-18 in. in the northern region and western boundary of the mip, and ahnost 24 in. at the southern and south-eastern boundaries. Evaporation, Caleulations ot evaporation from a free water surface (Common- wealth Bureau of Meteorology, 1963) show mean monthly evaporation varies between 10 in, and UW in, in December and January, and between L in, and 2in.in June aud fly at Clare, und is a little higher at Spalding, 6 tiles to the north of this survey, A mup showing the mean length of the growing season, in mouths, is giver int the Climatological Survey (ibid, Map No. 2), Ithas heen compiled fram a formula {Vrescott and Thomas, 1949). as the period during which the rainfall exceeds 054 BE" where Eis the evaporation from a free water surface expressed in inches. A growing seasob of seven months or more is shown in Id. Clare. southern part of Hd. Milne. and the parts of the Has, of Tart and Blyth adjoim- ing them. [1 ix also seven months in the surveyed part of Hd. Upper Wakefield, It drops below seven months north ancl west of these areas, and helow six months in the north-eastern portion near Andrews. The annual period when seme water is stored in the soil at Clare has been vstimated by the acthor hy the method nsed by Preseutt, Collings and Shirpurkar (1952) ancl found tu he approximately 7,3 months (from the end of April ta ‘arly to mid-December). Tr is assumed that the soil can only store 3 inches of rain, the rest being Jost as drainage and ranott. Potential ¢vapotranspiration, regarded as 0.8 E!" wherm Eis the evaporation from a free water surface, is shaven on Fig, 1. Evaporation estimates used were from the Bureat of Meteor- alogy’s. Evaporation Maps of Australia (1963), Soil water storage, calcifatedt from the balance of potential evapotranspiration and rainfall, is also viven in Fiy. 1 tavether with ofher climatological data for Clare, the only station in the area at which fairly full records are kept, Sails, The reconnaissance survey made in 1948-49 showed soils belonging to the following great soil groups, with a general distribution as follows:— 1. Padzolic soils. All examined are at the higher allitudes, above 1300 feet or within the area in which rainfall would be influenced by adjacent heights of 1300 feet. They occur mainly to the west, southwest and southeast of the lownship af Clare, 28 MARY A, TODD 60 = 0 = 250 4 RO i=} a & ° - Ww) x a r =< £ ok 70 o z f. ral 4 an ™ > = ae v is a = > 4 A 30 oo = a ™ are ct id a ‘a yz fz “A bE a gto 5D a MILES Rujilwoys - 38° Fir. 1. Locality Map showing the position al Koanamore Station. VEGETATION OF KOONAMORE STATION 45 LANDSCAPE Koonaimore Station, 500-1,000 feet above sea-level, is situated on a plain sloping gently towards Lake Frome. ‘This plain lies in the angle between the main Flinders Range and the Olary Spur (Fig. 1). The Siccus River, which is generally dry, flows from between these ranges towards Lake Frome and is close to the north-western boundary of Koonamore Station. To the cast. the property reaches to the foot of Mt. Victor (1.522 feet); to the south if baty 120 100 wr ve + D Cc ° o so & ww tel > Rain fal} c _— -_ 2 = s- 60 o wee E c QD j= a] ae 40 Pe 20 4 ia] be LL roan 20 1G 9g ms) > 5 0 1D Months Fir, 2.) Meau ruunthly rainfall, temperature and nainbers of frosts at Koonanere Station: approaches the Waukaringa Hills, the south-castern corner extending beyond them (Fig. 3). On the Station, three groups of low hills which are part of the Olary Spur rise out of the plain, namely, the Koonamore. Orama and Ovpina [Hills (Fig. 3), The slopes are usually gentle, although the hills may have steep rocky ridges, particularly where intrusions of more durable rock occur. Between the hills, ridges of wind-blown sand lie across gently undulating plains of deep alluvial deposits. The underlying rock is a Precambrian shale with intriu- sions of tillites and massive quartz. Although some of the drainage water of Koonamore Station eventually finds its way into the Siceus River, the draimage of the urea is for the most part internal. Numerous watercourses cross the property, but are drv except imme- diately folowing heavy rain, Their channels are often well-defined for con- 46 B, B. CARRODUS, R. L. SPECHT axy MARGARET JACKMAN siderable distances, then fan out onto flood plains, only to reform into channels further down the gradient. These eventually lead into two salt “lakes” or “pans” which rarely hold water, and lie at the lowest sites on the property; one is in the north-east corner of Hills Paddock and the other in the central west of Milang Cross Paddock (Fig. 3). | | els Od fe JACKSON 5 a eek AMT VICTORS = a ag — < a > vt 2 / * a = io é = 3 = a / Es 2 - € « = ne we z Z a Z z Pe He : : 2 fe 28 a a < oa uw a 2a zu 5 PR am 5 Zu" | z OZ-5 . 2 YOGes £ 4 z WEE ol. . = is - = 2 ™ “ ie z > = = am a = ve & z = = z a 2 ; < a . e & * Fy 2 a e, 2 x“ i i a fe = a fea L a rd = i] < z Y= ft STATION iL ANG PDR a < 4 KOONAMORE Seawée =oR- miLb Fig. 3. Map of Koonamore Station showing hills, salt-lakes, pacldocks and miail-tracks. MILES VEGETATION OF KOONASIGNED STATION 47 SOILS 1. Oapina Sails The Oopina-Waukwinga Hills and the south-eastern corner of Koonamore Stution, and the Orama Tiills in the west (Fig. 3), form a distinct landseape of low hills and adjacent rolling plains. Gently-dipping Precambrian shales aud tillites have developed a shallow caleareous amv soil (Um 3-11 of North. cite, 1960) of variable depth, ‘he surface soil.) which pulverises when anv, is usually a brown sandy-loam. This grades into a light brown loam at about 4 inches und then into decomposing grey shale. The soil, which contains particles of calcium carbonate throughout, varies iu depth from 12 to 36 inches. It supports a shrub steppe form dominated either by Atriplex vesieartt on shallow soils or oecasionally by Koehia secdifolia ou sites with deeper soils Along broad drainage swales and in pediments ut the base of hills, a chaiples soil (Dr. 1-33 of Northeate, 1960) has developed, The surface soil a brown eliv-loam, develops a flaky snirfice erust when drv, Quirte pebbles ate often seuttered over the surface. Noa A2 horizon is preserit and there is a shar p binmedary between the A and B horizons, The upper 6-12 inches of the RB horizon is a red clay which breaks wp into shiny-faced peds. This BI ljorizon wredes into a brown structureless clay which merges inte decomposing, utten grey, shale. Particles. of calcium carbonate, usually present throughout the profile, increase. with depth and may form a coating over the parent rock. This soil also supports a shrub steppe farm dorninated hy Atriplex vesirarin, 3. Hills Soils These soils are found on Precambrian shales and tillites on the sleeper sections of the three main hills systems ou Koonaniore Station, and may wlso vecur on Other low rises where rock outerops. They are mainly shallow and skeletal, and are coarser textured (usritty ohare loam) than fhe Oopina Soils, often mixed with rack debris, and filling crevices in the rucks from which they ure derived. "There is no profile development although the soil may be wp to four feet in depth. Calcium curbonate particles are usnally present in the soil and the underlying rock is often coutect with lime. On the yery shallow soils, the environment is unfavourable for perennial vegetation, and the ephemeral species. Stipa nifida, Bassin spp, and Zygn- Phyllum curantiacum, a perennial. ave chiefly found. But where soil and moisture accumulate along the strike lines und drainage channels. trees of Cusvarine cristata, and sometimes Acacia aneure, and slirabs including Dolonari spp., and Eremophila spp., occur, Kochia sedifolia is usually found on the minor racky onterops, and may extend into the hills where it sometimes consti- tules an important element of the shruls laver, The trausition zones between the Hills ahd Oopina Soils may be extensive and usually carry Kochia astrotricha. Thus, there may be large areas of mixed shrub steppe, Afviplex vesicaria merging with Kochia astrotricha, and this with 1 This deseription refers to 2 typical profile From the centre of Alederman’s Paddock, (for mechanical ynd chemical analyses see Currudus. 1962.) = In Oopinn Hills Paddoek the area shown on the Vegetation muy (Fig, +) ag a mixture Wh Kochia sedifolin and the alinost incistinynishable K. astratrichy is wot in faet a mixture. bit at nomber of small discrete: commumitios whieh oveupy the sep and dip faces respec- tively of the hamoclingal hills, * This description refers to a dypienl profly in the north-western corner of Piissveat “addict. 4's B. BK, CARROBUS. K.P. SPROTIT ast MARGARET JACKMAN K. sedijolia, for example, in the eastern end of Koonamore Cross Paddock. W here the transition is abrupt, there are direct ecotones between A. vesicaria and K, sedifolia, as in the viewity of the north-west corner of Johnson's Paddack. 3. Bineyeye Soils Acrass the centre of Koousiiore Shition. hetween the Oopina and the Kouna- more Hills, lies a belt of country charactérised largely by sand-dunes and sand- plains. These sandy sails all show an accumulation of caleium carbonate nodules in the profile but at varying depth: that of the sand-plain lies no more than « Foot From the surface, whereas, in the sand-dunes, the layer mav be at a depth of 4-5 fect (Ue 5-11 and Uc 3-12 soils of Northcote. 1960). The sans wwe bif-eoloured (Osborn ef al, 1935) except for an area of red sand in a valley enclosed by the Oopina Hills. They support Lucalyptrs oleosa, Acacia “neurd, Casuarina cristata, Acdcia burkiltii, and Eremophila sturtit in either u semi-arid: mallee, arid serub, low arid sernb or low arid woodland sub-form. Intermingled with and iarginal to the sand-dunes are greas of solonized brown soil (Ge 1-12 of Northeote, 1960), in which the texture gradually becomes finer with depth; calcium carbonate is obvious in the shallow surface soil ind often becomes cemented in the B horizon into a prominent kunkar layer, These sous tiv general support 2 shrub steppe of Kechia sedifolia, but occasionally a Myoporum plitycarpum-Atviplex vesicaria asseeiation may occur, Small low-lying ureas of these brown solonized soils may be periodically Hooded and then a Myopoerunt platycarpum-Evemophila longifolia association with seattered clumps of Helerodendrum aleifolium is characteristic. Eroactia- phiyllum elderi often forms. dense ground cover when the water recedes. The following profile with Jittle limestone is characteristic of the soils trom St. Patrick’s Paddock (Fig. 3) north and west through North Peéarce’s into Quarry Paddock: 0-9" brown sandv cluy loam with platy surface, grading into G17") paler sandy clay loam with much nodular limestone; 17-29" as ahove, with a marked development of lime nodules; 29-36" soft decaying shale. (For mechanical and chemical characteristics, see Carrodus, 1962, ) The soil in No. 2 Mustering Paddock differs from that described above only in the presence of powdery ¢ypsum instead of shale in the deeper subsoil. In Station Paddock and south-west through KRoonamore Vegetation Reserve, in a lower-lying area than these deseribed ahove, the lime layer becomes prominent uns) almost continuous fi a pan. Lt is noteworthy that this pan ds penetrabley to roats. (For mechanical and chemical characteristics, see Osborn et al. L931. (935, and Carrodus, 1962.) 1. Nillinghoo Soils Kxtending fron the northern foothills of the Nillinghoo section of the Kodgnamore Hills aver a small part of the detrital plains to the uerth, are soils over pight feet in depth, showme obvious stratification of gravelly sandy Gay- Joan, detrital material, Soil-forming provesses are apparent, since a sradational profile has developed in which clay increases gradually with depth, and calcium cathouate particles, present hut nof clearly visible in the A horizon, are obvious as discrete nodules below 12 inches. (For mechanical and chemical analyses. yee Carrodys, 1962.) This is a sclonized brown soil (Che 1-23 of Northente 1860) and is closely related to that inthe Bindveyve vroup af soils (Ge 1-12), VECETATION GF KOONAMONE STATION 4 The Nillinghoo Soils support an extensive stand of Kochia secifolia with same Casuarina eristata along the watercourses. Towards the Jower levels of and Casuarina cristata, characteristic of the sand-dunes and plains of the Bin- dyeye Soils, replace Kochia sedifolia. 5. Cunwanoarne Soils In the area of detrital soils to the north of the Koonamore Hills, the duplex Curnamona Soils (probably Dr 1-13 Gf Northcote, 1960) ave widespread, the Nillinghoo Soils being characteristic of a small section only. The Curnamona Soils have developed on the pediments Hanking the northern side of the Koona- more and the Orama Hills and extend northwards into Curnamona Station. They support extensive areas of Kochia astrotricha, with patches of Acacia aneura und Casuarina cristata. 6. Lakes Soils The greater part of the drainage from the five groups of soils discussed above Hows into the low-lying saline arcas where the Lakes Soils occur. They are heavy textured soils containing higl concentrations of soluble salts and often have a puify structure in the A horizon. The soils are either highly saline solonized brown soils (Ge 1-12) or solonchaks (Uf 6-61 of Northcote, 1960), and in the extreme form become eavered with a thin layer of salt to produce a salt-pan such as those in Hills and Milang Cross Paddocks, Apparently, as the amount of sodium salts in the soil increases, the vegeta- tion grades from a shrub steppe of Kochia pyramidata through Nitraria schoberi to a samphire association of Arthrocnemum haloenemeides and Pachycornia tennis, and finally to a bare salt parm VECETATION The vegetation map of Koonamore Station (see map) shows the distribu- tion of the dominant species of the six vegelation forms or sub-forms: the semi- uri mallee (Eucelyptus vleosa), the arid sernb (Acacia aneura), the low arid sciub (Eremophila, Acacia}, and the low arid woodland (Casnirina cristata, Myoporum platycarpum, Heterodendrum olzifolium) sub-forms; the five major associations of the shrub steppe form dominated by Atripler (mainly A. vesi- caria), Kochia sedifolia, K, astroiricha, Nitraria-Kochia pyramidata, and Arthroenemum-Pachycornia; and lastly Bassia-Stipa and Zygophyllum auran- Hlactim, dominant species of two associations of the ephemeral herb and ¢rass- land sub-furm, The structure, composition, and ecological relationships of the vegetation forms and sub-forms are described below and summarised in Table 1. In addition, the distributions of Eucalyptus camaldulensis, along creeks where ground water is nearly always available, and scattered individuals of Pittosporum phylliraeoides ave included on the map. 1. Semi-arid Mallee Sub-forni (Williams, 1955). This sub-form is vharacterised by a discontinuous stratum of low mallee eucalypt trees (Eucalyptus oleosa’) up to & metres tall (Plate 1, Fic, 1). Seat- tered chenopodiaceous shrubs itnd ephemeral species such as Stipa nitida, Salsola Kali and Bassia spp. form the lower strata. In this. district £. oleesa is found at the driest limit of its distribution. being characteristic of the wetter regions 30 B. B. CARRODUS, KR. L. SPECHT sxv MARGAREY JACKMAN further south. This sub-form is, therefore, restricted to deep sandy soils with a well-developed limestone layer in the sub-soil (Bindyeye Soils), along ereck beds, and occasionally extending into the hills on rocky slopes (Ovpina Soils), lh. Arid Serub Siub-form (Williams, 1955 ) In this sub-form, a Jayer of low Acacia aneura trees up to & metres. tall and usually branching near the ground is dominant, and forms a discontinuous stratum ranging from open to dense. Scattered bushes of Acacia burkillti or Eremophila sturtii may be present in the wuderstorey with a few chenopodiaccous shrubs. After rain, ephemerals like Stipa nitida, Salsola kali, and Bassia spp. may form a continuous ground cover. The Acacia aneura association (Plate 1, Pig, 2) is common on the deep sandy Bindyeye soils which, unlike the soils on which the mallee is dominant, lack a well-developed limestone layer in the sub-soil. This sub-form may also extend into the hills along either drainage lines or steeply dipping strata where soil and water accumulate. WU. Louw: Arid Sernb Sub-form Shrubs 2-3 metres tall of Acacia burkittii and Eremophila sturtii, which branch close to the ground to give a rounded, bushy appearance, and form a discontinuous stratum) ranging from open ty dense, are dominant in this suh- form. Lower strata dre usually absent, except for ephemeral plants which may cover the ground alter rain. This subform is common on some of the low sand-dunes of the Bindyeye Soils (Plate 1, Fig. 3). Where water accumulates along the steep rocky strike-lines of the Koonamore-Mt. Victor Ihills, narrow bands of low arid sernb sub-furm are dominated by Eremophila spp. and Dodonaea spp, Williams (1955) imelnded this sub-form iu his “Arid Sernh”* sub-form. {Towever, on Koonamore Station these communities are structurally so different fram the taller Acacia aneuta association characteristic of the “Arid Serub” sub-form, thal it seems reasonable to describe them separately. IV. Low Ari Woodland. Sub-form (Willianws, 1955) When law trees, 4-5 metres tall, with single stems and spreading canopies arte common in the landscape, they impart a woodland stracture to the com- munity. This is the low arid woodland sub-form (Williams, 1955) ind contrasts with the arid serub sub-form in which the Acacia aneure irees usually branch close to the ground, and tend to be bushy in habit. The Jow arid woodland is dominated by Casuarina cristata (Plate 1, Fig. 4), Myeporwm pletyearpum or Heterodendrum oleifotium, The canopy of the tree stratum ranges from open, when Myoporum is the dominant species, to almost continuous, as exhibited often by Casuarina or clones of Heterodendrium. Chenopodiacesus shrabs are usually present im the understorey, and ephemeral species appear after rain. Various associations dominated by one or more of the three species listed above are commen on the plains and Houd plains of the Bindyeye Soils. The Casuarina association extends into the hills, and the Afyeporum association onto the Lukes Soils (Table 1). VEGETATION OF KOONAMORE STATION al V. Sheek Sfeppe Form (Williams, 1055) This form is dommated by low shrubs usually 0-3-1 metre tell, with semi- succulent leaves, which are usually separated frum one another by a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the plants. Ephemeral species are prominent atter rain, This vegetation form is by far the most common found on Koonamore Sta- tion. It includes five major associations (Table 1): Atriplex vesicaria association ix common on the Oopina Soils (Plate 2, Fig. 5); Kovhia sedifolia association on the svlonized brown soils of the Bindyeve (Plate 2, Fig. 6) and Nillinghoo soil rroups, and on Hills Soils; Kochia astrotricha association on the Curnamona Soils: Nifraria schoberi-Kochia pyramidata association (Plate 2, Fig. 7) and Arthroc:- nemum halocnemoides-Pachycornia tenuis association on Lakes Soils. The plants of Nitraria schobert may be much larger than the other stubs, sometimes up to 2 metres tall and several metres in diumeter, but ate included here for convenience. Vi. Ephemeral Herb and Grassland Sub-form The absence of trees and shrubs, and the presence of a carpet of ephemcral herbs and grasses following rain, are characteristics of the ephemeral herb and grassland sub-form on Koonamore Station, which was not described by Williams (1955). It is common wherever the environment is seasonally too dry for the establishment of perennial vegetation, and hence, perennial herbs and grasses are rarely found. In addition to these areas of presomably natural ephemeral herh and grassland, this sub-form includes disclimax: communities resulting from excessive over-grazing of shrub steppe associations. This is evident along the fence separating South Pearce’s Paddock from Oupina Hills and Pussycat Paddocks, and along the fence separating No. 3 Mustering Paddock from Finn's Paddock (Plate 2, Fig. 6). Stipa nitida and Bassia spp. usually dominate both the overgrazed areas, wn the natural herb and grassland occurring on very shallow skeletal soils alony drainage channels and at the base of hills (Plate 2, Fig. 8). Erodiaphyllum eldert is often dominant on flood-plains of ihe Bindyeye Soils, For example, the large flood-plain (area 3-5 square miles) extending south-west from Southern Cross Bore ints Milang Cross Paddock, is covered with ephemeral herb and grassland apparently dominated hy Krediophyllunt. On its wester margin are clumps of Muehlenbeckia cunninghamil. Zyeophyllian aurantiacum, a perennial. dominates this sub-form on the driest habitats of the Kuonumore Hills, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The authors are indebted to the late Professor J. G. Wood, Professor af Botuny, for advice and encouragement. Both Dr. C. G, Stephens and Mr. K. H. Northeote of the C.S.LR.O, Division of Svils generously gave valuable advice on the soils. Thanks are also due to the owner of Koonamore Station, Mr, A, P. MeLiteh- lan. for allowing access to all parts of his property. Most of the phprographs of plant associations were taken by colleagues in the Botany Department daring the course of cther programmes of work al Konnamore. The authors particularly wish to thank Miss C. M. Rurdley fm her help in this, and many other uspeets of the work. ut ro B, B. CARRODUS, R. L, SPECHT asp MARGARET JACKMAN This study was made possible by the award vf a post-graduate research grant from the University of Adelaide to the firstmamed author (B.B.C) and this is now most gratefully acknowledged. REFERENCES Brack, J. M.. 1943-57, Flora of South Australia, Vols. 1-4, 2nd ed. Govt. Printer, Adelaide. Canrropus, B. B,, 1962, Some Aspects of the Ecology of Arid South Australia: The Relative ' Distribution of Atriplex vesicaria Heward ex Benth, and Kochia sedifolia, F.v.M. Thesis, University of Adelaide. Haus, E. A. A., Specat, R, L., and Eanpiey, C. M., 1964, Regeneration of the Vegetation of Koonamore Vegetation Reserve, 1926-62, Aust. J. Bot., 12, pp. 205-264. Norvaeotr, K. H., 1960. Atlas of Australian Soils. Explanatory Data for Sheet 1: Port Augusta-Adelaide-Hamilton Area, C.S.LR.O, (Aust.}. Melbourne University Press. Ossornn, T. G. B., 1925, On the Ecology of the Vegetation of Arid Australia, No. I, In- troduction and General Description of the Koonamore Reserve for the Study of the Salt-bush Flora. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, pp, 290-297. Ospoan, T. G. B., Woon, J. C., and Pauramcr, T. B., 1931. On the Ant-ccology of Stipa nitida, a Study of a Fodder Grass in Avid Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W,, 56, pp. 299-324, Osaorn, T, G, B., Woon, J. G., and Pauraice, T. B,, 1932. On the Growth and Re-action to Grazing of the Perennial Salt-bush, Atriplex vesicarium. Proe. Linn. Sac. N.S.W,, 57, pp. 377-402. Osuonn, T. C, B., Woon, J. G., and Partripce, T. B., 1935. On the Climate and Vegetation of the Koonamore Vegetation Reserve to 1931. Proc. Linn, Soc N.S.W,, 60, pp. 392-427. Roank, B. A., 1955. The Aut-ecology of Asphodelus fistulasus LE. Ph.D. Thesis, University of Adelaide. Wiraustams, R. J. 1955. Vegetation Regions in: Atlas of Australian Resources. Dept, Nat. Devel., Canberra, Woop, J. G., 1936, Regeneration of the Vegetation on the Koonamore Vegetation Reserve, 1926-36. Trans. Roy. Soe. $, Aust., 60, pp. 96-111, A —t 4, KOONAMORE_ STATION VEGETATION MAP ——- FENCES = CREEK BEDS ----- TRACKS 4 Cc ——— awe Lo H AY : oi AR a c H a. = ————————— 7 —_————SS=”>_— are ee —————— i ay, —=— an OO ———_ ——— 2 / - fie == A ae ST iI! : WN eee, he amite ey ee hae | LNT) NS \ . MG NS . S2 = v : w p Su) these, a v v M Rds a4 y . SS . arastwage, OM a, X Sy se \ y. v Cee Mf, M Ae . 4 M M \ ‘ v, NN WS on 2 2 0 | wi z , Aly .c Al * f i : ne ‘ Vv YAWN ° oe us 4 Mat I v. ‘ v o c m c i WN w ¥. P Y, AN eet hee MC SN . \ YO! PANN SNS rp wa O ' S vy. “a rs NN \, ‘ ‘\ A M A “ae = r et M M. 7 A . SS P M > ie efit PAN ae . Ft M M : \ \ WAN m CANN OS FFD id Eero boa QQ \ Pp WS Aes SE HS ’ MOM Am i fait & Me ‘A cary el \ w HW M M 4 oa ‘ et H ae ar) Moen AM ce M ray’ a H NG M “M ; = Mb. * JM yee Wy Asner BS MEMS AN i ops WM aN oe MLS eM RRR We ee Mo w\. MM Oe J TAG AnH ue oy — -M MoM fa! Ht SM ANA anes Feet NS SM Ae Sapna) fe hae rar ial Luh cot! Baal yokt se OARS - ; Bias : 7 hie : REM ISS Bee ANS ee ee eR one + Mn: ay ARS SR ee eA Et 43 mM SSS \ QA ep Bag ee bs ES ie Tees Cee aL B a i AN We MA Ae << MAP ~ Res AN ae AMA HY ai Ay Moo ———— it A wks Ya | one —— ; Mee lll i Yves All Ree y WN? PHS fl { a | Hil | NAT | ety M > ‘ M RNG MN i M 7) M Qk x rnin RV s M My is “mM J We Lp Yule H “an a Atriplex (chiefly A. vesicaria) YMA Kochia astrotricha Eremophila , Acacia I | lh il BRB Nitraria, Kochia pyramidata Eucalyptus oleosa y ili = nny | ca p tH Baars ee% , e] Zygophyllum aurantiacum ae ia era Eucalyptus camaldulensis Myoporum platycarpum & “SRUTTTMIT Kochia sedifolia [| Bassia , Stipa } il 1 a ae | NH NS SY Wl It) WU = |! Pittosporum phylliraeoides Cc Casuarina cristata Vv Arthrocnemum , Pachycornia | \ \ Acacia aneura H Heterodendrum oleifolium ETT HL | Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1965), Vol. 89. VEGETATION OF KOONAMORE STATION 53 APPENDIX I DISTRIBUBTION OF SPECIES RECORDED OX KOONAMORE STATION The following Table lists the species recorded on Koonamore Station and indicates the habitats in which the species have been found. The data thus presented are by no means complete as the survey was undertaken during the drought period 1960-61. However, the list was supplemented by information gathered by other workers in more favonrable seasons, The identification of many of the specimens was checked by Dr. Lj. Eichler, Mr, P. Wilson and Mr. E, H. Ising of the State Herbarium of South Australia. where a voucher sct of specimens has been deposited, The nomenclature follows Black (1943-57) or the forthcoming Supplement thereto, prepared by Hj, Eichler. Att a before the species indicates that the plant is an introduction to Australia. The species have been recorded in the twelve habitats listed below: the numbers preceding cach habitat refer to these used at the head of the vertical columns in the Table, Semi-arid mallee, low arid woodland, arid serub, low arid serub sub-forms: (1) Rocky hills (2) Creek beds (3) Sand-hills and sand-plains (4) Flood-plains Shrub steppe form: (5) Nitraria schoberi-Kochia pyramidaty association (Lukes Soils ) (6) Arthrocnemum falocnemoides-Pachycornia tenuis association (Lakes Soils ) (7) Atriplex vesicaria association (Oopina Svuils) (8) Myoporum platycarpum-Alriplex vesicaria association on Solonized brown soils (Bindycye Soils ) (9) Kochia astrotricha association (Curnamona Soils) (10) Kovhia sedifolia on Solonized brown soils (Bindveve Soils ) (11) Kochia sedifolia on Solonized brown soils (Nillinghoo Soils) Ephemeral herb and urassland sub-form: (12) Stipa nitida-Rassia spp. association, The following species have been recorded on Koonamore Stetion but no details regarding their weological distribution are available. Danthonia penieidlata, Brnenpogon nagricons, Tragus ovstralianus, Atriples lindleyi, Altriples: velutinelia, — Helipterum wariahile. Acarin telengonaphyllr, — * Padla annua, B. B. CARRODUS., R. L. SPECHT ann MARGARET JACKMAN a4 é i ral at LPOY pte test pl YAOLaye AWN Suanganwte “yy Depry a7 OR NEPOBLY Y yeitay besoolhyon | HSOpUaHlOp ' Me mayoflpaxs ‘Mr Mynpmianeid “3p Moyfsqo] "M tabaoul ~ 37 LyMALDIVA UPA dd pynpen UEMOMUDS By “M “M “y “M DSOPMalaT Nua Aya AT orpeuend "oy Wingo tnepodonay;) HSOILTUAL “JT SapNOUaDjOdapos medanargivagnd * nropinud “9 DLGO “ef nytiguua) “7 sidenarin) “ZX PIELID LATER BED “a sithy Majd Pyouag > EF SUULLOITG DISET MAdjdoLay HILO pLenowsaa ynpedape * pe psowbuods DID? PF aphiappana * ye nynpndiay wadiayy paadyohh tard “en SAMOA HIOTUY MAIL Y Lh EF apaaripadousy.y APU stood SU iE tAd VATPP y, LRH MHD UY AQ ia) yan Jar ) ARUOANTO ST ATITG ip “SYQOP PUY S MOSUTLO [HE ssO0,) ATELY JO saepunog wlugyus Uy dt HO SUTTON) Aagayus UII N OL) OPUL PAAMW STYF JO UWISEAUIE Lat payOdod (Gag [) apreoy gy, = - ~~ +4 54 = = — —— = == =. — = = =a = = = — ce [> — == & + ~ — oe eH HE HH - = =. = 5 SES = = & = s of an = =-_ —_= = +- = —_ <5 + - =—_ —_ = + >a =e oo = + —— = ne - - Ho 4 2 — ++ = = 2% ie ee yet = = moe of {i e = > —= -f- =, F 44 2-5 +4 -- -~—~--=+4 - +4 —— = + — - — ne es = -| = s—_— = = = a = = — oS o_o — eee t = a fy et = — ~-- — — -— a = = = “== -b @éLiul & & £ 9 © F F @ IED abaa INA SET tinsnaed oe pynpinadk Ee HMO ete Deon Une ORDO TY HERP TORY HEMP snyliydy vod ansora DpUIMTS + Ty DUM NAOT AHONU|V IWR APC idafdoInay vayn OvBRIJOU APU wt fqap BADIA ef TRIVIAL ATE DEEL DURLVASD, SROIVUMIVNSV AMI 4ensonjsy snjapoydsF oRooeTT APL MERON UGISEL Tg JOU SLY TL. i) sdaorbuo) ip SULLY DIPOL F vpanyahoyd +s ppyie pda SRPNGdIG SHLULS LYON! dtp SesOLBos ny snghythjor + ap FMLPUIDHD “4p snaduiadn uobod vagy SUDPRPOE UOLLUIIOPN ONE enguyjurs vobodoquuiy sramurRIy, Ape * HAPISAD JAP oBgaeALSIBYY APLUUT SnAGOLLNA FRLOKOLHA/D nppindarsy) sdypinpiay, ) oraamipodspagd \pruae gy saraaile + ¢+4++ sj. ~+ ETATTON OF KOONAMORE STATION x , VEC Hfeytad pal “sy WYNILAP HE OKE H WAU “S| (ep Pl Gg TOAD SWS “20g “NOY *SUeM “OU ENLL, » JO KLVURS UBIPELYSELYy (,) peafyngyl sy) tUIUs BLOOS go UOINIAve puato oy Leggy "Wop Aqy peytpery £ Lp LANALOD Lpist + mange "3 WI RPAES HOGS DEY TAT _ wlagaye naayouey + = Lane WO pegng p - BRodVAPV YY ATO YT Mi Ofao NRL Uaposaya Py nRzotawWUe CT -- MEPRQOL “Cl DURAN DANUINOET | stsorpuldeg Ape aialtnd SRY —- & vpydoiwdata "iF -- PAE MERC AL nansaud wap orooiniqdoydiigp Spur SWIIULT MOULDISO2 LTT ORIIRANYP, APART, ucraayjopnitsaal “a — OPER * OF HOME POL “Ee HEFT Ade? aE ManpPeyy/rG Z MICRTAETL * 9 menprydouun wungiydobig SepMPta}AIIO SPeyPNGrL f, - = vadapoppiyd 9 —_—— nytojod MyASSD.A;) wyrydowiant *) aah + Sa Orsdapeny UPSET) aeoplornitdyexee,) —apsouTumnsary APU, pa ODOM 2 ott aphiydauns + PUEILIDS OF 1) PPANsa Yo "ez é mpbiay > BS at wad “Yr hanrayanig 17 i at BANAUD DTD ORO PTOSOUUTY ——ausoulamiury AP ULE yf = + waplosmniplyd wendodsonigy avoonodsoqyy Apurey WUDAIQITS +} dravynseed) APU A a IOI) PPISA w oraoypaseryy Ape y °° — aLvaury wnpyadoursg a snppsnd snaooaeag) DPNUALDY WOME RMDGOYOS Had dL GENT uiofinicay srenjojdny » ononyAqdosag Ayam Dpvawv ad) HPHYRIUULOD RLU) avaaRpyesg Ape Hinsopr puny “ss wnwoublia +5 ; HINDI WUD anaarinetosy Apu = — — —_ = sapHOrpOUualg DIpPaUuMapT vruugonagy Apu y f - qe = NADMILAIG VOLO] - - waiiada HRUA pI) ordavarlngiog Aye a = Dazanedy WU AYIN AT, RHLISSEAONS DEPUOHAET, = vuaha minopaplina p t= naniada DLHOHDVAYA f. monty Apimeg sapuoonyrl WUMASTERDAN ST suajud papptoeg vpapnapuay Oboe Ty =— = SHIVUANM SNOT — perf nesewi song : epuaRlsewAN AlTure a sniiyompshyod: +p SNBWADGO “qT ENSOULIOL SHYJUDI, ) —~ arqruoyule gy _ —SPSOTMMUINAIT SPURT sormade (er eet ar I~ o "9 SUPUGON: SNIOPIT ——— ‘ils Span aee etaoUY URIRUDY ATTY ee ob satuailg t+ JACKMAN ART , ort B, B. CARRODUS, R. L. SPECHT anp MARC ttt + + Pd wo ts WASOUIES WMAYTUDYN wQoyety * PGDIN DLUUPDYE A MAITONU SOYPRMVUGT, S79INLIZO SMYDUOK SNyDTAapLEponD *s* snvyeUbpur “sy 2dObaLh Ki snapofiypoun owauas TOP YPN KISOPYNT Uipopanyds WoyniI0897,4 PUNU DWOIOPO, f Soproaawead wr.cna¢ AUT YBUZUUND BAAN IAP weofepryovoliuc Tyr UE BIOLINU DYOWIT sidajojday nuawjoin f wijofueninsd sisdoqaosy Swaps DPA 4 LORIE “TT TENN ISOUN © FT MnpUAg oy Unda pa Fy winsoUIbon sapojnyd us) Weg pOaTH] UNATDY GNU) ) ehapp Wenpydorwpory npoydaverajd. nipadsns; NUYMIPITION HILNIMUI/ Vy SLAY] DEULES,) SAPNULY STUEYIAD, jg nynprdsriy *;) DYPUBIDY MHD HOLD.) piaylhyond auoosfiyorey Ten ydng snypucwbu pr evpisoduie;) ATU T nahiapurgns Dinapoay ROTH pOay) ATU | wagais * A] BYIULSUOR * 44 AQQOIIG Dibsaquapyyn py pao epniedames Apu sooty jo Vy tour BOTY FIMO -_ t + “+ + } 1 +l ++) + + <" cl Pt ‘yHoppHRY BULGE) PUR SUPP. SUOSugop UT spay yas yy FMEA MOOTHTM SLILMIN, RNB) SAYNAP araaRqqiuony ALUaTyp wHdanal pnd undsodoh py ARPT: Bf VIDNas ~ Hy wriudoas * pp wiyoppsoddo tat DiVpAIvU * Hy , { Balt “OT TIMOR * myofeusayn ppeydouladagT eran eodot yy Apu (RUM LIATIS “5 UNLV “Sy. winandigpa wnunjos: vipaatdly 008 * Ay HIG YUQOIEN B/DAISHM WNQE TT eRoavuTpO, Ape y TUNSOM AIL WUNLINA,T, UAOYLIDLAPS LMIYPUDISOL Ff HePRIGeTT ATT wMIdns DUIG4d, | PROMRTIOYIO A ApETe snpidasianjid shayoqown gy mentor pmnddnjaypyiduy) nanos pndd wy MUNIN WNLLOLOLII HT sashoah) Wenaryog . onaouuTaeiog ATU suaasaqnia snpntyoauos evanrpnATOAUo;) ApUre.y IDAIEND PUULIIGOILDSY SUPAISTD TUM AP SAD PE ovaaeperdayasy Ape Ssnpnepupoojs snonoy amg qequy Apurey npEjIay) poRapNIA Ty nsoayo ‘ay Lap nprUuind Sn M ONT anaonprayy Aping say Fig, lig. Fig. Fig. Fig, Fig. Fig. Fig. VEGETATION OF KOONAMORE STATION St -I AppEnpIx II POPULAR NAMES OF SOME BETTER-KNOWN PLANTS FOUND ON KOONAMORE STATION Scientific Name Acacia aneura Arthrocnemum halocnemoides Atriplex vesicaria Bassia—various species Casuarina cristata Dodonaea spp. Eremophila_sturtii Eremophila longifolia Erodiophyllum elderi Eucalyptus camaldulensis Heterodendrum oleifolium Kochia pyramidata Kochia sedifolia Muehlenbeckia cunninghamii Myoporum platycarpum Nitraria schoberi Pachycornia tenuis Pittosporum phylliraeoides Salsola kali Stipa nitida Zygophyllum spp, Popular Name Mulga Samphire Bladder Saltbush Bindyeye Black Oak Hop Bush Turpentine Bush Long-leaved Eremophila, Emu Bush Koonamore Daisy River Red Gum Bullock Bush Black Bluebush Bluebush Lignum False Sandalwood Nitre-bush Samphire Native Willow Roly-poly Spear Grass Squash Bush EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE 1 Semi-arid mallee, Eucalyptus oleosa association on Koonamore Station, Arid serub, Acacia aneura association on Koonamore Station. Low arid scrub, Acacia burkittii-Eremophila sturtii association on Koonamore Station. Low arid woodland, Casuurina cristata association on Koonamore Station, PLATE 2 a Shrub steppe, Atriplex vesicaria association on Koonamore Station. Shrub steppe, Kochia sedifolia association on Koonamore Station with overgrazed community (during drought) on right. Shrub steppe, Nitraria schoberi association on Koonamore Station. Ephemeral herb and grassland, Stipa nitida-Bussia spp. association on Koonamore Station; Myoporum platycarpum trees in the background. AT, AND Marcaret JACKMAN EC B. B. Carropus, R. L. See PLATE 1 PLATE 2 B. B. Carropus, R. L. Specur, AND MArGARET JACKMAN MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS - PERMIAN SEDIMENTS IN A PROBABLE PIERCEMENT STRUCTURE BY IAN B, FREYTAG Summary Mount Toondina lies near to the centre of the Arckaringa Sub-Basin, herein re-defined somewhat provisionally on seismic evidence, as a significantly thicker development of Upper Palaeozoic sediments. The Mount Toondina Beds are formally described. Their type-section consists of 263 feet of shale and argillaceous siltstone with interbeds of fine sandstone and coal. These sediments were deposited mainly in a lake environment, but also during intermittent swampy phases, and their flora indicates an Early Permian age. So far, the Mount Toondina Beds are limited in exposure to the small area of the type locality, where they are severely deformed and dislocated together with remnants of Upper Jurassic Algebuckina Sandstone. The surrounding outcropping Lower Cretaceous strata, and underlying Upper Jurassic and Upper Palaeozoic sequences inferred from seismic surveys, are only mildly deformed. An isolated, small, positive gravity anomaly coincides approximately with the Permian inlier. To explain the structurally anomalous occurrence of the Permian sediments at Mount Toondina, it is suggested by present geological and geophysical findings that they were elevated by piercement of the overlying strata, probably in Middle or Late Tertiary time. The question of motivation for such a piercement has not been resolved. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS — PERMIAN SEDIMENTS IN A PROBABLE PIERCEMENT STRUCTURE by Tan B. Frevrac* [Read 10 June 1965} SUMMARY Mount ‘oondina lies near to fhe centre of the Arckaringa Sub-Basin, herein re-defined somewhat provisioually on seismic evidence, as a significantly thicker development of Upper Palaeozoic sediments. The Mount Toondina Beds are formally described. Thotr type-seution consists Of 263 feet of shale ane argiflaceous siltstone with interbeds of fine sandstone and coal, These sediments were deposited mainly in a lake envirou- ment, but also during intermittent swampy phases, and their flora indicates an Early Permian age. So far, the Mount ‘Tooudina Beds are limited in exposure to the small area of the type locality, where they are severely deformed und dislocated together with renmmants of Upper Jurassie Algebuekina Sandstone. ‘Che surrounding outcropping Lower Cretaceous strata, and underlying Upper Jurassic and Upper Palacozoie sequences inferred [rom seisraic. surveys, are only mildly de- formed. An isolated, small, positive gravity anomaly coincides approximately with the Permian jnlier, To explain the structurally anornalons aceurrence of the Permian sediments at Mount’ Toondina, it is suggested by present geological and weophysical finud- ings that they were elevated by piercement of the overlying strata, probably in Middle or Late Tertiary tine. The question of motivation for such a pierce- went has not been resolved. INTRODUCTION Geological mapping of the area of the Oodnadatta 4-mile Military Sheet by the South Australian Geological Survey led to the discovery in 1962 of Glossopteris-hearing Lower Permian sediments at Mount Toondina. Subsequent detailed mapping, shallow stratigraphic drilling, and gravimetric and seismic surveys have furnished important additional information about this anomalous Permian inlier. Mount Toondina is a singular landmark in desolate, undulating country, some 28 miles approximately south of Oodnadatta township (see Fig. 1). The point is conspicuous not so much in elevation but in its solitary, dark patch of vegetation which is supported by nearly a dozen springs around the lnall- slope. Indeed, Mount Toondina owes its preservation mainly to resistant lime- stones deposited by ancestral Pleistocene mound-springs, The Permian exposure is the best and most interesting one in northern South Australia and will provide an important reference section for both sir- face and subsurface work in the future. It is therefore opportune to formally * Petroleum Section, Geological Survey of South Australia. Trans. Roy. See. $, Aust, (1965), Vol. 88. JAN B, FREYTAG Santos Oodnadatia No.1 MILES 8&8 MOUNT @ DUTTON Gy ALGEBUCKINA a T ARCKARINGA HOMESTEAD ATA -—. SU B-BASIN ~— ° mes SCALE Bo . QD 2 ANNA CREEK HOMESTEAD ’ Parmian outcrop..-. # Permian isopachs. Archaean Del EB. 65262 S.A. Dept. cf Mines MT. TOONDINA REGIONAL SETTING SHOWING TENTATIVE PERMIAN ISOPACHS Fig. 1. Mount Toondina regional settiag. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS a3 uefine the Permian secliments., Their unusual structural position within an upparent piercement will also be discussed. For the purposes of discussion, the important subsurface pre-Upper Juras- sie sequence in the region will be termed Upper Palaeozoic in this paper, The ie is inferred from seismic refraction data. REGIONAL SETTING AND THE ARCKARINGA SUB-BASIN Mount ‘Toondina lies nortli-west of the Peake and Denison Ranges proper (see Fig. 1) and has a survey cairn elevation of 382 feet above mean sea level. Geologically it is situated within that portion of the far western Great Artesian Basin referred tu informally as the Arckuringa embayment (Sprigg and Stall in Glacssner and Parkin, 1958), and Jater as the Arckaringa sub-basin (Sprigg. 1961), The latter term was related, as 4 sub-unit, to the “Permian-Mesozoic Artesian Busin” (p. 53). It has heen demonstrated clearly by Wopfner (1964) that Mesozoic cleposition in the area of the western margin of the Great Artesian Basin was separated fram the Permian by a period of 80 to 90 million years, essentially af uplift and erosion climaxed by peneplanation. Thus, the Permian sediments do not constitute a part of the Great Artesian Basin. which is essentially an intra-cratonie basin of Mesozoic age. It is proposed that “Arckaringa Sub-Basin” should remain ay a useful term referring to the relatively thick Late Palaeozoic sediments in the Arckaringa- Mount ‘Toondina area, shown by isopachons contours in Fig, 1. This use is preferred ty “Arckaringa embayment” applied to the Great Artesian Basin, as the Juraussic-Lower Cretaceous sequence in the region lacks evidence of a sedimentary history or configuration diflering significantly from that of the region east of the Peake and Denison Precambrian inliers, Snb-unit status is therefore not necessary. The Arckaringa Sub-Basin is analogous to the Boorthanna Trough, a teri reently introduced for the thick development of Upper Palaeozoic sediments situated between the Proterozoic Peake and Denison ranges and the Archaean of Mount Woods (Wopfner, 1964). To what extent these thicker bodies of sediment are primary features or structural remnants of the former extensive Lale Palacvzvie sedimentation indicated ky Wopfner (his Fig. 1, p. 119) is nut yet known, Their recognition is hased on aeromagnetics, water bore data and Mines Department seismic investigations. The consistent high-speed refracting layer, below which in some places ordered reflections still originate from sub-horizontal strata (Moorcroft, 1964) is interpreted as the hase of the Upper Palavozoie seetion in the Arckaringu Sub-Basin, This implies that sediments probably not younger than Ordovician and possibly as old as Willouran undorlic the Arckarmga Sub-Basin. The Peake and Denison, Mount Kingston, Alzebuckina and Mount Dutton inliers expose moderately folded sediments of Willouran, Torrensian and Stur- linn age, together with upthrown blocks of (2) Archgean metamorphics af the Peake Series (Reyner, 1955). This author aud others. (Parkin, 1956; Chugy, 1957: Heath. 1965) assigned « tentative Permian age to several stall, isolated outerops of coarse clastics. reworked in part. along the westeru edge of the ranges (see Fig. 1), on grounds of stratigraphic position and glacigene characteristics, Cluge alsa recorded gravimetric and borehole evidence for the presence of “Permian to (?) Jurassic” 64 JAN B. FREYTAG GEOLOGICAL PLAN MOUNT TOONDINA ~~ 7 ee eee Old Bore P fogndina Nel CALE FEET O 500 1000 FEET a ae ce ce Approx. LEGEND QUATERNARY r Undifferentiated aeolian sands. gypsite & spring limestones LOWER CRETACEOUS Roma Formation equivalent —shales with concretionary limestones Transition Beds equivalent - interbeds fine sandstone & siltstone UPPER JURASSIC Algebuckina Sandstone.._...._., LOWER PERMIAN Mount Toondina Beds (with bedding traces) Observed Fault Inferred Fault.,...... i Artesian Stratigraphic hole Plant fossil locality. . A Airphoto or drainage lineations related to fractures. . Del FB 65-309 |. Freytag S.A. Dept, of Mines Fig, 2. Geological plan — Mount Toondina. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS 65 sediments west of the Peake and Denison Ranges. This view was later con- frined by Ludbrook (1961) in extending the Lower Permian section dated by Balme (1957) in Lake Phillipson bore to several water bores in the Boor- thanna Trough, SURFACE GEOLOGY AT MOUNT TOONDINA The surface geology of Mount Toondina is depicted in Fig. 2, which is a geological map based on portion of an enlarged. acrial photograph. The Mount Toondina survey cairn stands on a small, flattying remnant. about 3 to 5 feet thick, of gypsite-covered Plio-Pleistocene arenaccous lime- stone, which rests mushroom-like on a column of steeply inclined Permian sediments (see Fig, 3; also Plate 2). FRE LEGEND Sty rib. (G7 FLED INTERPRETIVE GEOLOGICAL CROSS-SECTION A-A' MOUNT TOONDINA | Freyraa S.A Depiof Mines Mie. 5. Interpretative geological cross-section A-A’ — Mount Toondina. Permian outcrops occur within a circular area about one-third af a mile across. In detail, the outline of Permian exposure is probably polygonal, but it is obscured by an anmilar mound of Quaternary limestones, gypsite and aeolian sands. Most outcrops inside this mound are encrusted with recently deposited travertine, or haye heen affected by calcareous replacement. Between outerops, the ground snorface is a thin saline. clavev crust. ‘Vravertinized Permian rocks can be distinvuished from the coarse, niassive Alyebuckina Sandstone by their well-bedded and fine-grained character. Usually the base of the Algebuckina Sandstone iy defined by an angular quurtz conglomerate, up to thee feet in thickness. Although the Algebuckina Sandstone is generally lacking in visible beddiny (perhaps due mainly to calcareous replicements), it is apparently structurally conformable with the Permian, The regionally unconformable relationship be- tween Permian and Upper Jurassic sediments of this area (Wopfner, 1964, p. 123; Heath, 1965) is not evident within the compass of the small Mount Toon- dina exposure. Both Permian and Jurassic strata are strongly deformed and dip in excess af 55 degrees, (st) IAN B. FREYTAG Permian plant lossils were discovered in two places (see Fig, 2) and details of the Hora appear in the definition of the Mount Toondina Beds, The fossils from 500 feet north-west of the cairn oveur in finelv-bedded pink silt- stones associated with gritty sandstones not present in the type section. Outcrops of gentl=dipping daurk-hrown, ferruginous sandstones with macu- céuns. silty interbeds ‘and caleareans aolitic horizons ovcur on the southern and eastern slopes of Mount Toandine Similar sediments are known from muverous localities surrounding the Peake and Denison basement indiers, where their stratigraphic position is above the Algebuckim Sandstone but below the Lower Cretaceous marine formations, For this reason, and antil formally described, these sediments ure related to the Transition Beds of Whitehouse (1955), of the Blythesdale Group in Qneenslind. A feature of their occurrence in proximity to basemeut highs (e.g. Mt. Alice, Mt. Dutton, Algebuckina, Peake and Denison Range) is one or more horizons of rounded, water-worn, boulders nuiging up to several feet in maximum diameter, and of diverse lithology, At Mount Toondina, however, the boulders are absent, und the significance of this is ter be discussed. Lower Cretaceous mirine sediments crop ont widely in the region sur roynding Mount Toondima, These grey shales exposed in. erosional gutters. apparently are imdisturbed within a few hundred teet of the Permian. Seat- tered jirmestone concretions in the shales protrude « few inches above the surrounding plain and one mile approximutely north of Toondina cairn they eantain Inoceramus carsoni, Maccoyella reflecta and Barcoona trigonalis, u iolluscay assemblage placed iu the lower portion of the Albian section hy Dr. \. EL, Ludbrook (1966, in press), In comparison with Santos Oodnadatta No, L Well, this horizon is about 600 feet above the base ot the marine Cretar- ceo sequence. Indications of fractures both ou and around Mount Toonding are ounnerous. ‘These: are classified on the map as:— L, Observed faults—visible truncation or displacement of beds. 2. Inferred faults—displacement apparent from surtace trend, repetition af beds, or subsurface data. 4. Probable faults and radia) fractures—airphoto lineations assumed peri pheral to the Permian and Jurassic sub-crop covered by Quaternary deposits: and drainage lineutions, The fractures strike in many directions. "The predominating set is m the \WSW-_ENE direction, and less prominent sets lie NNW-SSE and NE-SW. Llades are not evident, but are probably small, Minor drag-folds oceur in the Permian and Jurassic sediments, and also in the Transition Beds equivalents on the slopes of Mount Toondina, Viewed overall, the geological map suggests that the Permian of SMfount Toondina forms the centre of a very steeply, sOuth-westerly plunging structive with its culmination centred om the north-eusterry side, The nature at the structure Will be discussed Further in detail. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS — FORMAL CONCEPT The Australian Code wf Strutivraphic Nomenchelire stutes that a sequence of strata “whose thickness und lithology are incompletely known” may be referred to formally as “Beds”, The Permian sequence at Mount Toondina is within this category and the following formal definition is proposed; MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS i7 Name: Mount Toondina Beds. Type Locality: Mount Tuondina. 28 miles at 10 degrces west of south from Ovdnadatta township, Lat. 27°36°42"S., Tong. 195°21'41E, survey cairn by astrofix ), Type Section: North-east to south-west sevtion chammeled on flat ground une chain south-east of Mount Toondina survey euir (see Fig, £). Base af section (Unit 1) is covered by Quaternary deposits. Top of section (Unit 31) is chosen arbitrarily at a structural break. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS —FIELD DESCRIPTION Sissi Taclrnens “An t oi, | Sandstone, greyish to off-white, weathers brownish, fire to vere fne- urained, selt, friable, Dontimintly well-sorted, sub-ronded quartz urains. Slightly caleareous, occasional carbonacvous. laminae and cruss-lunvination. Few thin intercalations grey laminated siltstone. Irregular veinlets and wobbly coneretions of calcite on 7. = im : 15 2 Siltstonc, grey grading to black (carbonaceous) in top hall, soft, strgilla- ceous, slightly micaceous, minor crass-hedding, Laminge and keatieles off. white, friable quiirtz siltstone —_ : a ite f te 7 F > Sandstone as in Unit | r 2 § 4 ({Interbeds) Shale, Ueht- to dark-arev, silly, finely micuceous. fissile, cure bonaceons in part, ylayey; aud siltstone; light to dark-grey, argillaceoms, finely mricuceans, curbaneceaus flecks wid Jaminae. Intermittent laninae light-grey, very fine-grained. argillaceons sandstone van ; _. Ge @ 3 Sandstupe, pale vreenish-grey, weathers. light brown, fine-grumed!, sabe angular to subvounded quartz, very silty, very micacecous, bictitic, soft, friable, fissile, culeareans, few thin streaks carbuuaceous matter _ we 22 G Coal (strongly weathered in outerep}, black, soft and puggy below surfitce, dryiay to crumbly, sooty powder. Nomerous tiny (4 in.) Jenticles quartz silt, white, porons, very clean, unconsolidated, (See analysis Appendix A) Shale, dark gtey, very clayey, plastic when danp, silty, micaceous, becom- ing yery warhonaccons in top 4 ft. Numerous fine interlaminations in lower half of siltstone und very fine offswhite sandstone _ = ed ; 1d 0 4 Coal as in Unit 6. Silt-filled cracks on top surface indicate naval facing, (See analysis Appendix Alou a 4! “1 WW Gowlas in Unit 6. (See analysis Appendix A,) a ; ih & 1} Siltstone. grey and lirht-wrey, very argilluweots. micaceons, finely bedded with carbonaceous plant fragnients on bedding planes. Nianerous laminae and leases very fine quiurte sandstone and siltstone, Some carbemaccous smeirs rt , , ; 6G 6 12 Caurhonaccqusy vliew vraciay to coul as in CGnit 6 4 ; 4. 2 6 1 (Interbay) Clay-shale. grey and light-giey, plastic when damp, hunin- ated im part, and siltstone, light-prey, very argillaceaus, anicaeeens. larvin= ated. Couly band 3 in thick at 2 ft above base —- 4 re ta | I (interbodsd Sandstone, off-white Uo light-grey, soft, fine-grained, mien econs, argiluccons: and silistone, lighterey to grey, mieaceous. fissile in part, arpillacvous. grading to silty élay-shale in some layers. Abundant carbonaceous Hecks and fragments on bedding planes a - (you 15 Silistone, with lesser chuy-shale as in Unit 134. Minor interbeds wreyish- white, Janinated fine sandstone, weathering yellow-brown. Plaot imaero- ossil Larivons 3 FR above base af muiit .. 4 _ sabe me | ee 1G Carbonaceous clay grading to cowl (as m Umit 6) in top 4 fh Bin. (See analysis Appendix A.) 1 tb 6 IAN B. FREYTAG MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS—FIELD DESCRIPTION—continned. Thema Unit Ht. in. '7 Silt te very Gine sand as in Unit 9 At iniddle, 2 in, bed paper-fine lanyin- ated carbonaceous siltstone ; f., nf en : 4 Al 1% Coalas in Unit 6 (See analysis Appenclix A.) Sh nite = wo eu 19 Siltstone with clayeshale interbeds and aninor very fine sandstone in ipper 3 ft., lithologies as in Unit 15) - L mi Ree san P| a % G 20) Coal ay in Unit 6 A - . a . ' -. Ll 21) Shale, grev and light-grey, solt, fissile, very silty, micaveuus, and minor clay-shale. 3 in. coaly band L ft, abave base — f am ‘2: a Yi 22) Sandstone. light-grey, very fine. very argillaceous, micaccous weed 1 2 23) Cluy-shale gracing to finely larninate:) siltstone, Lithologies as in Unit 13., If 0 24 Sandstone, light-crey. very fine, silty, argillaceous, Garbonaceons Hocks 0 5 0 25 Siltstone as in Unit 11)... ‘f- oe fe mn ; vce Th ff 26° Sandstone, reddish-vrey, very fine-vrained, argillacecous, finely Jaminited . 3 0) 27 Siltstone as in Unit 1, grading to silly shale in part osha db 0 24 (Interbeds) Siltstone, light-grey to grey, urgillaceous. mivaceous, lamtinated, carbonaceous Mragments; and sandstone. weathered red-brown ta yellow- brown, fine-grained, silly, argillaccous, At middle, 3 Ft. clay-shale with white quarts siltstone lenses seals ey pn _ _# — Wo tl 29° Sandstanc, greyish-white, fine ty very fire. salt, friable, argiflacoons anatrix 30 30) Interlocking lenticles coaly material ancl white quarts silt, scattered gypsum crystals - _ ‘J - al he 1 4 St Sandstone as iu Umit 29 a ety fie Encironment The Mount Toondina Beds consist in the main of well-stratified variants. 64 a silt-elay deposit, with lesser interbeds of fine sandstone and coal, The sedi- ments are considered to be freshwater in origin with characteristics of a lake bottom-environment. Frequent fine bedding, Jaminutions, the presence of un- broken leaves and an abundance of carhonaceous Hecks aud mica on hedding planes iudicate quiel-water conditions. Furthermore, the bulk admixture of fine clustics and organic material would not survive a higher energy environmedit, Coals attest to several phases of swamp development. ] | |: Boundary Relationships: These are not established. The base of the vntit is not exposed and, it is anticipated, will be defined only by drilling. Thickness: Total thickness. of the tvpe-section computed trom surface mei- surement and dip values is 263 feet. A distinct similarity between units 7 ta 14 and 15 to 21 (see Fig. +) suggests a repetition of strata, for which, however, nu strictural evidence was scen. Flora aud Age: In a collection of fragmented Jeaf impressions from Unit 5. W. K. Harris (1962) identified the following: Glossopteris. indica Schimper Sphenophyllum sp. Cordaites australis. (MeCoy ) Gangamopleris cyclopternides Feist (tentative ) Schizoncura sp. (lentative ) (These forms, excepting Sphenephyllum, also occur in siliceous silt: stones 300 feet north-west of Toandina cairn.) MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS 6g Structural break Coal oo... bd nce felted giales = Carbonaceous shale, clay, Ee * | S hale on So in feet Thickness 0 Siltstone Sandstone......... Raat Plant Fossils Possible repetition of sequence , but no Structural evidence N Toonding * cairn 4 ——— 1000 Feet Section SECTION LOCATION IN PERMIAN OUTCROP AREA Lower beds obscured Del, F.B. 65-221 |. Freytaq S.A.Dept. of Mines Fig. 4. Mount Toondina Beds — colummar stratigraphic section. 7M) IAN B, FREYTAG Harris stated that whereas Glossopteris indica is indicative of a Permian age, “,., the presence of Cordaites australis, a typically Devonian to Carboniferous species, associated with G. indica would support a Lower Permian age for the Hora. " The Bordeaux laboratories of Compagnic Francais des Petroles have pro- duced a well-preserved microflora from specimens from two horizons at Mount Toondina, one of which approximates to Unit 4 of the type-section. Kieser (1965) poimts out that several previously regarded index forms for the Greta Coal Measures and the Upper Coal Measures of the Sydney Basin occur mixed at Mount Toondins. Thus correlations at present seem to he limited by long ranging species. Kieser, however, regards with some confidence the saseniblages of Mount Toondina as being closely allied to those of the Greta and Upper Coal Measures, and the Lake Phillipson section. Bulme (1957) ranged the assemblages in Lake Phillipson bore from ?Late Carboniferous through Sakmarian to Lower Artinskian. STRUCTURAL INVESTIGATLONS AT MOUNT TOONDINA Giavimetric Survey The aim of a gravimetric survey which followed the discovery of the Per- mian exposure was to delineate the form of the Permian body in the subsurface, and thus endeavour to explain the anomalous, isolated outcrop. The survey was conducted late in 1963 by J. McG. Hall, Exploration Geo- physicist, of the S.A. Mines Department. Stations at 500 feet spacing were - WSW ENE ~ 1BO > BOUGUER ANOMALY PROFILE A \90 Fravife units PIO 4 er ee 210 ao eo EXTENT OF PERMIAN QuTcaor ~—-NNW SSE-—= BOUGUER ANOMALY “COSNENA a PROFILE B 7 250 210 Gravity units 2204 Gravity survey and Bouguer avaliiation by J.MoG, Hall, Gea- physicist S.A, Dept of Mines 230-4 SCALE FEET oo) wod mo 3000 FEET — or Cel FS Sh225 1. Freylag S.A Depl of Mines Fig. 5. Bouguer gravity profiles through Mount Toondlina. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS 71 read on a 10,000. feet rectilinear grid with origin at Mount Toondina cairn, Bouguer profiles along the traverses through the origin are presented in Fig. 5. Mount Toondina clearly has an associated minor but diserete positive gravity anomaly of about 1:5 milligals magnitude, which coincides with the Permian outcrop. The anomaly can be attributed to a density contrast between the more compacted Permian sediments and the surrounding Cretaccous shale blanket. The significance of the srnall negative trough, intersected transversely and longitudinally by profiles A and B respectively (Fig. 5), is not yet known, The reversal could relate to material at depth with a density relatively lower than the Permian sediments, or it may originate in a complex of faulting. CONTOURS OF HORIZON B MT. TOONDINA AREA MT DUTTON *: if i i i ry “ = ( if 2 1475 ee Lome | ™ Woes af A ‘ ——— MT TQOND) Saati A wait Fig. 6. Contours of horizon B, Mt. Toondina area (after Moorcroft), Shallow: Drilling _ The results obtained from two shallow drill-holes each 305 feet deep, south of Mount Toondina, are of particular interest. Locations of these holes are shown in Fig. 2. $.A. Government Toondina No, 1 intersected Lower Cretaceous marine shales through its entire depth, Samples from 50 feet and 305 fect yielded good microfloral assemblages of similar character, which date the sediments as Aptian (Harris, 1964), The No, 2 hole was located 450 feet north of No, 1, at the edge of ont- cropping ferruginized Transition Beds equivalents. ‘These, in the form of fine- grained micaceous sandstones and argillaceons siltstones, were intersected to ubout 150 feet, followed to total depth by fine to coarse, occasionally pebbly, sandstones of the Algebuckina Sandstone, which produced artesian water. -i 13 IAN 5. PREYTAG Thus, assuming bedding dips to be low, there appears to be a relative vertical displacement exceeding 300 feet between these two holes (sec cross- section, Fig, 8). Further, an aggregate relative vertical displacement exceeding 600 feet is inferred between Toondina No. | and the Permian outcrop about 1.200 feet north of it, These results can be interpreted ay severe faunlting at and near the margiu of Permian outerap. Seismic Surveys The main source of regional subsurface information south-west’ of Oouna- datta is the surveys of the Mines Department Seismic Section conducted in 1961, 1963 and 1964. This work, under the direction of K. R. Seedsman, B. E. Milton and E. Maorerott, was responsible for the discovery of a substantial sedimentary sequence presnmed now to be largely Upper Palaeozoic which. in this paper, is identified with the Arckaringa Sub-Basin, It must be remembered that in the absence of deep drilling in the area. correlation of seismic events with stratigraphic horizons can be made only provisionally by extrapolating Stratigraphic relationships established around the basin, Mooreroft (1964) presented some results of seismic work im the vicinity ot Moant Toondina where rather more detailed procedures were carried out. Ot hasic imporkinee is the identification by refraction probe. of a high-speed layer (feund consistently in the Sub-Basin) with velocities in the 17,000 to 19,000 feet per second range. This layer can be interpreted with some certainty as the pre-Upper Palucozoic “basement” the bedrock of the Arckaringa Sub-Basin. Its age is considered to be Ordovician or older, and depths to this refractor afford an indication of the overlying Upper Palacozoiu-Mesozvic thickness. In particular, Moorcroft cites shot-point GD56 (see Pig. 6) less than two tiles north-west of Toondina cairn, as having depth to high-speed refractor of 4.200 feet. Nearby, ordered reflections with two-way limes of about 1-6 seconds (unpublished plan 63-274) originate apparently from depths greater than the refracting surface. and therefore imply a mildly deformed, stratified “hasement” in the surrounds of Mount Toondina. He alsa points out that the spread across the outcropping Mount Toondina Beds recorded a maximum veloeity of 16,000 feet/sec.. which is somewhat lower than the nsual “high- speed” velocity, The geological significance of this is not known. Several reflecting horizons were persistent in the Toondina area. Two uf them assumed to originate within the Upper Palaeozoic sequence, could be contoured with sufficient control to show some interesting structyral aspects rae Wh (Fig. 6). One is that deformation even at the deepest horizon (ie. 3,000 feet) neve Mount Toondina is only mild, and therefore the severe dislocations at Mount Toondina must he limited ta little more than the area of Permian outcrop. Secondly, a circular domal closure of 800 to 400 feet and two miles diameter gecurs some four miles SSW of Mount Toondina (see Fig. 6). The structure gpens and loses its circular shape m successively higher horizons and merges into wn elongate anticlinal fold nosing just south-east of Mount Toondina, One is therefore tempted on grounds of proximity and shape, to interpret the seismic dome as a structure at depth, similar to that of Mount Toondina. This view can he tested only by drilliny. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS 73 MOUNT TOONDINA AS A PROBABLE PIERCEMENT STRUCTURE The foregoing geological and geciphysical findings imply strongly that Mount Tuondina is a piercement structure. The very mild deformation of the enclos- ing Cretaceons sediments suggests further that it is of isostatic rather than tectonic origin. Some pertinent puints favouring a piercement are now reviewed: 1, Geological mapping has shown Mount Toondina ta be a small inlier of steeply-dipping, severely dislocated Permian sediments, surrounded immediately by sub-horizontal Cretaceous strata. Photo-lineations in polygonal outline suggest that the inlier is fault- bounded, and this has been verified to some degree by drilling. 3. Probable radial fractures are consistent with a “point intrusion”, 4, Gravimetric results show that Monnt Toondina has an associated small positive anomaly, This approximates to the area of Permian auterop, but gravimetrically it is isalated in an area of regular north-westerly gradien?, A small reversal within the anomaly may be duc tu core material wt differing composition. Vhe position of the reversal coincides with the structural apex indicated by surfuce mapping. 9. The absence of bonlders at the Transition Beds Jevel suguests that the Permian rocks were not elevated topographically in Early Cretaceous time. 8. Luck of breceiation in the faulted Permian sediments is noteworthy. It indicates in these rocks a degree of plasticity which can be attributed prohably to their high proportion of soft clays. 1a The question of primary motivation remains unanswered. The suhsurlace sequence in the region is unknown and strata with a potential for plastic de- formation, be they evaporite, shale or otherwise, cannot be identified, In age the rock would be Early Permian or older and in this respect. a sedimentary “basement” in the area may be significant. An original 5,000 fect of Upper *wWaeozoic-Mesozoic sediments at Mount Toondina could provide a loading sufficient to mobilize rock of Jower density deep jn the section. Certainly. Mount Toondina is located in the deeper portion of the Sub-Basin. The maximum velocity af 16,000 feel/sec. recorded from the refraction probe on Mount ‘Toondina could be attributed equally well to clastic sediment, tectonic breccia or rock-salt. It ts interesting to compare Mott Toondina with the “probable salt dome” described hy Veevers and Wells (1959) at Woolnongh Hills in the south Canning Basin (W.A.). These two structures have similar shape, size and geological setting. At Woolnough Hills, however, the centre of the dome is occupied by sheared gypsum and blocks of breeciated dolomite. thought to be exposed cap-rock, and Permian wverlain by Cretaceous sediments crop ont oy the flanks. Veripheral faulting was not observed. Mount Toondina could well he such a structure cither now at a shallower stage of erosion or else less-developed a8 a Piercement. Although the geological environment of Mount Toondina is completely unlike that of diapirs in the Flinders and Peake and Denison Ranges (Coats. 1964), sediments of Willouran age which Coats considers. contribute the breccia core complexes, crop ont in great thickness in the Peake-Denison-Mt, Dutten trend, only 30 miles to the east of Toondina TI IAN B. FREYTAG The ave of the Toondina piercemenut is known to be post-Lower Cretaceous and pre-Quaternary. There is little doubt that the piercement has led to the development of the mound-springs and their limestones which, from ficld rela- tiouships, are Plio-Pleistocene in aye, Piercement may well be assuciated with Middle or Late Tertiary tectonics which have had the must profound influence ou the present stricture of this region. The abutmeut of the Pleistocene gypsite land surface on the north-eastern slopes of Mount Toondina, at a level lower :than that of the same surface at the sutvey cairn could be due to continuing upward movement of the Permian body during Quaternary tine. This theory could also explain the undulating (2deformed) base of the limestone shown in Plate 2, and the advanced state ot erosion of the ancestral motnd-springs. In conclusion, it is the author's opinion that the data now on hand is best explained by piercement inherent beneath the deformed Permian rocks. An alternative structural explanation may be found in a complex of fault inter- sections but faults of this magnitude would surely haye been detected by continuous seismic survey immediately around Mount Toondina., Either theory would be tested clfectively only by drilling. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The Director of Mines, South Australia, has kindly erimted permission to subinit this Depattmental work for publication. The author is indebted tu colleagues at the Geological Survey ot South Australia who have contributed in various ways to this investigation. Special thanks are dne ‘to Mr. K, A. Rochow for his supervision of shallow drilling and the field logging of samples, and to Mr, G. R, Heath for co-operation with section measurement, Criticism of the manuscript has been made by Dr. EH, Wapfner, Dr. B. GC. Forbes and Mr. K. A. Rochow. The drafting of figures was ably done by Mr, FV. Barrett. The author is indebted also to the French Petroleum Company ( Aust.) Pey. Ltd. in kindly providing palynological information, REFERENCES Rare, B. EB. 1957. Upper Palaeozoic Microfloras in Sediments from tie Luke Phillipson Bore in South Australia. Aust, Journ. Set, 20 (2), Croc, RK. b, 1987. The Hydrology of Portion of the Great Artesian Basin near the Peake und Denison Rarizes. Geol. Surv. S, Anst. Rept. Investig. No. Lt), Coats, R. P., 1964. The Geoloey and Mineralization of the Blinntan Dame Diapir. Geol. Sorv. S, Aust, Rept. of Investig. No. 26, Cuaesswen, M. F., and Pauxis, L. W., 1958, The Geology of South Australia. Journ. Geol. Sow. Aust, 5, pt, 2, Hamas, W, K., 1962. Permian Plant Macrofussils, Yoondina I-mile Sheet, Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Palavo, Rept. No. 19/62 (unpublished). Hanes, W. K.. 1964, Palynolovical Examination of Toondina No. 1. Geol. Surv. §. Art. Palyuol, Rept. No. 4/64 Caunpublished }. Hears, G. RB. 1965, Permian Sediments of the Mt Dutton Inlier. Ceal, Surv. 5. Aust. Quart. Geol. Notes No. LJ, Riesen, G., 1965, A Complementary Palynologic Study of the Permian Problems of the K\P.C.(A.) Permit (South Australia). Compagnie Franesis des Petroles, Unpuh- lished Company Qeport. Lupnroox, N, H., 1961, Permian to Cretaceons Subsurface Stratigraphy between Lake Phillipsen and the Peake and Denison Runges, South Australia, ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 85. MOUNT TOONDINA BEDS 75 Lupsrook, N. H., 1966. Cretaceons Biostratiztaphy of dhe Great Artesian Basin in South Australia. Geol. Surv. $. Anst. Bull, 40 (in press), Moonororr, E., 1964. Geophysical Investigtian, Mount 'Teemeding Area. Geol. Surv. 8. Aust, Quart. Geol, Notes, Na, 12. Bevner, Minzarn L., 1955. The Geology of the Peake and Denison Region. Geol. Surv h. Aust. Rept, of Investig. Na, 6, srriec, R. C., 1961, On the Structural Evelution of the Great Artesiqn Basin, Aust. Petrol, Expl. Assoc, Papers presented at (he L96L Conference (Melbourne ). Veuvens, J. J., and Weors, A. T., 1959. Probable Salt Dome at Woadlnough fills, Canning Basin, Western Australia. Bur. Min. Resour. Aust, Rept. No. 38. Warrenousr, F. W., 1955. The Geology of the Queensland Portion of the Great Australian Artesian Basin, Appendix G. Co-ord, Gen. Pablic Works Parl. Paper A, 56-1955, Brisbane. Worenen, H., 1964, Permian-Jurassic Histury of the Western Great Artesian Basin. Trans. Ray, Soc. &. Aust. 88. APPENDIX A, Analyses of Permian Coals from Mt. Tooudina and Lake Phillipson Bore —_ SS | | Sample No. / Ash Fixed Volarile | Culorifie (A.M.D.L ! ~ Carbon Matler =; Moisture Sulphur | Value Ps, 4, A I os ‘ ay B.T.U,/Lb, st se r -- 1 A 503/62 Uy dee | 1a.97 20-06 sin ° ese | 805 Unit 6 (2) 48-58 I-10 30-87 | 12-00 2-57 3655 A 504/62 (Ll) 37-54 19-56 O45 | VB AS 244) 4175 Unit 8 {2) 38°17 1-89 2b 12-0) 2-18 4245 A naf62 i (1) 4653 | 14-01 32-80 | | 19-07 2-91 $045 \ | = = | q J Pp _ Unit: 10 (2) j41-37 | 14-02 82-41 12-00 2-91 4050 2 | _ a. Sn) ie A 806 /6Y (1) 46-03 | 14-19 | 20-80 | 10-8 | Bag 3430 iY ! + | = —s Unit 16 (2) 45-10 13-90 20-00 | 12:00 | 2-43 3860 —— * : = - | A 507/62 (I) 42-87 196 | BU-IT ) 11-00 eg 3705 Unit 18 | (2) 42-39 | 14-79. BU+82 12-00 1-40 3665 — as =! = i . — = Lake Phillipson | (3) [8-4£ | L164 61-00 | S-82 0 — — 310’ 117-312" 1 | i ! i | Lake Phillipson | (3) G-38 33-12 | So 48 21-02 | = —_ 377" LO"—393" 2° : a gp ig tg (1) denotes sample ‘as received” (2) denotes 12%, moisture basis (3) data from Brown | 1905) N.B.-—Mount 'Yoondina samples are from weathered outerop Analyses by Australian Mineral Development Liboratories 76 IAN B, FREYTAG EXPLANATION OF PLATES Pater I. Stereoscopic pair of aerial photographs of Mount Toondina, spaced for standard pocket stereoscope. PLATE Il Fig. 1. Mount Toondina capping of limestone and _gypsite overlying with strong uncor- formity steeply dipping Mount Toondina Beds. View to south-west. Fig, 2. North-eastern slope below Mount Toondina capping, showing undulating (? de- formed) base of Cainozoic deposits. Dark rocks are Permian coal seams. Piate Ul Permian plant fossils trom the Mount Toondina Beds. Preservation of all specimens is poor. (a) Equisitalian stem impression. (x 2.) (bh) Cordaites sp,, fragmented. (x *¥.) (ce) Gangamopteris sp. (x 2.) (d) Glossopteris indica, impression. (x +4.) (e) Glossopteris indica, impression showing more detailed venation. (x 32.) Determinations by W. K. Harris, Palynologist. Geological Survey of South Australia. PuatTEe | JAN B. Frevrac (S.A. Lands Dept. Survey) a) Toe OD PLATE 2 TAN B, FReyraAG sill ( Author's photo) (Author's photo ) PLATE 3 LAN B. Freyrac (Photography by Palaeontology Section) REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSC TYPES - PART 3 LIMOPSIDAE, GLYCYMERIDAE, ARCIDAE, CUCULLAEIDAE BY N. H. LUDBROOK Summary Twenty-nine species of Tertiary mollusca in the Tate Collection of the Geology Department, University of Adelaide, have been redescribed. All but five of the species have restricted time- ranges, there being a significant difference both at the generic and specific level between Upper Eocene species and those of mid and late Tertiary age. REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES — PART 3 LIMOPSIDAF, GLYCYMERIDAE, ARCIDAE, CUCULLAEIDAE by N. If. Lupproox® [Read 10 June 1963] SUMMARY. Twenty-nine species of Tertiary mollusca in the Tate Collection of the Geolagy Department, University of Adelaide, haye been recdescribed, All but five of the species have restricled time-ranges, there being a significant differ- ence both at the generic and specific level between Upper Eucene species and those of mid and Jate Tertiary age. INTRODUCTION, The paper is the third of the series in which the Tertiary mollusea in the Tate type collection in the Geology Department of the University of Adelaide are tedescribed, These include all of Tate’s primary types and mounted speci- mens to which he referred without necessarily figuring them. Where the holotypes are located elsewhere the following abbreviations have been used for their repositories: NM.Y. National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne. M.U.G.D. Melbourne University Geology Department. Tas. Mus. Tasmanian Museum, Hobart. In determining the stratigraphic range of the specics belonging to the four taxodont families only the specimens mountcd in the Tate Collection have been taken into consideration. Where it has been possible to confirm the type locality from material available in the collection of the Geological Survey of Sonth Australia, this has been done. The time ranges of the species are tabulated in Table 1. No stage name has been used for the Upper Eocene, since two names, “Johannian” and. “Aldin- gan” have been used in recent publications for the same microfaunal units of the Upper Eocene. The name “Yatalan” is included to designate the Pliocene fauna of the Dry Creek Sands underlying the Adelaide Plains (Ludbrook, 1963, p. 13), The composition of both the Eocene and Miocene faunas is essentially that of warmer waters. Arca, Cucullaearca and Cucullaew are represented only im lropical faunas of the present day, * Geological Survey of South Australia; published with the pennission of the Director of Mines. Trans, Roy, Soe, §, Aust. (L965), Vol. 89. §2 “, A. LUDBROOK TABLE 1, oy 2) G | BEES 5 es , Bey | 2 b0, Miocene Phoeene time 2) eS Peis & ; 2 o = i 7 = = & le. @' 3'°3 =. €: i) 5 a = = nore Ba 5 sok & S cf Sol = | 3S oe todd al = i ot aia = At Tw fee CE | ee Bp Z = | OS gio cai s i & = 2S] oe” | ee? & Es a at 23 = i ce = = 3 | = Et TF eI Ss 7 iO I = an ‘ ot = a me | fe fos} a ia; it LIMOPSIDAE 1 Limopsis beaumaricnsis | : : maf Limopsis cGhaprnani lf Limopsis maccoyi 8 i ~ Limopsis mormingtonuensix Limopsis nultiradiata a GLYCYMERIDAE Glycymeris (Glyvymeris) cainozoice. } _ Glycymeris (Glycymeris) hallt Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) granti = Glycymeris (Grancdaxinea) maccoyi ee Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) ornithopetra, Clyeymeris (Tucetona) canvexa, Glyeymeris (Tucetona) decurrens - Glycymeris (Tucetona) gunyvoungensis ae Glycymeris (Tucetona) lenticularis ; Glyeymeris (Turetona) subtrigonalis ARCTDAL Area capulopsis Arca pseudonavicularis Arcopsis dissimilis -- Barbatia (Barbatia) consutilis Barhatia (Barbatia) limatella, Barbatia (Barbatia) pumila —- Barbatia (Acar) celleporacea Barbatia (Acar) crustata Barbatia (Acar) simulans Hee Barbatia (Cucullacarca) equidens Barbatia (Plagiarca) cainozoica : a Anadara interelathrata CUCULLAEIDAK Oucullaea adelaidensis Cucullaea corioensis - of 7 TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 43 Family LIMOPSIDAE Genus Lrsropsis Sassi, 1527 Limopsis beaumariensis Chapman (pl. J, figs. 10, 14. 15, 16) 1875. Limapsis beleheri MeCoy, Prod, Pal. Viet, dee. 2, 26 (in part )- 1911. Linropsis heaumarivnsis Chapman, Proc, Roy. Soc, Viet., 23. (2), 423, ph. 84, fig. 6: pl 4&5. fig, 12. 1853. Limepsis beaumariensis; Ludhrook, ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 78, 23. pl. 5, fiz. 7. Description, Shell subtrigonal, about as high as long, subequilateral, thick, moderately convex; umbo ceutral, small, acute, incurved; dorsal margin short and slightly curved, both anterior and posterior margins gently curved, ventral margin curved; hinge line arched, with 7-9 posterior and 7-9 anterior teeth, ligamental area relatively short and narruw, ligament pit large and triangular; arnament of conspicuous slightly undulating primary riblets crossed and can- cellated by comeentric growth Jines, in the juvenile stage the radials and con- ecntrics are approximately equal, but in the later stages the concentrics are strongér than the radials; inner margin smooth, slightly concave; auterior adductor high and small, posterior adductor a little lower than the anterior, broadly ovate: pallial line entire, interior of shell inside the pallial line con- spicuously radially striate. Dimensions. Topotype T1023G length 21, height 22 min, Types. Vtolotype N.M.V. P12583; hypotypes A.U.G.D, T1023G, HL (topo- types). T1O30A, B. Material. The species is represented in the Tate Collection by two speci- mens G and HH from Cheltenham on tablet T1023, the other specimens on the tablet being L.. maccoyi, and 7 specimens from “Gippsland Lakes” on T1030. Both tablets are labelled “Limopsts belcheri Adams & Reeve”. Type Locality. Beaumaris, Victoria (Cheltenhamian ), Stratigraphic Range. Cheltenhamian (Upper Miocene )* and Pliveene, Limopsis chapmani Singleton (pl. t, figs. 1-9) 5S. Limupsis uurita MeCoy, Proil., Pal Vie. dee. 2, 24 (pars), pl 19. fies, 5. GL Bi-b, 7 non Arce durita Broechi, 1885, Limopsis aurita Tate, Pap Proc. Roy. Soc, Tus. for ISS4, 212% Cron Broechi). 1886, Limopsis iusalite ‘Vato. Trius. Rov. Sac. s. Aust. 8, 134, awn Trigonococlia tayelite Sowers, 1886, Limepsis aurtta Tate third. (pers) (aon Braewhi). 1884, Linepsis atcrita Joluuston, Geol Tas, pl, 52, fiz, 7. 1897. Linapasis insolite Harris, Cat. Tort. Moll. Brit. Mus. 844 (rit Sowerby J, 191). Lanopsis insolity Chapman, Prov. Roy, Suc, Viet. 23 (2), 425-420 pl 84, fig, 3: pl. 85, fig. IL. 1982. Limopais chepatent Singleton, Proc. Roy. Sov. Viet, 44 (2), 296, pl 2d. fies, 12 Id: pl, 25, fig. 16. Deseription. Shell thick, obliquely ovate, inequilateral, convex, particularly near the umbo: umbo situated a little: ta the anterior, small, acute, ineurved: dorsal margin curved, slightly shouldered, anterior and ventral margins rounded, pe aa =I * Present npiniun is that the Cheltentimian as of Plineene rather than Upper Miocene are 8d WN, H. LUBBROOK posterior margin only slightly arcuate and w little produced ventrally, slightly concave below the hinge line in topotypes; hinge line arched, high, with 8 anterior and 8 posterior teeth, the anterior teeth usually more or less erect, straight and narrow, the posterior teeth short, wide and hooked; ligumental area long and high, ligament pit large, prominent, broadly triangular, with concave sides, encroaching on the hinge teeth. Ommament of numerous concentric growth lamellae, imbricating towards the veutral margin; between the ridges are fine, weak, irregular radiating grooves; immer margin smooth, broadly Hattened; anterior adductor high, small, narrowly ovate, posterior adductor low, broad, somewhat quadrately ovate; pallial line entire, conspicuous, interior of shell inside the pallial line radially striate. Dimensions. Topotype T1022A length 18, height 20, inflation (both valves) lL mm.; T1032B length 28, height 30, inflation (both valves) 18 mm. Types. Holotype M.U.G.D. 1317, paratypes M.U.G.D, 1318-9. Iypotypes A.U.G.D. T10224, T1022E, TLO25B, T1025C, T1025, T1025H, TL032B, T1032C. Material. The species is represented in the ‘Tate Cullection by three tablets: T1022, with 13 mounted specimens A-M in a growth series, labelled “Limopsis insolita G. B. Sowerby. Eocene, Spring Creek”. These are topatypes of Single- ton's specics from Jan Juc Formation, Bird Rock Cliffs near Spring Creek, Torquay, Victoria; T1025, with 19 mounted specimens A-R, labelled “Limopsis insolifa Sow. Eocene Aldinga; Adelaide”. The large specimens A-D (25 x 30 mm.) in the top row appear to be from the Limopsis bed at the top of the Blanche Point Marls, Aldinga Bay; other smaller specimens have the matrix of the “glauconitic greensands of the Adelaide Bore”, ic. the Upper Eocene greensands at a depth of 150-218 feet in Engineering and Water Supply Depurt- ment Bore at Kent Town. Adelaide, T1032, with 10 specimens A-) in a growth series, labelled “Limopsis insolita Sowerby, Miocene? Aldimga Cliffs”. The locality. is presumably the Limopsiy bed at the top of the Blanche Point Marls, Aldinga Bay. Type Locality. Bird Rock Cliffs near Spring Creck, Torqtay, Victoria: jan Jue Formation, Oligocene. Stratigraphic Range. Upper Eycene to Oligocene. Limopsis maccoyi Chapman (pl. I, figs. 17-23) 1875, Limonsis belcheri McCoy, Prod. Pal. Viet., dee, 2, 25. pl, Li bes, 8, Caen Achunis and Reeve) (in part). 1886. Limopsix belchert Tate, Trans. Rey, Soc. S$. Aust., 8, 134 (von Adums und Booye) (in part). 1911, Limonsix maceoyi Chapman, Froe. Roy. Soc. Vict. 23 (2), 421, pl, 85, fig. 2: nil. 54. fiz. 8 1955. Limopsis maccoyi: Ludbrook. ‘Trans, Roy. Soe, 8. Aust. 78, 24, ph 1, fig, 10. Description. Shell subtrigonal, obliquely ovate, moderately convex. uimnbe slightly to the anterior, small, acute, incurved; dorsal margin slightly curved, anterior and posterior margins curved, the posterior margin produced. towards the ventral margin, ventral margin gently curved; hinge line arched, with as TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 85 many as 11 teeth on each side, teeth strong and high, slightly hooked; ligamental area small and broadly subtriangular, ligament pit Jarge and deep; ornament of nuinerous narrow radial riblets with secondary riblets intercalaling between them, crossed by less prominent concentric undulating ridges, Inner margin smooth, bevelled, and bounded on the inner side by a fine narrow ridge extend- ing as far as the hinge on both sides; anterior adductor high, clongate-oyate, posterior adductor low and broadly ovate; pallial line entire, interior of shell inside the pallial line conspicuously radially striate. Dimensions. T1023A length 20, height 19-5; T1U23K length 20:5, height 18:5; T1027A length 18, height 20 mm. Types. Lectotype (here designated) N.M,V. 212376, the specimen Agured by McCoy pl. 19, fig, 8; syntypes N.M.V. P12377 (McCoy pl. 19, fig. 9), P12579, P12580, P1258L (figured Chapman pi. 83, fig, 2). No holetype was designated by Chapman, nor did he consider it necessary to redescribe the species de- scribed and figured by McCoy as Limopsis belcheri (Adams and Reeye). The two specimens from Balcombe Bay P12376, P12377, figured by MeCoy, and the three P12579, P12580 (Grice’s Creek) and P12581 (Gellibrand River) figured by Chapman, form the type series from which P12376 is selected as lectotype unt! Balcombe Bay designated type locality. Tate Collection hypotypes are T1023A, T1023C, ‘10231, T1023K, T1O27A, T1027E. Material. The- species is represented in the Tate Collection on two tablets T1023 and T1027. T1023 has 28 mounted specimens A-F from Muddy Creek. I-] from Camperdown, K-L, T-W from Gellibrand River, M-O, X-Z, a-b from Spring Creck, O-R frorn Mornington, § fromm Fyansford. G and H from Chelten- ham are Limopsis beaumariensis; T1027 has 16 specimens A-P, all from “River Murray Cliffs”, ie. Cadell Marl Lens, Morgan, Type Locality. Balcombe Bay, Balcombe Clay, Baleombian, Stratigraphic Range. Jan Juc Formation to Dry Creek Sands; PUpper Olivo- cene to Upper Pliocene, Limopsis morningtonensis Vritchard (pl. 1, figs 11, 12, 13) 1875, Limopsiy aurita McCoy, Prod, Pal. Vict, dee, 2, 23 (qs) (nan Area aurita Brooch). 1886. Limopsiy aurita Tate, Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust. 8, 134 (pars) (non. Broevhi). WWOL Limopsts morningtonensis Pritchard, Proc, Roy, Soc. Viet. 14 (1), 24, ph. 2 figs. 6, Ga. OLLI, Pires marninutonensiy, Chapman, Prov, Foy. Soe. Viet., 23 (2), 420, pl. 83, hig, fy pl. 85, fig. 7. Description. Shell of moderate size, roundly quadrate, depressed, slightly oblique; umbo situated slightly to the anterior, small, promincnt, acute, and in- curved; anterior margin cvonvexly rounded, posterior maryin gently rounded with a tendency to angulation at the dorsal and ventral borders: slightly pro- duced posteriorly. Hinge ‘line straight or very slightly curved. half the length of the shell, ligamental area fairly long, ligament pit couspicuous; 5 to 9 anterior and 4 to 7 posterior teeth of unequal size, Ornament of strong flat concentric ridges of unequal strength, the ridges crossed by fine radial stelations: inner margin smooth, broadly fattened. 86 N. ff. LUDBROOK Dimensions, T1020A (topotype) Jeugth 15-5, height 15 mm.; T10271A (Muddy Creek) length 19-5, height 18-5 mm. Types. Uolotype M.U.G.D. 1778; topotypes A.U.G.D, T1020 A-D; hvpo- types T1O20A. TLO2Z1A, Material. There are two tablets in the Tate Collection: T1020 with + speci- mens (A-D) from "Eocene, Gellibrand River", the fifth specimen TLO20E is Limopsis chapmani from Table Cape; T1021 with 9 specimens (A-T) in a growth series from Muddy Creck. Type Locality. Gellibrand Marl, coast section below Curdies Steps, Bairns- dilian. Stratigraphic Range. Miovene, Batesfordian to Bairnsdalian. Limopsis multiradiata Tate (pl. 1, figs, 238-27) {88G, Limupsiy multiradiale Tate, Trans, Roy, Soe. 5. Aust., 8, 135, pL J2, figs. Lach. L897. Limopsig winltiradiatu; Harris, Cut. Tort. Moll, Brit, Mus:, 1, 346. 1911, Limopsis multiradiata: Chapman, Proc. Roy. Soe. Viet. 23 (2), 423, pl bd. fig, 4; pl. 85, fiz, LO. Description, Shell suborbicular, slightly inequilateral and oblique, thick, moderately convex; wmbones situated slightly to the anterior, prominent, m- curved: shell slightly shouldered; anterior, posterior and. ventral margins gently rounded, the posterior-ventral margin slightly produced; hinge line arched, fairly long, high, with 7 looked teeth on each side; ligamental area long and conspicuous, concave; ligament pit large, equilateral, moderately deep with concentric striations. Juvenile shell smooth but for concentric ribs and very faint radials, adult shell ornamented with numerous fine bifurcating radial riblets broken by creuulated concentric growth lamellae producing a conspicuously tessellated surface; inner margin smooth, flattened; anterior adductor high, small, ovate; posterior adductor low, broadly oyate, pallial line inconspicuous. Dimensions. A.U.G.D, T1O31A Tength 10-5, height 9-5 mm, Types. The type series T1031 consists of 17 specimens mounted in a growth series; TLO31A is the holotype; a right valve which in Tate’s figure pl. 12, fig. 1 has been reversed. Material, Tablet T1031 only. Type Locality. “Adelaide Bore”, ic. bore at Enginecring and Water Supply Department, Kent Town, at 150-218 feet depth. Stratigraphic Range, Upper Eocene (lower part), Observations. The species also occurs in the Upper Eocene Blanche Point Marls of Aldinga Bay and in glauconitic sands at 75-80 feet depth at Adelaide Children’s Hospital, North Adelaide, 1 mile from the type locality. The species occurs at a lower level than 1b. chapmani. TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 a7 Family GLYCYMERIDAE Genus Giycymerts 1a Costa, 1778 Subgenus Gryevancas s.8tr. Glycymeris (Glyeymeris) cainozoica (Ténison Woods) (pl. 1, figs. 28-4) (877, Cueuflace cainusoica Tonison Woods, Pap, Rov, Soc, Tas. for 1876, LLL, IS86, Pectunculus eainozoivns: Tate, Trans, Roy, Soe. $. Aust, 8, 186, pl. 10, figs, Sa, Sh: p. 137 (in part). 1385. Pectunculus vainosoivus: Jolinston, Geal. ‘Was, pl. 31, fies. 13, 13a. by 1897. Pectunculus eainozoicus; Marris, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mns., L, 340 (2 in part). Description, Shell large, roundly trigonal to orbicular, solid, slightly oblique, globose, subequilateral, a little longer than high; umbones central, prominent, inflated, finely radially ribbed, strongly incurved, slightly overhanging the liga- inental area; ligamental area of moderate size, arched, broad, with six sTUOVES on each side; hinge area long, gently arched, with ay many as 13 tecth on each side hut usually encroached upon by the ligamental area; anterior adductor suboyate, posterior adductor ovate with a ridge on the anterior side; inner margin finely denticulate, the denticulations sometinies smooth, but marked with fine closely spaced radial striae and fine concentrie growth striae. Dimensions. Topotype, T1095Q, length 33, height $1, inflation (one valve) 12 mm, Types. Holotype Tas. Mus, Z204A, paratvpe Z204B. ‘The type tablet in the Tate Collection coutains 19 specimens T1055 A-\W, TIO55C was figured by Tate and T1055B and C by Chapman and Singleton. T1055A-I], K-P are from Muddy Creek without any indication of whether from the lower (Muddy Creek Marl) or upper (Grange Burn Coquina) beds. TI055H, K-P are Glycymeris halli indistingnishable from topotypes collected by the writer from the Grange Burn Coquina, T1055] is from “Spring Creck”, T1055 Q-T from ‘able Cape, and T, U-W from “Adelaide” (ic. Kent Town Bore ), Material. The type tablet and tablet T1068 with specimens A-E from Cheltenham, Victoria, and F from Camperdown. Type Locality. Table Cape, Tasmania; Freestone Cove Sandstone of Table Cape Group, Longfordian. Stratigraphic Range. Upper Rocene to Upper Miocene, The oldest known ocourrence of the species is in the Upper Eocene of Kent Town Bore, Adelaide, its youngest occurrence is in the Cheltenhamian of Beaumaris and also of the Bookpurnong Beds at their type locality, Loxton. Glycymeris (Glycymeris) halli Pritchard (pl. L, figs. 35-36) 1886, eteticulng tuinazoicus, Tate, Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Anst. &, 137 Cin part), non Tenison Woods, 1897. Pectunculus cainozaicus, Harris, Cat, Tert. Moll Brit, \brws., 1, p. 340 (ia part), nen Tenison Woods, 88 N. H, LUDBROOK 1903. Glyeymeris halli Pritchard, Proc, Roy. Soe. Vict, 15 (2), 89, pl, 14, flys. 10-12; pl, 15, figs, I, 2, 8, ¥. 1925. Glycymeris halli; Chapman and Singleton, Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet, 37 (1), 40, pl, 3, fig. 23; pl. 4, fir. 15, Description. Shell of moderate size, orbicular, tumid, thick, solid, equi- lateral; about as long as high; umbones central, tumid, incurved, overhanging the ligamental area; ligamental arca small, short and very weakly grooved: hinge line long, gently curved, with about 12 teeth on each side; anterior adductor ovate, posterior adductor quadrately ovate; inner margin with numerous fine denticles. Surface ornamented with as many as 50 low slightly convex radial riblets with linear interspaces, each riblet finely radially striate; radial sculpture erossed by undulating growth folds. Dimensions, T1055I1 length 23, height 22, inflation (both valves) 17 mm. Types. Molotype M.U.G.D. 1783. On Tate's tablet T1055 labelled “Pectun- eulus cainozoicus T. Woods sp. Muddy Creek, (1) Table Cape, (2) Adelaide, (3) Spring Creek”, specimens 11, K-P are regarded as topotypes of Glycymeris halli from the upper beds at Muddy Creek (Grange Burn Coquina). Material, T105511, T1055K-P, which have been compared with topotypes in the G.S,S.A. Collection. Type Locality, Grange Burn, between Forsyth’s and Henty’s, Grange Burn Coquina, Stratigraphic Range, Kalimman (Lower Pliocene), Subgenus Granpaxinea Iredale, 1931 Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) granti Singleton (ph. 2. figs, 3, 6) 1932, Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) granti Sinvleton, Proc. Roy, Sac. Viet., 44 (2), 294, pl. 24, fizs. 10, IL. Description, Shell large but not heavy, about as high as long, suborbicular tending to become irregularly orbicular in the adult; umbo subeentral, incurved, small; ligamental area relatively long and narrow, with 10 striae on each side, hinge line nearly straight in the middle but strongly arched ut each end, with 5 or 6 anterior and 9 posterior teeth, scarcely eurved and rather low and broad; anterior adductor subtrigonal, posterior adductor subovate, the shell within the pallial line and between the adductor sears excavate; inner margin nearly flat, weakly denticulate with about 20 denticles which become obsolete on cither side, Surface ornamented with 33 to 37 radial costae crossed by concentric growth striae which are weaker on the ribs than in the interspaces, the costae tend to be angulate on the side and flattened in the middle appearing dichoto- mous when the shell is wet; ribbing on the anterior and posterior rather flattened dorsal areas discrepant with narrow ribs and wider interspaccs particularly on the dorsal side. Dimensions, T1071D length 53, height 53 mm. Types. Uolotype M.U,G.D, 1315, paratype M.U.G.D, 1316; hypotype Tate Collection T1071D. TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 BY Material. ‘Vate's tablet T1071 labelled “Pectunculus laticostatus Quoy and Gaimard, Eocene, (1) Bird Rock Bluff; Muddy Creek", contains 3 specimens 3, D and E from Muddy Creck, all of which may be identified as G (G) granti. Type Localily. Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Muddy Creck Marl, Balcombian to Bairnsdalian. Stratigraphic Range. Balcombian to Bairnsdalian, Miocene. Observations. The three species G. (C.) granti, G, (G.) macéoyi and G. (G.) ornithopetra are very difficult to separate. The fewer ribs (29 to 31), orbicular and more convex shape, and inconspicuons dorsal arcas distinguish maccayi; ornithopetra has 32 to 40 ribs which become narrow and more widely spaced on a posterior-dorsal area; sranti has a broader hinge line, flattened dorsal areas, and more angulate ribs. Most of these differences could be attributed to ecolo- gical conditions. The lineage described by Singleton (1932, 295) should be reversed, the stratigraphic order being from Janjukian (Upper Oligocene) to Baleombian (Lower Miocene): ornithopetra—maccoyi—granti. Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) maccoyi (Johnston) (pl. 3, fig. 1) 1880, Pectunculus MaeCoyii Jubnstow, Pap. Roy, Soe, Tas. for 1879, dl, 1865. Pectunculus MeCayi Johnston, Pap. Roy. Soe. Vas, Tox 1894, 199, 209, 1886, Pectnnculus MeCoyti; Tate, Trans; Roy. Sou. S. Anst., 8, 137, 18)7. Pectunculus luticostatus; Heoris, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, 34L (in part), 94, Glycimeris macenyi; Chapman and Gabriel, Proce, Noy, Soc. Vict., 26 (2), 303, pl. 24, fie, 4 (non 1-3, 5). S916, Glycimeris maccoyi;, Chapman, Rev, Geol. Suv, Vict, 3 64), pl 87, fig. 4 (num 1-3,.5), 1925, Clweymeris maceoyt; Chapman and Singleton, Pro, Roy, Soc. Viet., 87 (1), 27, pl. 1, lig. Ta, Th; pl. 4, fig. 5. Description. Shell large, orbicular, convex, about as high as long, equi- lateral; dorsal margin short, slightly curved; anterior, posterior and ventral margins evenly curved; umbo central, small; lizamental area relatively long with about 8 striae on each side, hinge line fairly long and broadly arched with 8 teeth on cach side; anterior adductor large, reniform; posterior adductor sub- trigonal and ridged om the inner margin: pallial line entire, inner margin of shell flattened with 20 broad denticulations between the external radial ribs. Surface ornamented with 29 to 31 radial convex ribs separated by narrow inter- spaces, Weaker and somewhat more widely separated on the anterior and pos- terior dorsal area, but without any discrepancy between the anterior and pusterior, Dimensions, T1066A length 42, height 42 mm. Types. Neotype N.M.V. 13326; hypotype (topotype) T1066A, Material, Of the two specimens mounted on Tate’s tablet T1066, labelled “Peetunculus McCoyii RB, M. Jobnston, Eocene, Table Cape Tasmania” only specimen A is considered to he Glycymeris maccoyi, as redefined by Chapman and Singleton. TLO66B is Clycymeris ornithopetra with discrepant ornament between the anterior and posterior dorsal areas, Type Locality. Table Cape, Tasmania, Table Cape Group, Freestone Cove Sandstone, Longfordian, Stratigraphic Range. Lower Longfordian (Lower Miocene). TN) N, OW, LUDBROOK Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) ornithopetra Chapman and Singleton (pl 2, figs. 1, 2, 4, 4; pl. 3, fig. L4) is7a. Peetunculus liticostatus McCoys Prod. Pal, Viel., dee, 2, 26-27, pl. 19, fiys, 10, 11, 14 (numbered 9 in error on plate (nea 12, 13))5 (en Quoy and Gaimard ), 1886, Pectunculus lutivostulus Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. 8, 187 Cin part) (aon Quos and Gaimard )- LbSS. Pectunculus MeCoyi Johoston, Geol, ‘Tas. pl, 31. figs. 1 Ta, Ib (non Te. Jd) Une Johnston, 18835), 1914. Glyvimeris maccoyi: Chapnian and Gabrict, Proc. Roy. Soe, Viet, 26 (2), 393, 801. pl. 24, figs. 2, 3 (non 1, 4. 5} 1925. Glyymeriy ernithapetra Chapman ancl Singleton, Proc. Roy, Soc, Vict, 87 (1). 32. pl. 2, figs, 91, 9h; pl 4, fig. 7. Description, Shell large, thick, convex, about as high as Jong, suborbicular but tending to become irregularly orbicular in the gerontic stage with the ventral margin tending to be produced on the umbonal-ventral axis and the posterior martin ta become angulate: umbe subcentral, incurved, small; ligamental area short and high, with as many as 14 striae on each side; hinge broadly arched, encroached upon by the ligunental area, leaving about § arched teeth on each side, Anterior adductor pyriform, posterior adductor roundly quadrate. pallial line entire, inner margin of shell bevelled, with 24-28 deuticulations correspond- ing to the intercostal spaces. Surface ornamented with from 32 to 40 radial vostue crossed by concentric growth striae becoming more conspicuous and lamellose towards the ventral border; the radials are discrepant on the posterior- dorsal triangular area in which they are narrower and tending to become obsolete. the mterspaces becoming correspondinyly wider. Dimensions, TLO70A Jength 73, height 70 mm, Types. Holotype N.M.V. 12465; hypotypes Tate Coll. TL066B, TLOTOA, TLOTIA, C, Material. The species is represented on three tablets in the Tate Collection: T1066 labelled “Pectunculus McCoyii R. M. Johnston Evcene, Table Cape, Tasmania”, on which specimen B is G. (G,) ornithopetra, T1070 labelled “Pectunculys laticostatus Quoy and Gaimard, Eocene, Spring Creek”, with 9 specimens A-I, all topotypes. TLO71 labelled “Pectunculus laticostatus Quoy and Gaimard. Eocene (1) Bird Rock Bluff; Muddy Creek”. Two specimens A and C are from Bird Rock. Type Locality. Bird Rock, Torquay, Victoria; Jan Juc Formation. Stratigraphic Range, Janjukian to Longfordian, Upper Oligocene and Lower Miocene. Subgenus Tucrtona Iredale, 1931 Glycymeris (Tucetona) conyexa (Tate) (pl. 3, figs. 15-20) 1886. Pectunculus concexus Tate, Trans. Ray. Soc. S. Aust., 8, 138, pl. 11, figs. Ta, b. 1897. Pectunevlus convexus; Harris, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, 342.. 1914. Glycimeris. maceoyl Chapman and Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict, 26 (2), 304, pl. 24, fis. 5 (nen 1-4), non Johnston, VATE MOLDLUSCAN. TYPES PART 3 YI 1916. Glycimeris maccoy? Chapman, Ree. Geol, Surv, Viet, 3 (4), ph 67. fi. S (now Iti, non Johnston. 1925. Glycymeris convexa; Chapman and Singleton, Proc. Roy, Soe, Viet. 37 (1), 38, pl, 2, figs, 1Gu, L6b, 17-20: pl, 4, fis, 12, 13. N47. Tucetone crane Cotton, Reo. &. Aust Mus. 8 (4), 660, pl. 20, figs. J, 2. 1953. Glycymeris (Turetonad) convexa; Laidbronk, Trans, Roy. Sue. $. Aust., 78, 26. Description. Shell large for the subgenus, thick, tumid, suborbicular, subequi- Jateral, ubout as long as high, umbones central, approximate, incurved: ligut- mental area small, with 5 striac on each side, hinge area wide, strongly arcuate, with about 10 teeth on each side: anterior adductor subovate, posterior adductor subquadrate with a slight ridye on the anterior side below which the shell is excavate; inner marvin bevelled, strongly dentienlate with 20 intercostal denti- culations, surface strongly ornamented with 22 to 24 rounded elevated costae equal to the concave interspaces, ribs and interspuces crossed by close set concentric growth striae: the ornament is weaker on the anterior and posterior dorsal areas. Dimensions. Holotype, TLOLTC, length 33, height 31, inflation (one valve } 1] mm, Types, Tute’s type series TLOITA-R mounted on a sinyle tablet cuntains the holatype T1O17C and 15 paratypes, all from “Muddy Creek” (upper beds). Material, In addition to the type series, there is a tablet T1010 A-F with six well-preserved and typical specimens from “Cooke's Plains, 90-mile desert”, The exact locality and formation from which these were obtaincd is at present nncertain. Type Locality. Grange Burn Coquina, Muddy Creek, near Hamilton. Victoria; Kalimnan. Stratigraphic Range, Kalimnan und Yatalan. In South Australia the species is present in the Pliocene generally: Norwest Bend Formation, Hallett Cove Sand- stone and Dry Creek Sands. Glycymeris (Tucetona) decurrens Chapman and Singleton (pl, 3, fizs. 9-10) 1925. Glycymeris deeurrens Chapman and Singleton, Proc. Roy. Soe. Viet. 87 (1), 42, pL 3, flys. 24a, 25h, 25a, 25h: pl. 4, fie. 16. Description. Shell small, rather thin, subtrigonal to suborbicular, moder- ately depressed, equilateral, about as long as high; umbones very small, central, acute, opisthogyrous; Higamental area very small, hinge area deeply arcuate, with about 13 strong teeth on each side; anterior sector uvate, posterior adductor roundly quadrate with a ridge on the anterior side; inner margin hevelled, with about 20 strong denticulations; surface ornamented with about 31 radial costae of even strength over the whole shell, somewhat fattened. veges by regular concentric lines, more conspicuous in the interspaces than on the ribs. Dimensions. T1065A, length 13-5, height 13-5 mm. Types, Holotype N.M.V. 13332, paratype N.M.V. 13333; the two Tate Collection hypotypes TLO65A, B. 92 N, H, LUDBROOK Material. Tablet T1065, labelled “Pectunculus McCuyii R. M. Johnston, Miocene, Gippsland”, has 2 left valves both juveniles. They are conspecific with topotypes from Muddy Creek and presumably came from Jernmy’s Point Formation from which Chapman and Singleton (p. 43) recorded the species. Type Locality. Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, near Hamilton, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina, Kalimnan. Stratigraphic Range. Kalirnan, Lower Pliocene. Glycymeris (Tucetona) gunyoungensis Chapman and Singleton (pl), 3, figs. 5-8) 187A. Pectunculus luticostatus McCoy, Prod. Pal, Vict., dec. 3, 26, 27, pl. 19, figs, 12, 13 (non. 9, 10, 10a, 11) (non Quoy and Gaimard). 1886, Pectunculus leticostufus Tate, Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 8, 137 (in part) (nen Quoy and Gaimard), 1886. Pectunculus McCoyit Tate, ibid. (in part) (non Johnston). 1888. Pectunculus McCoyi Johnston, Geol. Tas., pl. 31, figs, Lo, Jd (nen 1, la, lbh); tton Johnston, 1885, 1897. Peetunculus laticostatus Harviy, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus, I, S41 (in part) (non Onvoy and Gainard}, 1914. Glycimeris maceoyt Chapman and Gabriel, Proc. Roy. Soe. Viet, 26 (2), 303, 304, pl, 24, fiz. 1 (nan 2-5); non Johnston. 1916, Glycimerig maccoyi Chapman, Ree. Geol, Surv. Viet, 3 (4), pl. 67, fig. 1 (nan 2-5). non Jolinston. 1925, Glycymerix punyoungensis Chapman and Singleton, Prov, Roy, Soe. Vict., 37 (1), 23, pl. 1, figs. 5a, Sb, 6; pl. 4, fig. 4. Description, Shell of moderate size, suborbicular, depressed, a little longer than high; umbo central, small, inconspicuous, slightly opisthogyrous; ligamental area small, with 4 striae on each side; hinge Jine of moderate length, arcuate, with 10 to 11 short and slightly uncinate teeth in each series; anterior adductor elongate-rhomboidal, posterior adductor sub-trapezoidal with a thin ridge on the anterior side; inner margin only slightly flattened, with 21 intercostal denti- culations, interior of shell within the pallial line radially grooved, Surface ornamented with 33 radial costae, rounded, wider than interspaces, crossed by concentric growth lamellae which become more irregular and imbricating towards the ventral margin. Dimensions. T1067b, length 29, height 27 mm. Types. Holotype N.M.V. 13324, paratype N.M,V. 13325, hypotype T1O67B, C, J. Material, The species is represented in the Tate Collection by 20 examples mounted on tablet TLO67 labelled “Pectunculus MeCoyii Jolmston, Eocene, Muddy Creek, Schnapper Point, Corio Bay, Gellibrand River, Fyansford”, T1067A-D, G, H, J, K, N-P, R-T are from Muddy Creek, 1 from Schnapper Pomt, Q from Corio Bay, E-F from Gellibrand River, L-M from Fyansford. Tyne Locality. Grice’s Creek, Baimsdalian. Stratigraphic Range. Baleombian to Bairnsdalian. TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 Os Glycymeris (Tucetona) lenticularis (Tate) (pl. 3, figs. 11-13) 1886. Pectunculus lenticuluris Tate, Trans. Roy. Suc, S. Aust., 8, 138, pl. 11, fiz. 1, 1925. Glycymetis lenticularis; Chapman and Singleton, Proc. Ray, Soe. Viet, 37 (1), 31, pl. 1, figs. 8a, 8b; pl. 4, fig, 6. Description, Shell of moderate size, rather thin, orbicular, depressed, equilateral, a little Jonger than high; umbones small, approximate, incurved; ligamental area small, narrow, with 5 widely diverging striae on cach side; hinge line long and roundly arched. with 12 teeth on cach side; anterior adductor elongate-subovate, posterior adduotor subyuadrate, with a ridge on the anterior side; inner margin Hattened, with 32 conspicuous denticulations; surface orna- mented with usually from 30 to 50 fine radial costae crossed by frequent im- bricating growth strize. Dimensions. Holotype T1011 A-B, length 31, height 29, inflation (both valves) 12 mm, Types. Holetype TLO1LA-B, both valves of a single specimen mounted separately on tablet, Tate's figure appears to be that wf T1O11B, the left valve; both valves were figured by Chapman and Singleton (pl. 1, figs. $a, 8b); the tablot also contains 9 paratypes C-L in. a growth series. Chapman and Single- ton, who were under the impression that C. lenticularis was of Lower Miocene age, considered that TLOJIC and T1O1IG-K belonged to G, guityoungensis, but this is not se, although all of these specimens have feaver tibs than the finely ribbed holotype. Type Locality. “Adclaide” (Kent Town) Bore, ut 150-318 feet in green- sands equivalent to Blanche Point Marls. Stratigraphic Range. South Maslin Sands and equivalents of Blanche Point Marls. Upper Eocene. Observations, This species also oceurs in foundation bores at Adelaide Children's Hospital at depths between 65 and 76 feet. mostly below the level at which Limopsis chapmani occurs (62-66 feet). Glycymeris (Tucetona) subtrigonalis (Tate) (pl. 3, figs. 2-4) 1886. Pectunculus subtrigonalis Tate, Traus. Koy. Soc, $, Aust,, 8, 137. pl 11, firs, Ga-Bh. 1897. Peetuneulus subtrigonalis; Harris, Cat. ‘Cert. Mull. Brit. Mus. J. 340, 1925, Glycymeris subtrigonalixs Chapman and Singleton, Prac Roy. Suc. Viet, 87 (1), o4, pl. 3, figs. 10-12: pl. 4, fig. &. Description. Shell of moderate size, solid, roundly subtrigonal, suhequi- lateral, convex, 4 little longer than high: Jigamental area relatively small, with & deep striae on either side; hinge line fairly short, arcuate, with from 8 to 10 short, uncinate teeth in either series; anterior adductor subtrapezoidal, posterior adductor ovate, with a ridge on the anterior side: inncr margin bevelled, with 17 denticulutions; interior within the pallial line excavate and radially striate: surface omamented with from 26 to. 30 radial costae, rounded and separated by narrow interspaces crossed by concentric growth lamellae which become imbricating towards the ventral margin in adult shells, Ya N, H, LUEDBROOK Dimensions. Holotype T1069C, Jength 30, height 29. inflation (one valve) Y mm.; paratype TL069D, length 32, height 31-5, inflation 9 mm. Types. The type tablet TLO69 contains the holotype TIOG9C and 11 para- tvpes TLOG9A-B, D-M, Type Locality. Cadell Marl Lens, section C, Tlundred of Cadell. 4+ miles south of Morgan, Stratigraphic Runge. Lower Miocene. Batestordian, Family ARCIDAE Genus Arca Linné, 1758 Area capulopsis Pritchard (pl. 4, figs, 1-3) 1901. Arca capulapsts Pritcharl. Pree, oy. Soo, Viet, d4 (1). 28. pl. 2, figs, J, 2. Description. Shell elongatetrapeziloriy, subpyramidal, with a flat shallow medial suleus from the umbo to near the ventral margin: hinge margin straight, ventral margin curved and approximately parallel to the hinge margin, anterior margin gently rounded, posterior margin concave, ventral margin gently curved, insinuated; posterior slope with a well-defined angular carina which delimits the concave posteriot dorsal areca; umbones widely separated, situated at the anterior one-third, small, slightly opisthugyrous; igamental arca large and wide. with one or bwo radiating grooves: hinge long and narrow with about 12 small trvisverse tecth under the umbo and 12 posterior and 6 anterior larger some- what oblique teeth; adductor impressions not discernible; inner margin weakly eremiate, Surface ornamented with from 5 to 11 radial riblets ou the posterior area and numerous fine radial riblets on the rest of the shell crossed and fim- briated by frequent growth lamellae which ate weaker on the posterior area than on the rest of the shell, Dimensions. T1064A, length 9, height 4-5 mm. Types. Uolotype M.U.G.D, 1773. topotypes A.U.G.D. Tate Collection T1064 A-D. Maferial. Tablet TLO64 labelled with the Tate MS. name “Fossulared emimua” containing 4 specimens, A-C, from Fyanstord (topotvpes ol Priteharel’s species) and D from Muddy Creek. Type Locality. “Orphanage Mill, Geelong’, Fvanstord Clay, Bairnsdalian. Stratigraphic Range. Miocene ( Bairnsdalian), Pritchard (p. 23) observes that the species in the Pliocene (“Miocene”) of Grange Burn ts probably de- rived. TLO64D on Tate's tablet has the appearance vf a derived shell. Area pseudonavicularis Tate (pl. -3, figs, 30-31) IKSG. Aree pseudonanicnlaris Tate, Trans, Roy. Sac. 5. Avst., 8. 139. pl. Ll. fiz. 8. Description, Shell elongate-subtrapezilorm, tumid, geping ventrally; hinge wnargin straight, yentral margin slightly curved and excavate in the middle, TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PALT 3 oa ‘interior margin gently rounded, posterior margin nearly straight; umbones at ihe auterior one-third, widely separated, acute, inenrved: ligamental area large with radiating grooves typical of the genus; hinge long and narrow with numerous transverse teeth. wl roughly transversely grooved: anterior adductor subtri- angular, inner margin of valve smooth, pallial line distinct, area within palliat line finely striate. Surface ornamented with irregular radial riblets crossed on all but the posterior dorsal area by concentric fimbriating, folds, dn the posterior dorsal area the radial ornament is dominant, on the rest of the shell the em- centric ornament dominates, Dimensions. Holotype T1OS7A. length 27-5, height 12-5, inflation (one valye) 8 mm. eo Types. The holotype T1037A and two paratypes T1027B, C, mounted on a single tablet, Material, The type tablet only, Type Locality, Adelaide (ie, Kent Town) Bore at 150-218 feet, Upper Eocene. Stritizraphic Range. Upper Eocene of Blanche Point Marls equivalents, Tute recorded (p. 139) that R. M, Johnston had the species from Table Cape. but there are no specimens te confirm this in the Tate material. Genus Arcorsis yor) Koenen, 1885 (= Fossularea Cossmann, 1887) Areopsis dissimilis (Tate) (ph 5, fies. 26-30) 1886. Barbatia dissimiliy Tate, Vrans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust, 8 140, pl. 11, fies. 4, 5, [S97. Arca ( Fossidaven) digsimilis: Harris, Cat. Lert. Moll. Brit. Mns.. 1, 334, Description, Shell small, transversely oblong, tumid, convex anteriorly but with a flattened trinngalar posterior dorsal aren; hinge margin straight, oblique; ventral margin gently rounded, anterior margin gently rounded, pus- terior margin nearly straight or very gently curved meeting the hinge margin wtan angle of about 120°; umbones wear the anterior one-third, fairly wide apart. prominent, incurved, overhimging the ligamenta) area; ligamental area rather narrow with a triangular pit beneath the mbo: hinge area slightly: arcuate with about § anterior and 14 posterior doctly all slightly oblique: adductor impres- sions faint hut apparently triangularly ovate witli a narrow ridge on the inner side; pallial line entire, inier margin simple. Surface ornamented on the left viulve with radial riblety crossed by concentric striac: which interrupt the riblets in a tessellated pattern; the pattern is absent on the right valve except in the triangular dorsal areas, elsewhere the surface of the shell is pitted in a concentic aud radial pattern as if these were sears Jeft after the tessellated! riblets had rubbed off. Dimensions. 'T10591), length 7-5, height 5 mra. _ Lypes, The type tahlet T1059 has 18 mounted specimens A-T from Mocene of Aldinga and Adelaide Bore, there being 1 distinction between the two loeali- 96 N, H, LUDBROOK ties. The syntypes figured are the left valve T1059D and the right valve T1059L; both ure stated to have come from “Adelaide bore”. Material. The type tablet. The species also occurs in Adelaide Children’s Iospital Bore 5 at 63-76 feet (G.5.S.A, Collection ). Type Locality. Adelaide (ie, Kent T own) Bore at 150-218 feet, Upper FRocene. Stratigraphic Range, Upper Eocene of Blanche Point Marls and their equivalents in and near the city area, Adelaide. Observations. The stratigraphic range of Arcopsis is Upper Cretaceous to Recent, with greatest abundance in the Eocene (Reinhart, 1935, p. 32). Genus Barpatia Gray, 1642 Subgenus BARBATIA s, str, Barbatia (Barbatia) consutilis Tate (pl. 3, digs, 24-27) 1886. Barbatia consutilix Tate, ‘Trans, Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 9, 142, pl. 3, fig. 15. 1897. Arca (Barbatia) consutilis, Harris, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mas., 1, 332. Description. Shell moderately large, narrowly ovate-oblong, twice as long as high, with a medial-ventral depression; ventral margin more or less parallel to the hinge margin; anterior margin rounded, posterior margin ronnded, pro- duced: ventral margin geutly rounded, insinuate; posterior slope slightly flat- tened; umboney at the anterior one-quarter, prosogyrous; ligamental area narrow, faintly grooved; hinge margin straight, with numerous oblique teeth; adductor scars not clear, internal margin smooth, Surface ornament consists of manerous fine radial threads crossed by concentric growth folds and fine concentric threads with granules at their intersections with the radials, particularly in the immature shell. Dimensions.. Holotype T1053A, length 41, height 20, inflation (one valve) § mm. Types. The type tablet contains the holotype T1053A and 12 paratypes T1053B-N: most are from “Eocene. Muddy Creek”: T1053C is from Cheltenham, Victoria, and T1053K from “R, Murray Cliffs”. The figure of the holotype has been reversed on Tate's plate. Material. Tablet T1053 only. Type Locality, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marl, Balcombian to Bairnsdalian, Miocene. . Stratigraphic Runge. Lower Miocene (Batesfordian) to Lower Pliocene (Kalimuan). The species is recorded by Dennaut (1589, p. 50) from both upper and lower beds at Muddy Creck. Observations, Spécimen T1053C from Cheltenham may not belong to the species. It bears some resemblance to a specimen of Barhuatia simulans TLO54B from Norwest Bend, A range of specimens is, however, lacking to enable the two specimens to be determined with any confidence. TATE MOLLUSGAN TYPES PARRY 3 oT Barhatia (Barbatia) liratella Tate (pl. 3, firs, 21-23) 1886. Barbatia Hmatella Tite, ‘Vranas. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. 8, LLL pl 10. fig, 2: Pescription. Shell large, oblong-ovate, jumid, medially depressed in juvenile specimens, ventral margin more or less parallel to the hinge margin; anterior murgin. rounded, posteriar margin rounded and meeting the hinge margin at an Obtuse angle, ventral margin gently rounded, usually insinuated medially. posterior slope convex; umbones at the anterior one-fifth, prosogyrous; ligu- mental area very nurcew, with four civaricating furrows: hinge margin straigtet witht sumeronsy small iransverse teeth in the centre becoming oblique and larger towards the ends; anterior adduetur elongate-pyriform, posterior adductor rhomboidal; internal murgin showing faint fine denticulations in obliqne light. Surface ornamented with numerous fine dichotomously dividing radial threads crossed by fine concentric threads and imbricating growth falds. Dimensions. Holotype T1048B, length 50, height 28, inflation (ane valve} mm. Types. Tate's tablet TLO45 contains the holotype TIOI8B and 10 paratypes TH048A, CL; TH48A has been marked (in Howchin’s handwriting ) “hod”, but the measurements given by Tate and the figure, although at is u ¥erv poor orie, appear to correspond more closely to T1048B which is accepted as the holotype. Material. Tablet T1048 only. Type Locality. “Adelaide”. ie. Kent Lown, Bore at £30-218 feet depth, Stratigraphic Range, Upper Bovene of Blanche Point Marls and their equivalents itt subsurface sections at Adelaide. Barbatia (Barbatia) pumila Tate (pl. 3, figs. 15-16) 1886. Barhutio pronita Vate, Prana, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 5, 142, pl IU, fe. 7, IBUT, Area (Barbatia) yronita: Darris, Cat, Vert. Moll, Brig. \ius., 1, 334. Description, Shell small, ovate, convey, inequilateral, ventral margin diverg- ing slightly in a posterior direation from the hinge jnargin; hinge margin straight, anterior and posterior margins rounded, ventral margin gently rounded; umbones at the anterior one-third, prusogyrous; ligamental area narrowly friangular and slightly enerouching on the hinge at ahout the middle of the pustertor side: hinge with numerous transverse teeth: anterior adduetur small and high, subh- ovate: posterior adductor small, clongate-subtriangular; inner margin crennlated, particularly on the posterior, Surface ornamented with Hatly rounded radial viblots. broader than the interspaces, wider and more prominent an the posterior slope where they are bifurcated by a longitudinal suleus: riblets croxsecl anel erinulated by numerous concentrie threads and concentric wrowth folds, Dinensions, T1052D, length 8, height 3-7 mm. Types. "There is no clear indication on the tablet us to whielt is the figured specimen and TL052D is selected as lectotype. TLO53D has been marked (in Howchin’s writing) ‘fig'd’, bot this is a small specimen not agreeiug with Tute’s measurement or very well with the type figure. The type figure has presurm- ably been reversed, as with other figures of Tate's types. Tablet T1052 contains also 14 paratypes T1052A-C, E-N, of which all are from Muddy Creek but P wnd Q. which are from Gellibrand River. 8h NH. LUDBROOK Material. Tablet T1052 only. Type Locality. Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marl. ( Baleombian to Bairnsdalian). In his type description Tate states that the species is “not uncommon in the upper beds at Muddy Creek, Hamilton”. Tate's tablet T1052, Harris (1897, p. 334) and Dennant (1869, p. 50), Dennant aud Kitson (1903, p. 120) all clearly state that the species occurs only in the lower beds. Stratigraphic Range. Maddy Creck Marl and Gellibrand Marl; Miocene (Balcombian to Buirnsdalian }, Subgenus Acan Gray, 1857 Barhatia (Acar) celleporacea Tate (pl, 5. fies. 10-14) 1886. Barbatia celleporaces Tate, Trans, Roy. Sov. S. Aust, BL 141, ph LO, fig. 10. 1897. Arca (Barhatia) cellevordceas Harris, Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus., 1, 332, 1947. Acar comn Cottou, Ree. S. Aust. Mus, 8 (4), G57, pl, 20, figs. 25, 26. (955. Borbatig (Acar) come, Ludbroak, Trans. Roy, Soc. 5. Aust. 78, 23. Description. Shell of moderate size, elungate-oblong, rather compressed. with a shallow umbo-ventral depression, ventral taargin divergent from the hinge margin in a posterior direction; anterior margin gently curved; posterior margm nearly straight, oblique, forming an obtuse angle with the hinge margin: pvs- terior slope with a sharply defined carina delimiting a flat posterior area; ventral inargin slightly insinuate; umbones prosogyrous, situated at the anterior one- quarters hinge margin straight, hinge with a narrow cardinal arca and teeth transverse in the middle, becoming more oblique towards the ends, all grooved across the top: both the anterior and posterior adductor scars are drap-shaped and raised ahinie the level of the shell interior; internal margin crenulated between the external ribs, Surface ornamented with strongly fimbriate concen- tric lamellae crossed by radial riblets which on the adult shell develop into hollow elongated tubereles on the posterior carina, the ornament elsewhere heing tegulate. Dimensions. Holotype T1062A-B, length 26, height 10, inflation (bot! valyes) 7-5 mm. Types. The type tablet contains the holetype. a pair of valves. TLO62A, B. mounted separately, and 14 paratypes T1062C-P, Material. The type tablet only. Type Locality. “Schnapper Point, Mornington, Vietoria.” There is nothing on Tate's tablet to distinguish specimens from “Schnapper Point” From those fron Muddy Creek. As Tate specifically states (Ie. 6, 157) that the figured specimen is from Schnapper Point, Balcombe Bay must be accepted as the type locality. Stratigraphic Range, Lower Miocene te Upper Pliocene, from Lower Miv- verte of the Freestone Cove Sandstone of Table Cupe to the Upper Pliveene of the Dry Creek Sands. ‘he species occurs in both the Muddy Creek Marl (alge it to Bairnsdalian) anct Grange Burm Coquina (Kalimnan) at Muddy Creek, TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PAHT 3 WwW Barbatta (Acar) crustata Tate (pl. 5, digs, 19-25) 1886. Barbatia crustata Vate, rans, Roy, Soc. §. Aust, & 140, pl, 2, fie. 16, WHO7. Arca (Barbedia) erustuta; Harris, Cat. Vert, Moll. Brit. Mus:, 1, 333. Desenption. Shell smull, elongate-rhomboidal, tumid. with a conspicuous medial suléus wand corresponding shallow sinus in the ventral margin, anterior side relatively short and, narrow, posterioy margin concave, forming an obtuse angle with the hinge margin; posterior slope with a well-defined carina delimit- Ig i concave posterior areca; ventral margin insinuate, diverging from the hinge margin in a posterior direction; umhones at the anterior one-fifth, prosogyrous; steught, long: hinge with ahout 7 anterior and 14 posterior oblique teeth, the posterior series sometimes at a lower angle than the anterior series; adductur unpressions large, the anterior subpyritorin, the posterior clongate-subtriangular. inner qmargin plam. Surface strongly ornamented with concentric lamellie. abont I4 per mm, in the middle of the shell, crossed and grannlated by fine radial riblets, about 7 per mm. Dimensions, Holotype T1061B, length 7-3, height 4-3 mn, Types. Tablet T1061 contains 9 specimens A-f of which only T1061B was marked by Tate as from: Norwest Bend. As only Norwest Bend is referred to in the original description, it must be assumed that this is the type locality and T1061B the holotype. The type figure is so poor and probably reversed that it is difficult to relate it to any particular specimen on the tablet. T1061B has heen marked ‘fig’ and ‘holotype’ by later workers. Specimens TLO6LA and C-[ are paratypes from Muddy Creek. Tablet T1060 has 10 paratypes: A-O from Gellibrand River, E from Fyausford, and F-| from “River Murray”. Material. TIO61A-J, TLOGOA-J. Type Locality. In describing the species Tate referred only to “Oyster beds of the River Murray Cliffs at North-West Bend”, Jt is unlikely that the small shell came from the hard sandy limestone of the Norwest Bend Formation; both the preservation and stratigraphic affinities suggest that if it came from Nor- west Bend it was taken from the Morgan Limestone underlying the Norwest Bend Formation, Specimens have heen collected from the Cadell Marl Lens at the type section, of the Morgan Timestone from which Tate's specimens T1060F- ure presumed also to have come. The species is stated by Denuant (1889, p. 30) te oceur only in the older (Miocene) beds at Muddy Creek. Stratigraphic Range. Midjcene, Batesfordian to Bairnsdalian, Barbatia (Acar) simalans ‘l'ate (pl. 3, fizs. 28-295 1886. Barhatin sininlane Yate, Trans. Roy. Soe. S, Aust., 8, 142, plow), fie, 10; TROT. Area | Barbatia) simulans: Harris, Cat. Tert. Mol. Brit. Mus, 1. 333, Deseription. Shell of moderate sive. transversely trapezoidal, relatively! high, moderately inflated, very inequilateral, with a weak broad medial suleats particularly in juvenile specimens; anterior margin rounded and meeting the hinge margin at an obtuse angle; posterior margin concave, forming an angle of 130° with the hinge margin; posterior slope with « somewhat rounded bod ~ HE LUDBROOK carina delimiting the Concave posterior area; ventral margia weakly insinuate, slightly curved: umbones situated at the anterior ouc-quarter, prosugyTous, well separated; hinge area fairly narrow, hinge margis straight, with muamerous oblique slightly grooved teeth; anterior adductor ovate, posterior adductor not visible because Of mounting of specimens; inner margin finely crenulate, Sur- face ornamented with fne radial riblets weaker and finer in the medial area, those in the posterior being broader and longitudinally suleate, all crossed and wranulated by concentric growth ridges weaker than the radials. Dimensions, Wolotype T1O54A, length 34, height 18, inflation (one valve ) 7 mm. Types. Tablet T1054 contains the holotype TI05JA and three paratypes “"TLaadC, E, F Crom Muddy Creek, two paratypes T1054B, D from Norwest Bend. ambamne paratype TLO53 from “Well aear Blanchetown”. Material. Tablet T1054 only. Type Locality. Muddy Creek, Mamilton, Victoria; Wuddy Creek Marl. Bulcombian to Bairnsdalian, Strifiuraphie Range, Miocene ( Baleombian) tu Lower Pliovene ( Kalimnin ). Subgenus Cucurtanarca Conrad, 1865 Barbatia (Cucullacarca) equidens (Tate) (pl. 4. fies, 4-7) ISS6, Ace cquddeny Tate. ‘Trans. Boy, Sov. S$. Ansl, 8, 139, pl ET, fig, PSUT | Area equideny: Nuwris, Cat. Tert, Moll, Brit. Mus. 1, 331. Description. Shell small, elongate-subtrapeziform, with a auarked tmbo- ventral depression and a corresponding broad insinualion in the ventral margin, hinge margin straicht. oblique. anterior margin meting the hinge margin at yO” but sloping away in a gentle curve to meet the ventral margin, posterior margin insinnated in the concaye posterior-dorsal area theu roundly curving to the ventral margins umbones situated at the anterior one-third, wide apart- prominent, strongly incurved and. slightly overhanging the ligumental area: lieamental area Jung and wide with a long narrow ublique triangular pif pos- terior to the umbo obliquely striated with as many as ten Close-scot striae, the liginontal area otherwise is smooth or faintly striate; hinge area straight dorsally and gentle curved ventrally with seven or eight teeth on cach side usually more or less horizontal near the centre and becoming more oblique towards the interior andl posteriar barders, all the teeth are conspicnomsly grooved on both sides. Anterior addictor triangularly-ovate, posterior adductor sub- quadrute, both adductors weakly buttressed on the immer side; pallial line entire, inner margin of shell simple. Surface of shell strongly ornamented with con- coutrie iinbricating ridges and radial riblets which are interrupted by the growth ridges in the adult stages; there is a tendency to discrepancy between the two valves, the ornament on the left valve being fimbriate, that on the right valve cuncellate, hut becoming fimbriate near the ventral margin. Dimensions, Holotype TLOSSC, leneth 9-9, height 6, inflation (oue valve ) 4 atte, TATE, MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 1d Types. ‘Tate's tablet consists of the holotype T1058C and 17 paratypes T1058A-B, D-T, all from “Eocene, Adelaide Bore”. As in other cases the fieure of the holotype (ph. LL. fiz. 9) has heen reversed, _ Material. The type tablet. Both Tate and Harris recorded the species also from Aldinga. It vecurs in Bore 5 at Adelaide Children’s Hospital at 63-64 fect and 72-73 feet (G.S.$.A4. Collection). Type Locality, Adelaide (ie, Kent Town) Bore at 150-218 feet, Upper Eneene, Stratigraphic Range. Upper KFocence of Blanche Point Marls and their equivalents in bores in and ucar the city area, Adelaide. Subgenus Pracianca Conrad, 1875 Barbatia (Plagiarea) cainozoica (Tate) (pl. 5. fips. 1-9) 1586, Macrodon ceinuzotens ‘Vate, ‘Truns, Rov. Soo. $. Aust. & 145. ph 10, fiv, 4. 1807 Arce (Plagiarcu) cainuzoiea; Harris, Gat, ert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, 335. Description. Shell small, subrhomboidal, with a broad depression from the wnho to the ventral margin and 4 corresponding very slight shallow sinus in the ventral margin; anterior side short, acutely angulate, posterior side elongated, with a slight concave triangular dorsal area und triimeated by a well-defined posterior slope; hinge margin straight, ventral margin slightly curved with a median insinuution; umbo situated at the anterios one-quarter, prominent incwrved; ligamental area narrow with a few faint striae; tiie very slightly curved with abuut five short, oblique teeth on the anterior and thirteen slightly oblique or laminar teeth on the posterior side of the edentulous central area, all tecth finely niguse; anterior adductor ovate, posterior adductor subquadrate: inner margin smooth, bevelled. Surface ornamented with concentric Hut ridges carrying fine radial threads sometimes producing a fimbriate ornament towards the ventral margin: the ridges are separated by deep grooves narrower thin the ridges. Dimensions. Holotype T1056C, length 27-5, height 10, inflation (one valve) 5 mm. Types. The holotype T1056C and 26 paratypes T1056A-B, D-U, T1063A-H. Material. Tate's type series is mounted on two tablets. The first T1056 carries 10 specimens from Muddy Creek, 4 from Schnapper Point, J from “Corio Bay” and 4 trom “Adelaide”, Of these T1056B is marked “fig’d”, but it is obvious from the dimensions of the type figure that the specimen is T1O56C. As with others, the figure has been reversed. Taldet T1063 carrics 3 specimens, A-C, from Gellibrand River and 5, D-I, from “River Murray” (i.e. Cadell Marl Lens). Types Locality, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marl, Balcombian to Bairnsdalian. Strahsraphic Range, Upper Bocene of Blanche Point Marls equivalents beneath Adelaide; Miocene (Butesfordian to Bairnsdalian) in Victoria, 102 N. H. LUDBROOK Genus Awapana Cray, 1897 Anadara interclathrata Ludbrook (cx Tate) sp. nov. (pl. 4, figs. 6-10) 188%: Barbatie tuterelathrate Tate in Tate and Dennant, Trans. Roy. See, $. Aust, LT (1), 224 (nom, nud), Description, Shell smail, thick but fragile, broadly trapeziform, tumicl. with a shallow umbo-ventral depression; ventral margin parallel to the hiuge murein, anterior margin very gently rounded and meeting the hinge margin at about 90°, posterior margin curved and meeting the hinge margin at a little more than 90°, veritral margin insinuated, anterior and posterior slopes some- what flattened; umbones fairly widely separated, at the anterior one-third, prosogyrous; ligamental area long and fairly wide, triungular; hinge margin straight, with numerous teeth becoming slightly oblique towards the extremi- ties: adductor impressions obscured, inner margin coarsely denticulate. Surtice ornamented. with 22 to 24 strong radial costae somewhat narrower than the interspaces crossed by fine frequent conventric threads which are stronger on the interspaces than on the ribs, Dimensions. Holotype TIO5LA, length 12, height 8, inflation (one valve) 4 mm. Types, The holotype and T1051A and 5 paratypes T1051B-F. Material. The type tablet only, Type Locality. Spring Creek, Torquay, Victoria, believed from the matrix to be Jan Juc Formation, Stratigraphic Range, Janjukian, Pupper Oligocene. Observations, The species though named and recorded was not described by Tate, Its rarity as an ancestral species of the genus Anadara and its restrioted occurrence necessitates its description. Family CUCULLAEIDAE Genus Cucvrnaca Lamarck, L801 Cucullaea adelaidensis Tate (pl 4. figs. 11-13) S86. Cucullaca adelutdensis Tate, Trans. Rey, Soc, 5. Aust., 8, 144, pl. 11, fe. 14. 1932. Cuenlliea adelaidensis: Singleton, Prov. Roy. Sou. Viet., 44, (2), 804, pl. 26, figs. 21-24, Description. Shell of moderate size, rather thin, obliquely trapezoidal. inequilateral, tumid, longer than high; hinge margin straight, meeting the anterior and posterior margins at 120°, posterior margin straight, produced: anterior margin rounded, ventral margin gently rounded; umbones Jarge, pro- minent, strongly meurved and overlapping the Jigamental area, situated slightly to the anterior; ligamental area small, with as many as five divaricating furrows: meeting under the umbo at a low angle; hinge areca narrow, long, with trom three to five longitudinal laminar teeth on the posterior and anterior sides and TATE MOLLUSGAN TYPES PART 3 104 about ine small, transverse, central tecth increasing in size and obliquity out- wards, teeth rugose on the upper and lower surfaces; anterior adductor elongate- subtriaugular, posterior adductor pyriform, bounded by a thickened but wot plate-like ridge; pallial line entire, area within radially striate, inner margin indre or less coarsely denticulate. Surface ornamented with fine narrow radial riblets developing a median linear groove towards the ventral margin, crossed hy frequent undulating growth laminae; the ornament on the left valve is finer than that on the right and is always mure definite on the juvenile shell. F Dimensions. Holotype T1O47B, length 43, heivht 30, inflation (one valve) 15 mm. Types. The holotype TL047B and eight paratypes 'TLOATA, C-] mounted on at single tablet, most of these were taken from the tablet for photographing woul remounted by Singleton so that the interior of the shell could be examined and figured, T1047B is the specimen measured and ligured hy Tate, although Chidley’s. figure, like many others in the ‘Tale papers, has heen reversed. Material. The tvpe tablet T1047 only, Type Locality. Adelaide (ic, Kent Town) Bore at 150-218 feet; Upper Eacene. Stratigraphic Range. Upper Eovene equivalents of Blanche Point Mavs. Cucullaea corioensis MceQoy (pl. 4, figs. 15-24) 1876. Cueullaea corinensy; MvCoy, Prod. Pal. Viet., 3, 32, pl 27, ligs, 4,3 (Pron flys. 3. Say, 1886. Cucullaea corinensis; Tate, Trans, Roy. Soc, $, Aust, 8 144, 1888. Cuculluce ecorivensis; Johnston, Geol. Tas., pl, 29, fiys. 4, da. 1897. Cucellvea cortoensis; Uarris, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus, 1, 336, 132, Cucullaea corioensis; Singleton, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 44, (2). 300, pl. 36, figs, 19a, b, Deseription. Shell moderately large, heavy, obliquely trapezoidal, inequi- laferal, tumid, longer than high, Jeft valve overlapping the right valve ventrally, hinge margin straight, meeting the anterior and posterior margins at 110°, anterior margin rounded, posterior margin slighUy produced; umho large, pro- minuent, strongly incurved, with a shallow median radial depression, overhanging the Hgamental area; ligamentzl area broad, flattened, with as many as four deep furrows on cither side; hinge line moderately long, straight, with four longi- tudinal deeth in each series and a median series of 14 or more transverse to oblique teeth more or less encroached upon by the ligamental area, Anterior adductor subtriangular, posterior adductor subquadrate with an elevated plate extending from the pallial line to below the umbo on the posterior side, pallial line entire, arca within the pallial line radially striate, damer margin crenulate. Surface ornamented with fine Hut radiating riblets separated by linear grooves, in the adult shell the riblets have « rmeclian longitudinal gronves radial riblets crossed by fine concentric growth lines more or Jess undulating ayer the riblets. Dimensions. TLOAIA (topotype), Jength 41. height 33, inflation (left valve) 17 mm. Types: Leetatype N.MEV. 12236, paratvpe N.M.V. 12237; hypotypes Tate Collection T1046 A, B, Be PLOY A, Cy TLO5D A, B,C. Material. The Tate material consists of three tablets; T1046 with 8 mounted specimens in a growth sevies from “River Murray Cliffs"- Cadell Marl Lens, 4 104 NH, LUPBROOK miles downstream from Morgan; TLO49 with two mounted specimens A lrom “Eocene, Spring Creek” and B from Cheltenham; T1050 with 10 specimens in a growth series A-B, E-M, from Muddy Creek, no indication being given of whether they were from the Pliocene vr Miocenc, 2 specimens C, D trom Tuble Cape. Type Locality. Bird Rock Cliffs, near Spring Creek, Torquay; Janjukian. Stratigraphic Range. ? Upper Oligocene to Upper Pliocene. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author's most grateful thanks are due to Miss Lynette Linke of the Palaeontology Section of the Geological Survey of South Anstralia for phote- graphing the specimens, a task made difficult by the fact that they are mounted in raws on wooden tablets. Some stratigraphic details were clarited by Messrs, R. C, Glenie and P, E. Bock of the Geologica] Survey of Victoria. Information on the type series of Limopsis beaumariensis and J, maccayi was provided by Mir. T. A. Darragh of the National Museum of Victoria. REFERENCES CHaraian, F., 191). A Revision of the Spevies of Limepsis in the Tertiary Beds of Southera Australia, (Proc, Roy, Soe, Vict, 28, (2), pp, 419-432, pls. 83-85. Cnaraan, F,, 1916, Cainozoic Geology of the Mallee und other Victorian Bores. Reo, Geol. Surv. Vict., 8, (4), pp. 323-340, pls, 43-78, Crapman, B., and Gasmime, GC. J.. 1914. Description of New and Rare Fossils Obtained hy Deep Boring in the Mallee, Part 2. Mollusca, Proc. Roy, Soe, Viet, 26, (2), pp. GOL- 330, pls. 24-24. CHarman, l,, and Sincerron,, F. E., 1925, A Revision of the Cainozvie Species of Glycymeris in Southern Ausiralia. Proc, Roy. Sne, Viet. 87, (1), pp. 18-60, pls, 1-4. Corron, B. G., 1947. Some Tertiary Fossil Mulluses trom the Adelaidean Stage (PHacenc ) of South Anstralin. Bec. S$. Aust. Mus. 8 (1), pp. 653-670, Haus, G. F., 1897. Catulogue of Tertiary Mallusea in the Department of Geology, British Misesmy (Natural History). Part 1. The Australian Tertiary Mollusea. London British Museum (Natural History), pp. 1-407, pls. 1-8. Jonnston, BR. M. 1480.. Third Contribution to the Natural History of the Tertiary Marine Beds of Table Cape, with a Description of 30 new Species of Mollusca. Proc. Ray. Soc. ‘Tas, for 1579, pp. 29-41. Jonnsron, Ro M., 1888. Systematic Account of the Geology of Tasmania. i-xxn, pp. 1-108, 80 pls. Hobart. Lupunook, N. H., 1953. The Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata underlying the Adelaide Plains. Part 2—Peleeypoda. Trans, Koy, Sov. S, Aust., 78. pp. 18-57. Lupanoox, N. H., 1963, Correlation of the ‘Tertiary Rocks of South Australia, ‘Trans. Roy. Sac. $. Aust., 87, pp. 5-15, figs. 1-4, MeCoy, F., 1874-1882. Prodromus of the Palaeontology of Victoria, Decades 1-7. Geol. Sury, Vict. Spec. Pub, Nicoi, D., 1945. Genera and Subgenera of the Pelecypod family Glycymeridac, J. Pal., 19, (@), pp. GIG-621, 12 text figs. Nicox, D., 1954. Nomenclatural Review of Genera jod Subgenera of Cucullacidae. J, Pal, 28, (1), pp. 96-101. Prorcrarn, G, B., 1896. A Revision of the Fossil Fauna of the Table Cape Beds, Tasianin, with Descriptions of New Species. Proc, Roy, Soc, Viet, & (n.s.), pp. 74-150, pls, 24. Prrreuanp, G. B., 1901, Gontributions ta the Palaeontology of the Older Tertiary of Victoria, Lamuellibranchs, Part 2. Proc. Roy. See. Viet, 14, (1), pp. 22-37, pls. 2-3, Prcuann, G. B., 1903, Ibid, Part 3. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., 15, (2), pp. 88-103, pls. 12-15. Rermmanr, P. W., 1938. Classification of the Peleeypod Family Arcidae. Bull. mus, roy, Hist. nat, Belg. 11, (13), 1-68. TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES PART 3 105 SINGLETON, F, A., 1932. Studies in Australian Tertiary Mollusca. Part 1. Proc. Roy Soc, Vict., 44, (2), pp. 289-308, pls. 24-26, Tater, R., 1885. Notes of a Critical Examination of the Molhisea of the Older Tertiary of Tasmania Alleged to have Living Representatives. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas, for 1884, pp. 207-214, Tate, R., 1886. The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia. Part 1. Trans. Rov. Soc, S, Aust., 8, pp. 96-158, pls. 2-12. Tare, R., and Dennant, J., 1893. Correlation of the Marine Tertiarics of Australia. Part 1. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 17, (1), pp. 203-236. Woons, J. E. Tenison, 1877. Notes on the Fossils Referred to in the Foregoing Paper. Proc, Roy. Soc. Tas. for 1876, pp. 91-116. 106 1-9 N. H. LUDBROOK EXPLANATION OF PLATES Puiate I Limopsis chapmani Singleton Ny, Complete specimen T1032B view of right valve; Aldinga, Blanche Point Marls, “Limopsis Bed” Upper Eocene to Lower Oligocene. 5. T1032B dorsal view. 2. Complete specimen T1032C, view of left valve; Aldinga, as T1032B. 3. Left valve T1025C, interior view; Aldinga, as T1032B. 4, Left valve T1025A, exterior view; Aldinga, as T1032B. 6. Complete specimen T1025E, view of left valve; “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. 7. Right valve T1025H, interior view; Kent Town Bore, as T1025E, 8. Complete specimen, ‘topotype T1022A, view of left valve, “Spring Creek”, Bird Rock, Jan Juc Formation, Upper Oligocene. 9. Left valve T1022E topotype, interior view. 10, 14, 15,16 Limopsis beaumariensis Chapman 10. 11-13 17-22 23-27 Right valve T1023G, topotype, “Cheltenham” (Beaumaris), Black Rock Sand- stone, Cheltenhamian, Upper Miocene. 16. Left valve T1023H, topotype. 14, Left valve T1030B, “Gippsland Lakes”, Jemmy’s Point Formation, Kalimnan, Lower Pliocene. 15. Complete specimen T1030A, mounted with valves separated, “Gippsland Lakes”, as T1030B. Limopsis morningtonensis Pritchard 1l. Topotype T1020A; Gellibrand Marl, Gellibrand River, Bairnsdalian. 12. T1020E. Freestone Cove Sandstone, Table Cape, Longfordian. 13. T1021A. Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek, Balcombian to Bairnsdalian. Limopsis maccoyi Chapman 17. Right valve, T1023A, somewhat rounded, Muddy Creek, Muddy Creek Marl. 18. Left valve, T1023C, interior view; Muddy Creek Marl. 19. ead valve, T1023D, an oblique and rather depressed specimen; Muddy Creek Marl. 20. Right valve, T1023K, Gellibrand Marl, Gellibrand River. 21. Right valve, T1027A; “River Murray Cliffs”, Cadell Marl Lens, 4 miles down- stream from Morgan, Batesfordian. 22. Left valve, T1027E; Cadell Marl Lens. Limopsis multiradiata Tate 23. Holotype, T1031A, “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. X 2-5. 26. Holotype X 1. 24, Paratype, T1031L; Kent Town Bore. X 2-5. 27. T1031L. X1. 25, Paratype, T1031K; Kent Town Bore. X 2-5. Glycymeris (Glycymeris) cainozoica (Tenison Woods) 28. am valye, T1055Q, topotype; Freestone Cove Sandstone, Table Cape, Long- fordian. 29. Right valve, T1055E; Muddy Creek Marl. 30. Right valve, T1055C; Muddy Creek Marl. Sil eae valve, T1068B; “Cheltenham” (Beaumaris), Black Rock Sandstone, Chelten- hamian. 32. Right valve, T1068C, Cheltenhamian. 33. Left valve, T1068F; “Camperdown” (Lake Bullen Meri), Gellibrand Marl, Bairnsdalian. 84. Left valve, T1055U; “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. Glycymeris (Glycymeris) halli Pritchard. 35. T1055L, immature specimen; Grange Burn Coquina, Muddy Creek, Kalimnan. 36. T1055K, complete specimen (immature); ?Grange Burn Coquina, Muddy Creek. (All figures natural size except 23, 24, 25) PLate 1 N. H, Lupsroox 108 N. H. LUDBROOK PLATE 2 1,2,4,5 Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) ornithopetra Chapman and Singleton. 1. Topotype T1070A; produced ventrally; Bird Rock, Jan Juc Formation, Janjukian. to Topotype T1071C, complete specimen. 4. Topotype T1071A, round form, exterior view. 5. Topotype T1071A, interior view. 3, 6 Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) granti Singleton. 3. Topotype T1071D, exterior view. 6. Topotype T1071D, interior view. Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek, Balcom- bian to Bairnsdalian. (All figures natural size) H. LupsrooKk N. Puarr 2 110 a 8 5-8 9-10 11-13 14 15-20 21-23 24-97 30-31 N. H, LUDBROOK PLATE 3 Glycymeris (Grandaxinea) maccoyi (Johnston). 1. Topotype TLO6GA, Freestone Cove Sandstone, Table Cape, Longfordian. Glycymeris (Tucetona) subtrigonalis (Tate). 2, Holotype 'T1069C; Cadell Marl Lens, 4 miles south of Morgan, Batesfordian, 3. Paratype T1069E; Cadell Marl Lens. 4. Paratype T1069A, round form; Cadell Marl Lens. Glycymeris (Tueetona) gunyoungensis Chapman and Singleton, 5, Topotype T1067I; “Schnapper Point”; Balcombe Clay, Balcombe Bay, Bal- combian, 6. TLO67C, Muddy Creek Marl, Baleombian to Bairnsdalian, 7. T1067B, Muddy Creek Marl. 8. T1067J, Fyansford Clay, Fyansford, Bairnsdalian. Glycymeris (Tucetona) decurrens Chapman and Singleton. 9. TLO65A, “Gippsland”, ?Jemmy’s Point Formation, Kalinnan. 10. T1065B from same locality. Glycymeris (Tucetona) lenticularis (Tate). 11. Holotype T1011A, “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. 12. Paratype T1O11B, Kent Town Bore. 13. Paratype T1011D, Kent Town Bore. Glycymeris. (Grandaxinea) ornithopetra Chapman and Singleton. 14. T1066B, Freestone Cove Sandstone, Table Cape, Longfordian. Glycymeris (Tucetona) convexa (Tate). 15. Holotype T1O17C; Grange Burn Coquina, Muddy Creek. Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene ), 16, Paratype T1017A. 17. Paratype TLOL7N (immature), 18. Paratype T1O17D. 19. Paratype T1LO17K (immature). 20, Paratype T1017G (juvenile). Barbatia (Barbatia) limatella Tate. 21. Holotype T1048B; left valve, “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene, 22. Paratype T1048A, right valve; Kent Town Bore. 23, Paratype T1048D, left valve; Kent Town Bore. Barbatia (Barbatia) consutilis Tate. 24. Holotype T1053A; Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek. 25. Paratype T1053D, left valve; Muddy Creek Marl. 26. Paratype T1053B, right valve; Muddy Creek Marl. 27. Paratype T1053N, right valve; Muddy Creek Marl. Barbatia (Acar) simulans Tate, 28. Holotype T1054A, right valve; Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek, 29, Paratype T1054D, left valve; “Norwest Bend”, Arca pseudonavicularis Tate, 30. Holotype T1057A, right valve; “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. 31, Paratype T1057B, left valve; Kent Town Bore. (All figures natural size) PLATE 3 N. H. Lupproox 5-10 11-15 16-24 N. H. LUDBROOK PLATE 4 Arca capulopsis Pritchard. 1. Topotype T1064A, right valve; Fyansford Clay, Fyansford, Bairnsdalian. X 3-3. 2. Topotype T1064C; Fyansford Clay. X 3-3. 3, T1064D; Muddy Creek, ?Grange Burn Coquina. X 3. Barbatia (Cucullaearca) equidens Tate. 4. Holotype T1058C, left valve; “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. X 4. 5. Paratype T1058K; Kent Town Bore. X 4. 6. Paratype T1058P; Kent Town Bore. X 4. 7. Paratype T1058Q; Kent Town Bore. X 4. Anadara interclathrata Ludbrook,. 8. Holotype T1051A, left valve; Jan Juc Formation, Bird Rock, Janjukian (Upper Oligocene), X 3. 9, Paratype TLOS51D; Jan Juc Formation, X 3. 10. Paratype T1LO51F; Jan Juc Formation. X 3. Cucullaea adelaidensis Tate. 11. Paratype T1047A, left valve; “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. X 1, 12. Holotype T1047B, right valve; Kent Town Bore, X 1. 13. Paratype T1L047E, X 1; 14. Paratype T1047F, X 1; 15. Paratype T1047D, X 1, Cucullaea corioensis McCoy. 16. T1049A, left valve, topotype, Jan Juc Formation, Bird Rock, Janjukian. X 1. 17. T1046A; Cadell Marl Lens, 4 miles south of Morgan, Batesfordian. X 1. 18. T1049C; Beaumaris, Cheltenhamian. X 1. 19. T1050C; Freestone Cove Sandstone, Table Cape, Longfordian, X 1. 20. T1046E; Cadell Marl Lens; 21. T1046B, Cadell Marl Lens, X 1; 22. T1046C, Cadell Marl Lens, X 1. 23. T1050B; Muddy Creek Marl, Baleombian to Bairnsdalian, X 1. 24. T1O50A; Muddy Creek Marl. X 1. PLate 4 N. H. Lupsprook 114 N. H. LUDBROOK PLATE 5 1-9 Barbatia (Plagiarca) ecainozoica (Tate), 1, NP ne g bo Holotype T1056C, right yalve; Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek, Baleombian +o Bairnsdalian, X 2. Paratype T1056E, complete specimen; Muddy Creek Marl. X2°5. Paratype T1056D: Muddy Creek Marl, X 2. Paratype T1063B; Gellibrand Marl, Gellibrand River. Bairnsdalian. X 2-5, Paratype T1063F; Cadell Marl Lens, 4 miles south of Morgan, Batesfordian, X 3. Paratype T1063E; Cadell Marl Lens. X 3. Paratype T1056M; “Corio Bay”, Fyansford Clay, Bairnsdalian. X 3. Paratype T1O561; “Adelaide” (Kent Town) Bore, Upper Eocene. X 3. Paratype T1056S; Kent Town Bore. X 3. 10-14 Barbatia (Acar) celleporacea Tate. Holotype T1L062A, left yalve; “Schnapper Point”, Balcombe Clay, Balcombe Bay, Baleombian, X 1, Holotype 'T1062B, right valve. X 1. 2. Paratype T1062N; Balcombe Bay. X 1, . Paratype T10620; Balcombe Bay. X 1. » Paratype T1062D; complete specimen, Balcombe Bay. X 1. 15-16 Barbatia (Barbatia) pumila Tate. 15, 16, 17. 18, Lectotype T1052D, right valve; Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek. X 3, Paratype T1052F; Muddy Creek Marl. X 3. Paratype T1052J; Muddy Creek Marl. X 3. Paratype T1052K: Muddy Creek Marl. X 3. 19-25 Barbatia (Acar) crustata Tate. 19. 20, 21, 22, 23, 24. 25. Holotype T1L061B, left valve; Muddy Creek Marl, Muddy Creek. X 3. Paratype TLO6OH: Cadell Marl Lens, 4 miles south of Morgan, Batesfordian, X 3. Paratype T1061F; Muddy Creek Marl. X 3. Paratype TLOGOA; Gellibrand Marl, Gellibrand River, Bairnsdalian. X 3. Paratype T1060J; Cadell Marl Lens. X 3. Paratype T1061E; Muddy Creek Marl. At the anterior end is an attached foraminifer Carpenteria proteiformis Goés. X 3. Paratype TLOGOB; Gellibrand Marl, Gellibrand River. X 3. 26-30 Arcopsis dissimilis (Tate ), 26, 27. 29. 30. 31, Paratype T1059B, lett valve; Blanche Point Marls, either at Aldinga or their equivalents in Kent Town Bore. X 4. Syntype T1059D, left valve; 28, Syntype T1059L, right valve, Kent Town Bore. Upper Eocene. X 3. Paratype T1LO59N, X 3-3, Paratype ‘TLO59R, X 3-3. Paratype TLO59S. X 3°38. PLATE 5 N. H. Lupprook PATTERNS IN SOIL GEOGRAPHY IN AND NEAR ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY C. B. WELLS Summary The pattern of distribution of the soils near Adelaide, and the kinds of soils, are shown to be generally quite orderly and consistent with the solid geology. Two aberrant cases not conforming with solid geology are the black clay soils and the coastal calcimorphic soils. The clay soils are shown to be related to a Tertiary plain as elucidated in the Barossa district, and the calcimorphic soils require the postulate of calcium carbonate accession from an unspecified external source. PATTERNS JIN SOIL GEOGRAPHY IN AND NEAR ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA by C. B. Weuts [Read 10 June 1965] SUMMARY The pattern af distribution of the soils near Adelaide, and the kinds of soils, tre shown to be generally quile orderly and consistent with the solid genlogy. Two aberrant cases not conforming with sulid geology are the bluck clay spits and the coastal caleimorphie soils. The clay soils ure shown to he related to a Tertiary plain ay elucidated in the Barossa clistrict, and the caleimorphic soils require the postulate af caleiont carbonate accession froin an unspecified external sOUTCE, INTRODUCTION In putting together at one scale with an unified interpretation the soil maps made aver the years® for Adelaide jnd its environs (Wells, 1961) it beeame evident that the soil pattern could be schematically expressed quite simply, as in Map 1, and thence interpreted to reyeal some major factors in local pedogenesis, CENERALIZED PATTERN OF SOILS The pattern may conveniently be described by dividing the map inta three parts, the central area around the city and inner suburbs of Adelaide, a northern and a southern portion, To generalize lor the Adelaide area, an arc ut red brown earths is. sir- rounded on the landward side as far as the foothills by another are of red brown earths and terra rossas intermingled with black carths and rendxinas. In the Gilley Plains area this latter is replaced by an isolated unbroken expanse of black-earth-like soils, Up imto the foothills there is another are of red brown earths and terra rossas, then ted brown earths and podzolic soils. Finally there is a Jine of podzolic soils along the main backbone of the Mount Lofty Ranges. The tidy concentric distribution is internipted by three radially distributed and completely different kinds of soils; solodie soils cut across the system at Marion and Stonyfell, alluvial soils. follow the radial paths of the Torrens River and Brown Hill Creck. and mallee soils come in through Enfield and North Adelaide. Extending the generalization from Adclaide to Gawler, the soil distribution has a more linear pattern, conforming to the lineation of the Para faujt, On the coastal side through the Penfield area, solodie soils occur, then toward the hills there are bands first of red brown earths only, then of red brown carths with terra rossa and alluvial soils at the base of the hills, red brown earths, terra rossas and rendzinas up into the hills. then red brown earths and podzolic soils further up, and finally podzolic soils in the highest parts. These are all continua- tions, more or less. from the Adelaide area, except that again the regularity of the pattern is interrupted by an isolated extensive occurrence of black earths. It is on a high plain south west of One Tree TIil, and its influence can be seen to have extended beyond its present limits coastwards as far as the Town Centre at Elizabeth by the appearance of black earths and rendzinas in the * See Aitchison, Sprige and Cochrane, 1954; Litchfield, 1951, 1980; Northcote, 1960; Specht and Perry, 1948; Ward, 196-, Wells. 1961. Trans. Roy. Soe. §, Aust. (£965), Vol, $9, Cc. B, WELLS ahs 6 jGAWLER ) gon fe gawirer i wot eo \e THA TREE GULLY" —— Vincent ~ ws bs : AR 2h ? 2, BAS * vane BAFa0e PODZOLIC SOILS RED BROWN EARTHS TERRA ROSSA, RENDZINA 4 BLACK EARTHS SEX soLopic/SOLONETZIC SOILSHEER MALLEE SOILS | ALLUVIAL SOILS ES Compiled by CB -WELLS 1965, SOLL CROGRAPHY [IV AND NEAR ADELAIDE 11%} otherwise continuous are of red brown earths and terra rossas. Again, as at Adelaide, there is throngh Tea Tree Gull a prominent transgression of solodiv soils across the general lmeation., South from the Adelaide area to the Onkaparingu River, the red brown earth are runs out to the coastline between Glenelg and Brighton. In contrast to this, the mixed red brown earth and terra rossa band, after continuing in the same general line from the Adelaide arva. crosses the hills near Sturt, and then hifurcates into terra rossas along the coast and red brown earths inland, The podzolic and red brown earth zone continues straight throwh from the Adelaide arca to run along the high country southwards through Blackwood, The red brown earth-terra rossa-black earth-rendzina arc turns south at Mitchell Park and is lost at the base of the hills below Burbank. However. it re-appears in the same line on the opposite side of the hills where the black earths are in concentration in the O'Halloran Aill-Happy Valley area, as at Gilles Plains, and extends southwards in a line from there as a mixture of black earth and solodie soils, It is a repetition of the situation south west of One Tree Hill. With the juxtaposition of the mixed red brown earth-terra rossa-black earthaendzina are and the red brown carth-terra rossa are are where they cross over in the Burbank-Darlington area, the red brown earth-podzolic soil band is nove separated from the mixed red brown earth-terva rossa-black earth-rendzina bund by a band of solodic soils derived from arenaceons Tertiary sediments stranded at the back of the fault block, Except that hore the solodie sails do nut transgress the general lineation, it is a repetition of the situation at Tea ‘Tree Gully. GENERALIZED PATTERN OF GEOLOGY Treatment of the geology of the area in a manner similar to that used for the soils reveals a pattern, Map 2, not unlike the soil pattern. In broad terms. the various pre-Quateruary rocks (excluding quartvites) and sediments have been rated as giving rise to arenaceous, argillaceons (including arkosic), cal- careous, Or mnugnesic parent materials as in Table 1. The Quaternary scdiments have been collected imto one alluvial/acolian group. TABLE 1. The nature of Adelaide System aul Vertiory sediments* us sail parent anaterials at Adelaide. Tertiary Arenaceous and/or argillacecus Mra Formation Chiracteristics as suil parent material Archavan, | | Arenaceous Procam brian | Aldvate sandstone | Arenaccous *Porrensine | Argillactous, calearéeous in parts, arenaceous, | ; TaAgNeaic | Sturtian i Argillactnus, caleareniia Marinoan Arenaccous, arpillaceous, calcareous | i DISCUSSION Red brown earths occur over a large proportion of the area, and therefore in a rainfall regime rismg from 17 inches to 27 inches per annum, and on a * Interpretation of legends szevompanyine S.A. Dept, of Mines, Geological Survey of South Australia, Sheets Gawler (1953), Adelaide (1951), Echuoga (1954) 1:63,360. C, B. WELLS a” nl” af penriest ty : iL = mie s - g ~T) BS 5! : fF PE ; ) ~ SVE # fe fee = j weieLo we med 4 : rn ae c ae, ioe i as a f ~ SY ere & is tay We od ae = gor tT NORTW ADELAIDE / — errs eer id Zé , | ADELAIDE ¥ z » Ney Crt A v a | A= o ; ge ckWoOD aff De ad eal ARENAGEOUS ROCKS a . it - OR SEDIMENTS i ‘ ie Valley Resergay = ARGILLACEOUS ROCKS (AND SEDIMENTS) [i > ¥ CALCAREOUS ROCKS ===3 an SoS MAGNESIAN ROCKS , Ar ene Ss QUATERNARY (ALLUVIAL) y Pe SEDIMENTS Ee WiLEh og q 4 2 & Wiles SOU. GEOGKAPINY TN AND NEAK ADELAIDE 12] variety of parent materials both separately as in the hills, and mixed together as on the alluvial plains. They thus establish therselves as being the normal soil under the general local conditions for pedogenesis. As far as the hills ave concerned, raintall and solid geology are su distributed ay to reinforce each other in producing sails other than red brown earths at the extremes, The maps show that podzolie soils. predominate in the wetter more uwrenaceous high country, and that ealcimorphic soils juerease notably in the drier less arenaceons more calcareous parts. The exception geologically in the southern corner will be diseussed later, The two exteusive occurrences Of areta- ceous Tertiury sediments near Vea Tree Gully and Wappy Valley are similar gtulogically and topographically and happen lo oceur in the sare general rain- fall regime. They both produce solodic/solonetzie svils, The geological map shows {wo areas of unusually prominent magnesite evelopment. The arenaccous Tertiary sediments with their soladic/solonetzic suils near Tea Tree Gully are adjacent to one and the other runs across the head of the drainage system that issues westwards through Elizabeth to where, again, solodie/solonetzic soils have formed. It could reasonably be argued that the same magnesitic influence might be present in the Stonyfell and Marion areas Of solodie/solonetzic soils, even though published geological maps do not mike a point of showing magnesites as such in those parts of the Torrensian Series drained by either Second Creek ov Slurt Creek. However this areniment, though by to means excluded, is very much less potent in its appheation to the atchinent area upslope from the arenaceons Tertiary sediments cast and. soutli of the Happy Valley reservoir. Tt seems then that the arenaceous Tertiury sediments preferentially prerliue solodie/solonetzic soils. Though the outwash from magnesite rich areas prn duces similar solodic/solonetzie tends in proluvial sediments which would otherwise #ive rise under Adelaide conditions ta red brown earths, there is au conclusive field or experimental exidence that the magnesium ion plays a deter- minative part in solodie/sulonetzie pedogenesis. The alluvial soils shawn on the map follow the main drainage lines as lisuial ancl require no further explanation, Two outstanding features remain, hawever, unexplained hy the solid geology, rainfall, or topography, They are the black soils and the cnastwards extension of ealcimorphie soils, The black svils The black soils have y very precise distribution and relationship ta the landscape, In the immediate environs of Adelaide they are [or the mest part appressed as a thin band against the base of the Ills searp. Here, their most sencral development is at about the 600 fl, contour level, and they oecui' less continuously down slope to about 200 ft As noted earlicr in the paper they completely disappear on the slopes ahoye Mitchell Park. to re-appear as a com- centrated mass ou the O'Halloran ITill plain at a Jieight of 600 ft. Again they wveur downslope from here mixed in with local sedentary soils, Moying now to the opposite side of Adelaide, their northern occurrence on the small plain seuth- west of One Tree Hill is at a slightly higher elevation ut 800 ft. and once more they are mixed in with other soils downslepe as: shown on Map 1. This higher elevation is, however, nOt an isolated ovcurrence, Another plain, almost identical in form and soil morphology occurs at abut $5041. ay the Gomersal plain twenty miles further north-west. }22 C. BR. WELLS Using soils evidence as proposed earlier (Wells, 1963) there appears to have been a similar plain at the present 900 ft, contour level at Rhynie, 40 miles north of One Tree Hill, and another in the south at 600 ft. at Seaview, 4 miles south of O'Halloran Hill (Ward, 1L96-). It would appear then that this evidence from different places many miles apart is in good agreement with the evidence studied in detail in the Barossa district (Wells, 1963), where the black soils were shown to lave had their origin in an extensive late-Vertiary clay plain. The remarkable 600 ft, conformity in clevation of the highest extensive occurrences of black earths south of Adelaide, the 200 ft. jump in their clevation at One Tree Hill, and its gentle rise northwards from Adelaide anggest post Tertiary fanit activity cast of the Para fault to the north of Adelaide compared with marked stability in the south, or else two late or post Tertiary periods of deposition of remarkably similar clay sediments separated hy a period ot fault- ing, There are al present no sitistactory data to establish an identity between the ceposits nor to indieate the origin of the very considerable quantities of clay involved in the construction of the postulated extensive plain or plains. The calcimorphic soils The terra rossa and rendzina soils in the hills could concewably be accounted for by the calcareous nature of (he uncorlying rocks. Downslope from them there ig in the north a Jrand of red brown earths, then solodic/solonetzic soils. Further coastwards there are highly caleareous mallee soils, In the Adelaide area there is a considerable widening of the terra-rossa rendzina zone and in the south the partly arenaceous Marinoan sedimeuts which might be expected to produce red brown earths as others do, in fact haye terra rossas and rend- zinas on their coastal leg. Such calcarecousness in these places seems beyond the ability of the Precambrian rocks to bave supplied, so an external source must be postulated. Evidence aud theories on the subject haye been extensively reported elsewhere, and need nut be elaborated further (Crocker. 1946; Ward, 196-). The position of the tera rossas and rendzinas in the landscape demands that the caleareous aceession must have been considerably Jater than tlie accumulation of the black clay, CONCLUSIONS There is a nice enough accord between the geolegy of the areca as shown an Map 2nd the general distribution of podsolic soils, red brown earths, terra rossus. rendzinas and alluvial soils as shown on Map 1 to argue that the soils lave arisen from the particular rocks withont the intervention of any other factor or process. However, some other mechanism must be adduced to account fur the black earths and some of the calcimorphie soils, The solution adopted here has been ta postulate a late Tertiary or early Quaternary clay plain being formed, and an even more recent accession of calcareous material over at least the coastwards parts of the Jandscape- REFERENCES Arrumson, G. D., Sprice, R. C., Cocumane, G. W., 1934: The soils and geology of Acteluide and suburbs. $.A, Dept, of Mines. Geological Survey of South Australia, Bulletin 82, p. 180. Crocker, R. L., 1946: PostMiocene climatic and ecologic history and_ its significance in the genesis of the mujor soil types of South Australia. C,5.LR, (Aust) Bull, 193, p, 56. SOU. GEOGRAPHY IN ANID NEAR ADELALDE 123 Lirciurienp, W, H., 1951: Soil survey ol the Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond, South Australia. C.S.1.R0, (Aust) Division of Soils. Divisional Report 2/51, p. 38, map. Minico, Lircurimzp, W. H., 1960: Soils on the western slopes of the Mt. Lofty Range near Adelaide and Elizabeth, South Australia, C.S.EB.0. (Aust) Division of Sails, Divisional Report 8/59, p. 36, map. Mimeo. Norrucorr, k. 1, 1960: Atlas of Australian Soils. Sheet 1, Port Augnsta-Adclaide-Hammilten aren. C.3,.LR.O. (Aust) and Melbourne University Press. srncnt, R. L., Peary, R. A., 1948: The plant ecolouy: of part of the Mount Lofty Ranges 1. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 72, pp. 91-192. Wanp, W. T., 196-; Geology, gcomorphology and sails of the southwestern part of County Adelaide, South Australia, C.S.LB.O. CAust.) Soil Pub., 23 (in preparation ). Weis, C, B., 1961: Soils at Elizabeth, South Australia: the grid survey. C.S.1.B.0. (Aust) Division of Sails, Divisional Report 4/61, p. 15, map. Mirieo, Wexts, C. B., 1963: The distribution and pedolozy of soil mosaics, Barossa District, South Australia, Aust. Jour. Soil Res. 1, pp. 231-241. Weis, C, B., 196-: A composite map cf soils in Metropolitan Adelaide. C.S.LR.O. (Aust | Soils and Land Use Series (in preparation ). Miip 2 was compiled by G. B, Wells from Geological Survey of S.A. Department ul Mines. Adelaide maps: Gawler 1 = | mile (1953). Adelaide 1” = 1 mile (1951). Eehunga = L rile (1954), LATE CAINOZOIC SEDIMENTATION IN NORTHERN SPENCER GULF, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY J.B. FIRMAN Summary Because of its unique position, fronting the Southern Ocean, the southern margin of the Australian continent provides many situations where the relationships between superposed or juxtaposed marine, transitional and continental deposits and associated land surfaces can be worked out. One of these situations in the South Australian portion of the southern continental margin is examined. Sediments of Late Cainozoic age were deposited in a compound rift which now contains Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs and Lake Torrens. Two sequences of clay, gravel and sand appear in a bore at the head of Spencer Gulf: CL lower sequence at least 300 feet thick, which is correlated with sediments of known Tertiary age in the St. Vincents Basin, and 'in upper sequence laid down in a piedmont-valley &it environment, which is correlated witl1 the "Pleistocene mottled clays" near Adelaide. Above the upper piedmont-valley flat deposits is a sequence of Anadara-bearing limestone, clay and sand laid down in littoral and marine gulf environments. It is suggested that a strong regression of the sea occurred after deposition of the Anadara-bearing limestone and that one of the features marking the regression is a lime-cemented crust on the shelly limestone, which can be traced shoreward to A limy crust in gravelly soil. The soil crust, or kunkar, is tentatively equated with the kunkar in Bakara soil of Plate Pleistocene age in the Murray Basin. Quaternary events are reconstructed and related to soil and landscape development. Two marine ingressions and two regressions are inferred from vertical changes in lithology and from littoral deposits marking earlier positions of the strandline. LATE CAINOZOIC SEDIMENTATION IN NORTHERN SPENCER GULF, SOUTH AUSTRALIA by J. B, Fiamas [Read 10 June 1965] SUMMARY Becarrse of ils tmictue position, frontinyy the Southern Ocean, the southern margin of the Australian continent provides many situations where the relation- ships between superposed or juxtaposed taurine, transitional and continental deposits and associated land surfaces can he worked out. One of these situations in the South Australian portion of the southern continental rinegin is examined. Sediments of late Cainozaie age were cleposited im a componnd rift which new contains Spencer and St. Vineeut Gults and Lake "Vorrens, Two sequences of clay. gravel and sand appear in a bare at the hoad of Spencer Gult> at lower sequence at Jeast SOO feet thick, whieh is correduted with sediments oF known ‘Tertiary age in Ue St. Vineents Basin, dud an upper sequence lakl down in a picshatnl ailey Hat environment, which is correlated with the “Pleistocene matted clays” near Adelaide Above the mpper piclmont- valley flat deposits is a sequence of Anaddra-bearing shelly limestone, clay and said laidk down in dittoral anc niarine wulf environments, It is suggested that a stone regression of the sea occurred after depusition of the Anaduru-bewriny limestone and that one of the featumes marking the regression is it lime-cemented crust en the shelly Hoestene, whieh ean be truce shorewird to a limy crust in gravelly soil, 'The soil crust. or kunkar, is tent tively ected with the kunkar in Bakara soit of Plate Pleistocene age in the Murray Basin, Quaternary events are reconstrnietyl anc related to sail amie landscape development. ‘Two: aiarine TWTESSTONS and two regressions are inferred frou vertival changes in lithology and fron: Tittoral deposits marking earlier positions of the sfrandline. INTRODUCTION The southern inargin of the Australian continent spang 86 degrees of longitude or abort 2,400 miles measured along the 33th parallel. Much of Late Cainozoic geological history in the Southern Hemisphere is recorded in the sedimentary hasmns, or on the maasils between the basins, by weathered rocks, soils. sediments and landtorms. There are many situations near the sonthern coast where correlation between marine depusits of the ocean basins, transitional ind continental deposits, and jand surfaces can be worked out, Shifts in the strand ant! Huctuations in environment consequent upon the profound climatic changes oF the Quaternary are recorded here also, Many of the marine, transitional and continental deposits, together with their related land surfaces ure superposed. or juxtaposed in the South Australian portion of the continental margin. The sediments desertbed in this paper were deposited in a compound citt Which oceupicd much the same area as the present Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs aud the low-lying tract extending nerthwards through Lake Torrens, (sce Locality Map—Pig. 1), Lithofueies and structaral details set out in bore logs yind on Geological Survew maps clearly show that the riff a second order geomorphic teatareé, was well developed in early TerGary Time. Trans, Rav, Soc. S, Aust, (1965), Vol 8a. 126 ). B. FIRMAN LINE OF SECTION Wke 5 rp) tal o VE: ~ S435 par 36*—— SCALE 40 80 MILES J Favits — Vig. 1, Locality Map- TECTONISM The horst and grabens and associated faalts within and bounding the rift have been discussed in a general way by Fenner, 1930, and others, and in some detail with reference to specific areas by Miles, 1952 and Campana, 1955. The more prominent faults are shown on Fig, |. after Johns, R. K, (1964). Thomson (1965) stresses the oscillation of [fault blocks as an important tectonic feature as carly as the Precambrian, Early marginal faults were covered by later Tertiary deposits. Major faulting ceased at the end of the Pliocene, although displacement on some faults continued into the Pleistocene. Epeirogenic uplift of at least 200 feet since mid-Tertiary time can be demonstrated for the area as a whale, with uplift increasing in the Mt, Lofty Ranges (amounting to 600 feet in the Mt. Lofty Ranges in Late Pliocene times, according to Glaessner and Wade in Glaessner, M. F. and Parkin, L. W., 1958), GCAINOZOIG SEDIMENTATION IN SPENCER GUL 127 PROVENANCE Much of the lerrigenous material in Tertiary and Quaternary sedimentary sequences in Spencer Gulf is derived from older Precambrian melumorphics unl younger Precambrian to Lower Palaeqzoic sediments of the Mt. Lofty- Flinders Ranges ancl Yorke and Eyre Peninsula massifs, At the head of Spencer Gulf, coarser clastics in Quaternary deposits can be traced to known rock mits of the adjoining ranges. East of the section, in the Flinders Ranges, peaks rise to 3.174 feet above sea level at Mt. Brown. West of the section. the Arcoona Plateau (Johus, op. cit.) has a general clevation of about 600 feet with njyonadd- hocks rising to aver L000 feet above sea level TEN? Als DE ORMA TION De Prsdtgont with aiiay Peat wilh Rent Perey, Hat wet String Norré Mie sedear a @| [.) Sou weaesr Marine gui ® i. &. @ De E itterals \ 7H | [L. @) otorads &> ® Ml Neal sul sce ot sigur E0uee a at feast 48200 below ground surface e tiny sequerc ier ae LEGEND tl il oF . RECENT + iiffora anv maine gr séo%s air ea Meaamant sarily chays and aeave!, Volley ‘ist clays with grave! fanses 8. FISTOGENE 'ERTIAHY Pred wit demos ane clip of the veiley ffar Wore - ; | WErficg! exaggeration | | 6f topography x20 | degimenrary Muckoess' x80 | Pent Ail “ameter PROTEROZOIC Pregaking Saale SCALE M/LES | , o i 2 2 4 MILES rIG.2 + = KILOMETERS rita cd i SA Dep? a2" Mines RILOMETERS 1 i \ 2 3 Bei ALN es- 23 Fis, 2.) Diagrammatic structure section, Spericer Gulf, South Australia. For details from Bore T to Bore 12 sce Fig, 3. Note that the shell-beuring sediments shown in the upper block in th legend are taken to be Late Pleistocene in this report. 128 J.B. FERMAN SEDIMENTS AND ‘TIME BOUNDARIES At least 462 feet of 2non-marine sediment are known from an abandonei! bore at the head of Spencer Gulf near Port Augusta (Hullett, 1852). ‘The inaterials described can be divided into two sequences; a distinctive 150-200 leet thick upper sequeuce of clay with sand and gravel lenses and with Timy B horizons of fossil soils in a piedmont-valley flat environment, aud a lower sequence of white, blue, yellow and black! clays, gravels: and sands, at least 300 feet thick, which contains lignitic clays and carbonaceous sands (see Fig. 2). The upper sequence is correlated with the “Pleistocene mottled clays™ neur Adelaide on the basis of lithology, environment and occurrence within, connected morphostratigraphic units as defined in Frye and Willman [{ 1962). The lower sequence is correlated with sediments of known Tertiary age m the adjoining S{. Vincents Basin on the basis of colour, lithology and carbonaceous material, A thin sequence of littora) and marine gulf deposits overlies the upper piedmunt-valley flat clay with sand and grayel lenses. The sequence contains shelly limestone with Anadara trapezia, silly clay with plant fibre and shelly sands of the beach ridges aud shallow channels. The top of the shelly limestone is strongly lime-cemented and this feature can be traced shorewards through littoral shelly granule and pebble conglomerates to a limy crust in eravelly soil (see Pig. 3), The Plioeene-Pleistocene boaundary in this area may be deeper than the hase of the piedmont-valley flat deposits, This is sugmesicd by comparison with similar sequences near Adclaide in the St. Vincent Basin, Here Ludbrook, L963. may be interpreted to shaw that if ~ .. . the extinction of warm-water Yatalan fauna” represeuts “the onset of colder conditions at the end of the Pliocene”, then a sandy sequence 150 feet thick events between the marine Dry Creek Sands of Pliocene age and the overlying piedmant-valley flat deposits ot Pleistocene age (“Pleistocene mottled clays”), The Pleistovene-Rectnt boundary hay not been precisely determined in the seclion area, but the Time-cemented top al the Anadare-hearing limestone is now thought to have formed at the sane time as a-calearcous crust (*Kunkar” ) which is a fossil “B’ horizon in adjacent gravelly and brown sail. The kunkar in this area may be equivalent to the kunkur in Bakara Soil (Firman, 1964 ). whieh is thought to be of Jate Pleistocene age, Materials strativraphically above the crust or lime-cemented top of the Anadura-bearing heds are taken as Recent in this report. Radiocarbon dating. proposed for materials from Unis ares, miry hely to place the time houndary and will also provide imporkint information ai the time of steandline nrovements in Spencer Gulf. QUATERNARY EVENTS Qnaternary geological events hegin with deposition of claws. sands and gravels in the rift, coarser clasties of the piedmont facies on the oer near an rnassifs and valley flat deposits in the rift centre. The tupeseeaphic profile can iw revonstrieted ty show that the upper surface al this sequence was as neh as 180 fect above the present floor af the galf, Phat as. aboot 180 feat of the sequence las been removed by erosion prior to marine ingrexsion. Vhe Call now hes west of the ald rift centre (Fig. 2). The assmmetry may ie che, gn part “Colors feont erietnd dow. “Trborvatl (ante te Commun tite ie Seagthe Astra The sedimentiny aquence here deserted! fy antels the caine a the sertreive pein je \iidakhe an the St Vanewt Basin tsee Furman 960). SEU, Jo jueWjuedag “y's ued ys “Pp S8l-rg9 eor4 OZ X “bexa jeayjuaa ‘AydeuBodoy Joy “Z PUE| OWOg sjeug eueobaay by SS Ss ‘yeapooe'r Aq & adog (paduin|S) waquay sae SUDUILUIS Za SaulaW Goot O08 (SNR Oty, -aDs e PRS SAGA PaInpas jjng ssouse uoljaas jo yjhuaq JISSEY B)Nsujus-_ BAZ > yooupag aT E tS coe oe, e oa > 1334 000% aces OObe oou1 a08 c 00, Lag4 ALON [a JFABIY) Bi) -suoriuoy {los [issoj z a1vos aplejany Jeau Apo palo auacopsiay4 of uapeainby 15 feo fine ER (JEIAN|j0oje1AN| 4) janeué ale Se fal ajnubuB pur ajqqad ya (S}uajeainba jevou!| ave sayeuawojfuos arqaed pue ajnueB [= pue Ae|5 ae o Ms AlJays pajuewao aul] ‘aujuew moijeyc)‘eizadey eJEpEUY lo wunsd&ey SUIB,UOS “ABO Apis Ajays pue atioysauuly jays yyos M 2 Cc ( 421} ieptL) “edais (seaxjd ul auals B Held Uepunge Yim KEIO ALIS pu elu) ‘unsdé6 Ueljose ro > 2 a 4[s"2tar| joo yeranig) Aejs b a ow Tet" 4 (aBplu yopag) |] Apues DUR pues aur WEOT < | Maisie f pues AWjaus +: a a 9 JPly A } Byer 2 [108 umoug —4 ort e}o z 4 | eae a woRS_ Pe 4 A = < v : Voctato | ie oF = a= & | no | Ry @ Bs => S ars 2 i cs 4 zl Bi "8 a < 5. 3) 0) isd) oe, es DILIBANIdA 8 IVNOILISNVAL LNAWNOYIANS JVLNANILNOD 4 SZ9NS3YS9444 Tt li Apa Apueg M31VM HOIK Lv ONVHUS xt S39014 HIVIE Q30nNvyLS (3) ATIO YAINAdIS pavayjeay * AIND YAONAdS ‘NOILISOd3d 40 SLNAWNOYIANS ONV SLISOd3d TVIDISYHNS 1su |. B. FJKAIAN to westward tilting of the fault block below the gulf. A reconstruction of topo- graphy immediately prior to the ingression and deposition of the Anadara- bearing beds on the gulf foor can be made by connecting the tops of marine cliffs near the present strand. At this time the upper surface of the piedmont- valley Hat deposits was 25 feet above the present Hoor of the gulf (about 15 feet above L.W.O,S.T.). A feature of interest at the present top of the unit is the presence of abundant massive crystalline gypsum indicating that ere, as else- where in Australin during this part of Quaternary time, sulphates were being deposited in drying playas. Marine imgression. the first such event recorded here im the Tertiary- Quaternary sequence, is shown by soft shelly limestone and shelly silty clay (“marl”) containing Anadara trapezia, Outeraps of the littoral eqnivalent of this unit are found well above the high tide mark and inland behind ridges of beach gravel that barred old stream channels during this early high strand of the sea. The vertical position of materials in this arva suggests a stand about 10 fect above L.W.O.S:T.. but similar materials elsewhere are found higher in the landscape (up to 25 feet above L.W.O.S,T, near Pt, Wakefield). Stranded marine cliffs may have been first formed at this time. Regression led to strong incision of streams, with erosion of the upper clays and gravels near the ranges, and a first accession of lime here at the base of the hrown soil profile, The top of the exposed Anadara-bearing limestone was vemented by lime, Similar lime-cemented materials are known from the floor af Gulf St. Vincent 70 feet below sea-level, suggesting that this was a major regression. The later development of the brown soil is dug to sedimentary lavering and soil differentiation (see Fig. 3). A veturn of the sea, bringing a tidal flat environment to the Gulf margin, led to: deposition of silty clay with abundant plant fibres, This early phase of the ingression was succeeded by a high stand of the sea of perhaps five feet, which is marked elsewhere along the gnif margins by shell beds, Coarse shelly sand of the stranded beach ridges marks a later repression. The formation of a deep off-shore channel, as shown on the east side of the section, also marks a low stand of the sea. perhaps slightly below modern §vit level, Similar features are well developed at other places along the South Australian coast. near Fort MacDonnell for example, where they comect an older and higher littoral enyirenment with the modern coust, In some places surface drainage was restricted and evaporation reached the stage ot halite precipitation, Modern streams have breached He old gravel bars of the LO FL seu level Modern deposits are wWhuvial sands and gravels of the present stream courses dune sands formed by ucolian workiug of stranded beach ridges. granule snd) pebble heds forming, beaches in the present littoral zone. and the shelly sands id sills of the gulf Wor and the off-shore channels. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Joformation derived fram surveys by the weiter along the route of the Port Augusta-Uncla telephone Tink and the Port Augusti Whyalla power line has leon combined with data from tnpublished Geological Survey reports marie hy &K. BR. Miles and G. b Whitten (Site investigations al the Port Augnsta power station) aml L. Keith Ward ( Foundation investigations at the Por Aiigusta bridge site). . CAINOZOIC SEDIMENTATION IN SPENCER GULF WL Thanks are due to Dr. N, H. Ludbrook and Mr. B. P. Thomson for helpful criticism of the text. REFERENCES Campana, 1955: The Structure of the Easter South Australian Ranges—Thoe Mt. Lofty Olary Are, J. Geol. Soc, Aust. 2, pp. 47-61. ; Faisrroce, R, W., 1958: Dating the Latest Movements of the Quaternary Sea Level. Trans, N.Y, Ac. Sc. Ser. 11, Vol. 20, (6) pp. 471-482, Famprince, RK. W., 1961: Eustatic Changes in Sea Level. In Physies and Chemistry of the Earth, Vol. 4, Pergamon Press, London. Fenner, C., 1920: The Major Structural and Physiographic Features of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A. 54. Firman, J. B., 1963: Quatemary Geological Events near Port Adelaide. Dept. Min. §,A. Geol. Surv. Quart, Notes No, 7, July. Fimatan, J. B., 1964: The Bakara Soil and Other Stratigraphic Units of Late Cainozoic Age int the Murray Basin, South Australia. Dept, Min. S.A. Geol. Surv. Quart. Notes No. 10, July, Frye, J, C. & Witteman, H. B., 1962: Stratigraphic Commission Note 27—Morphostrati- graphic Units in Pleistocene Stratigraphy, Bull. A.A.P.G, 46 (1), Jan. Guarssser, M, F. & Pankin, L. W., 1958: The Geology of South Australia. Journ, Geol. Soc, Aust. (2), Heiiurr, H. W., 1882; Statement of Strata Traversed by the Boring made for Obtaining Waters at Waterworks Yard, Stirling North, near Pt. Augusta. Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A, 5, Jouns, R. K.. 1964; Investigation of Lake Torrens (Unpub.). Dept. Mines, $.A. 59/133. Lupsrook, N. H., 1963: Correlation of the Tertiary Rocks of South Australia. Trans, Roy. Soe, S.A. 87, pp. 13-14. Mites, K. R., 1952: Tertiary Faulting in North-eastern Eyre Peninsula, South Atstralia. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 75, pp. 89-96. Tuomson, B. P., 1965: Geology of Australian Ore Deposits (2nd Edition) Eighth Common- wealth Mining and Metallurgical Congress, 1965. GROWTH RING CHARACTERISTICS IN AN ARID ZONE CONIFER BY R. T. LANGE Summary Growth rings in logs of Callitris coluniellaris F.v.M. from near Woomera have been studied, and some of their characteristics correlated with features of rainfall records. Evidence is presented that these trees produced about one ring per year, in some years more and in some years, none. GROWTH RING CHARACTERISTICS IN AN ARID ZONE CONIFER by R, T. Lancu! [Read 12 August 1965] SUMMARY Growth rings in logs of Ca(litris columellarts F.v.M. fron near Woomera have been studied, and some of their characteristics correlated with features of rainfall records, Evidence is presented that these trees produced about one ring per vear, in some years more and in some years, none. Callitris columellaris F.v.M. is an Australian coniferous tree. It ranges widely* throughout Australia, and extends into arid regions, where it usually grows in stands limited to local niches, but is sufficiently abundant on some sheep stations to provide logs and rails for buildings ud yards. In March, 1965, three trees felled for posts were observed near “The Pines” station, 10: miles east of Woomera m central South Australia, They were of matched size, from the same stand, aod appeared approximately contemporaneous. Transverse sections were taken from their butts, and growth ring characteristics examined in these arid zone conifers which grew in an area where averave rainfall is less than 7 inches per year (Table 1). TasLe 1 Mean monthly rainfall at Pinba, Seuth Austrulia, over a 30-year perivd (1931-61). Jan. Feb. Mar. Apri] Muay June Jilly Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dee. Tatal 0-66 0-98 O43 0-39 0-62 D6) O49 OST (edt O61 0-52 (47 6-76 (Data fram C.B.M, records) In the laboratory, the sections were ground flat then polished, Observed stereascopically at 40X magnification, growth rings were clearly observable, the three trees exhibiting 77, 83 and 90 respectively. All sections were eccentric, sy band widths were measured along the maximum radius, Fig, 1 presents band-width data. Euch band-width graph shows two sorts of fluctuations, a basal type fluctuating over widths up to about 3 mm., with a mean about 1-5 mm., and superimposed on this, outstanding amplitudes at three positions a, b and c. The characteristics of these wide-band regions are consistent over all trees. Region 4 Department ‘of Botany, the University af Adelaide, South Australia, 2Mrs. C, Offler! has pointed gut that this binomial voyers specimens described under C. intratropica Benth, & Hook. f. (1880); C. hugelit (Carr.) Franco (1952) [Synonyan—C. glauca, Baker & Smith (1908) nom ileg.]; and C. columellaris. F.v.M. (1866) [Synonym— C. arenosa Cunningham, ex Baker & Smith (1910) nom. ilewJ. Althongh these 3 species are maintained by some avthors( eé.g. Garden), Blake considers them as a single species with a disjunct distribution. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, (1965), Vol. 89, V4 KR, T. LANGE @ consists of two abnormally broad rings separated by one or two very narrow ones, Wide-band region b consists of a single spike, on all three graphs. Region ¢ is made up of a prolonged succession of widely-fluctuating band widths. This wide-band pattern is expressed, however, over a variable number of rings, from about 55 in tree 1 to about 80 in tree 2. The positions of regions a, b and ¢ centripetally in the growth-ring sequence is approximately the same ww) & _ a Ss 2 a 5 is} o = TREE |. . d b Cc i= = I wy RELATIVE WIDTH 300 TREE 3, 200 Lele) () T ae hey Lr iO =6©200—C BOC 5500s bs OO] GROWTH RINGS Fig. 7, Widths of successive growth rings in trunks of three Callitris columellaris from near Pimba, South Australia. Mea- surements are in stereomicroscope cyepiece graduations, 35 of which equal one millimeter. GROWTH RINGS IN AN ARID ZONE CONIFER 135 A Bed 4 inches (Fig. 3), or years with a total rainfall > 15 inches. For trees 2 and 3, probabilities of rainfall and ring width characteristics coinciding within the observed ranges (see Fig. 3) appear to be significant, yiz.: Tree 3 Tree 2 2 5 6 = — —( “() =>. Se Ch ° 2 P= a ag 08 b= gp 70° GROWTH RINGS ADAXIALLY TREE 3 2 lp eo 32 40. YEARS BEFORE 1964 Fig. 3. Correlation between outstanding widths in. the centripetal order of growth rings (A) and years in reverse order from 1964 with a month of rairifall > 4’ (0). GROWTH RINGS IN AN AKID ZONE CONIFER 137 The weight of evidence points to an imprecise relationship between broad- bands and wet years, and hence between growth-ring numbers and time in years, that is, growth rings tend to be produced about one per year. An analysis of the broad-ring pattern, however, indicated that the three trees varied by about 20 rings in 80 years, averaging > one per year over some periods (a to b, tree 1, 0 to a, tree 3), and < one over others (a to b, tree 2). Tree 1 consistently averaged < one, except for the period following 1945, but it is not possible to determine if this tree occupied a less favourable site in the stand. It is obvious, however, that even slight allowance for such irregularity would greatly increase significance in Fig, 3. Annual periodicity in these trees is hardly relatable to rainfall cycle, because the rainfall regime does not follow a seasonal pattern. Broad-band region c appears to constitute an imprecise biological recording of a run of wetter years about 1900, prior to the establishment of the Pimba rain gauge. Old trees in the stand will hold further indications of pre-guage rainfall. PROCOPTODON GOLIAH (MACROPODIDAE, MARSUPIALIA) FROM WESTERN EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY D. MERRILEES AND W. D. L. RIDE Summary Procoptodon goliall ( Sthenurinae, Macropodidae ) is recorded from the vicinity of Calca, western Eyre Peninsula, South Australia. PROCOPTODON GOLIAH (MACROPODIDAE, MARSUPIALIA) FROM WESTERN EYRE PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA by D. Meskearcers® ann W, D. L. Rme* (Communicated by N. H, Luilbrook) [Read 12. August 1965] SUMMARY Procoptodon yoliah (Sthenurinac, Macropodidae) is recorded from the vicinity of Calea, western Eyre Peninsula, South Australie INTRODUCTION Fragments of bones and teeth collected by J. FE, Johnson from a well near Calca, on western Kyre Peninsula, were sent to us for examination from the South Australian Department of Mines in November, 1963, The occurrence has been noted previously by Segnit (1938, p, 8) under the general term “numerous fossil bones”, MATERIAL AND LOCALITY Portion of a molar tooth (Geol, Sury, $, Aust. Palaeontology collection, No. V1), a farly complete incisor (V3), an incisor fragment (V4), portion of a caleaneum (V5), portion of a (7) cuboid (V6), and about 50 small fragments uf bone (collectively V7) were examined. These were recovered from depths hetween 16 ft. and 26 ft. in well No. 65 north-west of Galea Hill, east of Beard’s Bay, Section 87, Hundred of Wrenfordslev, County Robinson. The occurrence is described by Segnit (1938), who reports that bones were recovered from a yellowish calcareous very sandy clay alsa containing fragments of shells, over- lain by 13% feet of travertine limestone and caleareons sandy clay, DESCRIPTION AND COMPARISONS Dental terminology used below follows Ride (1961) and Ride (1964). V1 appears to be the anterior portion (trigonid, i¢, protolophid and para- conid, with associated midlink and “cingulwun”) of a right My or My tooth of Procoptodon colidh Owen, Owen deseribed and figured a specimen (now Brit. Mus, M 1897—see Lydckker, [887) from Queensland (Owen, 1874), of whieh we have a plaster cast (W. Aust. Mus. 62.58.18) and a photograph, and VI hus been compared with these. There are some minor differences im the relation of the midlink to the edges of the protolophid, and in the height of the anterior “cingulum” relative to the paraconid (see Plats 1), However, we have no lesita- tion in ascribing Vi ta Provoptodon goliah. V3 is probably an upper lett first incisor, All stheturine 1 teeth we have seen are rather peg-like, curving teeth with much more enamel on the buccal than on the mesial aspects, and therefore show an enamel margin sloping for- ward and downward over the conves face of the touth. These generalizations apply equally to the I’ teeth of Thylacolea, bul tm size and in detail of the ° Western Australian Miisenm, Beuafort Street, Perth, Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust, (1965), Vol. 89. 40) D. MERRILEES ann W. D. 1. RIDE course of the enamel, V3 agrees much more closely with Sthenurus (as exemp- lified in S. occidentalis and $. gilli) than with Thylacoleo, Consequently, we accept V3 as sthenurine, and hecause of its association with V1, tentatively aseribe it to Pracoptadon. The upper incisors of Procaptodon arc not known with certainty, but Ride (1959) has discussed and feured a rostrum from Wellington Caves, New South Weles, which he ascribes to Procoptodon. Jn yeneral, the incisors of this speci- men resemble those of Sthenurus occidentalis (see Anderson, 1932) and ol S. will (see Merrilees, 1965), though there are some differences in form and in relative sizes of the components of the incisor row between 5, occidentalis and S. gilli and between either and Ride’s Procaptodon. V3 is smaller than one would expect from a macropad with so large a ynandible as Precoptodan goliah, being little larger than L' in the smallest of the Sthenurinac, §. eillt, recently described from Strathdownie, Western Victoria and from Haystall Cave, near Naracoorte, South Australia (Merrilecs, 1965). How- ever, sinve the relative proportions of the thee incisors within known Sthenurus tooth: rows differ from species to species, it would not be entirely imexpected for I! in Procoptodon galiah to be small, V4 is a ftagment probably representing the anterobuccal edge oF a large third upper incisor, Lt shows part of the enamel margin und in. this and in the shape of the enamel surface it resembles Sthenurts occidentalis Glauert fray Mammoth Cave, Western Australia, and a similiar animal oecurring at Haystall Cave and at Strathdawnie (Merrilees, 1965). Tlowever, V4 must have derived from a larger tooth than [ in any of these three samples of Sthenturiays, Again tentatively, we refer V4 to Procoptodon. V5 is the antero-dorsal portion of a right caleanenm, in form rather rexemb- linu the modern western grey kangaroo, but some 14 times the linear dimensions of a large adult male grey kangaroo. Owen (1876, Plate 23, Fig, 4) figures. Without description, a right calcaneum ascribed by him ta Procoptodon golioh, but the grounds for this ascription appear to have been that it was “indicative af a hina foot shorter in proportion to its breadth, and yel retaining unmistuk- ably macropodal characters” rather than direct association observed im the: eld, V5 does not quite match Owen's figure. However, ily proportions suggest that it was broader relative to its length than the caleancum of the modern grey kingarov, and on these grounds, and beeause of its association with V1, we yefer it tentatively to Pracoptodon, V6 may be portion of the cuhoid of a large macropod, but we cannot posi- tively identify this nor any of the fragments collectively labelled V7. Many of these fragments obviously derive from a large animal, and thus it is possible that all the fragments examined may represent the same individual specimen ul Procoptoden goliah, OTHER OCCURRENCES OF PROGOPTODON Wonds (1960) reports P, guliah from the Pleistocene Darling Downs de- posits, but not from the (?) Pliocene Chinchilla Sand of Queensland, McCoy (1879) records P, goliah us “not uncommon” in Victoria, figuring a specimen from Lake Timboon; he Jisted these occurrences as Pliocenc, though apparently they are now taken to be Pleistocene, since wether Gill (1957) nor Stirton (assT) mentions them in discussion of Victurian Tertiary marsupials, while . thapman and Crespin (1935) associate “extinct marsuyuals” with “volcanic PROCOPTODON GOLIAH FROM EYRE PENINSULA 4] tulfs and alluvials at Lake Colongulac and Tirmboon” under “Pleistocene”. Procop- todon has been reported from Lake Menindec, N.S.W., by Tindale (1955), and by Tedford (1955). A radiocarbon date has been reported for this material, but there is some confusion over its applicability (see Dury, 1964, p. 106, No. 75, and Lundelius, 1963, p. 77 footnote; also Tindale, 1964). Owen himself records P. goliah from “the Breccia-cave of Wellington Valley’, N.S.W. (Owen, 1874, p. 797). Simpson (1930) lists P. rapha from King Island, probably on the basis of an early record, later amended to Sthenurus (see Scott, 1917; Anderson, 1932, p. 383, footnote ). A Procoptodon close to P. goliah has heen reported in the late Pleistocenc Malkuni fauna of the Tirari Desert, South Australia, but not in Tertiary faunas, by tistiin, Tedford and Miller (1961). The genus is not known from Western Australia. Thus Preceptodon as at present understood appears to be confined to the Quaternary, and its presence in the Calca deposit supports the Quaternary estimate of Segnit (1938) made from the associated shell fossils and from the field evidence, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are grateful to the Director of Mines, South Australia, and te Dr. N. H. Ludbrook for the opportunity to examine the specimens deseribed, which are relevant to aur own work on the related Sthenurus. REFERENCES AnveRsoN, C,, 1932. Palacoritoloyical Notes, No. WI. “The Skull of Sthenurus vecidentalis Glanert. Ree. Aust. Mus., 18, pp. 382-387, Crarman, F., and Crespis, 1, 1935. The Sequence: and Age of the Tertiuries of Southerr Australia, Bep, Aust. Ass, Ady. Sci., 22nd Meeting, pp, 118-126. Douy, G. H., 1964. Australian Geochronology: Checklist 1. Aust. J. Sei; 27, pp. 103-109, Gitu, E, D., 1857, The Stratigraphieal Occurrence and Palaeoeéology of some Australian Tertiury Marsupials. Mem, nat. Mis, Vict, 21, pp. 135-199, Lunbenrus, E. L., 1963. Vertebrate Remains fron the Nullarbor Caves, Western Australia. J. roy, Soc. W. Aust,, 46, pp. 75-80, Lunuxker, R., 1887, “Catalomue of the Fossil Matiamahia in the British Museum (Natural Uiistory)”, Pt, 5. (British Museum (Natural History), Landon, ) McCoy, F., 1879. Procoptudon goliah (Ow.), Decade 6 “Prodromus of the Palaeontolagy of Victoria”, (Govt. Printer, Melbourne. ) Munritees, D,, 1965. Two Species of the Extinct Genus Sthenurus Owen (Marsupialie, Muc- ropodidar) fram South-Rastern Australia, inclnding Sthenurus vill sp.nov, J. yoy, Soe. W. Aust, 48, pp, 22-32. Own, BR. 1874. Gn the Fossil Manunals of Australia-Part IX. Family Macropodicise: Genent Maeropus, Pachysingon, Leptosiagzon, Procaptoden and Palarchextes. Phil. Trans.. (G4, pp. 783-803, plates 76-83. Owns, K., 1876. On the Fossil Mammals of Australia-Part X. Pimily Macropodiclae = Man- dibulur Dentition and Parts of the Skeleton of Palorciestes; Additional Evidences «if Mucropus titan, Sthenurus and Procoptodon. Phil, Trans, 166, pp. 18-226, platey 19-31. Kine, WD. L., 1959. Mastication and Taxonomy jn the Macropudine Skull lp. 39-59 in “Fonction and Tixenanac Impurtance’, ed. A. J. Cain, (Systematies Asén., London | Hin, W. Do t., WEL The Cheek-Teeth of Hypsipryzingdoen moychatus Ramsay 147K (Macropoclidye > Marsupialia), J, roy, Soc. W, Aust. 44, pp. 53-60. Ropu, We. Dd. Ls 164. A Review of Australian Fossil Marsupials. J. roy. Soc. W. Aust., 47, pp. 97-L31, 142 D, MERRILEES ann W. D. L, RIDE Scotr, H. H., 1917, Some Palaeontological Notes (Largely Emendatory). Victoria Museum Brochure 6, Launceston, Tas. Srcnit, R. W., 1938. Geology and Development of Ground Water in the Robinson Fresh Water Basin, Eyre’s Peinsula. Bull. geol. Surv. $. Aust., No. 17, Part 1. Stimpson, G. G., 1930. Past-Mesozoic Marsupialia. “Fossilium Catalogus” 1: Animalia. Pars 474, Ed. J. F. Pompeckj. (W. Junk, Berlin. ) Smmron, R. A., 1957. Tertiary Marsupials from Victoria, Australia. Men. nat. Mus. Viet. 31. pp. 121-134. Samron, R. A., Teprorp, R. H., and Minter, A. H., 1961. Cenozoic Stratigraphy and Verte- brate Palaeontology of the Tirari Desert, South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus,. 14, pp. 19-61. Teprorp, R. H., 1955. Report on the Extinct Mammalian Remains at Lake Menindee, New South Wales. Rec, S. Aust., Mus., 11, pp. 299-305. Tinpa.e, N. B., 1955. Archaeological Site at Lake Menindee, New South Wales. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 11, pp. 269-298. , TinpaLe, N. B., 1964. Radiocarbon Dates of Interest to Australian Archaeologists. Aust. J. Sci., 27, p. 24. Woons, J. T., 1960, Fossiliferous Fluviatile and Cave Deposits, pp. 393-403 of “The Geology of Queensland”, ed, Hill, D,, and Denmead, A. K. (Melb. Univ, Press— originally publ. as J. geol. Soc. Aust., 7.) PLATE | D. Merriters AND W, D. L. Rwe Above: Anterior fragment of a molar tooth from Calea, S.A. (Specimen V1). Below: in plaster cast of Brit. Mus. spee. 1897 (Procoptodon goliah). TAXONOMIC REVISION OF SOME AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE BY ELIZABETH A, SHAW Summary A taxonomic revision has been made of the Australian species of Cruciferae which were included by O. E. Schulz (1924) in the genera Arabidella, Blennodia, Drabastrum, Geococcus, Harmisodoxa, Lemphoria Micromystria, Pachvmitus, Pseudarabidella and Scambopus. Recent Australian authors, following Bentham (1863), have treated these species as belonging to Blennodia and Geococcus. In the present revision the species included by Schultz in Arabidella, Lemphoria, Micromystria and Pseudarabidella are now placed in the genus ,4rabidellu. Two new species, Arabidella glauceccens Shaw and Harmsiodoxa puberula Shaw, and a new variety, Harmsiodoxa brevipes var. major Shaw, are here described. Harmsiodoxa cunninghamii (Benth) Schulz has been shown to be a synonym of H. blennodiodes (FvM) Schulz, Pachumitus lucae (FvM) Schulz is treated as a synonym of P. cardaminoides (FvM) Schultz, and Scambopus richardsii (FvM) Schulz has been shown to be a species of Phlegmatospermum Schultz. TAXONOMIC REVISION OF SOME AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE by Exvizaperu A. Suaw* [Read 12 Auyist 1965] SUMMARY A taxcuamic revision las been made al the Australian species of Cruciferae which were inchided hy ©. EF, Schulz (1924) in the genera Arabidella, Blen- nodia, Drabastrum, Geococcus, Harmsiodoxa, Lempharia, Micromystria, Pachy- mitus, Pseudurabidella and Seambopus. Recent Australian authors. following Bentham (1863), have treated these species as belonging to Blennadia wnod Ceoeaceus. In the present revision the species included by Schulz in Arabidella, Lem- phavia, Micromystria and Pseydarabidelle are now placed in the genus Arqbi- della. ‘Two new species, Arabidella ghawescens Shaw andl Tatnstodoxrg prberuld Shaw, and a new variety, Hormsiodoxa brevipes var, mujor Shaw. are here desoribed. Tarmsiodoxa cunniighamil (Benth }Schulz has been shown to be a synonvn of Hy blennodivides (FvM)Sehulz, Pachymitus lieve (FvM Schulz is treated as aosvnonyin of P, cardamingiles (FvMC)Schulz, anl Seambopus richardsii (P'yM )Schiulz has heen shawn to he a species ob Phlegmatoapermiun Sobite. INTRODUCTION Plants belonging to the family Cruciferae can be eusily recognized as such if they bear Howers or fruits. However, within this tamily it is difhieult to sulistactorily determine generic and, to a lesser extent, specific limits, Treat- ments during this century vary from that of EB, H. L. Krause (1902) who recog- nized only one genus, Crucifera, to that of O. E. Schulz (1936) who. in his revision of the family for the second edition of Die nativlichen Pilanzentamilien, recognized 351 genera including about 2500 species, From the second edition of J, M. Black’s Flora of South Australia (1948) it can be estimated that there are in Australia about 50 endemic species of Cruciferae. most of them included in the genera Blennodia, Lepidium, Steno- petaulum, Cardamine and Menkea, the remainder in Cuphonotus, Hymenolohus. Phlegamataspermum, Capsella or Geocoecus. In this present work only those species which have at any time been placed in or associated with Blennodia or Geacoceus bave been considered. for the degree of Doactor of Philosophy, Deparunent of Bolony, University of Adelaide. — It was carried out during the tenure of an award tinder the British Commonwealth Scholar- ship aud Fellowship Plan. Trans. Roy, Soc. $. Aust. (1965), Vol, $9, 1G BLIZABRTU A, SITAW ‘The first to he described was Blennad{a canescens KBr. (1849); oF the others eleven species were described by Ferdinand Mueller, most of them before 1860 and generally in Lrysimum or Sisymbrium. One was described by George Benthum (1863) as a Blennocia, one by Ralph ‘ate (1885) as a Sisyoebrian. and one by Black (1917) as a variety of 4. canescens. Ty 1855 Mueller transferred to Sisabriun: three species whieh he himself had originally described in Lrysintum, and by the time of the publication of his Systematie Census of Australian Plants (1862) Mueller had made at least one intergcneric transter of each species deserihed by himself. as well as (rans- terring Blennodta canescens first tu Sisymbrinm (1869) and then to Erysimnu (1877), In some cases he introduced new epithets tor species already described and these superfluous names figured in new combinations, The broad concept of Blennodia which was adopted by Black, originated with Bentham who, in the first volume of his Flora Australiensis (Fae) in- cluded all the species of this group then deseribed (ten) in Blenwodia, as well as there deseribing a new species, B. cunninghamii. This view was uever acgepted by Mueller; in is first major work, Plants Indigenous to the Colony of Victoria (1860-1562), Mueller placed four of these specirs in Sisymbrinm, tour in Blennodia, and one, originally described as a Bleniodia by Mueller honself, in Capsella, The tenth species does not occur in Victoria. In The Native Plants of Victoria (1879a) Mueller referred three Gf tie species previously (1862) treated as Blennodia to Erysimuni, this. beige the senns in which they were originally deseribed. 'The eatment i his later works is essentially the same as in this one. In the first comprehensive Hora of South Australia Ralph Tate. (1890) fol- lnwed Mueller closcly, placing all the species under consideration in cither Erysinnm or Sisymbrium, Wowever, eight years later Tate rebelled against the dictates OF Mueller and stated that he thought all these species to belong in Blennedia, This view was accepted by Black in the first edition of bis Flora of South Australia (1024), Also in 1924 appeared O. EB, Schulz’s monograph of the tribe Sisymbricue fur Das Pflanzenreich and here he sharply departed from earlier treatments. Sehulz retained the genus Blennodia but included in it only B. canescens R.By., distributing the other thirteen species known to him among eight mew tenera; he, Arabidella (EvM)Schulz, Pseudarabidella Schulz, Dralastrum Schulz, Scambopus Schulz, Harmsiodoxa Schulz, Pachymitus Schulz, Lein- phoria Schulz and Micrumysiria Schulz, ATL of these genera he included in the subtribe Arahidopsidinae except for Arabidella, which he placed in the sib tribe Sisymbrtinae. In Schulz’s system the only essential difference hetween these subtribes is that plants belonging 16 the former have seeds which exude mucus when moisterted; those in the latter do not. — In his monograph of the family tor the second edition of Div natirlichen Pllanzenfamilien Sehuly (1936) followed the same system except that he removed Blennodia from the tribe Sisymbrieae to the Hespericdeae. Although Black accepted Cuphonotus and Phlegmatospermaiun. two ober Australian genera deseribed by Schulz (1933), he considered the «ight new genera within the “Blennodia group” to be ill-founded. In 1987 Black criticized them as havine “been divided .. . an very slight characters’, a remark which is misleading, for it is these “slight characters” which must often be vse in delimiting genera in this family. lu the second edition of his fara (1948) Black made no mention of Schulz’s work. not even listing his new combinations ay synonyms, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC CENERA OF CRUCIFERAE V7 Geococeus was described by Harvey in 1833 from specimens and wotes sent to him from Western Australia by Janrss Drummond, It has generally been accepted as 2 distinct yenus, although in the Flora Australiensis Bentham, after describing the only species, G, pusilius Drumm, ex Hary., remarked that it is perhaps only a form of Blennodia cardaminoides Benth,, a view later adopted by Mueller and by Tate. As a result of these varied ideas about the circumseription of Blennaclia and GCeéaceccus the present work was undertaken, There is available in the Australian herbaria mech more material than any previous worker had been able lu see and the relevant collections at Kew, Berlin and Vienna were borrowed. In 1963, a visit was made to the British Museum (Natural History) where some critical material, including the holotype of Blennodia canescens, is housed, During the course of the study the writer made several trips in South Australia for making collections and field observations. Efforts were made to expand the scope of the collections of these plants and the writer is grateful to all those people who took particular pains to collect endemic Cruciferae. Survey or tHe NomMeEescuarunal Ilisrory of THE Seecirs IxcLupED IN Biexxonta (Sexsu Lato) anp Grococcus. in 1849 Robert Brown, discussing the plants collected by Charles Sturt expedition of 1844-1846, described the genus Blennodia and one species, B. canescens. Ty his generic description, Brown wrote, “Crucilerarnm genus, prope Matthiolam. Char.gen- Calyx clausus . .. Stigma bilobum, dilatatum, . , Semina aptera pube fibrosomucose tecta! Cotyledones incumbentes.” After describing Blennodia canescens he continued: “This plant has entirely the habit, and in many important points the structure of Matthiola, near which in a strictly natural method it must be placed, differ ing, however, in having incumbent cotyledons, and in the mucus covering of its seeds. The mucus proceeds from shor tubes. covering the whole surface uf the testa, cach containing a spiral fibve, which seems to be distinet froin the membrane of the tube. A structure essentially similar is known to occur generally in several families: to what extent or in what genera of Cruciferae it may exist I have not ascertained: it is not found, however, in those species of Matthiola which T have examined,” The name Blennodia (Gk Brewadns = shiny) refers to this production of muenus, On the hatotype sheet of B. cenescens in the herbarium of the British Museum in Brown's hand is w note, “Bleanosperma vel Blennodia’, but the name Blennosperma, had been used by Lessing (1832) for an Amerioan genus ot Compositac. Although the name Blennalia cauescens was accepted by Ferdinand Mueller in his botanieal reports on the expeditions led by Gregory and Babbage (1554. 1839a), and ly Bentham in the Flora Australiensis (1663), Mueller in 186 transferred this species to Sisyimbrinm as S. hlennodia, the epithet canescens being preoeerpied in this genus. Mueller mentioned that the seeds of S. biennodia are: mucose and irregularly biseriate in the fruit, hut added that thesv facts did not prevent its inclusion in Sisymbriunt, In 1877 Mueller transferred this species to Eryslntim as E. blennodia, This combmation was generally accented inti] 1898, when use of the original one was revived by Tate. Since then Blemnodia cancscens has been venerally acvented; it was used hy Black in both editions of his Flora and by Schulz In 1924 and 1936. Lis BLIZAWETH A. SHAW Black (1917), in discussing the plants collected on the South Australian Museum's expedition to the Strzelecki and Cooper's Creeks, mentioned a form of B. canescens collected at Lake Blanche, saying, “The specimens agree well with other northern ones except that the seeds are bordered by a rather broad wing, while those of the type are, as usual in the genus, quite wingless. | therefore propose calling this variety ‘pterosperma’,” In the first edition of his Flora (1924) Black referved to it as B. pterosperma, and the next year published a Latin description, fn Das PHanzenreich (1924) Schulz did not mention this variety. In Die natiirlichen Pflanzentamilien (1936) Sehuly said that Blennodia R.Br. includes only one spécies (B. canescens), but remarked, “B. pterosperma J. M. Bluck . ., soll nach dem Autor nicht verschleimende Samen haben.” It is true that Black originally deseribed the seeds as “haud mucosu’, but he later (1937) noted that examination of ripe seeds hud proved then: da be muease, Tt is presumably because Sehulz thought the seeds non-amucase that he dicl not commit himself to any decision abont the existence of B. plerosperma us a distinct species: Ferdinand Muller's stay in South Australia was brief, fram December of 1847 to August of 1852, but he made several short collecting trips around Ade fuide and to the Murray River, and a longer one whieh tovk hint into the southern part of the Flinders Ranges during October aud Noveinber, 185t. In February, 1853, Mueller described six new species of Erysimem, all hased on material which he had collected in South Australia, The frst two ave E, brevipes and &. blennediaides. The name Erysiarum brecipes was generally accepted throughout the rest of the nineteenth century. being used by Mueller (1879a, 1855) and by Ralph Tate in his Plora of Extea- tropical South Australia (1890). J 1855 Mueller hac referred this speeies ta Blennedia but did not make the necessary combination; this he did do in Plints Indigenous to the Colony of Victoria (1862) and B. brevipes was used hy pen- thim. and later by Black in both editions of his flora, Turezaninow i 1855 published Alyssupsts drummoudii, basing, the desvrip- tion on Drommond, series + no. 128 from “Swan River”. He was reluctant to include this species in Alyssopsis but did-so for want of w better place, ‘Turezaninow remarked that although this plant differed in some respects from his concept of Alyssopsis, the differences were nol preat enough to warrant creation of a new venus for it. To 1877 Mueller mentioned A. denmimonelii Varez, as a synonyny of Sisym- brian brevipes, this latter an iWevitimate combination based ou L!. hrevines, Gardner (1931) made the combination Blennedia drwammondii: eo lere made tur direct reference to Tureaiuntinow's publication, but cited Sisynebriny brachypodune as a synonym, 8, brachypodum FvM, (1869) is a levitimate con bination, being the correet one if the taxon onder consideration be treated as a Sisymbriant. Mueller twice (1877, 1878) does mention Alyssupsis drummonilil as svnnnymous with S$. hrachypotio and it was for this reason that Carder cited it with his new combination in Blenoddia, Schulz (1924) deseribed a new genus Harmsioexa in which he pliced bk. brevipes, Erysinain blennodioides PVM. (1853) and Blennodia cumninehantii Benth. (1863); he retained Harnisiodoxa with these three species in the second edition of Dice nutiirlichen Pllanzenfamilien (1936). Enysimum blennodioides was published in 1953, but two veers Liter Mele used the combination Erysimum blennodes to veter to this species. Brysinn AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 119 hlennodes is in this place (Trans.Phil.Soc.Vict.1 (1855) 100) a nomen nda and, although Mueller used it at least twice more, was Qppurently never asst ciated with a description. In Plants Indigenmis to the Colony of Victoria (1862) Mneller deseribed and fiiwed Blennodia lusiocarpa. citing as a synonym “Erysimum blennodes, FAL. in Linnaca, 1852, 367", As it stands this citation is wrotmg For the coin. bination Erysimum blennodes was first used only in $54; it is, however, possible that “Erysimum bleanodivides” was tatended tor the reference is ty the plaice of publication of the latter combination. If seems that Mueller used the new epithet “lasiocarpa” because he feared that the combination Blennodia blenno- ihivides would he tantological, The combination Blennoclia lasioearpa was aveepted hy Bentham and by Black (1924), In 1869 Mueller trunsferred this species to Sisymbriunr ay S. Rasiocarpuin and in 1879 to Erysinuin as BE, lasiocarpum and this latter combination wats weverally used vith the begiuning of the twentieth century, Drnce in 1M17 tinully made the combination Blennadia blennoedioides and vhis has been used in Australia since then, The third species which Schulz inelided in the genus Mearmsiodoxa, H. chnninghanmi (Benth.)Sehulz, was desertbed as Blennodia cunninehanai hy Bentham in 1863. In 1852 Mueller transferred this species to Lrysiniiae: beveud this, there seems to he nv mention of it in the literature. In addition to I brenipes and i. blennoedioides \ineller deyeribed tn Linaea in 1853 fonr more species of Erysivran, all baseck om plants collected daring his trip in the Flinders Ranges iy USS. ‘These are i. filifoliuae, Ef. trie seefina, Eo nasticin ad 2 errvipes; the first thre tay be aiwenieontty disenssed tnvether, In 1855 Mueller transferred £2. Alifolina to Sisyurbrinat. nyaking an atleati- mate combination which is antedated hy S. filifolinm Willd. (1500). Tt was. however, used by Mueller in his first and second censuses and by Tate an bis fon. Bentham, of course, consicderert this species to be a Blennortia. as he did Eo frisechue, this was eventually accepted Ty Tate and Jater by Black. As mentioned before, Erysianon triscctune was published together with M filifolinm and the similarities between the two were repeatedly stressed hy Mueller. hr 1855 be redeseribed the former species as Sisyinbeinni triseetiin im thiy was the name weourally used during the nineteenth century, Ben- thinn's combination, Bleanacia trisecta, being ignarcd unk) used by Tate (1895 ) and kiter by Black in both editions of his flor. Thy 1863 Benthiun desertbed B, triveeta var, brachyearpu, basins i ow a culleetion made on MeDouall Staart’s expedition. Tle rernarkecl that it citfered from the “eomanon fort” only in haying fruit “shortly oblong” and “very turgid”, Schulz (1924) acoepted this variety, repeating Bentham’s comments. Ab the sume time, he deseribed Arahidella trisecta var. ltybophora, characterizing, it as “Cavs inferue cum petiolis papillis mimatis toberculiturmibus Ghsessis”. and remarking that it is found with the typical variety. Neither of these varieties was mentioned by Black. The species originally deseribed as). nasturtini was, in 1555. tovether with 2. filifolimm and LE. tisection, trausferred by Mueller ta Sisymbrinm as S. nesturtioides. this new epithet bein necessary beeause of the earlier pibliea- tion of S. nesturtiume Thonh. (1794). ‘This was the vombination ised by Moeller itt the rest of his works end hy Tute in his flora. [an RLEZABETIC A SHAW When Bentham in 1863 transferred this species to Blenuoddla he wnfortun- ately retained the epithet “nasturtioides”, making an illegitimate combination to the epithet “nasturtium” was not preoccupied in Blennodia, Black apparently did not realize this aud used B. nasturtioides in hoth editions of his tora, although the combination Blennodia nasturtium (FyM.)Druce had been made in I9ET. In the Flora Australiensis Bentham described under B, nasturtioidés a Vitiety “pinnatifida”, busing it on a single collection made by Burkitt in New South Wales “between [the] Darling and Lachlan rivers”. Burkitt's plants were small fruiting specimens with most of the leaves withered; Bentham de- eribed them as having “leaves small, un long pedicels, with Sew short Jateral lobes and a larger terminal one”, thus differing from the typical variety with ‘leaves usually pinnately divided into a few linear rather thick segments”. This variety was retained by Schulz (1924) but there seems to be no other mention of it. Mueller always thonght FE. trisectaum and 1. nasturtivm to he quite closely rehited, at seast belonging in the same subgenus, Arabidella, of Evysimum. Aithough he seems to have never published anything to this effect, there is in the National Herbarium of Victoria a specimen, probably collected in South Austrilia, which is labelled fn Mueller’s hand “irysimam (Avabidella) nus- turtitan”. When Schulz revised the tibe Sisymbriewe for Das PHanzenreich he raised MucHer's subgenus Arabidella to generic rank, but made it sonospecific, inchid- Ing only A. frisecta (/vyM)Schulz. For £, filifolium he eveated a new genus Pxendarabidella, and for FE. nesturtivin and one other species, the genus Micro- mysteltn. The second species inchided hy Schulz in Micromystria is M. ererigena (PeM Schulz, described hy Mueller in 1861 fram collections mide ite Queens- lanicl and New South Wiles, Mueller noted that, “A Sisyibria nasturtioide . . . Videtur spevifive distinctum.” Bentham transferred this species to Blennorfin, misspelling the epithet as “eremigera”, and this combination (with the correct spellings) was used hy Black in bath editions of his flova, The seas Arabidella Schulz placed in the snbtribe Sisymbriinae of the Sisynthvicae, Psendarabidella and Micramystria into the Sisymbrteae-Arabidop- yidinae. In Sehulz’s treatment the only essential difference between these sub- tribes is that the Sisyubriinge are suid to lave seeds “humida hand nvellaginosia” While seeds of the Arabidupsidinae are mucose. He said of Pseucarabidella “. semina himida mucilaginosa (sec.Benthim ), igitnr ab Arabidella difert.”. Schulz never sew material of PL flifalia, basin his description on those of Moeller and Bentham anck on a drying sent him from Kew. In the second edition of Die natirlichen Pflanzenfumilien this arrangement was not ultered. An important figure in the history of South Australian betany is Ralph Tate who came from England ta Adelaide in 1875 and during the next twenty years collected extensively Hhroughout South Australia, In September of 1883 Tale collected at Termination ILill, in the northern part of the Lake Torrens basin, a crucifer which he sent ta Mueller with a note in which he referred ti itus “a Sisembriun which 1 cannot attach to any deseribed Australian species.” Tute himself described this in 185 as Sisymbrium procumbens. tn the protolugue he remarked, “Among Australian conueners, S$. procumbens ap: proiehes to S$, nasturtioides, from whiel it differs in habit, form of leaves, in thy spreading not erect fruitings pedicels, stouter pods, ete.” AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 43 ‘ate used this combination in his flora as did Max Koch (1898) in Its report on plants collected at Mount Lyndhurst in the northern Flinders Ranges, Ifowever, in the same nuniber of the ‘Transactions of the Koyal Society uf South Australia as Koch’s report, Tute put an end to the inclusion of these Australian Cruciferae in Mrysiinym or Sisynabriuin, In his paper “Dimorphism in two South Australian Cruciferous Plants’, Tite (1808) wrote: “Yhe majority of Australian botanists influenced by their compeer [Mueller] have accepted his dictum that Blennoiia is made up of spectes ot the genera Sisymbrium and Krysimun:. A critical examination of the LO species of the Australian flora, collectively included under these two generic names. satisfies me that the venation of the capsule is not thal proper to Sisyenbrinm: as in all (he species, there is only a midrib, without a Jateral vein on each side... . There is no justification for the employment of Sisymbrian for some of our-erueifers, and 1 take, therefore, this opporlinity to refer my $, procumbens to Blennodia as By procumbens, Yate, 3898." This combination was. used by Black in both editions of his flora, Schulz (1924) created for this species a new genus Lemphoria placed in the Sisymbrieae-Arabidopsidinae, The last of the species described in Linnaéa was Erysiinunt curcipes, based on a collection made at Crystal Brook io South Australia, This combination was cenerilly used by Mueller and by Vate, although in the report (18592) on the collections made by the Babbage expendition Mueller used the combination Blennodia eurcipes, also used by Benthany and lator by Black, Mueller (1869) transferred this species Lo Sisymbrium, a niove aceepled by no one, Schala in 1924 published the genus Scambaopus in which he included 5. eurvipes and the erstwhile Meysimunt richardsii FVM. Ile apparently saw ny mmiterial of either specics for his generic deseription says, in purt, “Plautae mali lantum delineatae ex lierbariu Kewensi visue .. 2) und Nis specifie deseriptions were adapted from those of Mueller aad Bentham. Erysinuon richardsit PvM. is deseribed in the tenth volume of Fragmentu Phvtoyraphiae Australiae (IST7), the deseription being based on a collection made at Euele in Westerm Australia by Mrs. Richards, In the protologue Mueller wrote, “Erysimum Richardsii (Sect. Blenoudia)” and this seems to be the ouly published indication that Mueller considered there to be a seetion Blennodia in Erysimum. After describing the plant and commenting that le had seen. no mature fruit, Mocller concluded, “Species ab E. eremigenn et EK, nasturtioide petalis majoribus et praccipue stylo bene evolito diagnoscenchi” The combination Blennodia richardsit was used by Tate in 1879 ane 1806. but hoth tines as a nomen nudum, Tt was validly made only in the first ediion of Black's Nora (1924), Black wrote; “B, Richardsii, BVM. (Erysinum Richardsii FVM. Sisymbrinm Richardsll, FvM.) [this latter a combination made by Mueller in the first Consus and used by ‘Tate in his flora] was deseribed by Mueller from Howering specimens collected in 1877 between Fowler's Bay and Eucla, but the specimen preserved in the Tate Herbarium appears to belong ta the South Australian form of Hytehinsia Drwnmandii.” Schulz. missed this comment for in te second edition of Die natiirlichen Pflanzentamilien (1936) he retained Scambepus richardsli. Vhe last word on the matter was liad hy Black who in 1937 wrote: “Tt seems impossible to decide the gencrie position of Erysimron richardsli, Fw.M. ... until we have ripe fruits 152 FLIZABETIT A, SHAW and seeds, ..- From the notehed, laterally compressed ovary tof the type} it uppears to be a Phlegmafospermuni yather than a Blennodia and is perhaps only a form of Ph, cochlearinum., Helms’ specimen from Arkaringa Creek, identified us Sisymbriun Richardsii by Mueller and Tate, is certainly Ph. cochlearinunt.” In 1855 Mueller desevibed Sisymibrivan carcdaminoides from plants collected near the mouth of the Murray River. He was not sure of the individuality of this species, writing in Plants Indigenous to the Coluny of Victoria, “As a donbttal pliant the Siswabriun cardaminvides . . . is kewise excluded, its diversity frou S. Thaliatuan (Gaudin, Flora Helvet. iv 438) having not yet heen convincingly proved.” . : Im the Flora Australicusis Bentham described Bleanocdia cardaminotiles citing “B. cardaminnides F.Muell. Merb, (as ua Sisymbriuin)”. This snegests that he may not have known of Muetler’s valid publication of §. cardaninoiles: thus Bentham’s B. cardamingides cannot necessarily be iulerpreted as. if aged oo Muelfer’s type although Bentham’s citation of specimens imakes it probable that he had seen it, The combination B. cardaninoides fas been generally wecepted and was used by Black, Erystunm Tucae PYM. was described in 1877 from a callection made dy T. RP. Lueas near the junction of the Mure and Darling Rivers. Mueller re onirked that it stood closest to 2. cardaminoides but scomed specifieally distinet hecause of its larger sive, Sehulz (1924) included B. earduiminaides and Ee. lucae in his weirs Pachy mitus, THe also described P. carcuminoides var, dasycarpus, differing trary the typical variety whieh, according to Schulz, bas wlabrous fruits. in haying “siliqnac pilis bitureatis brevibhuy puree vestitae”. He lad seen no specimen of P. fecae, oly a drewying sent hin trom Rew, and borrowed his deseription fram WWoellee, Mn the first part af Key to the System of Vietorian Plants Mueller, carn menting on Sisynibrivi carleninotles, wrates “0. Preity ta stemless stute at this plant very short, rather thick and tureid, singly forming on their stalks and chining matuecation burvine thomselves ti the vradned: the flowers of this state vary iniinieite.” This “state” refers to what is usally considered ta he Geocacens prsilius Dinan vx Hare, (1899), “This doubt adhout the individuelity. of Co pusillns seems to have arisen with Benthum (1863) who wrate: “) , it maw very likely he a Blonnocdia, of some species of which it has the radical leaves.” The pra- hlan was taken up by Tate (1898) who. affer diseussiue the ecmypnrativeds Foss specimens of “so-culleck Geacucens prosillies” available to. him, coneluclel Hat these plants really represented one at “the two very dissimilar sbites of Blennedia cardaminoides. which liwe tu common virtually only leat form.” A second species of Geacveens. Go fiedleri Scheuermium (1987), was cle sertbed) fron a plant adventitious in a uarden in Leipzig where it had been introduced with Australian wool waste. ‘This species was discussed by Blick (1940) who then aceepted itas inelidiuge all the South Australia collections available to him, but later considered G. fiedieri to be ouly a synonym at CG. pusillies Somewhat remote googriphically fram thase species sa far cisetssect is Blennodin alpestrisy FyM. (1855) whieh as known ouly from the mountainous ureas of south-eastemm Now Soath Wales aad the adjacent parts of Vietoria, Although deseribed as au Blennailia by Mueller, he was mocertiin of its correct generic position tor he wrote: “. 2 as the cotwledons are at times slighth: bent AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC CENRRA OF CHUCINERAL 153 imvards, Tam uncertain whether the genns ought not to be nnited with Diplotaxis or Moricandia®. In Plants indigenous to the Colony of Victoria Mueller transferred this species to Capsella as C. blennorlina, considering, it to form a dink between that genus and Blennodlia, Bentham retained it in Blen- nodia although admitting it to bave certain affinities with Capsella. Mucller in 1869 transferred it to Sisyibrign as 8. alpesire, hut ten years laler moved if to Erysiinim as E. capsellinim, a name retained in later works Lt underwent a further name change to Fe, blennodimum, by Otte Kuntze (1891), before being placed by Schulz as the only species in his new genus Drabastram based on a manuscript name tsed by Mueller. These. then, are the main points of the nomenclatural history of these species at the time that this study was begurs, Cyarnacrens OF ‘in Gexery rurre Discussrkp Calyx: Thore wre usually four sepals although monstrous Howers may have fewer or more, The calyx whorls are bere referred to hy their position. in rebition to the ovary; the median sepals are those inserted in line with the rephim, Hn lateral sepals, thase in w phue at right angles to that of the repliny and sephiat The ealyy ean be deseribed as “open” of “elosed™. Tf open the sepals wee more or Tess spreading and this fs the more eorraon in this group: indece, in same species. for example, Arabidella Iriseete. the sepals are at Full anthesis horivemtal ar even further heat back. The closed calyy is scen only in the two species of Blennocie. Ta these: te sepals are usually erect and the margins overlapping, fhig is vot absolutely constint for seme folly-opened Bowers wre seer with sepals slightly spreading, spreidmy at least to the extent that the margins do not quite touch, Towever. for practical purpuses the calyy in these species can be described as. closed for the sepals are cither parallel to ihe ovary ar at only a slight angle fron it, Size of the sepals varies considerably within a particalar speeies, hut is (ite constant among the fully apesed Howers onan individual plant, Dn shape the sepals: vary from oblong or ovate to deltate or catedy, suborbicular ‘Me lateral sepals are usally wider than the median and more alten ovate os deltate than oblong. Usually they ure subacute lo acute und are often saceate: thes latter feature i§ conshintlh seen in both species of Blearodia, but only becasiondly in the other genera, The median sepals are usually oblong or almost so aud rounded, They are not uncommonly cocullate but we weev rarely saceate, Usnailly the sepals are green although they are avcasionally hiwender cr purtly sa. They are bordered, almest ta the base, by a narrow bewalie marein Which is colourless or lavender, In pubescent speeies there are usually a lew hans especily near the tip. The sepals are generally esaducous, bat some- fies retain wutil the fruit is qnite well developed. Coralla: Most of the Crreiferte have flowers with four petuls, a Lait which is comstant Chroughout this group. The petals are ustially longer than the sepals althongh im Geococeus pusilles they may be of the sume length. Size is quite cousfant among flawers of i single plant, although it may vary surprisinehy much within a species. The petils are usually white or yellow. althvugh plants fron predominanth White-flwered species may have tawny fowers with pink or lavender petals: this seems ty be not the case in yellow-flewered species, The venation varies to the extent that a petal can be described as “finely” ur “coarsely” veined, us ROLMAAGRTI A, STIAW Usually the petals taper into an obvious claw. The blades are usually Ohlone to (ob-)ovate to suborbicular and rounded or truncate; if the latter they are often retuse or marginate. The claw is usually more or Jess linear and is sometimes winged. In some species, for example, Arabidella trisecfa, the blade ig at right angles to the claw when the petal is fully expanded. Kspecially in some of the smaller-flowered species it is not uncommon to find petals with no obvious distinction between blade and claw or with only a very short claw. These petals are usually spathnlate ar obeyate to deltate and wee usually smaller than the distinctly clawed ones. This feature is not neces- sarily constant within a species; a good example is Arabidella nasturtium in Which both clawed petals with suborbienlar blades and clawless obovate pvtuals, as well as all he (transitional forms between the two, may be seen. Androecitin: Within this group the flowers have constantly six stamens although these sometimes do not all fully develop; this seems to be partictlarly troe of the lateral ones. The filaments are linear or consprouously widened at the hase, the latter more common in small-flowered species. Quite often the filaments of the lateral stamens are unequally widened, the greater width heing on the lateral side of the vein. The anthers are dorsifixed and the connective is barely visible. They are usually oblong to square, although sometimes ones which are sagittate at the bast: are seen, and are rounded or truncate. Nectaries: These glands are outgrowths of the receptacle and staid at the level of the bases ot the stamens. They follow a quite constant pattern, thie differences among the species being mainly the result of varying degrees ot development, these in (urn being influenced by the space available within the developing bud. When fully developed the glands form an) extrastaminual tings whieh completely surrounds the bases of the stunens. ta this group they are usually seen only partly developed, In the common arrangement one cin distinguish betwee lateral and median elands. The lateral glands are rings of Hssue, each surrounding the base of ie lateral stamen and ustally open on the inner side. less often open or “margin ate on the outer side, They may be cirewhir or triangular, square to. pentagenal at hexatimal or, alternatively, vee- or horseshoe-shaped. Differences within cither of these two wroups seem to be of minor importance althmugh it is ap- parently of some taxonomic significance that a species falls within one rather than the other of these two groups, From this basic circular or vee-shaped gland fs produced, ane on cach side, u “lateral appendage” which curves aronnd the hase of the adjacent diagonal stamen. It is called this for descriptive purposes; in fact it iy part at the entice extrastaminal ring. The tips of the appendages from opposite glands approach each other and mav sometimes touch, but apparently are never fused. If the lateral glands. are less well developed, each may appear as four Jobes of tissue, one at each angle of a hypothetical square gland, or as semi- civeular pieces of tissne, each one subtended by uw petal, the pieces actually being the arms of the lateral appendages. These poorly developed glands are seen in the herbaceous species of Arwhidella. ‘The median glands, if present, are more or less conical pieces of tisstue, one between the bases of the members of each pair of diagonal sturmens. Un- fortunately presence or absence of the median glands is nat a constant character: it is an expression of the degree of development of the glandular system ard AUSLRALIAN ENDEMIK:D GENERA OF CRUCTERRAL 155 can vary trom plant to plant of.a particular species. This is especially noticeable in Arabidella eremigena. Gynoeaium: The ovary is usually sessile although in a few species, &g., Arebidella glaucescens, itis on a short gynophore, It is linear to fusiform to ampulliform and usually terete. Oveasionally the ovary is compressed, but compression is usually more obvious after ripening has begun. .n most species the ovary is glabrous, even though the fruit is pubescent, but in bath species oF Blennodia it is densely tomentose, The style is slender and linear or, in Blennodia canescens. very short and widened, eventually becoming almost spherical. The stigmas are usually de- pressed-eapitate, but are sometimes two-lobed. ‘The hilobed stigmas vither have the lobes extended over the placentas or over the valves, in the Jatter case appearing tectiform if seen from the dorsal uspect, ‘lhis is best seen in Blen- nadia CAnescens, The flowering pedicels are slender and usually erect to slightly spreading. even in those species in which the fruiting pedicels are hovizontal or reeurved; in section they are terete or quadrangylar, Fruit; Within this group the fraity are quite variahle m size but not in form. They are usually siliquas, in a tew cases, siliculas, terete or compressed. Tf the fruit is terete, the lvoe are convex and nearly semicircular in section and this is the most common conditions in a somewhat modified form the finits ave quadrangular and the valves alraost right-angled in section, This is sven in Seambopus eurcipes and Drabastruenr alpestre, When the fruit is compressed dorsi-veutyally and is thus latisept, the valves nee almost flat and this is commonly seen in Blennodia; in such truits the valves ave offen somewhat constricted between the secds. The laterally compressed! fruit is less commonly fonnd within this group, although fruits of Arabidedta eromigeng and A, procnmbens are often angustisept; the valves are then very wonvex or keeled, Lt may be noted that although terete and dutisept fruits may occur in one species, as well as terete and unwustisept together, latisept and afustisepe traits seem not to occur in the same species. Proximally the valves arc usually rounded or truncate; distally, rounded to snhacute, There ig amore or less distinet veire ane when the fenit is fally ripe there ds offen a seticnham af secondary veins. making the valve appear striated. Fruits of Arabidella trisecta sometimes have three parallel veins, the lateral ones heing rather indistinet, but this is not constant. Although the usual colour fs brawn, one offen sees red or magenta pigmeutation, especially along the vein and at the edges oF the valves, The valves nsnally Ae smoothly against the rephunm, bat i Seembopus curvipes and Pachymitus cardaminoides they ave rellexed and flared at the proxinidl end. The fits are sessile or shortly stipitute, the stipe clongating very litle during maturation, Usually there is a style which is linear and slender or obeonical although in Blennorlia curescens und B, pterosperma it is often much widened and almost spherical. Im most cases the stigma is depressed-capitate and as wide as or slivhthy wider than the style, but in B. cunescens it is tecti- form, Yery offen the stigma shows at Ieast a trace of purple pigmentation. The funicles are short and slender, usually linear tu deltate, straight or euved and ulmost always pendulous. In this group the septum is thin and fragile and is sometimes fenestrate by a longitudinal slit. Usually it is white, Jess often colourless, and is opaque or hyaline: it is smooth or rugulose, then heing wrinkled especially between the seeds and along the margins, 1a ELIZABETH A. SHAW The fruiting racemes are always quite loose and may reach a considerable length, as much as 30 em in Arabidella elaucescens. The pedicels are usually quite slender, although these of Harmsiodoxu bretipes are stout (often 1 anim in diameter) and very short. In Pachymitus carcaminoides the pedivels, alfhough slender proximally, beeome quite thickened just below the eilyy, Usually the pedicels are somewhat spreading, but they :nay be horizontal anid quite rigid or even recurved as in) Blennoria pterasperma and Seambopiy OCUPOLPOS, Seeds; The seeds are usually obluwe to (ob-)oyate and quite plump, bul those of B. pterosperma arc flattened, Seeds of this species wre always sur- rounded by a membranous wing. a feature seen less often in B. canescens and Avahidella filifolia, The testa varies from vellow through red-brown to hrown and often is sHahtly darker at the hihim. Usually it is finely papillose. bud the teste of seus Of Drabustrrme alpestre is coarsely reticulate. The outstanding feature of the teste is its ability to exude imneus when moistened, In the outer Jayer are “slime cells” which very rapidly take wp water The contents of these cells arg quickly exnided and riqytere (he caticle whieh can thea be seen as fragments on the surfice of the sheath of mucus, The mucns seems to he generally produced from all parts of the testa althouwh de some species there is a small arew near the bili which seems to he not mueose, Bach papilla seems to extrude a strand of inucus and the result is a coat of muiens envelopiugss the cutire seed. In seme venera, especitlly Harmstodexa, Blennedia and Seambopus. the mucus is exuded ay distinct ablougs, one from cach papilla, eacieuhlong seeming ty cutain a arev spirally coiled threud: to the nuked evo this mucus is erey and under dow mvenifieation appears distivetly: radiate, In Arabidelta, however, (he jiveus is exuded as cubes, hemispheres, or cones. again one from each papilla, but nat cowtaining the thread. This mens is colourless. and also uppers more or less rtdiate under low magnification. under higher magnification iF is sen that this apparent radiate quality is caused by the overlapping rows uf cubes or hemispheres. the optical properties of the mucus being such that the vrlves of cach individual exudate seem accentatted, Under low magnification (about SO tines) the testa appears three-layered, The inner daver is of light colour and is prohably the endosperm, the two ule livers being the testa propee and thew themselves covered by 4 cuticle. The outer Javer is the thicker aud pieces of it can casily be chipped off. it is rpuite light in colomr and bears the papillae or retteulations. Tt is this faver Avil produces the mircus; it is made tp of vertically placed ohloue cells which are somewhat conical at the top and Wiese cones give the testa its papilose appewr- anee, From each of those cells is produced a diserete macase mass. The seed is entirely filled by the erbrvo which in this group is autorrhivial. The radicle is usually straight although in Avabidelia fitifolia it is cenevally curved lo aoe side, making the seed appear skew The cotvleduns are usually oblony ur lhiptie and about the sume Jeneth as the radicle. On germination the radicle first chamutes und ruptares the testa: ats it lengthens the cotyledous unfold aod push aff the testa. ha the very vou seedling the shape of the cotvledans does not differ noticeably from species ta spevies; the first trne leaves are simile ta the cotyledons, being oblowe and usually entire, and it seems to be only the second-formed Jeaves whieh show any OF the specific characters, althongh in pohescent species the first leaves do bear a few hairs, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFRBAL 137 Not all species could be grown from seed, but the following did reach a stage at which the first few leayes could he seen: Arabidella trisecta, A. nustur- tium, A. glaueescens, Blennodia canescens, Harmsiodaxa blennodioides and H, brevipes, At the early stages about all that is possible is to separate the entire- ov trisectleaved species from those with pinnatisect leaves. Pubescence; The hairs found on members of the Cruciferae are almost thyays unicellular; these are simple or, quite often, bifureate or mmany-armed and complexly branched. There also occur, but rarely, capitate hairs which are either unicellular or divided by horizontal walls. Within this group only Arabidelle glaneescens, A. filifolia, Av nastiuvtiun and A, procumbens, are yuite glabrous. A. eremizena beurs siniple hairs; A. trisecta is usually described as glabrous, but almost all the plants seen have lad on the Jower parts of the stents and proximal parts of the leaves more or less numerous oblong to hemispherical papillae, In the other genera the hah’s are predominantly of the branched sort anid over On all parts of the plant except the stamens. In both species of Blen- ho¢dia they are usaally shortly stipitate and irregularly branched: in Scambopus, Pachymitus, Harmsiodoxa and Geococcus the hairs are shortly stipilate or sessile and are often twice bifurcate. Usually there are no voustant differences amony the hairs found on varions parts of a partionlar plant, but in two species of Harmslodoxd and in Scambopus the hairy at the distal end of the fruit Vilves are often simple or biturcate with one arm very short, while those on the other parts of the plant are more branched, Vesetatice characters: OF the species diseussed bere four are perennial and suffrnticose: the others are normally ephemerals, completing their life evel within a few months. The snflruticose species are usvally many-stemimed, the stoms arising cither ut graund Jevel or from a short main’ stem when the plunt is tully developed. These sterny are equal and usuilly each is terminated by un inflorescence. Often the primary stems are branched; the secondary stems hear infor- escenees. but are sometimes much veduced, the inflorescences. then seeming ti arise from the leaf avils, Drabastrum alpestie nav huve several stem systems. these arising from a woody ehiomatons part. The herbaceous species are also maty-stemmed, the stems arismy from ground level; very often they wre unequal, the main central stem being lealless arth shorter than the lateral stems. In some cases the central stem dies sot develop and its terminal inflorescence seems to arise from the base of the plant, The lateral stems are erect. decumbent or prostrate; the Jutler is seen only in Arabidelle procumbens ud in 2 growth form of Harnsiodoxa brecipes, Usunlh the lealy lateral stems hear tertiary branches in the axils: as in the sulfruticose species the axillary stems sometimes do not develop, so that there occur asi! jury inflorescences. Geacoceus pusillis is quite prostrate, consisting inilially of only a rosette of leaves; older pharts are quite complex in structive. the result of the pater twining at ground level of short sceondury stems, leaf petioles and fiutting pedicels. The root is usually slender and short, wud beurs a flew laterals, dy Ue perennial species it is often woody und thick, the apper Literal roots as well weoming woody, Drabastrum alpestre torms au wnderground rhizomatous part made up of the woody root and fle basal parts of the aerial stem systems. 16S ELIZABETH A. SHAM The stems are terete or finely fluted or quadrangular. When the plant is mature they are brown or reddish-purple in the herbaceous species and in the sulfriiticose species, brown to cream. In the latter there is usually a thick excoriating bark, at least at the base of the plant, The basal Jeaves are usually crowded and rosulate; they are always petiolate ane cather variable in shape of the blade which can be oblong or (ob-)ovate or elliptic to suborbieular. They ure sometimes entire or finely dentate, hut most commonly are lyrate-pinnatifid su thet the terminal lobe is the largest, the Jateral segments gradually decreasing in size towards the leaf base. Usually the basal Jeayes are less than 10 cur in length, but plants growing under favour- able conditions may have leaves as Jong as 20 cm. The lowermost cunline leaves may resemble the basal ones in shape but are always smaller, Towards the top of the stem they hecome still smaller and are shortly petivlate or sessile. These upper leaves are nsnally (ob-)ovate or elliptic and are usually entire or dentate although those of Arabidella cremigene and A. procumbens may be quite deeply divided. Four species of Arabidella have leaves. which are narrow and entire or bi-or tii-seet or even more intricately divided. ‘Three of these species are suffruticase: and never have basal Icaves, at Jeast not clustered in a rosette. The leaves in these species are usually rather fleshy and are often glaucons. The cauline leaves are solitary or fasciculate; they appear to be randomly seattered but the usual phyllotanis is 5/5. In no species are the leaves amplesi« caul or sagitlate. The flowers are borne or ebravteate TACCINES which are terminal on the stems, Tnitially the inflorescence appears corymbosc but after anthesis begins thy axis elongates and the infructescence is always racemose, The inflorescences vary in uumber of Howers, but there are rarely more than sixty, Arabidella trisecta often has a few buds below the lowermost fruits but this is rarely seen in any of the other species. Very often one sees inflorescences which appear to be basal or axillary asa result of stems failing to develop. The fruits which develop from the basal inflorescences are usually borne on pedicels somewhat longer than those of the upper racemes. An unusual case is that of Geococens pusillus which is essentially stermless and has basal inflorescences of very small but perfect flowers, After Howerme the fruit stalks elongate and turn downward, burying the fruit if the soil is soft enquh, ‘This species is usnally found in sandy soil but when vrowing in hurder soil the fruits are often only partly buried and misshapen- Screvey or Sysrearaic TREATMENTS oF Tur Crecirenarn wins Discussios oF THE CHARACTERS USED IN Cirncumscnipinc Taxa or INFRAFAMILIAL RANK A P. de Candolle (1821)—O, ER. Schtlz (1924, 1956): The first more or less modern system for the Cruciferwe was that of de Candolle in his Systema Naturale (1821). Here are recognized 95 genera distributed among 21 tribes in 5 subordines (subfamilies), His chief criterion for distinguishing the subfamilics was the arrangement of the cotyledons in yelation to the radicle, a character still thought to be of value in delimiting groups of infrafamilial rank. , AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE Iu The following subtamilies were recognised: (1) Pleurorhizeae (the vutylu- dons accumbent and flat); (ii) Notorhizeae (cotyledons incumbent and fat); (iii) Orthaploceae (the cutyledons incumbent, but longitudinally folded, the radicle lying in the sinus thus formed): (iv) Spirolobeae (the cotvledems incum- bent but spirally rolled upon themselves}; (v} Diplecolobeue (cotyleduns in- cumbent and twice toldecl transversely )- Within each subfamily the main criterion for delimiting tribes is the nature of the fruit (i.e., nnenmentum, lomentum, silicula or siliqua; latisept ar anpus- sept). For example, in subfamily Pleurerhiseae the tribes are (a) Plenro- rhiseae Siliquosae (Avabideae), b) P. Latiseptae (Alyssineaa), (ce) P. Angus- liseptae (Thlaspideae), (d) P. Nucamentaceae (Euclideae), (ce) P. Sepluluteue (Anastateeue), a group with dehiscent [rits in which the valves bear trans- verse processes on the inner side, and (f) P. Lementaceae (Cukilinese). in describing the tribes de Candolle also mentioned certain features al the seeds. but these do not affect the arrangement dictated by the nature of the fruit. For the circumscription of genera the characters are dirstly those of the fruit (tercte, angled or compressed; linear or non-linear; sessile vr stipitate ). Also nsed are the characters of the valves (convex or flattened, nerved or nerve less), the seeds (compressed or plump, biseviate or iniseriate) and the sepals (sieeate or not, calyx closed or open), Occasionally mentioned are features of the petals auc filaments. de Candolle eealized the artificiality of previous systems and hoped that he had produced a natural one, However, because of his reliance on only a few characters his system, too, was pubely artifeial, Still, Tayek 9h) considered it one wf the best produced to his time, its strength Iving in the faet that Churaeters derived from the seed were ised before those from the fruit, ‘his systan was (he basis for many whieh followed, incorporating. various modi- fivations, The first anajor work of Ferdinand Mueller was Plants Indigenous to the Colony of Victoria (1862) in which he used no characters not vse by de Cundolle in his treatment of the Crueiferae. Mueller here discussed only three genera relevant to the present work; that is, Sisyinibrivm (S. nasturtioides and 8. trisectumt), Blennodia (B. lasiocarpa, B. brevipes and B. eurvipes) and Capsella (C, blennolina), The muin distinguishing features in the deseriptions are drawn [rom the calyx (erect or spreading, saveate or not), the fruit (eylindrical or ellipsoid) and the seeds (aumerous or few, oniseriate or irregularly biseriate ). His chief veason for separating Sisymbrium from Blennodia was that the latter has mucose seeds, but it is surprising that Mueller dic not know that the seeds of both his S. nasturtioides und S. (elsectum are mucose. THe noted that Ssymbrium is most distinguished from Lrysinian by having fruits more vylin- drival than quadrangular, while Blennodia iy to he distinguished from Frystinen hy its mucilaginons testa. Capsella is set apart from all the zest by the firalts haying & rather low ratio of Jenuth to width, After de Candolle the first to treat the entire family were Benthayy and Huoker (1862) who, by using [ruit and seed characters, divided it into five series. The series were divided into ten tribes, these being separated Inv characters of the embryo and [niit and by arrangement of the seeds. Characters used for circumscribing gencra were, among others, sepals erect or spreading. basally saccate or equal, fruit terete or compressed, septum smooth or welikleat, and characters: und arrangement of the rete Blennodia, with six species, was included in the tribe Camelinene moder Series A, the plants in this series being deseribed as laving “Siliqua elongata v. fit) ELIZABETH oN. STEAW brevis, per totam longitudinem dehiseens, Valvae intus contimuiae, rarins septi- ferae, planae vy, concayac, nec septo contrarie compressae, septo cum valvis aequilate.” Among other gener pluced in Camelinede are Stenopetulum. Geecoecus and Menkea. After the generic description of Blennodia Bentham and Hooker remarked, "Genus vix a Capsella distinguendum”. This is surprising for Capsella is placed in the tribe Lepidineae under Series B, this series described as having “Siliqua brevis, pertotum Jongitudinem dehiscens. Valwac intus continnae, valde eaon- cavae, septo contrarie compressa, septum saepe angustissimum’™. In a ote they mentioned that “Siliquae valvae septo contrarie occurrunt etiam in... Blennodia . . . inter Camelineas’. Rentham and Uooker certainly noted the diversity of the species included in Blennodia and one wonders that they did not split the genus. With the possible exception of the production of mucus by the testa, they used no characters not used by de Candolle. The system was criticized by THitvek who pointed out that Bentham and Hooker knew a great maby more genera than did de Candolle, but were unable to produce a system which could be regarded as an improvement aver his. He felt tbat their use of fruit eharacters before those of the embryo was particularly unfortuuate for it split sume natural groups. In Bentham’s Flory Australiensis: (1863) the system followed is that of Bentham and Hooker although there is no division inta supra-generic groans. Bentham included in Blennordin ull the species then described (cleyen). “The eunerie characters used are those used in the Genera Plantaram — in fact, the descriptions are essentially those of the carlice werk, Of Blennodia Benthun remarked that it is “differing from Sisynibrinm, bo which some species have heen referred, by the seeds never so completely overlapping each other as to form a single rew, and gencrally in the copious mules of the seeds; which is, however, vot constant in all the species. Fran Capsella it differs in the longer pod. and in the dissepiment broader in pro- portion to the transverse diameter of the pod.” Bentham’s inclusion of these cloven species in Blennodlie is not hetter than Mucller’s distribution of them imong Leysimum, Sisymbrium and Blennodit. Thoy differ from Sisymbrinn (in ity modern delimitation) in having mucose Ne eds, Erysimum has a closed calyy wid lateral glands which completely encirele the shorter stamens; the first feature is seen also in Blennodia canescens aud B. plerosperma. bath of which hive, hawever, lateral glands open on the intericr These cleven species differ xo much among themselves that it is diffiew! to imagine that Benthaer who saw quite good material of these plants eould have considered thea congeneric Alter Bentham and Hooker the next major treatment of the family as a whol was that done by Prantl for the first edition of Die naturlichen PAanzen- lamidien (1890). Between 1563 and 1890 there appeared only a few general discussions ol the Ceneiferae, such as those of Baillon (1872) and Pomel (1S83)_ aud treat- ments of various regional Horas: but none of these modified the treatment of the Australian genera or, with a few exceptions, used any characters not used hy de Candolle and by Bentham und Hooker, Velenovsky in 1883 put forth wo system for the family in which te essen- tilly ignored the Joug-used embryo character's, but introdueed the nature of the nectaries as a character of imyportanus These ghinds had long bear recox- AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CHUCIERAAL ltt mzed as being of some systematic walue, but Velenovsky was the first to use them in delimiting major divisions of the family. Unfortunately, he investi guted only a comparatively few genera, none of these being Australian. After Velenovsky, Prantl was the first to break away entirely fram de Candolle’s system — not, however, with always happy results. Prantl pointed out that use of de Candolle’s characters of fruit and embryo produces an artificial system, widely separating very similar genera, Te also complained that use of fruit characters tended to separate related genera, noting that “siliqua” and “silieula” are variable concepts and useful only within certain limits; he also ¢riticized the concept of “angustisept” and “latisept” as used by de Candolle. Prantl meant that these characters can be misleading if used in making major divisivus of the family; they are certainly essential in circumseribing groups of lower rank, Prantl admitted that although it was easy to criticize de Candolle’s system, it was equally difieult to construct a new one, He felt it his duty to find new characters and thought he had done so by using the structure of the stigma (i.e., capitate or bilobed). Other characters that he considered useful were arrangement Of the nectaties, branching of the hairs and disposition of the epidermal cells of the septum. By these he characterized individual “Verwandt- schaftkreise” or tribes. To arrange the tribes inte a natural system he used some further characters: the biseriate arrangement of the seeds he considered to be the most primitive, also treating the dehiscent, two-valved, many-seeded fruit as more primitive thao the indehiscent, few- or one-seeded fruit, Prantl complainecl that he found this construction of a system especially difficult because he lacked material from trupioal areas and trom temperate regions in_the Southern Hemisphere, areas where he supposed the most primitive of the forms to occur. Still Prantl thought that he had constructed rather natural subtribes, but admitted to having difficulty in expressing the relationships among them; he did, however, present a table in which various phylogenetic lines are tentatively shewn, Hayek criticized sharply Prantl’s system, especially objecting to his use of characters of pubescence in delimiting tribes. As Mayek pointed out, the absence vr presence of hairs, and the branching of them or the lack of if, are useful characters only at the specific or generic level The division of all the known genera of Cruciferae into two groups on the basis of the ocetuwrence vf simple or branched hairs tends to widely separate some closely related genera, Furthermore, Prantl placed too little reliance on characters of fruit and seed; this led to unlikely groupings, such wy the inclusion of Sisymbrium and Cakile in the subtribe Sisymbriinae. Prant!’s table showing probable phylogenetic lines Havek dismissed as fantasy and he culled the series Lepidiinae-Sisymbriinae- Vellinae “ein phylogenetisches Unding”™. Tn circumscribing gencra Prantl used no new clwracters, relying on such things as presence or absence of the septum, nature ot the calyx and the arrange- nent of the epidermal cells of the septum, There seems to lave beea oa particnlar criticism of his generic concepts. In Prantl's syste Blennodia, said to include eleven species, and Geocaccts ate placed with sixteen other genera of uncertain position, He mentioned B. frisecla Benth. as being glabrous, B. eremigena Benth. as having simple hairs, and B. lastocarpa as having branched hairs, but said that le lad been able ta study only scanty material of the glabrous species. 1az KLIZABETIT A, SHAW Prantl commented that the stigma suggests thal of the Thelypodieue, de- scribed 2s “ringsum gleich entwickelt”, but added that he could not decide if such diversity in pubescence could occur in a single genus. Prantl's tribe Thelypodieae includes such genera as Pringles, Streplanthus, Wexaptera and Chomira, none of which show any real resemblanee ty plants of the Blennodia group. OF Geoeoceus Prant) said only that it seemed to be related to Blennodia. In his description of the genus he mentioned a form with erect stems and the appearance of a Cardamine; this is probably based on a misunderstanding of Bentham’s remark that G, pusillus could perhaps be a form of Blennodia cardauminoides, There have been only a few attempts to construct for the Cruciferae a system based on anatomical characters. The most ambitious was that of Schweindler (1905) based on the work uf Heinricher (1886) who divided the family into five groups according te the orientation of the myrosin cells in the leaves. Schweindler investigated more genera and suggested three major gromps, ie. Exo-Idioblastac, in which the myrosin cells are exclusively in the mesophvil and contain chlorophyll, Endo-Idioblastae, in which the myrosin tubes are free of chlorophyll and are closely associated with the vascular bundles, and Hetero- Idiohlastue, with both sorts of myrosin cells. These three groups are equivalent to subfamilies; the last includes only the tribe Isatidinae, but the Exo-Idio- blastae are divided among eight tribes and the Endo-Idioblastae among five. Schweindler’s work is commented upon at some length by Hayek who said. that these groups certainly should not stand at the rank Of subfamilies. although the orientation of these cells seemed to be of some value in charac terizing smaller groups. Hayek's main objection to Schweindler’s use of this character was that it separated tan widely closely related groups. Tlayek himself devised i method of investigating these cells in herbarium inuterial, and in most of his descriptions of genera and of vroups of hivher rank, mentioned their position in the leaf, but they seem to have had no great part in influencing his delimitations of groaps of any rank, Hayek's own system (1911) was the first truely natural one and a marked impruvement on that of Prantl He knew 23] vwenera which were divided among ten tribes, most of which include vevehul subtribes. The characters which Hayck used ta delimit groups of supra-geveric vank are chiefly drawn from the fruit, the nectaries. the myrosin cells, the stigma and the epidermal cells of the septum. tle greatly reduced Prantl’s list of genera of uncertain position, having only for such. One of these was Geovoceus which, he suggested, might be inchided in his tribe Schisopetalae, in Hayek's system this tribe includes five subtribes, une heing Stenoperalinge, and stunds near the beginning of the system, being placed in a direct evolutionary line from the Thelypodicae which are the most primitive tribe, Blennodia, apparently including the eleven species mentioned by Prantl, Ilayek with some misgivings placed in his Arabideae-Sisymbriinae, together with such genera as Sisymbelum, Descurainia, Alyssopsis and Chrysochamela He remarked that the genus was too little known for him to be certain of its place in the system, bot that it very probably belonged here. Unfortunately, Ihevek was unable to see material of more than three species, Arabidella triseeta, Harmestadoxa brevipes, and H. blernodioides, but this was. enough to convince AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 1A him that the venus should be split. He was impressed by the diversity of trichome types in Blennodia (senstt Bentham) and twice noted that it was unlikely that they could be found in a single genus, [He also commented on the difference in nectaries between A. trisecta, on the one hand, and H. brevipes and HW. blennodicides on the other, Hayek suggested that the capitate stigma indicated some relationship with the Thelypodieae, but concluded that Blennoclia included Australian represen- tatives of the Sisymbritnae which are only rather distantly related to the other genera in this subtribe. Hayek's system, by far the best produced to that lime, was lightly dis- missed by Scholz (1936) who mfiektel the criticism made by Thellung (1913) that it was further removed from the practical requirements of determination than was Prantl’s system. This criticism, which implies some defect inherent in the system, is not justified, To support his criticism Thellung presented Hayek’s conspectus, which gives the main features of tribes and subtribes and is not intended for purposes of determination, together with Prantl's dichotomous key to tribes and sub- tribes, The key is naturally better adapted to determinations than is the cOnspectys. Hayck's system fs, by far, more nearlw natural than is Prantl’s and it is only unfirtunate that he did not construct u key; it should also be noted that Hayek's paper is of value for his survey, with criticisms, of earlier treatments of the Cruciferae. O, E. Schulz, (1924, 1936): The genus Blennodia (sensu Bentham) was finally split wheu O. E. Schulz (1924) published the revision of the tribe Sisywbriede uf “Das PHanzenreich”. Ifere the eleven species known to Bentham and Prantl are, with three sub- sequently described ones, distributed among the following nine genera: Blen- nodia R.Br. (B, canescens R.Br.); Arahidella (FvM.)Sehulz (A, trisecta ('vM.) Schulz); Pseudarabidella Schulz (P. filifolia (vM.)Schulz); Drabastram Schulz, (D. alpestre (FvM.)Sehulz); Harmsiodoxa Schulz (H. blennodioides (FvM.)Schulz, H. brevipes (FVM,)Schulz, H. cunninghamii ( Benth.) Schulz); Micromystria Schulz (M_ nasturtiun (FvM.)Schulz, M, eremigena (FvM.) Schulz): Scambopus Schulz (8. curvipes (F¥M.)Schulz, S. richardsii (FvM.) Schulz); Pachymitus Schulz (P. cardaminoides rete Sohal P. lucae (FyvM) Schulz); Lemphoria Schule (L. procumbens (Tate)Schulz), Included with these is Geococeus Drumm, ex, Harv. (GC. pusillus Drumm. ex Hary.), Eight of these genera, including Blennodia itself, as well as Geococeus, are placed in the subtribe Arabidopsidinae Schulz which iy chietly distinguished from the other subtribes. by the fact that its seeds are mucose, Arubidella (Fy) Schulz is in the subtribe Sisymbriinae only because Schulz believed its seeds to he non-mucose. Schulz cémmented on the diticullics of determining generic limits when good distinctive characters are not known, THowever, be concluded that tho Sisymbrieae form a very natural group which, by use of “oft sibtile Charaktere”. van be divided amang six subtribes. In doing su characters such as the yrien- tation of the necturies, size of the sceds, nature of the testa, possession of glan- dulur hairs and division of the leaves are useful, It may he noted that these last two characters, possession of glandular haiys and of hipinuatipartite lowes, serve to separate the subtribe Descurainiinae from the othurs. léd ELIZABETH A, SAAW Schulz continued to say Uat in delimiting genera he used all constant vharavters, especially those of the more important organs, and mentioned that amon these are the number of ovules, size of the stigma, nature of the fruit. nervabon of the septum and presence of a wing on the seed, Other characters used by Schulz, as drawn from his generic descriptinns, are position of the calyx (erect or spreading), presence or absence of a median nectary, details of the septum (smooth or rugulose), type of pubescence and dissection of the leaves. For delimitation of species, Schulz relied mainly on details of the flowers and fruit as well as on differences in habit and details of pubescence and leaf dissection. In Sehulz’s inal work on the Cruciferae, the monograph of the family far the second edition of Die natiirlichen PHunzenfamilien (1936), his dispositivu of these genera is the same except that Blennodia is removed from the tribe Sisymbricae to the Hesperideac. The essential differences between these tribes are that the Sisymbrieae have sepals almost always spreading and a stigma described as depressed-capitate or, sometimes, bilahed, while the Mesperidewe have sepals erect and a stigma which is bilubed, the lobes sometimes heing surpidial, These things being so, Blennodia certainly fits more naturally into the latter tribe, and it is precisely by these characters that it differs inst sharply from the other Australian genera, In circumscribing these new genera Schulz made very astute use of a wide range of morphological characters —it must be noted that nowhere did he use the anatomical feature of the myrosin cells and, in fact, did not meution therm in any of his descriptions. Although Schulz saw only a very limited amount of material his treatment nf the Australian Cruciferae is good. These yenera can easily be recognized in a subjective, intuitive manner, but it is more difficult to express clearly the differences among them and to show why they should be separated. In this Schulz was remarkably suecesstul. Blennodia is well distinguished by its having a closed calyx and tectifarm stigma, the other genera having an open calyx and a more or less depressed- capitate stigma. The other eight genera ure distinguished one from the uther by varying combinations of characters which are often subtle, although, aceord- inz to Schulz, Arabidella is immediately set apart by having non-mucose seeds, Of the remaining genera, none can be said to have any one striking and distine- tive feature, Among the characters which seem, in Schuls’s treatrnent, ta be of most importance in this group are shape and colour of the petals, nature of the filaments (linear or basally expanded), presence or absence of the median clarids, details of the structure of the Jateral plunds. number of ovules per ovary, shape of the fruit (e.g,, linear or ellipsoid). hubit and, to some extent, the nature of the fruiting pedicels. Unfortunately, Schulz’s descriptions of Scambopus and Pseudarabidella ace rather short because he saw only some drawings sent him from Kew and hal to rely on these and on the deseriptions of Mueller and of Benthau. Schulz described no new species in this group, but did deseribe two new vurietics, one in Arabidella. triseota and one in Pachymitus cardaminoides. Neither of these is “gend”; both were published because Schulz had seen insufficient material tn quite appreciate the range of variation within these species. AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CKUCINERAE 165 ft must be emphasized that Schulz made a great move forward in splitting the genus Blennodia (sensu Bentham), There are certainly some inaccuracies in his descriptions, and, in some cases, the generic limits must be modified, but these are only the result of his haying seen such a small amount of material. In the present révision two new spécies and a new yariety in another species are recognized, but Schulz had probably seen no representatives of any of these newly-deseribed tuxa. Schulz’s system was criticized by Janchen (1942) who pointed ont that Sehulz paid litle attention to (ie principles set out by Havek for the construc- tion of a phylogenetic system for this family. Janchen’s criticisms of Schulz's work are entirely at the jevel of the supra-generic groupings. However, the present work is concerned chiefly with generic circumscriptions and Janchen did not criticize Schulz’s work in this respect. The writer herself is not qualified to judge Schulz’s delimitation of tribes and subtribes und so must wecept his majer groups, Present revision: On the whole, the criteria used in circumscribing the genera and the species differ ttle from those used hy Schulz. It is often difficult to delimit groups of any rank in this family and snbtle differences must be used, Characteristics mf any plant organ may be usetul, bot they are not all of equal taxonomic valuc. Most useful in circumscribing genera in the group here studied are shape of the fruit (lineur or fusiform, terele or compressed), nature of the nectaries, position of the sepals (erect or spreading), nature of the stigma (tectiform or depressed-capitate), and the sort of mucus exuded by the testa, this last a character which, to the writer's knowledge, has not been used before. For example, the fact that the mucus exuded by seeds of Arabidella species is clear helps to distinguish this genus from Scambopus and Harmsiodoxa in whieh each exndate of mucus appears to contain a spirally coiled thread, In delimiting species details of fruit (sesstle ov stipitate), seeds (plimp or fattened, winged or winglcss), habit (suffruticose or herbaceous, erect or prostrate), size and shape of the Hora) organs, pubescence (glabrous or phbescent, hairs erect or appressed, distribution pattern of differing surts of hairs on the fruit valves), and leaves (entire or Gisect or pinnatisect) have been used, With the exception of the tvpe of mucus exuded by the testa these charac- ters have heen used before. However, although the characters used are not new, the resulls, id some respects, are. One must agree with Schulz that Blennodia stands. well apart from all the other Australian Cruciferae and it is now difficult to imagine that any other of these species could have been included in Blennodia. For the present Schulz’s svstem must he accepted and this genus seems more likely to belong in the tribe Hesperideac than in the Sisymbrieac. Of Schulz’s new genera, Drabastruim, Scambopus and Pachymitus must stand almost us he circumscribed them, except that from the latter two genera one species each is removed. Each of these genera is monospecific and within this group stands somewhat isolated. Harmsiodoxa still includes three species, but one is newly-described and H. cunninghamii has been shown to be uw synonym of H. blennodioides. Wt L6G ELIZABRTIT A, SHAW mnat he admitted that Scanbapus is closely related to Harmsiodoxa and some would probably join these two genera, However, 8, curvipes differs from the three species of Harmsiodoxa im having median glands, the fruit quadrangular rather than terete or slightly Jatisept, and pedicels recurved rather than somie- what spreading. These differences seem enough to warrant retaining Scam- bopus as a distinct genus. Drabastrtn resembles Scambopus in having many features in common with Hurmsiodoxa, but it too differs in fruit and in the sort of mucus exnded by the testa. In all species of Harmsiodoxa the mucus is of the sort in which each exudate appears ta contain a grey thread; in Drabastrem the roucus is clear. For these reasons, and because of the geographical and ecological isolation of D, alpestre, it seems more realistic to maintain it as a distinct gents, Geococcus (G. prsillus only) is maintained. It may be related to Pachy- mitus and does resemble this genus in some ways, but it is certainly not to he considered a mere forty of P, cardaminoides. The Jargest of the genera is Arubidella, including six species. Pseucdura- bide filifolia (FVM, )Schulz is so much like A. triseefa that it seems impossible to maintain them in distinct genera, The seeds of A. trisecta are mucose to the sate degree as are those of P. filifolia; this knowledge removes the only differ- ence between these genera in Schulz's treatment, J. M, Black (1937) commented that most of the collections of P. filifolia liad Jeuves trisect rather than entive, the “typical form" being rather rare. This lorm which has trisect leaves and also differs from the “typical form” in having fruits more often ellipsoid rather than linear, as well as in some other ‘espects, has been sepurated us a distinct species, A. vlaticescens. The species included by Schulz in Wieromystria and Lemphoria have, in the present revision, heen also included in Arabidella. These species are her- baceaus and differ considerably in habit from the suffruticnse A, trisecfa, A. flifolia. and A, slaucescens, but the resemblances between these groups are strong enoneh to make it certain that they all belong in the genus Arabidella. The relationships within this genus are discussed with the general diseussion of these specius,, (EF Schulz’s division of the family be accepted, Blennodin must remain in the tribe Hesperideae and the other genera, including Arabidella, in Hie Sisym- bricae-Arabidapsidinae. These genera are distinct, one frum the other, but have enough characters in common to warrant their inclusion i this subtrihe, MAtTERTAL INVESTIGATED Specimens from the following private and State herbaria have been examined: A, C. Benuglehole, Gorate West, Victoria (BEAUGLEHOLSE ); State Herbatiom of South Australia, Adelaide {AD); Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide (ADW): Botunisches Museum, Berlin-Dablem (B); British Museum (Natural Tlistory), London (BM); Botanic Museum and Herbarium, Brisbane (BRE); C.5.01R.0., Divisions of Plant Iudiustry und Land Reseurch and Regional Survey, Canberra (CANB); Herbarium, Royal Botanics Gardens, Kev (K); National Herbarium of Victoria, Melbourne (MEL); University of New Tnoglaucd, Anni- duke, NOW. (NE); Aniaal Industry Branch, Northern Territory Administration, Alice Spritigs. N.T. (NT); National Herbarium of New South Wales. Sydney. (NSW): State Heibariin of Wester: Australia, Perth( PERTH); Herbarium, School of Biological Sciences. Uyiversity of Sydney (SYD); Naturhnstorisches Musemm, Wien (W). Tu all, 1,224 sheets were seen, but for most specics only a selection of the plants examined {2 eitud in order ty iudieate the known geographical distribution. Locality, date of collection AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC CENERA OF CRUCIFERAL 167 and collector's name are cited; when any of this information is not known, its absence is indicated by a question mark. The following herbaria are cited as holders of duplicates from AD: Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge, Massachusetts (GH); Rijksherbarium, Leiden, Netherlands (lJ; Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Laboratoire de Phanérogamie. Paris (P); Rancho Santa Ana Botanic Garden, Claremont, California (RSA); Botanical Institute, Tokyo (TT): Herbarium of the University of California, Berkeley, California (UC): Botanisches Garten und Museum der Universitit Zurich, Zarich, Switzerland (Z), Key To Tre Cenera or CxtcireRAE Wirth DeHISCENT Frurrs axp INCUMBENT COTYLEDONS WHICH ARE NOW KNOWN IN AUSTRALIA 1, Fruit compressed dorsi-ventrally or terctc, valves flat or rounded, septum broad. 2. Fruit usually 4-angled, valves with prominent nerve, 3. Fruit linear, leaves amplexicaul Conringia* 3. Fruit fusiform, leaves not aunplexicanl 4, Fruiting pedicels spreading Drabastrum 4, Fruiting pedicels recurved Scambopus 2. Fruit rounded or flattened, valves with nerve distinet to ohsolete 5. Scods mucose 6. Fruit oboevoid, cauline leaves sagittate Camelina® 6. Fruit linear to fusiform, cauline leaves nol sagittate 7. Petals drawn into slender point Stenopetalum 7, Petals obtuse 8 Sepals erect, stigma 2-lobed or tectiform Blennodia 8 Sepals spreacling, stigina capitate 9. Plant prostrate, fruit buried Geococcus 9, Plant erect, fruit aerial 10. Plants glabrous, papillose or with simple hairs Arabidella 10. Plants with branched. hairs lL. Fruit fusiform Harmsiodoxa Ll. Fruit linear Pachymitus 5, Seeds nol mucose 12, Prnit Jinvar, septum filly developed Sisymbrium® 12, Frait spherical lo obovnid, septuan reduced to a narrow rin Menkea 1. Fruit compressed Jaterally, valves very couves or keeled, septum narrow 13. Fruit liner Arabidella 13. Fruit orbienar to ovate or obcordate 14. Fruit notched at summit 15. Ovary with ca. 100-200 ovules Carinacalea 15. Ovary with fewer than LOO ovules 16, Ovary with 2 ovules Lepidium 16. Ovary with ca, 10-30 ovides Capsella 14. Fruit entire at summit 17. Fruit valves rounded Cuphonotus 17. Fruit valve. keeled or winged 18 Ovary with ca, 100-200 ovules Carinavaloa 18. Ovary with ca. 10-25 ovides Hymenolobus N.B.; The genera marked by an asterisk are those represented in Australia by introduced species only; genera in bold are those treated in this revision, 168 LLIZABETTHT A, SHAW Blennodia R.Br, (Brevwesns = mucose: the seeds are mucose when moistened ) R, Briwn im Sturt, Exped. 2(1849)67; FvM. Pl. Col. Viet. 1(1862)40, Benth. & Hook., Gen, Pl. 1(1862)61,82; Benth, Pl Austral, 1( 1863)73; Prantl, PAfam. 3( 1891 )204; Builey, Qld, Flora 1(1899)46; Havek, Heih. Rot. Centvalbl, 27( 1911) 167,186,325; Maiden & Betche, Cens. NSW. PI. (1916) 83; Black, Fl. S. Austral. (1924 )246; Schulz, Pireh, 86(1936)265; Schuly, PAfam.ed2 17b(1936)571; Black, Fl. S$. Austral. ed.2(1948)374, Type species: Blennodia canescens R.Br. Description: Calyx closed; sepals erect or very slightly spreading, usually green, Jess often lavender, with a narrow pink or colourless hyaline margin, on abaxial side sparsely pubescent with shortly stipitate branched hairs; lateral sepals narrowly oblong, usually slightly wider than the median, basally saceate. distally tapering and acute to subacute; median sepals narrowly éblonz to obovate, not basally succate or, rarely, slightly so, distally tapering gently and rounded ty truncate, Petals about twice as long as the sepals, white te lavender, with distinct blade and claw; blades oblong to obovate, entire or sinuate, rounded or truncate, often retuse or emarginate. finely veined, tapering into a more or less linear claw about as long as or slightly longer than the blade, Stamens 6, erect, filaments linear or dilated toward the base, sometimes distinctly winged, the filaments of the diagonal stamens often unequally widened, the ereuter width being on the luteral side of the vein, white ov pink; anthers ubleng, ubtuse, yellow. Lateral vlands each surrounding the base of a lateral stamen, horseshoe- or vee-shaped, open on the interior; median glands snuall, triangular, one on cither side of the median line or, if more fully developed, forming a thinly torose ridge at the base of the diagonal stamens. Pistil not stipitate, eylindrical, densely tomentose with shortly stipitate irregularly branched hairs, rarely with a few simple hairs: ovules hiseriate on slender pendulous funicles, ca, 20-40 per cell; style linea, stomt, short or obsolete: stizma fleshy, depressed-capitate or, as seen from the median line, tectiform, broadce than the style. Fruit bilocular, bivalved, dehiscent, not stipitate, linear, clongate aud straight. terete or slightly flattened dorso-ventrally, there- fore, latisept; celvex convex or Aat, with a distinct midnerve and a fine network of more or Jess parallel anastomosing veins, often somewhat constricted be- tween the seeds, hrown or reddish-purple, sparsely to densely pubescent with sessile ar shortly stipitate branched hairs, proximally rounded to truncate, distully rommded; style linvar to broadly obconical, sometimes yreatly thickened and almast spherical or obsolete; sligme capitate or tectiform, usually centrally de- pressed, usually purple, often not as wide as the style. Septum white or colorur- less, apaque or transIncent, sometimes fenestrate at the distal end, with median nerve, smooth or rugose; funicles short, triangular to linear, usually slightly curved, sometimes falcate. Seeds subbiseriate. ca. 20-40 per cell, broadly elliptic, plump or dattened, wingless or surrounded by a membranous wing; testa light galden-brown to dark brown, finely papillose, when moistened, mucose, the mucus exuded as discrete spiral threads, thus appearing radiate; embryo exactly natorrhizal, the radiele slightly longer than the ectyledons. Plant annyal, herba- ceuus, usually many-stemmed, erect, canescent or tomentose with simple or frregnlarly Iranched hairs; slems arising from a basal rosette of leaves, equal or with a leafless or almost so centra) stem and leafy decumbent lateral stems, these often branched, the sccondary stems sometimes reduced to the terminal inflorescence. Basal leaves vosulate, obovate to oblong, pinnatifid or, less often, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CATIFERAL 169 entire, tapering into slender petioles. Canuline leaves seattered, obovate ta elliptic, entire or remotely dentate, rarely pionatifid, usually sessile, occasionally on a short lincar to cuneste petiole. Root a slender taproot. Inflorescences ebructeate, terminal on stems, dense, initially corymbose but after anthesiz elongating and then racemose; buds jnst before anthesis oblong; flowering pedicels sometimes tather stout, erect or spreading or recurved; fruiting pedicels ereet to spreading or recurved. Two species in semi-arid parts of he Northern ‘Verritery, South Austrailiz, Queensland and New South Wales, Key to the species of Blennodlia: A Fruiting pedicels erect, seeds plump 1, B. canescens A Fruiting pedicels recurved, seeds fattened oe 2. B. pteraspernut Relationships; The genus Blennodlia is not closely related to any other Aus- tralian members of the family. In technival chatacters fhis genus has most in common with sume species of Hesperis 1, and Blennodia certainly fits more nalurally into the tribe Hesperidede than into the Sisymbrlede, 1. Blennodia canescens R.Br, (canescetts = hoary; the dense puhescence gives the plant a hoary appearance) R. Brown in Sturt, Exped. 2(1849)67; FvM.. Enum. Pl Gregory (1859)4; FyM., Rep. Babb. Exped. (1859)7; Benth., Fl. Austral. 1(1863)76; ‘Tate, Trans. Roy, Suc. $8, Aust, 22( 1898) 123; Bailey, Qld, Flora 1(1899)48; Black, Vrans. Roy, Soe. §. Aust. 39(1915)830; Maiden & Betche, Coens. N.S.W. PI. (1916)83, Ising, Trans. Roy, Soc. 5S, Aust, 46(1922)597; Black, Fl 8. Austral. (1924)248: Schulz, Pilych. 86(1924)266; Murray, Trans. Ruy. Soc. S, Aust, 55(1933)105; Black, Trans, Rov. Soe, S, Aust, 61(1937)243; Black, Fl. S. Austral. ed.2(1948)376, Jessup, Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust. 74(1951) 244,245,262; Chippendale, Trans. Ruy, Soc, §, Aust, §2(1959)329,— Sisymbrium. blennodia FvM., Fragm. 7(1869)20 [non Sisymbrium canescens Nutt,, Gen. Am 2(1818)68]— Enysimum blennodia (FvM.)FvM,, Fragm. 10 (1876)78 [non Lrysineen canescens Moench, Meth. Suppl. (1'794)86), Tate, Trams. Roy. Sow. $, Aust. 3¢ 1880)31; KyM., Cetstis 1(1682)5; Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust. 6( 1883) LOL; Winnecke, Trans Roy. Soe, $, Aust, 8(1886) 10; FvM.. Trans. Roy. Soe. $. Aust. 9(1887)213; ‘Tate, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 12(1889)71; I’vM., Sec, Consus 1(1889)9; Tate, TL §, Austral, (1890) 16,206; FvM., Trans. Roy. Soo, S. Aust 13(1890)96; FvM. & Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe. $. Aust. 19(1896)335; Koch, Trans. Roy, Suc, $, Aust, 22( 1898 ) 103, Both Sthymbrian blennodia PvM. ard Erysimume hlennodia (EvM.) FeM.. are nomencluural synonyms of Blennaadia canescens R.Br, these uames being based on the same type. Figures: Schulz, Pareh, 86(1924)fiy.53; Schuly, Péfam. ed. 17b(1936) fiy.347; Blake, Proc, Roy, Soe, Qld, 49( 1938 )fiz, 23; Figure LA, B, E-L. Deseription, Plant herbaceous annual cancscent with sessile or shartly sUipitate stellate or ircegularly branched hairs; root a slender taproot; stems few ta many, to about 50cm, erect, terete or, often, finely fluted, more or less Jeafy. offen veddish-purple, arising from a basal rosette of leaves, Basal leaves to J2em in length, sinnate-pirmatifid with 2-5 lobes per side, the labes more or less linear and obtuse to subacute; more rarely entire or with a few small teeth, these leaves usually linear to narrowly spathulate; leaves tapering into a Jony slender pehole. Cauline leaves 3-5 [-7]em in length, broadly linear or spathu- late, vsually entire or with a few teeth per side, obtuse to subacute, sessile or on a cuneate base, or, more rarely, shortly petiolate, Inflorescences \sually 70 ELIZABETH A, SHAW 10-25-flowered, dense, then elongating after anthesis; flowering pedicels 3-10 [-l5]mim in length, rather stout, erect to slightly spreading; buds oblong-ovate, almost oblong just hefore anthesis. Sepals ‘oblong to obovate, green or, especially in northern material, lavender, usually with a narrow hyaline margin; lateral sepals [4:7-| 52-60 [-6-5]mm Jong, [1:2-] 1°5-1-8 [-2-O]mm wide, average ratio length to width 3:4:1, usually more or less oblong, acute to subacute, basally saccate; median sepals [4+4-] 5-0-5-5 [-5-S8]mim long, [O-9-] 1-2-1-7 [-2:'1Jmm wide, average ratio length to width 3-8:1, usually morc or less oblong, tapezing distally and obtuse, not, or only very slightly, basally saceate, Petals about twice as Jong as the sepals, ca, 9-5-13-Omm long, clawed; blades ca. 3-0-6-7 x 2:0-3-7mm, ratio length to width 1-°3:1-2+5:1, average [-7:1, uhlony to broadly cuneate, apically rounded, tromeate or emar- inate, tapering into a move or less linear claw, often winged, usually slightly onger than the blade, blade averaging 44 per cent of the total petal length: petals white, pink or lavender, the last seen especially on orthern material, in sicco yellowish to dark brown. Lateral stamens [4°7-] 5°3-6-0 [-6-5]mm long, filaments usually more or less linear, O-4-1-0mm. wide, green to pink; anthers 1/6-2°3mm long, average 2-Omm, rectangular, obtuse, yellow; diagenal stamens [6-5-] 7-0-8:Omm long, filaments 0-5-0-Smm wide, linear or widened toward the base, the widening being greater on the laterul side of the vein; anthers 1-2-2-Onm long, average 1-61, oblong, obtuse, yellow. Pisti! 40-65 mm long, cylindrical, not stipitate or in a short linear stipe, densely tomentose with yery short hairs: style obsolete or short and linear, crowned with a fleshy tectiform or capitate stigma, this usually depressed; nectaries as in generic description, usually well-developed, bright wreen. Fruiting pedicels |4-] 8-13 [-(GJmr long, 0:4-0+7 [-1-0]mm. averaging (6mm in diameter, rather stout, spreuding to erect; fruit [1-3-| 2-5-4-0 [-5-5Jem long, septum L-4-2:3mm wide, usually less than 2-Onim; valves with distinct but not prominent nerve, usually nof constricted between seeds, rather densely pubescent, proxioially usually truncate, distally rounded to subacute, style [2°0-] 2+5-4: 0mm, linear or brouwdly ohvenical or so thickened as to be almost spherical; stigma tectiform or sorac- times reduced and appearing depressed-capitate, usnally purple; septten white. usually opaque and rugulose with median nerve, the epidermal cells being square to oblong, sometimes irregukuly pentagonal, with straight or slightly curved walls; funicles to about O-Simim in Jength, more or less linear to broadli triangular, usually slightly ctrved, pendulous, Seeds ea. 171-155 0°7-1-Omu. subbiseriate, ca. 20-40 per cell, oval, phimp, wingless or occasionally with a small obtusely triangular wing at the distal end; testa golden- to dark-hrown, usually with 2 darker area at the hilum. when muistened, exuding a radiate mucus ta Boum wide, the mucus emerging as a distiact spiral thread from enel papilh m the testa as soon as moistened: enebryo with radicle same length or slightly longer than the cotyledons; average thickness of embryos front soaked seeds {) 44mm. Tyrm Locautty; “Loedy arennsis we ‘ 2 4 (FyM.) Benth, Fl. Austral. 1(1863)74 “cremigera”; Bailey, Qld. Flora 1(1899)47; Maiden & Betche, Cens. NS.W. Pl. (1916)83; Black, Fl. S. Austral. (1929)687; Johnson et Cleland, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 67(1943) 14; Eardley, Trans. Roy, Soc, $. Aust, 70(1946)162— Micromystria eremigend {FvM.)Sehulz, Pirch. 86( 1924 )264. The aboye names ace nomenclatural synonyms of Arahidella eremigend, being biased on the same type. Figures: Figure 6. TrpirtcaTion: With the orytnal description are mentioned collections made hy Sir Thomas Mitchell on the Balonne River in southern Queensland and by Dr. Beekler “prope Bamamero” on the Darling River in New Soutli Wales. OF the Milchell eollevuons available the only one which it seems certain that Mueller sawis MEL 772, collected at "Ballomi: [P] Ceustern subtropied! Australia)” anc dated November 2), L846, Of Beckler's collections from Banianery [Panuimaroo, nedr Menince, NS.W.T only) (wo ave tn MEL, and it as probable that they were seem by Mueller. From these three the Mitchell calleetion has been chosen as lectotype for it is a better specimen thi the others and is representative of a considerable part of the total collections of this species, Mueller wrote “Siliqnie Hel" longa, Sf" * Inti’) but hath the Balonne River plant and those four Paonia have fruits about & inch dome said on Hiese plants the writer hag seen none approaching ooo tneh in length. Otherwise the plants agres with the deswripliou, Dexseription: Plant probably annual. raany-stenmaed, pubescent. including sepals and ovary, with erect or appressed siinple hans; roof slender, usually ei, Lomm diameter, but to Bamms stems to ca. 33-cem, but as short as 5 cm, usually fervle. less ofteu quadranyvelar oc otherwise angled, arising: from a basal rosette of jeaves, usally erect, sometimes decumbent or prostrate, often much branched, vsually equal or thy central stern lealless and shorter toan the leafy lateral stems. sornetimes much reduced. Basal ledies to oa. 6 ern. usuathy obovate and vinnatifid with 4-5 lubes per side, these more or less lincar aud usindly entire I sometimes remotely dentate or with secondary lobes, the Lerminal lobe nisually narrowly spathulate; the leaves rarely spathulate and entire; Teaves lnpering into a slender petiole about as lone as the blade. Canline leaves to et doom. but asnally less thin 2 oem, usually pirmctifid with ld lobes per side, these apposite or allermite. spathalite or Tivear, straight or faleateonurved, ronnded to smbacate, sometimes finely derate ar with small deeth in te sinuses, the terminal lobe lnewr er ohovate to narrowly spatlulate, entire or with 1 or 2 sinall teeth, rounded to subdcnte: leaves sessile to very shortly petiolate. Tu- flevescences to about 45-Mowered, dense. after anthesis elongating to ea. 15 em. dewasionally with seatlered buds below the lowermost flowers, sometimes busal ar avillirvoas resalt of vomdevelopment of stems. buds more or less spherical. Sepals oblong, green op lavender with a narrow hyaline, colourless or lavender miitgin, often, persistent below the young frait: lateral sepals ca. 1-9-2°8 vim lore. ca O-7-1-4 mim wide, average 2-3 8 1-0 inra, the ratio length ta width 1G:1-3-6:1, distully subacute, seldom rounded: medlin sepals ca, 2-0-3-0 min Jong, ca. O-S-1+3 mm wide, average 2 0 x 1-0 mor, the ratio length to width 1821-2831, distully rounded to subuente, sometimes slighth encullate. Petuls 198 ELIZABETH A. SHAW about 1% times us long as the sepals, ca. 2°5-3'9 mm long, ca. 0-9-2-0 mm wide, the average 3:2.x 1-3 mm, ratio length to width 1-7:1-3-5;1, oblang to spathu- late, sometimes gradually tapering into a broad claw, distally rounded or truncate, then sometimes reluse or emarginate, usually white or yellow, rarely lavender, rather coarsely veined. Stamens with filaments distally linear, basally suddenly widening and cochlear or only slightly broadened, usually white or pale green, oecasionally lavender; lateral stamens ca, 1-8-3-4 mm, average 2-5 mm; anthers ca, 0-7-L-5 mm, average 0-9 mm; diagonal stamens ca. 2°0-3+4 mm, average 2-5 mm; authers ca, 0'6-1-4 mm, average O-9 mm, Pistil ea, 1-2-5 [-3-2] mm, not stipitate, linear, usually terete, glabrous or sparsely pubescent; style linear to shorty obconical; stigma depressed-capitate, slightly wider than the style; ovules ca, 50 per ovary; lateral neetaries reduved to triangular or oblong or ovoid lobes of tissue, one on each side af cach lateral stamen; median nectaries lacking, Fruiting pedicels ca. 3-11 [-15] mm Jong, ca, 0-2-0-4 [-0-5] im, usnally ca, 0-3 mm, in diameter, lineur, terete or quadrangular or flattened, sometimes slightly expanded distally, usually spreading at 45 degrees or Icss fram the stem, but sometimes horizontal or slightly recurved. Fruit ca. 4-20 mm long, ca, 0-6-1-4 mm aeross the septum, not stipitate, linear and straight, usually aagustisept, less often terere; valves convex or keeled with a distinet verve and, when mature. stramineate or reticulate, glabrous ov sparsely ta densely pubescent, proximally usually truncate, sometimes pide distally rounded or tapering and subacute; style less than 1 mm to obsolete, linear to broadly obeonical; stigma depressed-cupitute or almost tectiform, as wide as ar slightly wider than the styles septum white, opaque, sometimes fenestrate with it Tongitedinal slit, nerve indistinct, usually smooth or, sometimes, ragulase, especially at the margins; funicles linear or narrowly triangular, straieht or sightly curved. Seeds ca, 0:7-l-1 mm x 0°4-0-6 mim, uniseriate, ovoid to oblong. straizlit, plump; testa Jight yellow-brown or orange-brown to red- brown, usually with dark red or black pigmentation at the hilum; when moist- ened, rapidly exuding mucus to ca. 0-15 mm wide. the mucus clear and greyish, exuded as discrete short cones, less often as evlinders or clavate hodies, thus “appearing radiate: embrya exactly ur ubliquely notorrhizal, the radicle shorter or longer than, or equal to, the usually oblong cotwledans, Tyre Locaey: “Ad flumen Bulonne, Sit Th Mitchell, Ad fumen Darling prope Bamarmrra, Dr. Reckler.” Leororyrus: Ballonia |?) (easter subtrop. Australia): 11.11, 1846; Mitclell = MEL 772! Seure Austrarm:— between Nappawerrie and Innamincka: 12.8.1962; Jackson doo = UG, *% AD: Ting Ting: 33.9,1916; White — AD; Moarree; 30,4,1930; Gearge — ADW: Cowurie Sta.- Camp 37, Shrapsou Desert Expedition; 84,7.1939; Crocker — AD: Qurensianp!— near Balmy Greck; 30,8,1846; Mitchell 267 — BM: Roma; 25.10.1933; White 9556 — BRLy “Warrie’, Niudivully; 19.7.1937; Hoe 10 .- CANB: Gilruth Plains, Cunnamulla; Oct. 1942, Allen £11, 444 — CANB: Currawillk — about 100 miles W. Wine doraly: 9.6.1949; Exerist 3931 — BRT, CANB, K: Birdsville: 31.8.1957; Filmer — AD: New Sovome Waus:— Collarencbri, 29,1951; Wateshouse — SYD: Hungerford-Brine Jingabba; Oct. 1912; Boorman — NSW 53594; Glenroy Sur, Wanauring; 8.5.1948; Richey [6 — CANB, BRI; Milparinka: 25.9.1921; Morris 887 — NSW A590: Yancannia: 20.68.1923: MarGillisray = ADW: Turella; Aug, 1887; Baverlen 74 — MEL: Bamamero [Pamamarnal, Tatling River; Dee, 1860; Beekler ~ MEL 773. Fitty-vight sheots were seen. Distribution: Known From north-eastern South Australia, south-western Quecusland and north-western New South Wales. In South Australia the southernmost locality is Marree and it has not been reported from the area west of Lake Eyre. In Queenslind it has been collected as far east as the longitude of Roma, and in New South Wales it has heen found at Collarenebri, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE it ulmost exactly south of Roma. Collarenebri is almost 300 miles cast of Hunger- ford from which is the next most easterly collection in New South Wales, but it is probable that A, eremiyena occurs in the intermediate areas, — Map 5. Observations: Fram north-eastern South Australia to castern Queensland can be traced a clinal variztiun in some chatacters, the most obvious being fruit length (the most short-fruited plants from the western part of the range) and type of pubescence. The Jeetotype, fvom near the eastern limit of the range, bears simple hairs curved upward at the base and then appressed to the orgau bearing them: the maximum length iy about 0-4 mim, but they are usually abaut iam long. The fruit, glabrous or almost so, are usually about 10 mm long, although some reach 15 mm. Although most of the entire froits on the plant were crished in pressing, they seem to have been alravst terete; the style is linear, about 0-3 mm Jong, and bears a small depressed-capitate stigma as wide as the style, A representative short-fruited South Australian specimen (Crocker — AID) fromm nea! Cowarie Station, bears flattened simple hairs usually about 4 mim or slightly longer, whieh ire offen twisted and almost erect. In width they are usually about G05 mm, although some are 0:1, they are usually subacute, but the shorter unes, especially, may he spathulale. The valves are sparsely pubescent with hairs similar to, but slightly shorter than, those on the other plant parts, The valves ave noticeably conves and the fruits angustisept, the average width across the septum about 0:7 mm, the average fruit width, measured across the valves, about 1-4 mm. ‘lhe style is obsolete or very shortly obconieal (0-1-0'2 mm) and the stigma is Hat and depressed. The floral organs, especially sepils and stamens, are slightly shorter thin thase of the lectoty pe, Frany west to east there isan increase in fruit length, a transition from erect to appressed hairs, a change fron: iigustisepl to lerete [euits, a trend toward glibrous fruit and a slight increase in size of the floral organs. Although on casual inspection the leetotype and the Cowaric Station plant might seem to heli ta different species, a series of intermediates proves the connectiun between them. Because the intermediates do exist there has been made no separation of the South Australian material as representing an infraspecific taxon Further collections from north-eastern South Australia, and south-westem (ucensland would probably support this decision, The plauts described are extremes jand there are many sorts of intermediates; the appressed hairs, which are not infrequently distally soathulate, may be found on frait valves of plants which otherwise bear erect hairs, even though these appressed hairs are usually assouiuted with the glabrous-fruited eastern form. The plants tram Pamamaroo cited by Mueller seem somewhat out of place, for in their fruit they cesenmble more closely the extreme eastern material than they do the other collections trom the nortli-western part of New South Wales, although they do have the longer erect hairs characteristic of the western plants. Noteworthy are plants collected wear Evlo, Queensland (Young 65 — BRI; Everist 1682 — BRL) which have glabrous fruit with very convex valves anc longer styles (0°6-1-0 mm); the width across the septum is about 0:7-1-3 mm, tha! acroxs the valves about 1-7-2:2 mm. Althou f they differ from the rest uf the collections by the very convex valves and longer styles, they seem certainly to belong to this species. Ecology and Biology: This species is found both on sand and on heavier soils. Crocker s.2.; .27.7.1939 (AD) from north-east of Lake Eyre is annotated 200 ELIZABETH A. SHAW as growing on the edge of a small clavpan and material from New South Wales was collected from “river flats” and “mulga scrub”, Notes with Queensland plants include “hard brown pebbly clay loam”, “red-hrown sandy luam among gidgea scrub”, “in chocolate clay soil” und “in loose alluvial sand in. shallow gully”, This species is ephemeral, aud probably appears very quickly after spring and summer rains. Its range lies chiefly in an area of irregular rainfalls between the regions of maximum suinmer and maximum winter rains. Flowering and fruiting is usually in July-September bot flowering probably can come at any time after rains, Uses and Common Nanies: Eaten by stock and said to be “good sheep feed” (Riches 16 — CANB, BRI). Beadle (Veg. & Past. West. N\S.W,, 1948) refers to Blennodia cardaminoides as a useful fodder plant, but it is probable that the plants to which he referred are yeally A. eremigena; the collections made by Beadle which were determined as Blennodia cardaminoides are A. eremigena. In the north-eastern part of South Australia these plants ave steamed like spinach and eaten by the aborigines. Names recorded in this area are “priddi- walkati” (Ngameui tribe} and “priddiwarrukatji” (Wonka-nguru trihe) (sce Johusen and Cleland, Tratts, Rov. Soe. S. Aust. 67(1943)154). Relationships: A, cremigena iy most closely related to A, nasturtiuam and A, procumbens, Lt differs frou: the former in being pubescent and in having leaves normally pinnatiseet rather than triseet. Althousl the terete froits of some plits of A. eremigena strongly suguest those of some plants of A. nestartivm, the angustisept ones point out the connection with A. propimmbens, [t otherwise dillers from A. proewnbens in being pubescent, ia hasing smaller floral organs and in being usually erect in habit. As is mentioned under A. nusturtinm, A. eremizena and A. procimbens torr au “roup rather distinct from the suffruticose species of Arabidella, but connected with them through A. nesturtiaan, 6, Arabidella procumbens (Tate)Shaw, comb, voy, (provumbens = leaning forward. spreading: the stems are prostrate) Blennodia nasturtioides var. pinnarifider Benth. Fl. Austral, 1(1863)74; Maiden und Betche, Cens. NSW. PL (1916)83. — Sisymbritan procumbens ‘Tate, Trans. Rov. Soc. So Aust, TCISSS 87 (basionyne), Tate. Trans. Roy. soe. S. Aust. GOISSS)LOL (nom. aid js Tate, Trans. Rov. Soc. S$. Aust T(18S5)72: Tate. Frans. Roy. Soe, S. Aust. 12(1889)71: Tate, FL S. Austral. (1590 )16. 206; Koch. Trans. Roy. Soo. S. Aust. 22(1895)102. — Blenneefia procumbens (Tate )Tate, Trans. Row. Soe. S$. Anst, 22( 1898) 123+ Bluck, FILS. Nvstral, (1924247: Black, FIO S Austral. (7929)687; Black, FILS. Austral: ed. 2 (1948375. -. Lemphoria procumbens (Tate )Sclmlz. Porch, 8601924) 268. — Miecromystria nashotium vac. piniiifida (Benth.)Sechulv.. Pdrch. §6( 1924 ) 264. Aferomystria nastartion: var. pinnutifala is a taseonminie senonsn ab Arehidella pra Chaens, being based on the tepe af Blennodid uasturtioldes viur. plineti—fite Benth deh is disenssed bulaws the oti astaes cited above ate ndinetclitunad synergy A, precnmbeny. Deine baserl un a comes types Fitatres: Schulz. PArch. $6( 1924) fel: Schulz, Pitan, ec 2 17(1936) fis. 124: Troll Diy Dntloress. (1964) fig 466.3). 467;— Figure 7, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 201 Description: Plant herbaccous, usually prostrate, glabrous, many-stemmed, rou? a slender short taproot; stems to ca. 15 em, central stem leafless or reduced, the terminal inflorescence then appearing to arise from the basal rosette of leaves, laterul stems usually procumbent, sometimes ascendant, Basal leaves to ea, 5 em, rarely entire, usually lyrate-pinnatifid with 3-7 lobes per side, lobes opposite or, less aften, alternate, usually obtuse, the terminal lobe obovate-oblong, rounded or, more rarely, subacute, leaves tapering intd a comparatively long slender petiole. Carine leases to ca. 2-5 em, as basal leaves, but sometimes almost sessile. Inflorescences to 30-lowered, but usually less, initially very dense, clon- wating after anthesis: Jids ovate to spherical; flowering pedicels terete, slender, Sepals oblong to ovate, green with a uarrow hyaline margin, distally slightly tupering and rounded to subacute, not saccate basally: lateral sepals ca, 1+8-2:3 tint Jony, ca. 06-08 mm wide; median sepals ca, -7-2-3 mm long, ca. 0-5-0°6 ma wide, usually rounded distally and sometimes slightly cucullate, Petals slightly louver than the sepals, a [b-4-] 1°6-2-0 [-2-2] mim long, ca. [0-4-] 0-5 [-0-7) mm wide, usoally with no distinetion between blade and claw, uiineate to cboviute, rounded to truncate. sometimes retuse, yellow or white (latter fide Sehuly), Stamens with filaments slender and lincar, slightly dilated at the base, white ar pale green; lateral stamens ea, 1-5-2-0 mm, anthers obtuse, oblong, ca, 0'4-0+5 mm: diagonal stamens va, 1°9-2-3 mn, anthers as those of lateral stamens. Pistil ca. 2+5 mim, not stipitate or, rarely, very shortly so, linear, terete or flattened dorse-ventrally; siyle very short and stout ov obsolete; stigma lléshy, depressed-capitate or niore vir less two-lohed, erules ca, 60 per ovary, hiseriate, ovate on thin straight funicles; lateval vlands usually veduced to more ur less bilobed semicircular pieces af tissue, one on each side of each lateral skimen, or if more fully developed, suborhicular to pentagonal, producing lateral uppendiges, thase of the opposite vlands nearly meeting on the median Tine: median sands obsolete. Iruiring pedicels usually to 1-5 cin Jone, exceptionally tr ea. 295 om, slender, spreading, sometimes recurved or pendulaus, Pret ca, {-4-] 10-17 mim long. ca. 0+ 7-1-2 mm wide cross the septinn. terete or Buttered hiferally, Cierefore anwustisept. Hnew, straight, wot stipitate or on a very short stipe (to ca, 083 mm); valves canver. sometimes carinate, proximally lapering and rounded, sometimes subacute or almost truncate, distally rounded to trun- ate, With u slender nerve and, when mature, longitudinal striationss style stout and shorl or obsolete: stigma tHeshy, depressed-capitate or more or less hilobed: sepa white with a nmedian nerve. healing, nob fenestrate; famteles to ca, OF frint long, slender, Jinear, pendulous. Sees ca. 0-6-0-8 nm Jong, ca, O-4-0-5 min wide. Diseriate. oblong ta ovaid plump: testa vellow to light brown with reel te oraniie-browa piumentation at the hihim, when maistened, exncding a Taerroyw Gdus oc De) mm, mncus exuded as discrete Temispheros ur short oblone bodies, thus appearing radiate: embryo exadethy notorrhizal, with radicle asially slightly tanger than the gurls ablong, cotyledons, Take Lae aby: “ORe pans nea Terminition THN, Cake ‘Torres Phon”. Honormtis: Clacpan, Tdevaka near Vemination Thty 2.07855: Tute — AD 964455541 tsertypr: back Porvers Plain wear Termination Hills 2.9,1888; ' ate NIEL 767, \TRLS Sort AusTHALsA: Ostliel und westlich von Tlittlers: Mawge, Letghs Creek, Farina, Loke ‘Torrens Gubiet, 1902-1904, Busedew 365 - Be Willhou Greek. 104.4932) Clelernl — Ws Gi BS niles Bo Dalbowsic Spring: SS8,19G5; hothian lat - ADS Gorlnnents Plum vas ME Bony stations baTa8a2. Iyine — AI: New Sou Wares: -— Betwour the During aid Lachbiie 2: Haake — MEL Chalotyqe B, meturtioides var, pimnetifihy Benth Je Lavinwstine: Au. (O42. Beaille — SYD: neor Billifla, Harting Rivers Anas P84) Beadle SYD: 30 sil nortleoast of Mlenindys Ang. 1942: 202 ELIZABETH A, SHAW Beadle — NSW 53597: kooringhirry [= Koonenberry];, Sept, 1887; Baverlen 200 — MEL: pelgrumaatte Bore; 23.7.1900; Corbett — MEI, NSW 53599: Barrier Range; 1689; Irotne — Wrrnout Locatrry: ?; 2; Tate? — NSW 53598: These citations inclide all material seen. Distribution: Known only from north-western New South Walcs and the Lake Eyre basin in South Australia, This species may he more widely spread but it is inconspicuous and probably short-lived, so escapes the notice of col- lectors, — May 5. Observations: There is little variation in this species. It is usually a rather straggling prostrate plant with scattered leaves and, often, fruit arising from the basal rosette of leaves because of the non-development of a stem. Schulz (1924) describes this species as having white petals, but Tate described them as yellow and on all the plants seen by the writer they have been yellow. Althengh Schulz refers to the seeds as being “humida valde mucnsa” and in his drawing shows them as exuding a broad radiate mucus, all these examined by the writer have exuded only a narrow band of mucus. Also Schulz deseribed the septum as “saepe fenestratum”, but the writer has seen no fenestrate septa on either of the collections in B and W which were seen and annotated hy Schulz. Eecolozy and Biology: Little is known of this species; the available notes indicate that it grows in areas which have been flooded and would hold water for some time. The type collection was made on a clay pan and other comments with collections are “Hat area between dunes”, “lake bed”, and “on tracks in mud on dry lake bed”. Beadle ( Veg. & Past. West. N.S.W., 1948) mentions that it is one of the few species capable of colonizing claypans, amoung fle others being Menkea australis and Marsilea drummondii. Flowering and fruiting seem usually to be in July to September, but prob- ably occur after rains at any time of year. Uses and Common Names: Beadle (1948) described il as being of no fodder value, Schulz quotes Basedow as giving the name “creeping mustard bush” but it is unlikely that this name is ever used, Relationships; Tate (1885) remarked of this species, “Among Australian congeners, S, procuinbens approaches to S. nasturtioides, fram which it differs in habit, form of leaves, in the spreading, not erect pedicels, stouter pods, ete.’ It is certainly related to A. uasturtium, but the pinnatifid leaves and the angus- tisept fruits, along with the reduced lateral glands, suggest rather a closer relation ta A. eremigena. This species and A, eremigena stand rather remote from the suffruticose species of Arabidella, but are connected with them through A. nasturtium, as is inentioned under the latter species, Note: Blennodia nasturtioides var. pinnatifida was described from a sinfle collection inade by Burkitt in New South Wales. Bentham described it as haviog “leaves small, on long petioles, with few short lateral lobes and a larger terminal one”.. The Burkitt specimen is, however, A. procumbens, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 203 Map 5. Distribution of Arabidella eremigena (FvM.)Shaw @., Dis- tribution of Arabidella procumbens (Tate)Shaw *. tat aie i .* s ioe i 9* I tts ® ot 1 “oe x ae all Map 6. Distribution of Arabidella nasturtium (FvM.)Shaw. 204 ELIZABETII A, SHAW Harmsiodoxa Schulz Harms. and 66a = praise: named in honour of Hermann Harms. } Schulz. Pflrch. 86( 1824 )260; Schulz, PAfam, ed. 2 17h( 1936638. Leetotype species; Harmsiodoxa blennodivides (FyM,) Schulz. Description: Calyx open; sepals. spreading or, occasionally, almost erect, usruilly green, sometimes lavender, with a narrow hyaline margin, on the abaxial side usually pubescent with sessile or shortly stipitate branched hairs, the margins, however, not pubescent: leteral scpals oblong to obovate ov deltate, nsually absolutely and relatively wider thar the median, usually slightly saecate, distally somewhat tapering and austuilly subacute to acute. less commonly, rounded; median sepals oblong to narrowly ohavate, sometimes elliptic, proxin ally usnally somewhat tapered. not saccate. distally rounded. sometimes slightly cnoullete. Petals usually 16 limes, to 28 times, the sepals in Jenath, white, piuk or lavender, usually with distinct blade and claw, but not uneorsmonly without such distinction and then obdeltate or ohovate; if choved, claw usually more or less linear and about as long as or slightly shorter than the blade: blade suborbieular or ohoyate. sometimes ubloug, usually entire or sinvate, apically isuadly rounded. sometimes truncate and then retuse or emarginate, osiwill\ quite coarsely veined. tapering suddenly or gradually into the claw, Stamens 6, erect or somewhat spreading, filaments linear and slightly dilated at the buse. or more broadened and spathulate, often widened nnevenly, the greater widtl on the ditteral side of the vein, white or pale green, sometimes pink or lavender; anthers oblong or almost quadrate, rounded or, sometimes, subacute, yellow, Lateral ucetarics each srerognding the hase pl a lateral stamen, generndly Hangar to pentagonal sometimes square or suborbieular, usually — quite shallow, open on the interier, open or emargimite on the outer side, producing Rein each side of each gland a Jateral appenduge encircling the buse of the adjacent diagonal stimen and forming there a distinct triangular lobes ynedlan necharies usually obsolete, but very rarely lander thssue ocenrring between the bases of the diagonal stamens, the tips of the lateral appendages approximate Diet tot fused. Pistid not stipitute, linexr to ampullitorm, terete, glabrous or pubescent with short branched hairs: orufey usually subbiseriate. suborbiculas ty elliptic. pendudous on short slender carved frmieles, ca, 4-14 per cell: style linvar or Slightly oheonical short or as lot ay the ovary, stigae fleshy, depressed- capitute, as wide ay or slehtl wider thin the stwle. Preit bilooulie. bivalyed, Aehiscent, tot stipitete. near or fusiform, straight on earved, forete or quid iter or somewhat duttened dorsiventrally Chitisept}: valves usually quite convey, with woinare or loss qhvieus midierce, when mature brown, oHern with Gore Heboor tnagenta pramentatinn, the exterior pubescent with sessile or shavtls sbitate biturcate to ramose or simple hairs, the simple hairs often restrigred to the distal ond. interior of the valve whibrons or sparsely: pubescent with short Iitiireute hairs. valves proximally tapering slielith and trineate ar rounded: rarely sithuctle, distally rounded to subuentes sty! linear or stghtly obeonival: stinma clepressecd-capitate. as wide as or slightly wider than the ste. Sept White, usually opaque, apparently net fonesteates with amore or deoxy distinet vein smooth or rugilose specially at the margins didoor the proximud end: Fraieles, Vinguy or tarrrow)y taneelien, straight or slightl carved. pendulous Seely Usually sobbbiseriwte ee, 3-12 per cell, ohlowe to ovate or obovate. plarnp, bot winged: testi otange-brown to clark red-brown, stiwhthy clarker al the ditaesy, fie) papitlove, wher neistened wwuding froncoael papilke sk evtinder of dens. wich cylinder seeming to eoutain a tightly: coiled grey spiral threads emlaye AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 205 exactly or slightly obliquely notorrhizal, cotyledons elliptic to oblong, rounded or truncate, usually slightly shorter than the radicle. Plant prohably annual, herbaceous, few- lo many-sternmed, usually erect, occasionally prostrate and spreading, pubescent, including sepals and ovary, with simple or sessile or shortly stipitate bilureate or branched hairs, stems arising from a basal rosette of leaves and equal, or a central leafless stem and leafy lateral stems, the central slem sometimes reduced Lo ai apparently busal inflorescence, stems sometimes much branched. Basaf leaves rosulate, usually obovate or oblanceolate, rarely entire, usually dentate or, most commonly, pinnately lobed, sametimes very deeply so, usually on slender petioles. sometimes almnst sessile. Cauline leaves seattered, usually obovate tu elliptic, entire or rather coarsely dentate, occa- sionally, especially Jower leaves, pinnately lobed, shortly petiolate or sessile on cuneate bases, Hoof a slender taproot, Inflorescences ebrdotesite, terminal cm stems, dense. initially corymbose but after anthesis elongating and racemose, the central stems sometimes reduced so inflorescence seems basal; buds immedi- ately before anthesis spherical to ovoid ov oblang; flowering pedicels short, slender: fruiting pedicels very short and Guite stout, erect or somewhat spread- ing Or, rather slender and slightly spreading to alnost horizontal, rarely slightly reenrved, Three species ay semi-arid parts of Western Anstralia, the Northern Territory, South Australia, Qneensliid, New South Wales qncl Vietoria. Key to the species of Harmsiodoxa: A Pedicels as loms as or longer than thie fruit B Frit with short almost sessile haivs, all of about same length Co Valves elalrous mside; petals ca. 4-8 mm Jong... 2. HT. pebernla CG Valves pubescent inside; petals ca. 2-5-4 om lene | - 3b, H brevipes yar, major B Fruit with Jonger haivs, those at distal end longer than those at proximal ened - LAL blennoctioides A Pedicels shorter than the fruit D Valves with distal hairs shuple, erect, toca, Damm ccc wc 3a. H. brevipes var. brevipes D Valves with distal hairs branched. appressed, to ca. KIMM vooccwou = 3b. HH. brevipes var. major 1. Warmsiodoxa blemodivides (l’'vM)Schulz (biennadioides = like Blennodia R.Bry because ot the cesemblance of this species to Glennodia canescens Rr. ) Schulz, Purch. 86(1924)261— — Lrystimeinn blennerlivitles FVM., Linnaea 25 (1553 )367 (besionpn ds PYM, Consus 1( 1588295; Fw Ml. See. Census 1 (1589 j 9 Erysimin blennodes FyM. Trans, Phil, Sow, Viet. 1( 18331100 (nen. nude}, PYM. PL Col Vict. L(TS62040, pire. sya; FYM., Frag. LIE{ STS 527 (none med i— Bleranodia lasiocedrpe We. Vrates. Phil, Soe. Viet. 1( 1555) 100 Chom. ial: FVM. Kaur, PL Gregory (185904 Cao. senii-enud.); Fv »- NSW 53632; “Zara”. via Wanuanella; Aug, (903; Officer — NSW 33629: Fongonia; 23.5, 1954, Crvolin AT4 — SYD: Baurke; Ang. LYOG; Maiden NSW 53674; Nengans 1L9 1947; Can- stile -— NSW. 4456: Cobar: sept, 1939; Beadle — SYD: Yandama St; July, 1910; Collier NSW 53677: Wileanniay Sept., 1910; Chany NSW 83667, NSW 33667, NSW 43665; Broken Ill; 23.68.1939: Pideeoun & Vickery — NSW 53td9; Lake Kudiee U.5,, 62 piles soth of Broken Hill 21.7.1955; Constable — NSW 89958, NT: in cumpis aridis ad ff, Mornay, Ire Bonaniee ot juxta flian. Alurranmibidgecs P: Mueller — MM: QWernst asni— Sub-tropienl New Talhiod, (846; Mitchell kK; Darling Downs near Wilhiumerra: Sept. 1444: Clones — BAL: Boma; 26.10.1933; White 9434 — BATE about 3 ioiles north of St. George: 12.9.1959; Lyedst GLOT — BRI: Ciriwillughi [Currawilinghil: ?: Dalton — MEL: Northhwnpton Downs, meu Bktekull; 27.8.1935; Lecrist (279 — WRI, Mitehedl district, 2 amiles west of Blackall, 29.39.1940; FReenist 2089 — BRAT: Aneathella; Sent. (007; Brosy & White 26 — TA: 45 wiles weet of Cunnuiinlla, 26.77.1948: Roe — NE: bee tween Stokes Kanwe and Coopers Creek: (S61: Wheeler — VERL: Nournens Tentrronye— Viet Rien Creck; 25.9.1955, Burbidge -— CANB: helween Sew Sprinus pil Charlotte Wulers; May, 1875, Giles — MEL: 36 miles north-east Angas Downs homestead: JOS 1999 Chippendale — BRL CANB, NSW 53627, NT: Two Dinidred ane stsloon sheets wore seen, Distributions Known from semi-arid parts of the Northem Territory, Seuth Australia, Queenslind, New South Wales and Victoria; probably alse in the southeeastern part of Wostern Australia. There are only a fow collections fram the Nurther Territory and. these wre from the area south and south-west of Alice Springs, In South Australia it is spread across the northern part of the Stite and south to the Murray River. In Queenshind it occurs in the south-central part, the easternmost collec- tien being fram Wallangarra. about 125 miles south-west of Brisbane, The buik of the collections are from New South Wales, where it seems to be generally distributed throughout the State west of the Dividing Range, the most easterly locality being in the Warrumbaogle Morntains about 3800 miles northwest of Sediney, The Vietoriin collections are from the northawestern part of the State, — Map. Ohsercations: The tiost conspicnons variation in this species is in petal colon, size and shape. fruit sliipe ane the sert of pubescence on the salves, The petals aay be white, pink or hivender, and those three colodys mga wppeur at random ina population. The petals muy be eliwed with) a sub- avbiowhir bhide. or with te obviaus distinetian into blade and claw, the potals How bein elomeatedy debhate. Usiiully the petals of au iedividnil Hower care Quite ecnstune ie sive Data vii cousiderstbly i shape rait shape and pubescence vies a arent choad, but this is rot at aaadein lor Gaumple, plints trom Vietoria can alwiis be distinguished from (hase: form thes Northern Territory. The available Victorian plants, all from the worth- western commer ol the Stites Tiewe fruits whieh are fosiform and anil faloate AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC CENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 208 Generally the valves’ taper proximally and are rounded to truncate; distally they are also tapered and subacute tu acute. The styles are slender, usually less than 0-2 mm in diameter and are usually about 1-0-2.0 mm long, although some plants ber shorter ones, The most striking feature of these Vietorian plants is the piubeseence on the valves; they hear simple Mattened hairs which may be 0:1 mm in width and 1-3 mm long. The lungest hairs are on the distal ends of the valves; towarfl the proximal end they are shorter and mixed with shortly stipitate, erect, bifur- vate hairs. Certain of the older collections seem to have glabrous fruits, hut the hairs have been broken off. With the Victorian plants may be compared Northern Territory material. The pubescence on the fruit is rather sparse and the distal hairs ace predami- nantly bifurcate, with unequal arms anc usually less than k mm long. Mixed with these are simple hairs which are usually slightly longer, to about O*4 mm. ‘The bifurcate hairs are shortly stipitate and all are terete, At the proximal end the hairs are hifurcate, these ysually having equal arms, or tau-shaped or, luss vtten, simple. The Northern Territory plants have fruits nearly linear or slightly wider af the distal end — the valves are sliglitly tapered and ronnded at both ends. The styles arc usually about 0-7 « 0-2 mm, and the stigma is more often the same width as the style. It may be noted that these plants huve fruits which are almost terete and straight; some appear angustisept. but this is probably caused during pressing. On the Victorian plants the fruits are latisept, These forms are the extremes uf a series which can be followed across Queensland and through New South Wales. In these States ave found inter- mediates with all possible combinations of fruit and pubeseeoce charucters. The material from South Australia is net abundant but does sample many parts of the State. Collections from the western part, such as Tietkens s.r. (AD) from Ooldea and Forde 468 (AD) from near Emu tend toward the Northern Territory form. ‘Those from ithe central-eastern part, for example, Kichler 12466 (AD) from Koonamore and Ising sn, (AD) from Canegrass are more like the Victorian form, Plants from the north-eastern part of South Australia, such as Crocker s,n- (AD) from the Warburton River and Tate sn, (AID) from the Strzelecki Creck are intermediates with varying combinations of fruit and pubescence characters Well sn (MEL) from Yarrawie fAppilal] tends toward the Victorian form, while Hill 1025 (AD) from Alligator Gorge near Port Augusta bears fruit which in shape and style characteristies resemble the Victorian plants, although the pubescence is rather of the Northern Territory ferm. In South Australia it seems that plants from west and north-west of the Flinders Ranges are outliers of the Northern ‘Territory form; those east of the Plinders and Mt. Lofty Ranges are of the Victorian form, while those from the north-eastern plains and the few collected within the ranges are intermediates, The Queensland plants are of interest; many of them show a combination af characters which can, for convenienee, be referred to as the Queensland form, This is intermediate between the Northern Territory and Victorian forms; it has the fruit shape and large admixture of bifureate hairs characteristic of the Northern: Territory plants, but the styles are Jonger and thinner. Some of these have previansly been determined as Blennodia cenningharmii Benth, the reluctance to identity them with H. blennedtoidcs being understand- able, as they are quite different from the typical Victorian form. Almost all possible combinations of characters appear in these Queensland plants, mans 210 ELIZABETH A. SHAW of them really being a short-haired Vietorian form, Among representative Queensland collections are White 9434 (BRL), Smith & Everisi 921 (BRI), Lverist 1279 (BRI), 1457 (BRL CANB), 1620 (BRI), 2083 (BRI) and White 11629 (BRI). From south-western Queenslind there are ouly collections which are all intermediates between the Northern Territory and Queensland forms. Pruit shape differs somewhat. the Northern Territory and Queensland forms having fruits which are usually straight and not tapered: the Victorian form, however, generally bears fruit curved and narrowed at the proximal end, Dimensions are compared in the following table: NT, Qld. Viet. finit length (mm) max. 12-0 Woo 13-5 aver. )-3 7-7 Wed min. 73 fir2 6-0 fruit width (mm) TLULX 19 2d a3 aver, 1-6 Led 2-1 min. 1-3 lel 3 max, with (fruit) basal width max. 2-321 2-321 aaa] avert: hSil 2-031 2°72] min, bO:1 1-721 2231 length (style) width. (avor.) de£01 7221 4921 length distal hairs (mmm) max. +25 0-40 2-0 aver. 0-2 0-35 1-0 min. 0-1; 0-15 0-6 In New South Wales can be traced the transition between the Northern Territory and Victorian forms. Uere I. blennodioides occurs on the western slopes of the Dividing Rauges and on the plains lying to the west. Plants From the northern part of the State resemble the Queensland form, but to the south- ward Victorian characteristics predominate. Those from the far western part of New South Wales are like those in the adjacent parts of South Australia and resemble the Victorian plants. Generally, the hairs on the vegetative parts are sessile or shortly stipitate; they are often once or twice bifurcate although many can be described only as irregularly branched. There is not such a high percentage of cruciform hairs as is found on plants of A, puberula. Ecology and Biology: H. blennodioides seems more or less restricted to sandy or light soils, although there are scattered references to its occurrence ou hervier soils. Beadle (Veu. & Past. West. N.S.W., 1948) noted that in parts of western New South Wales. it is common in well-stocked areas and added that henvy grazing of pastures can lead lo a complete monopolization of them by this species. Flowering and fruiting usually occur in July to September, but flowering plants have been collected in every month except February. Tnimer (1891) commented that the seed verminates freely after spring rains and added that AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 2h the plant makes its growth during the hottest part of the vear, Tawever, there is comparatively litde muaterial whieh has been collectec diving the summer montlis. As with several of these species. if the plant 1s well developed and then receives na Tain during a period of several weeks, it quickly dies back, eventu- ally losing its lenves. Tf rain falls between the beyimine of leaf fall and the time of death, the plant develops new lateral shoots and the process is repeated, Plitnts placed in water have remuined alive for almost four months. during this lime producing several wew side shoots on which flowers were borne. Uses and Common Names: Turner (1591) remarks that these plants have a somewhat pungent taste which muakes them attractive to stock, Beadle (1948) describes this species as being palatable to sheep and a valuable fodder, Turner cites “hairy podded cress” as a commen name but this seems to be not used, Relationships: H. blennodivides seems equally closely related to H, brevipes and to H, puberula, On fruit characteristics alone it may he difficult to separate the first twa for the pubescence pattern on the exterior of the fruit is similar as is fruit shape in many cases, However, H. blennodinides has truit valves glabrous on the inner surface. while those of H- brevipes are pubescent. H. bre- vipes is the only species in the “Blennodia group” which shows this phenomenon. H. puberula may be distinguished from the others by the slightly larger fret and by its short appressed hairs. Norn: In 1863 Bentham published the name Blennodia cunniaghamii, describing it in the following manner: “A tufted: herbaceous peroarigl, more or less hoary with soft stellate liuirs, oceasionally inixved with simple cares; ammual stems erect or deenmbent at the base, from a few inches to t ft. Jiigh, shehtly branched. Radical leaves petiolate, | to 2 in. long, oblong or laneealate. coursely toothed or shartly pinnatifid; stem-leayes small and fey, from hmecolute ta nearly obovate, Flowers small, apparently white. Fruiting racemes loase, 2 to 4 ine long, with spreading pedicels. Pod 4 to & lines long, aente at the top and at the hase, tipped by a@ very short subudate style, pubescent with shnple or stellate hairs, or nearly clubrons; valves very convex, with a prominent midrib. Seeds ovyal- oblong, smooth, the mucus rather copious, Oveenslind. Vlits on the Murai, Mitchell. N,S. Wiles. Bathurst Plains. and other parts of the interior of the colany, A. Conninghian. Fraser,” Tho chick differences between a plant answering to this description and one of H. blenuodinides ave the following:—“pod .. ., acute at the top and at the base”; usually the fruits of Tt. blonnodioides are rounded to trancate at dhe hase:—“valves very convex, with a prominent qaidrib”; the valves of Hf. Blennocioiifes usually cannot be described as very colivex and the midrih, aithough distinct, is not prominent, The fallowhus nine eullertions. arr those whiel probably haye been seen and determined as Hlennorlia eunninghamli by Bentham: BAT, N.S.W.is Fraser — Arabis species found on all the Barren Lands west of Fields plains adyaneed in flower in June and July. This plunt is H. blennodioides. kh: (1) 16 July — Arabis-A. Cuuninghai — ex Herb. Hook. ‘This phuiwt is HM. blennarliaides, (2) Nov. Holl. — Fraser — ex Herb, Hawk, This plant is H, Dlenniecdioides. (3) Sub-'Tropival New Molland — 1846 — Sir T. L. Mitchell — ex Herb. Tlowk, ‘There are two plants, bath of them A. blennadivides. (4) Interier NWSW. — TS17 — A, Cunningham 248. ‘This is also UL. bleunaclinides. 212 ELIZABETH A, SHAW (3) Lacrosse Island, Cambridge Gulf. NAW, Coast of Australia — 1819 — A, Cur ningham 248, L This plant is 17, blennodivides and agrees with Cunningham's other 248. The Jocility tiven is certainly wrong. (6) Sub-Tropieal New Holland — Aug. 1846 — Sir T. L, Mitchell 497 ~ Camp 29 — ex Herh. Hook. This plant bears no fruit, only bucls and towers; it is very possibly the Queensland farm of H. blennodivtdes. (7) N.S.W, — Colony 1822 = A. Cunningham — ex Herb, Hook. This plant agrees with Bentham's description in having « short style and a prominent midrib. It is not H. blennodioides and resembles a young plant of Drahastrum alpestre though the fruit are in shape more nearly those vf the former than of the latter specias. Dr. S. T. Blake. at present Australian ligison officer al Kew, who was asked to re- examine the plant, also thinks it D. alpestrc, ML: Arabis sp. Bathurst. plains — A, Cunningham — MEL 775. “These plants are not H. blennodloides; they seem to be the same as K(7) above and probably are Drabastium. alpestre. ‘The Mitchell collections from subtropical New Holland dated 1846 [K(3)] inchide two plant mounted on a single sheet tugether with a Cunningham collection [K(1)]. If the etter of the Mitchell plants (that on the right) be chosen as lectotype of the name Blen- nodia conninghamii this name and Harmstedoxa blennadiaides hecame taxonomic synonyas. It seems certain that the taxon which Bentham had in mind when describing B. can- Ainghamii is H. bleunorlioides: the discrepancies in the description of the former seem to lave entered through the inclusion of the Cimninghan plants. [K(7), MEL 775]. All the plants which have, since Bettham’s time, been determined (by Schulz and by others) as B, ennaninghaniii are TH. blennodivides, yory often the Queensland form. 2. Harmsiodoxa puberula Shaw, sp. nov. { puberwla = downy, with short haivs: the pubescence of this species is short and appressed } Figures; Figure 9. Dracsosts: Herba annua vel perennis(?). caulibus nsque ad 50 em altis, tennibus, adseco- dentibis vel decumbentibus, stellato-puberula {sepalis et ovarin incl.) pilis scgsilibus vel hreviter stipitatis rarnosis adpressis; jolis radiculilus usque wl 12, em longis, Jaminty late oblanceolatis vel oblongis, dentatis vel pinnatilobis, utvingque lobis 3-3, in petiolos tenues angustatis; foliis caulinis usqnue ad LO om longis, 2% em latis, oblanceolatis yal ogboviutis, intuprix vel remote dentatis, utringue 2-4 dentibus, inferioribus pinnatilobis non nomaquam, utringue lobis 3-5 lincuris vel triangularis, sessilis vel breviter petivlatis; inflorescentibus cit. 20- sque ad 30- Horibus: pedicellis frnetiferis ca. 4-12 min longis, ea. 0-6-0-9 mm climietnn. ereetis yel patentibus, siliqwis wsque ad 2-5 an longis, ca 1-4-3-0 mm Jatis. terctibus vel letiseptis, lineuris vel late fousiformibus; valvis pubescentibus, pilis omnis. brevi- lus. ramosis, adpressis, sessilibus vel brevissime stipitatis; stylis ca, O-8-1-6 mm Iongis, ca. 0-3 mia diametro; stigmatibnus capinetis, pleromaue depressis. seminibus ea, 1°7-2-0 mim longis, siibbiseriatis, ohlungis vel ellipsoideis, cotyledunibus incumbentibus exacte. Hotoryevs: Flood plain near Cadelga; 29.4.1960; Lothian 606 — AD 96045034! Description: Plant herbaceous animal, pubescent, including sepals and ovary. with sessile or very shortly stipitate bifurcate or branched hairs; stems to ci. 50 em high, few to many, terete or finely fluted, creet, more or less leafy, arising from a basul rosette of Ieayes, equal or with a central leafless stem, slightly shorter than the leafy [ateral sterns which are often much branched, Basal leaves to 12 em, usually less than 6 em long, with blades broadly oblunccolate to oblong, finely dentate, the teeth acute or obtuse, or sinuate or pinnately lobed, lobes 3-5 per side, more: or less: Wiangulur, sohacute to rounded, apically rounded tu subacute, tapering suddenly into a slender petiole, sumetimes dentate, as long us or slightly longer than the blade. Cauline leaves to ca. 10 em Jung, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 213 usually Jess than 5 om, to 24 em wide, oblanceolate to obovate, lower leaves tapering intu a slender petiole to as long as the blade; upper leaves shurtly petiolate or almost sessile, entire or sinuate or remotely toothed, 2-4 per side, usually: opposite and acute to rounded or sometimes pinnately lobed with 3-3 liner or triangular Jobes per side, subacule to rounded, apically rounded nr, less often, subacute, Inflorescences usually ca. 20-30-fluwered, initially dense, but elongating alter anthesis; flatwering pucieels 4-7 [-12] mm long, slender, ereet to spreadiny; buels before anthesis oblong, spherical or evate. Sepals green or lavender, with « narrow hyaline margin, adaxial side glubrous, abaxial side pubescent with ramose hairs; lateral sepals ca. 2-9-3-6 [-3-9] mm lony, ca. [1-2-] 1-6-2-0 nm wide, the average ratio length te width 1-9:1, oblong to lanceolate, apically subacute or, sometimes rounded, basally usually slightly saccate; median sepals ca. 2-7-3-5 mm long, ca. O-9-L-6 mun wide, the average ratio length to width 2°3:1, oblong, apically sounded, basally slighty tapering, not saccate. Pelals ca, 4-0-8°2 mm long, usually lavender, sometimes white. ia sicco usually white or yellaws blades ca, 2°0-5-0 mim Jong, ca. 2-0-5-0 mm wide, ratio length to width 0-8:1-L-4:1, average 1:0:1, orbicular tu obovate, densely yeined, entire or sinuate, sornetimes emarginate apically and almost cordate tapering suddenly or gradually mto a linear claw usnally about the same Jength as the blade or slightly shorter, the blade averaging 56 per cent of the total petal lenuth. Lateral stamens [2°7-| 3:-0-4°3 nun long, filaments linear or slightly expanded at the base, straight or slightly curved; anthers ca, 0-8-L:5 mm, oblong ur slivhtly narrowed at apex, yellow; diagonal stamens ca. 3-4-4-4 [-4-7] mm lony, otherwise as Juteral stamens; anthers ca, 0°8-1-2 mm, otherwise as those of the Jateral stamens. Pistil ca, 2+5-3:5 mm Jong, linear. terete, not stipitate, pubescent with short hranched hairs or, yarely, subglabrous: style linear or slightly vbeonical; stigma Heshy, depressed-capitate, as wide as or slightly wider than the style; evales cu. 10-25 per ovary; funieles slender, pendulous; lateral glandy triangular or square or cireilar, open on the interior, producing on each side a lateral apoeidare forming a distinet trianynlar Johe at the base of each diagonal stamen; median lands obsolete. Fruiting pedicels ca, 4-12 mm long, ea. 0-6-0°9 mm in diameter, ereet to spreuding, very ravely slightly recurved. Fruit to ca, 2-5 mm long, ca, 1-4-3-0 min across the septum, usually linear or broadly fusitonu, straight or sometimes Falcate-curved; valves proximally tapering gently and truncate or, sometimes, rourided, distally suh- weute to slightly rounded, with a distinet, but not prominent, vein, quite densely ubescent with small sessile or very. shorthe stipitate, hifireate ar branched raivs, those at the distal end differing from these at proximal end; style en. 0+ S8-1:6 mm long, ex. 0-3 mm wide, linear or slightly ohbconical; stigma usually depressed-capitate. ay wide as or slightly wider than the style; septum white, semi-opaque, with more or less distinet vein, epidermal cells irregalar in ant- line; funicles linear or slightly widened at the hase, straight or slightly curved, pendulous. Seeds ca. 1-7-2: mm lony, ca. 1-1-1-4 mm wide, oblong to ovaid; testa orainge-brown to red-brown with slightly darker pigmentation at the hilum, finely prumetate, when moistened exuding mucus as tightly coiled threads ime from each papilla, thus appearing radiate; seeds ca. 3-10 per cell, subbiseriale; embrya exuctly notorrhizal, radicle of same length as or slightly Jonger than the oval cotyledons. — Soura Ausrracsat—60 miles east-southeeast of Bhiff (Roseberth) wlong Miranila track; 29,.8.1960: Lothian 595 — AD, UC, Z: Paraliuna Hot Springs: 22.68.1969, Kurhet $56 — AD: New Sow Warcs:i—Pilliga; Sept., 1932; Rupp 25 — NSW 53601. Touth; Sent, 1910; Abraham 379 — NSW 53606: Bootra-Urisino; 2 Morris 946 — ADW: Milpiarinka; Avg, 1935- PB. and N.C.B. — SYD: Wileannias 20,8,1939; Pidgeon and Vickery — NSW 53604, NSW 55602: 214 ELIZABETH A. SHAW Qukenstanp:—Tanbar: 20.6,1949; Ecerist 4029 — BRL, CANB: Thargoininedih; 3.9.1923; MueGilloray — BRI, ADW: Nowrsern Trrrerony ox Sourn Ausraua:—South of Charlotte Water; Sept., 1885; Kempe - MEL: Seventeen sheets were seen. Distribution: There are only a few collections, but these indicate that it occurs in the far north-eastern part of South Australia, in south-western Queens- land and in northavestern and north-central New South Wales. — Mapr 7. Obesrvations: The few collections show little variation and it is usually easy to distinguish from the other species of Harmsiodoxa and from other Cruci- ferae found in Australia, Unfortunately there is only one collection bearing ripe fruit (Vickery s.n, — NSW 53603) and this is composed only of a number of fruiting racemes. hut there seems no doubt that these belong to this species. The hairs are usually sessile or almost su and are often cruciform with hifureate arms. The arms are generally parallel to the organ bearing the hair, and the hairs often appear stellate. The plant, with the exception of stamens, styic and replum, is pubescent and to the unaided eye looks canescent. Ecology and Biology: Little is known of this species, but it secms to grow both in sand and in heuvier soils. Lothian 595 (AD) is annotated “Blennodia on low sandhill..." while other comments are “in heavy grey clay on Hooded far” (Everist 029 — BRI, CANB), “grey clay, overgrazed Mitchell grass pas- tures” (Roe sin. — NE), “occasional on treeless plains” (Jolson and Constable 987 — NSW 39948) and “pine box woodland” (Beadle s.n. — SYD). Flowering aud fruiting occurs chiefly in the months July to October. Uses and Common Names: There appear ta be neither uses nor common names recorded, Relationships: H. puberula seems equally closely related to H. blenna- divides and to H. breeipes. Tt is most obviously distinguished from them by the very short appressed. hairs. 3, Harmsiodoxa brevipes (FvM)Schulz ( brevis = short, pes = foot; the fruiting pedicels are short) Schulz, Pllrel:, 86( 1924) 263. Lrysimum Brecipes FvM,, Linnaea 25(1853)367 (basionym): FvyM.. Trans. Phil. Soc, Viet, 1(1855)100; FyM., Nat. Pl. Viet. 1(1879)33; Tepper, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 3(1880)34; Tate, Trans, Roy. Soe. 8. Aust. 3( 1880.) 51; Fy M., Census 1(18$2)5, Tate, Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust. 4(1982)104; Rep. Field Nat, Soc., Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. §(1886)193; Tate, Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust, 12(1889)71; FvM., Sec. Census 1(1889)9; Tate, Fl. S, Austral, (1890) 16, 206; FvM. et Tate, Trans. Roy, Soc. §. Aust. 16(1896)335; Koch, Frans. Roy, Soc. $. Aust. 22(1898)102.— Blennodia brevipes (FvM.)FvM., Pl. Col. Vict. 1(1862) 41; Benth., Fl, Austral. 1(1863)75; Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 22(1895 )123; Maiden & Betche, Cens. N.S.W, PL. (1916)83; Ostent., Dunsk. Vidensk. Selsk. Biol. Medd. 3/2(1921)65; Black, FL S. Austral, (1924)247; Blick, Trans. Roy. Soe. S$. Aust. 62(1938)101; Black, PLS. Austral, ed. 2 (1948)375, [This species was referred to Blennadia by Mueller, Trans, Phil, Soe, Vict. 1(1855) 100, but the necessary combination was not made.]— — Sisymbrium brachypodum FvM., Fragm, 7(1869) 20; AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA Ol CAUCIFERAL 215 fyM,, Fragm. 10(1877)1]9; FvM., Fragm. 11(1875)6 [Bpayils — short; mais = foot]— — Sisymbrinan brevipes (PYM,) FVM, Pragm. 10(1878)53 (nom. devit.) [non Kar. et Riv. Bull. Soc. Nat, Muse, 15(1842)154], The above names are nomenclutural syonyms af Hastnsivdoxa breoipes, being based on the same type. Flenres: Hayek, Beih, Bot. Centralbl, 27(191])fig.8(13); Black, (1924) fi. 113 A-E; Schulz, (1924) f¢.7A; Black, (1945 )fig.529 A-R; — Figure 10. Deseription; Plant small herbueeuws annual, pubescent including sepals and ovary with simple or sessile or shortly stipitate bifurcute or branched luirs; stems toca, 40 em hivh, but usually mueh less, few to many, erect or prustrate with spreading branches, equal or with a leafless central stem and longer lateral stems, often reddish-purple; rool a slender taproot, ca. 0-3 mm diameter at ground level, Basal leaves to ca, 13 cnt long, but usually less than + em, blades remotely dentate to coarsely pinnatisect, lobes opposite or almost exactly alter- vale, rounded or, often, mucronulute, primary lobes sometimes with a smaller trimmgalar-rounded lobe or tooth on distal side. terminal lobe usually more or less triangular, Jeaves tapering into slender petioles. or, less often, almost sessile Cauline leates ea. (3-3-9 [-4-0] em long, oval to obuyate, lowermust leaves shortly petiolate and almost pinnatifid, upper leaves with 2 or 3 coarse acute teeth on a side, terminal Jobe obtuse to subacute, sessile on cuneate base or om a short petiole. Inflorescences usually with fewer than 20 flowers, initiully dense, then clungating; flowering pedicels slender, erect or somewhat spreading. Sepals sreen with a narrow hyaline margin, udaxially glabrous, abasially pubescent with shortly shpitute forked. huirs, rarely with simple hairs; lateral sepals va. 1°6-2-T mem long. ca. O-6-1-2 nun wide, the average ratio length ty width 2-4:1, ohlong to obovate to deltate. apically usually rounded ur subacute, basally usuully slightly saccates medion sepals ea. 1-5-2'7 mm Tong, ca. 06-12 mm wile. the average ratio length to width 2-5:1, more or Jess oblong or basally slightly narrowed and almost oval, apically rounded, sometimes slightly eucullate, basally not sueeate. Petals ea, 2-2-4:7 mm tong, lavender, pink or white, in sicco usually vellase, usually with obvious distinction between hlade and claw: blade ca, 101-7 [-2-0[ mm long, ca. 0+ 7-1-4 mm wide, ratio length tn width 1-1:1-2-1:1, averuge Lb L, usually obovate, sometimes suborbicular ar almost ublang, coarsely veined, margin entire or simuate, apically rounded to truncate, then sumetimes emarginate, usually tapering, iato a slender more or Jess Jinear claw, usually slightly tanger than the blade, the blade averaging 47 per cent of the total petal length; scmnetimes with no distinction between blade and elaw, the petal then usually narrowly oboviute, the average ratio leneth to width 3-1:1, Stamens usually with filaments lineur to tupered distally and slightly broadened ut the base, sumeltimes nareowly clavate, green or, often, lavender. usually darker distally: anthers oblong, sometimes uaceate. tsnally rounded, yellow: lateral stamens ca. 1-6-3-0 inn lone, anthers ca, 0-3-0-8 mm, nstudly O-4-0+5 mm long; diagenal stamens cit. 1-8-3-2 mm long, anthers ca, 0°3-0°7 mm, usually 0:3-0-5 tam: filaments often broader on lateral side of vein, Pistil ca, 1:3-3-5 mm. ampulliform to ovoid, terete, not stipitate, shortly pubescent, style short, linear; stigma depressed-capitate, as wide as or slightly wider than-the style; ooules ca. 8-14, suborbicular to ovoid; frnicles shart, slender, pendulous; lateral glands not fully developed, a more or less crescent-shaped lehe of tissue. one on cach side of each lateral stamen, sometines only a small lobe at the base of each diagonal stamen; median glands obsolete. Fruiting pedicels oa, 160-365 |-7-0) min Jong, ea. O-4-0-7 mm in diameter, spreading to erect, terete or, offen, quadrangular, Fyeit ca, O-6-1-7 cm, usually L-Q-1-2 cm ling, ea. 212-5 mm in width across the septum, fusiform-curved, tapering at 216 ELIZABETEL A, SHAW proximal end, wot stipitate. terete or slightly compressed dorsu-ventrally, there- fore latisept; valves convex, proximally rounded to narrowly truncate, distally rounded to narrowly truncate or subacute, vein almost obsolete, inner surface usually sparsely pubescent with bifurcate hairs, exterior pubeseent with huairs usually sessile or shortly stipitate. bifurcate proximally, distally hairs sually simple, erect, often flattened at the base, ncute to ca. 1-0 mm. longer than proximal hairs; style ca. 0141-0 mm linear; stigma small, depressed-capitate, as wide as or slightly wider than the style; septum white, upaque, will vein, rugose, especially at edges, epidermal cells small, rounded, round to more or less oblong, irreguijrly arranged, Seeds ca, 1-2-1-7 mm long, ca, O-9-1-3 mm wide, more or less ghlong, plump: testa dull red-brown te dark brown, slightly darker at the lrlum, testa with small tubercnliform papillae, when marstened, exuding mueus in cylinders, each containing a tightly coiled spiral thread, Hing appearing radiate, subbiseriate, ca. 4-6 per cell embryo exactly or slightly obliquely notor- rhizal, uswally with radicle about same length as the cotyledons, Tyre Locaury: “In collibas subarenosis juxta omnem Rocky River”, Hovorveus; Th collibus subarenosis prope Rocky River; Oct, 1851; Mueller — MEL 757! Soury Ausrmaria!— Wilpena — lower slopes Mt. John; 4.9,196]; Siaion 1539 .— ADW: Halbury; 6.9.1909; Black(?) — AD: Loveday; 10.9,1949; Gauha — W: ca, 15 km west- south-west of Purnong, J-3 km north-east of tumotf to Walker Flat on road from Purnong ta Manoum; 11.86.1963; Kichler 16203 — AD; Ardrossan: Oct. 1879; Tepper — AD: Me. Wudinna; 7.9.1938; John — AD: Arkaringa Creck; 13.5.1891; Helms — MEL: Fowler's Bay: ® Richards — MEL: Vievorta: Swan Hill ?; Guemeun — MEL; 3 miles north 63-mile post on Sturt High- way alone track to Berrihhee Tank: 2.91944, Willis — MEL: near Beulah; 15,9,1903; Reader — MEL: Jeparit; 11.4.1916; W.R,A.B. —~ MEL: New Sourm Waces;—Lake Cargelligo Dist.; 1903; St. Eloy D'Altun — MEL; Wesvern Ausrratia:—Eucla; 1877; Richards — MEL: Fraser Runge: 12.10,1891; Helms — MEL: Cowcowing; Sept-Oct. 1904; Koch — PERTH, Sixty-two sheets were seen. Distribution: This is the most widely spread species of Harmsiodoxa, occur- ting in Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria and, apparently, in New South: Wales. In South Australia this species seems most common in the southern part of the Flinders Ranges and on the plains to the south-east, although there are scattered collections from the far nurth, the Yorke Peninsula, the Eyre Peninsula, and near the head of the Great Australian Bight. It extends further south than must of this group, the southern-mest cullection (Ising coll. — AD) being fram near Kinchise, wbout 5 miles west of Murray Bridge. Tn Victoria it is restricted tu the drier areas of the northavest. From New South Wales there is only one collection: this seeming rarity in New South Wales is surprising for this species does occur in north-western Victoria and eastern South Australia, — Map 7, Observation: There is little variation except in length of the fruiting pedicels and Jength of the hairs on the fruit valves. The pedicels are usually short and stouk, but oceasionally ave as long as T mm. Unless the inner surface of the valves is checked for the presence of pubescence, a plant with longer pedicels which is only in fruit is often difficult to distinguish from some forms of H. blennedivides, Wowever, the flowers of H, brevipes are considerably smaller than those of other species of Harmyiodoxa, The fruit show the same pubescence pattern as those of I. blennodioides, At the proximal end the hairs are usually bifureate with more or less erect arms; toward the distal cnd there are gradually more hairs which are simple AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC CENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 217 or with one arm shorter than the other. The hairs are shortly stipitate; those at the proximal end are usually less than 0:3 mm long — at the distal end they may be as mnch as L mm, but are usually less. The other parts of the plant have hairs which are shortly stipitate to sessile and bi- or trifurcate to irregularly branched. Keology and Biology: As is true of the other species of Harmsiodoxa, H. brevipes generally occurs in the more sentherly semi-arid areas and usually erdws in sandy soil. The chief period of flowering and fruiting is in July through October, but, given rain, fowering probably occurs at any time of year. Willis sn. (MEI.), from the far north-west of Victoria, is annotated “common in open grassy situations on low sandhills with B. cardaminoides FvM.” Uses and Common Names: None known. Sit. Harmsiodoxa brevipes yar. major Shaw, var. nov, DiAcnosis: A ¥arietate typica differt: Foliis radicalilns plerumqve integris vel sivmatis; pedicellis Fractiferis ca, 2-7 [-15] mm longis, ca, 0-5-0-8 [-1-0) ama diameétro; valvis. exteriure cunestentibos pilis. bifureatis vel ramosis, sessilis vel brevissime stipitatis; scptis levioribus; seminibus ca, 1-5-2-1 mimi longis, ca. 1-O-L-4 wm Jatis, prorata longioribus, Wouorrevs: Evelyn Downs; 14:7.1952: Ising ~ AD 96112032! — Sour AustRaAna:—Mt, Lyndhurst; Aug, 1898; Kech 330 — B: Mt, Lyndhurst; Oct. 1898; Kool: 330 — BRI, MEL, NSW 53608: Arcoona Creek — south of Arcoona Bluff Range; 16.09.1956: Eichler 12664 — BL GH, Z, AD: Arkaringa Creck, 12 ailes north of Mt, Barry; 30,8,1955; Ising — AD, UC: Evelyn Downs; Oct. 1950; Ising -- AD, KW; New Sour Wares:—Lachlan River; 1879; Tucker 47 — MEL: Twenty sheets were secn. Distribution: This variety has been collected in the Flinders Ranges, south- west of Lake Fyre and in the vicinity of Evelyn Downs Station, about 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, as well us in south-central New South Wales. — May 7. Observations: The pattern of pubescence is much the same as for the typical variety, bot the hairs of the distal end of the valves are not strikingly longer and are often evenly hifurcate. On all parts of the plant the hairs seem quite silky and are often appressed to the organ bearing them. Were it not for the smaller flowers, some specimens of this yariety could be confused with H. puberula, It is usually easy to recognize H. brevipes, but two collections from the Areoona area in the Flinders Ranges (Kiehler 12664, 12827 — AD) are difficult. These are bath rather robust plants which seem intermediate between H. bre- ulpes and H. blennodinides, The fruit are ou longer pedicels than is usual for H. brevipes but the Howers are, in size, much more like those of H. brevipes than those of H. blennodivides. For the present it seems best tu refer them to H. brevipes var. major. Ecology and Biolegy: So far as is known the ecological requirements are the same as for the typical variety, Flowering and fruiting seem to occur chiclly in July to October; probably flowering, at least, can take place at any season after rain. Uses and Cammon Names: Koch 83) is. annotated “good fodder”. Na common names are known, 18 ELIZABETH A. SHAW sot ry eo ety a ry é iy ds a : f ' “ne : : x aS A, ree ans . . oa a \ ae — _ t aes ‘ s “ ~ ia & ' Way i xo “cs ae . * : : j ig Lb OO ar PS etd e ~ = # t a TR f ‘ ° acct be ry ; : § ° ° f Se 4 1 eee i « e “ U ad on the ~ Le 3 ae! P anil a a sy Wy SP Map 7. Distribution of Harmsiodoxa brevipes (F'vM.)Schulz @; var. major Shaw x. Distribution of Harmsiodoxa puberula Shaw a. — i an ’ ( Map 8. Distribution of Harmsiodoxa blennedioides (FvM.) Schulz. AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC CENERA OF CaLGeeRAr 24 Nolte: A possible synonym of I. brevipes is Alyswopsix clrunmondii Turez.. Bull. Soc. Nat. Most. 27/2(1854)29b. VTurezunivow deseribud this species citing Drummond. serivs Aone, 128, ealected in Western Arestrolia, and this, deseription agrees with H. brewipey. Turezaninow was oot certitin ta whit genus this phint belonved aad inched it ju Alys- sepsis for want of a hetter place, In 1877 and JS78 Maeller remarked that A. drummed Tures. was synonynions. with his Sisgpnbrivn brachypadum and Schule (1924) eited A. drummmandii Tares, us a synonym ot Harmisiodoxe brevipes, There are in BM, Wo and K collections labelled as uo, 128 fron Drurmnond’s fourth series and these plants ire all TW. breeipes wu. lrecipex. Frou KW was received a phote- wraph of the plant from ‘Curezaninow's lerbariunt which is labelled as “Drummond, 4th series, no. 128" On the label is written, Alysvopxiv drunuaeudii, but this plant is not the same as the other collections under this dumber and does not agree with Turczaninow's (leseviption. lt is woody at the base and, suggests a suffruticoxe perennial which has just put forth wonew season's growth, Also the (ruits, which seem to he young, ave on long slender pecticels ind seem to be almost obavoid, the inflorescence iuppearg to be vot so dense as it is iu H, brevipes. Authentic material af A, brecipey var, brecipes was theo sent to Kiew for eoaiparison with the Trresantiow plant, Dr, 1D. N, Dobrotshajewa, Gunttor of the Lerbariin, replied that in the moving of their collections during the war the lichel front the authentic specimen of Ay dtummondii Ture, must Juwe Dbecoue crroncously attached to another plant which was the one photographed, Until Trreziuginow's Qype is found and examine il is inipossible do cite with certuinty Aliskopsis dtimaamondi Tares. as a synonyin of TT, brevipes (FvM_iSehile Scambopus Sehulz (kaos = curved, wary = fvot; the fruiting pedicels are recurved ) Schulz, Pflreh. $6(1924)259; Schulz, Pilfam. ed. 2 176(1936)637, Deseription; Calyx open: sepals usvally spreading, eecasianally erect or aligost so, usually green with a narrow fiyalive margin, pubescent ou the abaxial side with shortly stipitate hifurcate or branched hairs; lateral sepals ablowg or deltate, usually slightly wider than the median sepals, sometimes slightly saceate basally, distally rounded to subacute; median sepals usually more or less oblong, less often pbovate, not basally saccate, distally rounded to truncate, sometimes slightly cucullate, Petals usually slightly longer than the sepals, to whout twice as long, vellaw, clawless ar with a very short linear claw, usindly suborbieular ta obovate, sometimes deltate, entire or, rarely, retuse a1 eiacdinate, rounded to truncate, rather eoursely veined. Stamens 6, erect or somewhat spreading, filuments slender distally but suddenly widening ut the hase, often spathulate, white to yellow or pale green; anthers oblong, uhtiuse, vellow. Lateral glands each surrounding the base of a lateral stamen, circular Lo syuare, usually open both on the interior and exterior, producing from vach side of each gland a lateral appendage curving around the hase of the adjacent diagonal slamen; medion gland a triangular lo ablang lobe of tissue between the bases of the members of cach pair of diagonal stamens: median glands and the tips of the Jateral appendages touehine but not fused, when fully developed. Pistil wot stipitate. anpulliforn to linear, torete or slightly compressed laterally, therefore angustisept, glabrous or pubesecnt with hairs mostly simple; ovules subbiseriate, ca. §-22 per cell, oblong to ovate, pendulous on slender linear or narrowly triangular Funicles; style linear or narrowly obconical; stigma depressed- Beate, as wide as or slivhtly wider than the style. Fruit hilocular, bivalved, dehiscent, not stipitate, fusiform aod usually curved, quadrangular or slightly latisept; valees very convex, generally keeled, with a prominent nerve and, 221 RLIZABETH A. SHAW when mature, x reticulum of secondary veins, brown, usually with magenta pigmentation ov the midrib, pubescent with simple or sessile or shortly stipitate bifureate or branched hairs, proximally tapering and subacute to rounded, ustially slightly recurved, distally tapering and usually subacute; style linear and short, slender; slizma depressed-capitate. as wide as or slightly wider than the stvle, Septum white, opaque, with nerve, slightly myose; funicles linear ti narrowly triangular, veriderlts Seeds generally subbiseriate, ca. 3-20 per cell, oblong, plump, not winged; testa reddish-brown, with darker pigmentation at the hilum, papillose, when moistened. mucose, the mucus exuded as diserete arey. elongate spirally coiled threads, oné from each cell of the testa, the mucus thus appearing radiate; embryo exactly notorrhizal, the cotyledons slightly longer than the radicle. Plant probably annual, herhaceous, several-stemmed. crect, pubescent, including the sepals, with sessile or shortly stipitate branched hitivs; stems arising from a basal rosette of leaves. equal or with a leafless central stem and remotely leaved decumbent lateral stems, Basal leaves: rosn- late, usually narrowly obovate, entire or dentate or pinnatisect, petiolate. Cantine leaves scattered, obovate to linear, entire or dentate, on slender petioles or altriast sessile on narrow cuneate bases. Rood a slender taproot, Inflorescences vbracteate, terminal on stems, inithily corymbose, but after anthesis elongating and racemose; bids just before anthesis more or less oblong; flowering pedicels slender, usually spreading, sometimes almast erect; fruiting pedicels sleneer, spreading, usually recurved and then ascendant or almost horizontal and straight. nt species in South Austrihin in the Flinders aged Gawler Ranges and the Lake Torrens MINTH. Scembapus curvipes (FyM.) Schulz Fxcwuprn Sereda: Seambopus richaredsit (FuM,)Seludz, Pace. 86(1924)260. Esystmum vlehardsit Fue, Fragen, 1OCU877)105 (Chasiongm) — Sispmbrium eicharesii (EAM) PYM.) Census £(1882)5.— Bheanordia richaredsli (PVMYFOM., ex. Tate, ‘nuns. Phil, Soe, Adi (1879)121 (nom. aud.)~ Blennodia richardsii (vM.)FVM, ex. Black, FU.S. Austral, (1924 )247, The holotype, collected at Euchi. Western Anstralia, bears no ripe frit, but the ‘ippuessed simple hairs and the very mych angustisept ovary indicate Ubat itis a species ot Palezmatospermum Schule. ‘Phis was first pointed out by Black (1937) wha sug. vested that the Helios collectoos from othe Arkuringa Creek which was determined ais Sispmbviton richurdsié by Mueller and Tate wee P. cockleatinum. Relatiouships: Scambopus is apparently most closely related to Marmsiodoxa- However, it differs from Huarmsiodexy in having median glands and in usually having fruits which are quadrangular rather than terete or slightly latisept. Admittedly these are not great differences and a quadrangular fruit is not very far removed from a terete one; however, rather minor differences must often be vsed in circumscribing genera in this family and Scambopus is quite distinct trom Marmsiodoxa. The quadrangular fruit is somewhat suggestive of that of Drabastrum. but there wre really no other significant similarities between the two and it is unlikely that they are closely related. Mueller also recognized the similarities between Harmsiodoxa and Scam- bopeus; in MEL is a plant callected by Mueller in November, 1851, probably near Crystal Brook, South Australia, It is labelled, in Muellers hand, “Ery- simum curvipes Ferd, Muell,” but also bears Mueller’s note, “Subgen: Varenia [11.z.] erysimoides”; this was later crossed out, presumably by Mueller himself. This is the same name for a subgenus of Erysimum. which occurs on sheets of AUSTRALIAN FNDEMIC GENERA OF CAUCIEFRAE 221 H, blennodivides and H. brevipes. Tt is unfortunate that Mueller did not publish any of his ideas about rela- tiouships within these groups. The grouping of MH. blennodioides, H. brevipes anc §. eurvipes under Varenia, and of Arahidella trisecta, A. fiifolia and A. nasturtium under Arabidella, as is suggested in Mueller’s annotations, would have presented a much more natural arrangement than dues Mueller's pub- lished work, Scambopus ecurvipes (FyM_) Schulz (eurvis = benl; pes = foot; the fruiting pedicels are recurved ) Sehulz, Parch. 86(1924)259.— LErysimun curvipes FvM., Linnaea grea] 368 (bastonym); FyM., Trans. Phil. Soe, Vict, 1(1855)100; FyM., Nat. PI. Vict. Se ee Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe, 5. Aust, 3(1880)51; FyM., Censtis 1(1882)5; FVM., Key Vict: Pl, 2(1895)7; FVML, Key Vict. Pl. 1(1887-1888) 129; "Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 12(1880)71; FvM,, Sec, Census 1( 1889) 9; Tate, FL S. Austral. (1890)16, 206.— Blenrodia curvipes (FvM.)FyM., Rep, Babb. Exped, (J839)7; FvM., Pl, Col, Viet. 1(1862)42; Benth. FI, Austral, 1(1863)75; ‘Tate, Trans. Roy, Soc. S$. Aust, 22(1898)193; Maiden & Betche, Cens, N.S.W. Pl. (1916)83, Black, Trans. Roy. Suc, S$, Aust. 45 (1921)12; Ising, Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust. math derds Black, Fl, §, Austral, (1924)247; Black, Fl S$. Austral, ed, 2 (1948)375.— — Sisymbrizan curvipes (FvM.)FvM,, Fragim, 7( 1869) 20. Erystmum eurvipes, Blennadia curcipes and Sisymbrium curcipes are nomenclatural synonyms of Scambopus cureipes, these names being based on a single type. Figures: Figure 1. Description; Plant herbaceous, pubescent; stems to ca. 30 cm high, excep- tionally to 50 em, terete or finely fluted, rigid, Basal leaves usually less than 6-8 em long, exceptionally ts 16 em, entire or with 1,2 or several rounded to acute teeth per side or pinnatitid with as many as 6 lohes per side, these oppusite or elternate, usually subacute, often very small toward base of leaf, leaves rounded to subacute distally, tapering into a marrow petiole. Cauline leaves usually Jess than ca, 34 em long, entire or with a few small teeth per side, or ea, 3-3. em, exceptionally to LO em, pinnatifid with usually three lobes or teeth per side, sessile or shortly petiolate. Inflorescences usually ca. 10-20-Hlowered. dense, after anthesis clongating; flowering pedicels slender, usually spreading; buds more or less ublong. Sepals usually oblong or deltate to ovate, usually green with a narrow hyaline margin: lateral sepals ca, 2:6-4-0 mm long, ca. L-0-2-0 mm wide, average 3°3 x 1:4 mm, ratio length to width 1-8;1-371:1, oblong to deltate, rounded to subacute, sometimes. slightly saceate basally; median sepals ca. 2-9-4-0 mm long, ca. 1-0-1-9 mm wide, averuge 3-4 x 1-5 mm. ralin length to width 1-8:1-3-2:1, more or less oblong of ovate, rounded to truncate, sometimes slightly cucullate. not basally saccate, Petals to about iwice as long as the sepals, ca, 3-4-6-6 min long, ca, 2-4-5-3 mm wide, average 4:9 x 3-5 mm, ratio lenyth ty width 1:1;1-1+5:1, usually suborbicular to ovate, not clawed or with 2 very short claw Jess than 0:3 mm in length. Lateral stamens ea, [2-44] 3-1-4-0 mm long, average &-& mm, filaments ca, 0:1-0°2 mm diameter distally, basally expanded to ca. 0-5-0-7 mm, white, yellow or pale ereen: anthers ca. [-0-1-7 mm, average 1-4 mm, oblong, yellow; dinzanal stamens ca. 2°6-4-1 min long, average 31 mm, otherwise as Jateral stamens; anthers ca. 1-0-1'8 mm, average 1-4 mm, as those of the lateral stamens. Pisril cu, 2-0-4-0 nm ong, ampulliform to linear, terete or slightly angustisept, not stipitate, glabrous or pubescent; style near or narrowly obconical; stigma £33 ELIZABETEL A, SHAW depressed-capitate: nectaries ay in’ generic description, I'ruiting pedicels ca, 12 cm long, semetimes to 3 cm, ea. O-4-0-7 mm ih diameter, slender, usnally recurved, Fruit ca, J0-20 mm, nsually 10-15 mm long, septum usnally ca. 2 mm wide. but to 3 mm; valves convex or keeled. with a prominent nerve. pubesceut. hairs to ca. 0-5 mm, usually shorter at proximal end of the yalve: style ca. 0-3-1-3 mm. linear and slender. stigma depressed-capitate, Seeds ea. 1-1-1-5 x 0-9-1-1 mm, subbiseriate. ca, 3-20 per cell, oval, pluinp, not winged; teste reddish-brown, at the hilum with darker pigmentation: cnrhrye exactly notor- rhizal, cotyledons slightly longer than the radiele. Tyer Locantey: “Prope rivinn Crystal Brook”. Horopyees: Orystal Brouk; Oct... 1831: P. Moeller -— VIET, 760! lsorveus?: S. Australia. Crystal Brook: ¢: ex herb. Miuetl — KB. Sovin Ausinacis:—28 tiles $. Pavachilny; 26.8196); Shaw 34 — AD: Waite House; 3.7,1054: MWiltun 402, S514 ~ ADW: Whyalla-Kimba; July, 1955; Higginn — AD, UO, 7: Tarcoola; 22,9.1920: Istue J767 = MEL. NSW 53574, BRI; Thi all thirty sheets were seen. Distribution; This species seems to oecur only in South Australia, where it has been collected in the Flinders Ranges, the ranges sonth-west of Port Augusta, the Lake Torrens basin and at Tareoola, As’ is true of several species in this group, the holotype was collected at Crystal Brook in the sonther part of the Flinders Ranges; this area has for many years been uscd for agricultural purposes and it is unlikely that this species still occurs here. — Map 10. Observations: The most noticeable variation is in size and foliaye. The plants in Shaw 87 (AD) are only a few inches high and are bearing fruit; with these can be compared some of the Yuduapiua plants which are as much ag 30 em high. These differences in size are oly the consequence of more or less favonrable conditions, Although the Jeaves usually have been described as entire or remotely toothed. the basal Jeaves are often pimiatisect. This is especially noticeable om some Of the Yadnapinna plants. It should be remarked that this spevies seems td lose its leaves easily, for many of the collections are entirely Jeafless, being only bare stems und fruiting racemes. Mueller described the corolla parts as heing scarcely longer than the sepals und this was repeated by Schulz, Imt in all the plants examined the petals have been af least 14 times to twice as Tong as the sepals, In fact, the Howers are ruther conspicuous hecanse of the large expanse of blade beyond the calyx. It should also be noted that the seeds seem to be not more than 1% mm Jong though Schulz described them as bemg 2mm in length. Ecology and Biology: Little is kuown of §. enreipes in these respects, but it probably occurs most commenly on light sandy soils, Mivray 131 (ADW) is annotated as vecurring on “sandhills or bluebush flat’ and on collections fram Yuduapinna it is said to be very common in this area. The writer has seen tis species in the field only once, hetween Hawker and Purachilna in the Sines Ranges, and here it was growme on sandy soil in depressions bv the ronuasiqe, Uses and Common Names: Neither nses nor common names Lave been recorded. Relationships; These are discussed under the genus Scambopus, AUSTRALIAN BINDEMIC GENBEA OF CaOTCUR URAL 225 Drabastrum (Fy M)Schuby | Wraba = genus in this family} Schulz, Plreh. 86( 19241257; Scholy. Piha. ed, 2 17b(19386)636— — Rlen odie sect. Drabastram VyM., Trans, Phil, Soe. Viet. 111855)100, Description, Calyx open; sepals spreading or, loss atten, almost ereet, basally hot saceate, wsually green, sometimes. lavencler. with a narrow hyaline margin. usuilly sparsely pubescent on the abavial sides lated! sepals vhlong to obuvate mstially wider than the median, distally usually subacute; median sepals often obioug. sometimes obovate, distally rounded. sometimes slightly cucullate. Petals about Uh to 3 times as long as the sepals, usually white, sometinies lavender. with distinction between blade and claw; blade oblong to broadly obovate ae suborhicular, qndire or sinngte, ruanded or truncate, sumetimes retuse or emarginate, coarsely veined, tapering suddenly into a slender linear claw. Stamens G, somewhat spreading, filaments linear or slightly dilated at the base, white, offen becoming violet distally; anthers quidrate to shortly ublong, obtuse. yellow, Lateral glands cuch surrounding the base al a lateral shintwen, subquacdrate, emarginate un interiov, open on the exterior, with short lateral appendages, or, reduced to a small triangle of tissue on either side of euch of ire stamens: median glands lacking. Pistil nol stipitate, linear to lusilormn or narrowly ampulliform, straight, terete. glabrous: ovules irregularly biscriute, peadulous on slender linear funieles, ca. 5-12 pec cell: stigma small, depressed-capitate. usually slightly wider than the stvle. Fruif biloeular, bi- valved, dehisvent, viol stipitate, ellipsoid to oboyoid, usually slightly curved, terete Or quadranwular; valves very convex, often almost keeled, with stant nerve and allen a coarse reticulum of secondary veins. often reddish-purple, glabrous or rarely, with a few scattered branched hairs. proximally tapering and almost truneate, rarely, rounded, distally acute to rounded; style linear, slender, short; stigma depressed-capitute, as wide as or slightly wider than the style. Septum white, opaque, sometimes fenestrate. nerved, proximally horizontally wrinkled: /rimicles linear, slender, slightly curved, senda Seeds irregularly Iiseriate, cal 1-9 per cell, ovoid, phimp. not winged: testa shiny, dark red- brown or brown, slightly darker at the hilum, conspiciously reticulate, when moistened, mcose, the mnens exuded as discrete hemispheres or shurt oblongs, often appetrin non-radiate; embryo exactly notorrhizal, radicle straight, longer om Shorter thaw the broadly linear te snborkieular cotyledons. Phant perennial will) woody base, few- to many-stemmed, erect, usually low, densely pubescent to, and including, the sepals with sessile cr shorth: stipitate branched hairs: steuns arising from i basal rosette of leaves, equal or, more commonly, with a leafless central stem and remotely leaved lateral stems, Basal leaves rosulate, narrowly obovate to niwrowly spatholate, finely dentate or, oot uneommonly, pimnutfied, usually on petioles as lone as, or to 2 times the blade, very rarely ahiiost sessile om eureate bases. Candine leates few. scuttered, more or less obovate, entire Or coatsely dentite, sessile on cuneate hises or very shortly petiolate, Root staut and woody, duflorescences ehracteate, terminal on stems, initially dense, hut elongating after anthesis; buds just befare anthesis spherical to ovoid: flowering pedicels slender, usually somewhat spreading; frulling pedicels rigid, spreading to horizontal or almost so, straight or slightly curved. One species in alpine qnd subalpine pivls af New Seath Wales and Vietoria, Drabastray alpestee OFvM. Selmi. Relationships; Dradastrune stands Yuite isolated from the other genera in this group; if itis at ull clasely related to any it must be to Harmsiodora, Uwe S34 ELIZABETH A, SITAW absence of a median gland und the fusiform fruits suggesting the affinity with the latter genus, It differs very much from Blennodia and it is difficult to wnderstand Mueller’s originally describing D. alpestre as a species of Blennodia, Although Mueller at one time included this species in Capsella and Benthain commented that it seemed to form a transition between Capsella and Blennodia (sensu Bentham), it differs from Capsella in not having a laterally compressed fruit. The valves are somewhat keeled but the width in the plane of the septum is not significantly less than that in the plane at right angles to that of the septum. On some of Mueller's own collections of D. alpestre are annotations in his hand suggesting that it might be better placed in Moricandia or Diplotaxis, He chiefly based these suggestions on the Fact that “the cotyledons are at times slightly bent inwards”. The writer has seen no evidence of this in anv of the collections, including Mueller's own, which have been examined, Furthermore, the cotyledons of both Moricandia and Diplotaxis are not “slightly bent”; these genera belong to the tribe Brassiceae aud the cotyledons are conduplicate, Drabastrum also differs from these two genera in many other respects, par- ticularly in the nature of the fruit, 1, Drabastrum alpestre (FvM)Schulz (alpestre = of the alps; this species occurs chiefly in the Australian Alps). Schulz, Pflrch. 86(1924)257— Blennodia alpestris FyM,, Trans, Phil. Soc. Viet, 1(1865) 100 (basionym); FVM,, Pl, Col, Viet, 1(1860-1862)40; Benth., Fl, Austral. 1(1863)77; Maiden & Betche, Gens. N.S.W. Pl. (1916)33.— Capsella blennodina FyM,, Pl. Col. Viet. 1(1960-1862)42.— —— Sisymbrium dlpestre (i'vM,)FVM., Fragm., 7(1869)20.— Erysimum capsellinum FyM., Nat. Pl. Viet. 1(1879)35; FvM,, Census 1(1882)5; FvM., Key Viet. Pi, 3(1885)7; FvM., Key Vict. Pl, 1(1887-1888) 129; FvM,, Sec. Census 1( 1889) J— Erysimum blennodinuin (I'vyM.) Kuntze, Revis. gen, pl. 2(1891)933 Blennodia alpestrix, Capsetla blennadina, Sisymbrium alpestre, Erysimum: capsellinam and Erysimum blennodinunt ave nomenclatural synonyms of Drabastrum alpestre, these names being based on a single type. Figures: Schulz, Pirch. $6(1924)fig.15; Schulz, Pfam, ed. 2 17b( 1936) fiz 406. — Figure 12, Description: Plant an undershrub, sometimes with a woody underground rhizomatous part bearing at least two aerial stem systems; stenrs to 30 cm high but usnally much less, exceptionally to ca. 40 em, erect, rigid, terete or finely Huted, reddish-brown or reddlish-purple: root often with woody laterals. Basal leaeves ca, [1-] 2-4 [-6] cm long, to ca. 14 om wide, usually with 3-4 coarse teeth per side or a few small acute teeth, or pinnatifid or entire or sinuate, rounded to subacute, sparsely pubescent or subylahrous, petioles sometimes remotely toothed and short. Cauline leaves eva, (3-0-8 [-1-5] om long, to ca. 1 om wide, often with 1, less often with 2 broadly acute tecth per side, some- times entire. usually subucnte, subglabrous, sessile or shortly petiolate. Ii- florescences to ea. 30-fowered, dense, after anthesis elongating and often very loose; flowering pedicels usually terete; fruiting: racemes to 12 cm long, usually much less; fruiting pedicels to ca. 1k em, Sepals usually oblong to ovate, usually green, sometimes lavender, with a uarrow liyaline margin; lateral sepals ca. 2-1-3-4 mm Jong, ca. L-(}1-$ nm wide, average 2-9 x 1-35 mm, ratio length to width 1-8:1-2-1:1, often broadly ehavate or oblong, usually subactte, not saceate; median sepals ca. 2°0-3-5 mm long, ca. O-S-L-35 mm wide, average AUSTHALIAN ENDEMIC CENERA OF CHUCIFRAAE 5 2) y 1-2 mm, ratio length to width 2-1:1-2-0:1, oblong to obovate, rounded und sometimes cugnlate, not saccate. Petals ta abont twice as long as the sepals, ca, 4:0-6°3 min long, average 6-3 mm, clawed; blades ca. 2-6-4-5 mm long, ca, 2°0-3-7 mm wide, average 34 ~ 2-9 mm, ratio length to width 1-O0:1-1+4:1, oblong to suborbieular, sometimes almost obcordate, rounded or fritheate, tapering inte a slender linear claw, the blade averaging 65 per cenl of the totul petal lenyth; petals white or Jayvender, often only the claw and the lower part of the blade Favender, the veins usually purple. Lateral stamens cu. 2-0-2-8 mm, average 2°3 mm, filanients ta 0°5 mm wide, linear or slightly expanded basally, white or lavender; anthers ca. 0:6-1-0 mm, average 0-8 mm. quadrate to oblong, yellow; diagonal stamens ea. 2+5-4-0 mm, average 3-1 mm, otherwise ag lateral stamens; anthers ca, 0-3-1 mm, averave 0:7 mm, as those of lateral stamens. Pistil ca. 2-3-3-2 mm long, linear to Fusiform or ampulli- firm, straight, terete, glabrous; style lineur, slender, stiyma depressed-cupitate: uectaries as goreric Fescription, Fruiting pedicels ca, 4-8 pa4| mm long average 0°4-0-5 mm diameter: spreading to horizontal, densely pubescent. Fruit ca. 4-8 [-12] mm long, ca. 162-20 mm wide aeross the septum; epidermal cells of the septum more or Jess rectangular with straight or sinuate walls, becoming irregular in shape toward the edges; style cas [0-4-] 0-7-0-8 [-L-1] x 0:1-0°3 mm: stigma depressed-capitate, Seeds ca, 08-12 mm long, ca, 0°6-0°8 inm wide, irregularly biseriate, usually 5-6 per cell, these mostly in the distal epi of the fruit, ovoid, plamp, not winged; mucus exuded ta ca, ’ inm; embryo exuetly notorrhizal, cotyledons longer vr shorter than the radiele. Een Locatary: “In subalpine graysy places on the sources of the Murray and Snowy Werk, Honotypuss Sources of the Murray aod Snowy Rivers; 4-5000 % Bub. 1854 [fele Willis]; Mueller — MEL 776! tsoryers KY, WMI, MET 777! New Sovre Waves; Cooma to Nimitibelle; Deo, 1896; Maiden — NSW 53577: Cooma: QAVNG08: Cambaye 2104 — NSW 83578; Cooma; Sept. 1913; Bearman -— NSW 53576, BM, MEL: Tlappy Jack's Plain, headwaters of the Ifuppy Jack River ca, 19 miles 5. of Kisndrar 181.1958: Thompson — NSW 53580; Murray. River, NS .Wales; 2; 2 — MEL: Oldbury an Trop Mountain, wpwards af 300 tl. altitude; ?; Atkinson — MEL; Virrostar Suggim Bugeany Ovt. 1939; Harter — WEL; Ainnomnntie near Onien (jue tion of Peds ialaid Ck. and Mitte Mitta River); 27.9.1882; Stirling — MEL; Mitta Mitta; In all, 18 shewts were seen. Distribution; This species occurs in the mountains south-west of Sydnev ant extends southward into Victoria, Most of the collections in New South Wiles are from the area south of the Australian Capital Territory, but D, alpestre has been collected as far north as Bathurst, N.S.W) — Maz 10, Observations: Most of the available plants are less than 15 em high, although the Sugvan Bugyan River specimen, an almost leafless stem bearing an intruc- tescence, is 40 em long, Apart from this, there is no muteworthy variation, The most distinctive organs wre the petals and the seeds. ‘The petals are usually white with the veins purple, although sometimes the claw and the lower part of the blade, or the entire petal may be coloured, ‘he seeds are plump wd a deep reddish-brown in colour; the testa is coarsely reticulate und the micas is exuded as disercte bodies, one from each intrureticular area, The reticulate outer layer of the testa is easily removed, exposing the tnely reticu- late inner Javer. Within these is a thin whitish layer of endosperm. Uses and Common Names; Neither uses nor common names have heen recorded. Relationships: These are discussed under Drabastrum (FvM)Sebulz, Ty ELIZABIVTID A. SLIAW Pachymitus Schulz iwayzs= thickuéros= thread; the troiting pedicels of P, eardanitnoides are stout) Schulz, Pilrch. $6(1924)266; Schilv, Pdfam. ed. 2 17h (1936) 639. Description; Calyx open; sepals spreading or, less often, almost erect, ustially green with a narrow hyaline margin and on the abaxial side sparsely mibescent with shortly stipitite brariched hairs; lateral sepals usually more v1 5 Oblong, sometimes hela or ovate, usually broader than the median. sometimes slightly saccate basally, distally rounded to subucute; median sepals usually oblong or narrowly obovate, proxsimully slightly tapering, not saccate, distally rounded or, less often, subacute, often slightly cucullate. Petals to twice as long as the sepals, probably always while, usually cuneate to narrowly obovate and without distinction into blade and chiw, entire or simiate, apically rounded or truncate, then often slightly retuse or emarginate. coarsely veined: sometimes clawed, then the blade oblong. often broadly so, or obovate to stub- orbicular, tapering gradually into a rather slender claw, the same length as the blade ar slightly longer. Stamens 6, erect ov somewhat spreading, filaments more or less linear or slightly dilated basally, white or pale green, the diagimal Hkonents often suddenly contracted and slightly curved distally; withers oblornu or almost quadrate, obiuse, yellow. Lateral glands each surrounding, the base wa lateral stamen, usually quadrangular and open on the juterior and the exlotior, often the sides suppressed, the gland then appearing as four Jobes ut Hssae, proadicing From each side of each land a lateral appendage curving around the base of the adjacent diagonal stumen, needidn glands, iF present, obhave or triangular pieces of tissue hetween the bases of the members of vach pair of diagonal stamens. Pisti! not stipitate, linear, more or less terete, glabrous. ocvales subbiseriate to biseriate, oblong to elliptic, pendulous oi short Tineay funieles, ca, 10-20 per cell; style usually obconical, sometimes linear, stignia fleshy, depressed-eupitate, usually slightly wider than the style. Bruit bilocwlar, bivalved, dehiscent, not stipitate or on a very short stipe, linear, straight or slightly curved, terete or quadrangular, calces convex to keeled, with a pro- minent vein and a Jess distinct reticulum of veins more or less parallel to the longitudinal axis, often somewhat constricted between the seeds, shiny, often. when vipe, reddish-purple,. subglabrous or generally pubescent with simple or sessile or very shortly stipitate hifurcate hairs, the hairs usually denser dis- tally; valves proximally tapered’ and usually rounded, rarely truncate, but not uncommonly subacute. almost always Hared or reflexed, distally tapering slightly anc rounded te bineate, sometimes retuse or emarginate; style Jinear or slightls tapering distally or ubheonicul; stigna small, depressed-capitite, as wide vas ar slichtly wider than the style Septym white, opaqne, vein more or less distinet. slightly rugulose; funicles linear, short, straight or slightly curved, pendulous. Seeds noiseriate ta subbiseriate, cu, 10-20 per cell, ublong to ovoid, plump; testa dil orange-hrown, finely papillose, when moistened, mucose. The mutes exnded as diserete oblongs, each with a conical central core, thus having a finely wadiate appearance, Plant probably annual, herbaceous, few- to many- stemmed, erect, pubeseent, including the sepals, with simple or shortly stipitate tau-shaped or branched hairs; steams arising Pam a basal rosette of leaves, equal, ov a leafless central stem with Teafy lateral stems, Basal leaves rosulate, hed or pinnatifid, often deeply dissected, or remotely dentate, petiolate. Canline leaves scattered, ovate to elliptic, entire ur coarsely dentate, sometimes deeply dissected, shortly petiolate or sessile un cuneate bases, Roof a slender taproot. Inflorescences ebracteate, icrminal on the stems, initially rather dense and there- fore corymbose, but alter anthesis elongating and racemuse, sometimes «nite AUSIMALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIVERAB 227 Jax; sometimes stems much reduced so inflorescence appears basal; bucls tmme- diately before anthesis spherical to oblong; flowering pedivels slender, more or less erect; fruiting pedicels rigid, gradually expanded distally, usually spread- ine to horizontal, rarely almost erect, One species in the Murray lands of Sonth Australia and the adjacent parts of Vietoria. Pachinnitus cardaminoides (FvM.) Schulz, Troated jis a synonyin of P. cardaminotdes: is 2. ldeae (EVM.)Schulz, Relationships: Pachymifus has several features in common with the other “onera of the “Blennodia group", but is nevertheless quite distinct trom them. It differs from Marmsigdoxa in having median glands, in having fruit which are linear rather than fusiform, and in the sort of mucus exuded by the testa. Prom Seambopus it difers most in the shape of the fruit and in the type of mucus. From. the other genera of this wronp itis also set apart by characters of this sort, Pachymitus cardaminoides (FvM.)Schulz \cerduminoides = like Cardamine L., a genus in this family) Schulz, PHrch. 86(1924)266.— — Sisynrbrium cardamimoides FyM,, ‘Trans, Phil, Soe. Viet. 1(1855)34 (busienynt); FyM,, Hook. J. Bot. Kew Mise. 5 (1856)4; FvM,. PL Col. Vict, 1(1860-1862)40; PvM., Pragm, 11(1878 )27: P'vM., Nat. Pl, Viet, 1(1879)32; Tate, Trans. Roy. Soe. S$. Aust 3(1890)51; FvM., Cerisus 1(1862)5; FyM.. Kew Viet. PI, 2(1885)7; Key Vict. Pl. 1 (1887-1888)131; Tate, Trans. Roy, Soe, 8. Aust, 12(7889)7L; FyM., See. Census 1(1889)9: Tate, Fl. 8, Austral. (1890)17, 206; Tate, Trans, Roy, Suc. S. Aust. 22(1898)123.— — Blennoria careliminoides Benth. Fl, Austral. 1(1863)75; Tate. Trans, Roy. Soc. §. Aust. 22(1898)123, 124, 239; Bailey, Qld, Flora 1(1999)47; Maiden & Betche, Ceus. N.S.W. Pl, (1916)83; Black. Trans. Roy. Soe, S. Aust. 41(1917)638: Black, Fl, 5. Austral, (1924 )247;, Black, Fl. S. Austral, ed. 21048 )a7 — Erysinion cardamingoides (FvM.) FvM., Fragm. 11(1879)59 in obs— Erysimum lucae FvM.,. Fragm. 1) (1879)59.— Sisymbriom lucoe (FvM.)FvM., Census 1(1862)5; FyM,, Key Vict. PL 1(1887 1888) 131.— Blennorlia lucnae (FV¥M.)Maid. et Betche- Censns NSW. Pl (1916)83.— — Pachymitus lucae (FvM,)Schulz, Pflrch. 86( 1924 ) 267, Sisumbriton cardaminaides KVM. Erysimun curdaminuides (FvM. EVAL, and Blonwodie carduininaides Benth, are adrienclatural synonyms oF Pachymitus curdaminoides (FvM.) Sells, these names being based on a single type; Sisymbriam Incwe (FVM.)FvM. Klennedio tue: (EVAL Maid. et Betche and Pachymitus Iuede (FyM.)Scholz are taxo- nomic synonyms of the preeeding manws, being based on the type of Krystian (ueae FyM. which is discussed below. Figure: Figure 14, Newe: Although Sagmbrivm. vardaminodes was published by Mneller i 1855, Beathan (1463) cited “Bo ciurdaminoides, FL Muell. Ierb, (as a Sisymbrium)”, The form of this vitutian sagéests that Bentham may nat have known of the valid publication of S$. carda- mitwides, ‘Therefore one cannot necessarily interpret Bentham’s species as being based on the type of 5. ecardaminnides. To jwwoid confusion if seems advisable to chaose the holotype of §. cardaminoides is lectotype of B. vurdeminvides, making the two names nomenclatural synonyms. — This is sossible if Bentham saw the type of §. cardamiavides. FyM.; this appears probable frem onthiin’s citation of spreimenn, The type lovality of S$. rardumtnoides is given as “On sandridacs near the entrance of the Murray River”. The only collection mule by Mueller which agrees with this locality and is dated before the publication of S.. cardaminoides is MEL 762. [twas collocted by Miller on October 5, 1848, and the Jovality is ziven as “In campis arenosis inter Straitalbin 228 ELIZABETI€ A. SHAW gAlsafFialbsyn) et Wellington, this as only a few miles from where the Murray River enters Wir Stu. This collection was seen hy Benth for it bears his mark on the Jubel and js probably the One referred to by ine as coming fram South Austealia, ‘Iherefore, this collection Which is the holotype ot §. eardamineides is chosen as the leetotype aE 8 eardaminpides Beath the two names thus lowsming nomenchitigl syaonyins, ly 1924 Sehils published 2. cartaminoides var. casycarpus, distiuenished from the epic! variety, sail to have glabrous Quit, by having the fruit sparsely pubescent. It does not seen justified to maintain this variety for on a0 plant seen by the weiter Tiave all the fruits heen either glabrous or pubesoont. However, there seems ta uxist oo collection annotated by Sehiilx as beng the variety var. dasyearpux, Until such w collection is found it is necessary to raaintain the name, altheudh at has been red by no one after Schalz. The nime Lrysimiin fucae was published in 1879 hy Mueller who based it on a eol- lestion anade hy Lacey aear the jmoction of the Minnmay and Darling Rivers. The type collection made in Septermber, (878. by To PL Lucas and labelled a beme from Balranald (MEL T7704 is a rather robust specimen of 2. cardaminoides, to K is av collection made by Vivo at Balranald which is probably an isotype. Description: Plant herbaceous. pubescent: stems usually less than 30. em, but i fuwonrable conditions miy be much taller, terete or finely Muted, usually pubescent. but eceasionally subglabrous, then usually more densely pubescent on the adaxial side of the fruiting pedicels, nsnally reddish purple, Basal leaves exceptionally ty 20 em, but usually Jess than 12 em, to 3 em in width, usually less than 2 cm, pinnately lobed. lobes usually opposite, lincar to deltate, usually acute, somehmes rounded, horizontal or runeinate, often with a small acute tooth in the distal sinus; terminal lobe deltate or suborbicular or elliptic, some- times with) one coarse subacute tooth per side. sometimes niucronate; Jeaves fapuring inte a long slender petiole, Cauline leaves ta ca. 4 em king and ca, 3 om wide, entire or remotely dentate with small, more or less deltate, acute teeth or deeply pinnatisect with 1-3 linear to narrowly deltate, weute to subacute luhes per side, the terininal Jobe acute to rounded; Inflorescences tu ea. 40- flowered, usually ca, 25- to 80-Howered. usually dense; flowering pedicels ea. 2 min diameter, slender, not much expanded, more or less ereety Huds spherical ty Oblone. Sepals oblong to ovate or obowate, usually green with a narrow hyaline margins lateral sepals va. 2-1-3-0 mm long. ca. 0-8-1-3 mm wide, average 26% .-Lmm, ratio length to width 2:1:1-3:0;1, usually oblong, rounded to subacute. sometines slightly suceate basally, median sepals ca, 2-3-3-3 mm lone cu. (8-1-7 min wide, average 2-7 » 1-0 nim, ratio length to width 2°5;1-3°3:1, oblong or varrowly obovate, rounded or subacute, often slightly cucullate, not usally saceate, Petals about twice us lone as the sepals, ca. 3-5-5-6 mm long, cu. te12-7 mm wide. average 4°9-1°$ mm, ratio length to width 2-0:1-3+7:1, cuneute to obovate. if clawed. ratio Jength to width of blade 1-0:1-1-2:1, blade averaving 53 per cent of the totul petal length. Lateral stamens ca. 2:5-4°1 mm. average Sed inm. filaments linew ov slightly expanded basally. white or pule sree anthers ca. 0°5-0-0 mm, average 0-7 mm. oblong to quadrate. obtuse, yellow; ¢Hagonal stamens ea, 2+0-3-2 mm, average 2-6 mm, filaments sume- Hines suddenly contracted distally. otherwise as those of the lateral starnens: wnrhers ca, 0-3-0-9 mm, average O-T mm, otherwise as those of the Jateral stumens, Pistil ca, 3-5-5-3 mm. linear, straight, terete, glabrous: style lineur to obciinical; stigma Hleshy, depressed-capitite. Pruitine pedicels ca. 4-5-16 mm, exceptionally to 40 nm Glediced hasitl raceme), diameter at proximal end cx. O-34h7 mm, at the distal Q-4-1-1 tm, usually ahout twice to three times as White at distal as at presimal ead, usaally spreading at an augle greater than 48 devrees. surely at cu 15 devrees. usvally straight, sometimes slichtly curved. aecasionally somewhat reflesed and then ascendant. Preil ea. 8-19 nie lony, cu. Q:7-1:G mm across the septum: salves conver to keeled, with a prominent yein, AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF GROUCIPERAE 220 proximally flared, pubescent with hairs to ca, 0-2 mim long; style to ca, 1-2 mm, sometimes very short, then ca. 0-3-0-4 mm; stigma depressed-capitate, Seeds ca, 0-8-1-0 x 0-5-0:6 mim, uniseriate to hiseriate, ca. LO-20 per cell, oblong to avoid, plump; mucus appearing finely radiates embryo exactly notorrhizal, radicle slightly longer than the eotvledons. tyre Locaury: “On sandridges near the entrance of the Marray River,” Lectoryecs! In campis arenosis inter Streitalbin [Strathalbyn] et Wellington; 5.10,1648; Mueller — MEL 762! Suvrw Atsraacrat—Loveday; 20.7.1942, Gaylu — Ws Karoonda; 14.85.1924; Cleland — AD: Pt. Pornonda, Lake: Alexandrina; 3.L0..880; Nate — AD: Naw Sout WaAxes:—Lake Cargelligo; Sept. 1918; Baurmen — NSW 53582: Broakang- Waiga Wagga; 1873; Crouch — MEL: Zara, via Hay; Aug, 1903; Officer — MEL: Lower Lachlin Hiver; Sept. 1878; Mueller — MEL: Darling and Murray River jimetion: 1680; Warburton — NSW 53391 - Vietoma:—3 miles N. of G5-mile post on Sturt Highway, along trick to Bervibce Tank: 2.91948; Willis — MEL: Joparity 20.9.1898: Willumson 3h4 — MEL: Dimboola and Nhill; 12.11.1899: StEloy D’Alten 5 — MEL: Glenelg River: ?; Robertson — MEL 765, FE: Sixty-five sheets Were seen, Distribution; This species is known from Victoria, New South Wales and South Australia, Itt Victoria the collections extend from the far north-western corner to the lower Glenele River in tho south-west, In New South Wales it seems restricted to the south-western part of the State. In South Australia P. cardaminvides seems to be most common alone the Murray River, althongh there are collections from Ardrossan on the Yorke Peninsula, Mt. Remarkable, and Monalena, — Map 10. Observations: The genus owes its name to the stout fruiting pedivels which are often of a greater diameter at the distal end than at the proximal end, Hawever, this is not constant and there are many plants with pedicels which ure quite linear. The pubescence presents no distinctive features, being made up of short branched hairs. The fruit valves are almost glabrous with a few hairs at the distal end, These may be simple, or sessile or very shortly stipitate bifureate lrairs lo about ¥ mm long. The leaves bear sessile or shortly stipitate bifureate to stellate hairs, The cauline hairs are almost sessile and branched with the arms appressed to the stem, or slipitate and tau-shapecl or bi- or trifureate. or even more com plexly branched, These stem hairs may be as much as & mm long, but ave nsually shorter. Occasionally, even though the hairs on the stems are branched. there may be long simple hairs on the adaxial side of the fruiting pedicels and the secondary stems. It hag often been suggested that Geococcus pusillus Drumm, ex Harv. is a form of this species. The writer feels that this is not so; even when P_ car- daminoides is stunted it does not approach the habit of G. pusillus which. is essentially stemless, Also G. pusillus always has much smaller flowers, a dhif- ferently shaped ovary (conical as opposed to linear for P. cardaminoides) and w smaller finit. The fruit of G, pusillts is often somewhat misshapen as a result of its being forced into the earth, but even when one finds a plant with fruit which have not heen buried. they are not of the size and shape of those of 230 ELIZABETH A. SHAW 2 \ } 6 é an N i \ hs f ; i f 5 \ | Ne 5 } : 7 ( f N ae i ! RL 2 d wo \ \ fe t ‘ Msn | . 4 L Pa _ L \ Ss , S f 1 { \ fk ~~ -4 ‘ i * 1 jf Hl ° ' ‘ \. : fabs cee Ne * of e t . é * / ny - ‘A yy a a! ° / o ex eo ae a =f ee Ry ia eee fotos : ; fy rd oy ey oe a oe, i : \ a i ae o Map 9. Distribution of Geococcus pusillus Dramm. ex. Harv. ; “ ao ats ayy 24 had ; 2 y 3 oa \ ws, f LA wen 8 J . - IX ee t os / t & ! i Sy é ; 1 1 * 1 | sy aa J a pot ! ; : j j j KO i Ss, 4 i i } 4 ~L ( : \ f- oa ess - : i : | : So j H y t i \ i . - i f \ a ae { Map 10. Distribution of Scambopus curvipes (FvM.)Schulz ®; Distribution of Pachymitus cardaminoides (FvM.)Schulz x. Dis- tribution of Drabastrum alpestre (FvM.)Schulz &. AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 231 PF. cardaminoides. Ecology and Biology: P. cardaminoides is an ephemeral and appears after winter rains. The most asual months for flowering are August through October, It probubly occurs most commonly on light sandy soils; among annotations with collections of this species are “sundridges” (Reader s.n,; 16.9.1903.— MEL), “ipen vrassy sandhills” (Wills sn; 3,9.1948 — MEL), and “heaths on the Glenelg River” (Robertson s.n, — MEL 765, K), Uses andl Comnean Names: Neither mses nor common names have been recorded, Relationships: These ace diseussed wider Pachymitus Schulz. Geovoveus Drumm. ex Lary. (yy — earth, xdewos — fruit, The fruits are buvied in the ground) Drummond ex Harvey, Hook. J. Bot. Kew Mise. 7(1835)52; Walp. Agu. 4(1857)208: Benth. & Hook. Gen. Pl. 1(1862)83; Benth., FL Austral. 1 (1863)79; Prantl, Pilfam, 3(2)(1890)205; Tate, Fl. §. Austral. (1890205; ‘Yate, Fl, S. Austral, (1890)17, 206; Bailey, Qld. Flora (1899)49; Hayek. Beith. Bot. Centralbl, 27(1911)324; Maiden & Betche, Gens, N.SW_ PI. (1916)84; Black, Fl. 5. Austral, (1924)245; Schulz, PArch,. 86(1924)258; Schulz, PHfany, ed, 2 17b( 1936)637; Bluck, FI. S, Austral. ed.2 (1948)376, Deseription; Calyx open; sepals usually spreading, sometimes almost erect, usually aes green with a narrow hyaline margin, sparsely pubescent on the alaxial side with sessile to shortly stipitate irregularly branched hairs; lateral sepals ovate to deltate, usually slightly wider than the median sepals, not saecate basally, distally acute to subaoute; median sepals oblong to obovate, not saccate basally, distally subacnte to rounded, Petals often about the same length as the sepals, but sometimes slightly longer or shorter, white or cream- coloured, clawless or the blude tapering gradually into a more or less linear claw, obovate to ovate, subacute lo rounded, rather coarsely veined, Stamens 6, ereet or slightly spreading, flaments more or less clavute, usually expanded proximally, white or pale green; athers oblong to square. rounded to truncate, vellow. Lateral «lands indistinct, appearing as oblong or semicircular pieces of tissue, cach subtended by a petal; medivn glands apparently obsolete. Pistil nok stipitate, more or less conical, terete or slightly compressed dorso-ventrally, elubrous or very sparsely pubescent with very shortly stipitate irregularly yranched hairs: ovules subbiseriate to biseriute. ca. 4-20 per cell, oblong, pen- dilous on slender linear funicles; sfyle very short and obconical or obsolete; slizma small, depressed-capitate, as wide as the style if present. Frait bilocular, lnvalved, dehiscent, not stipitate, usually linear, sometimes nearly square in eutline, almost always latisept, rarely terete, brawn, glabrous or pubescent with sessile or shortly stipitate bifurcate to irregularly branched hairs; calves usually almost flat, rarely convex, usually with a distinct nerve and, when mature, a reticulum of secondary veins, proximally rounded to truncate, reHexed or dared su that fram the dorso-ventral aspect the fruit is sagittate, distally rounded to subacute; style short and linear or oheonical or obsolete; stigma depressed- cupitate, as wide as the style. Septunr pale-vellow or cream-coloured, opaque, with nerve, smooth, coriaceous; funicles linear to narrowly triangular. Seeds subbiseriate to. biserlate, ea. 2-12 per cell, oblong to obovate, plump, not winged; lesta light orange-brown with darker pigmentation at the hilum, papillose, when 233 ELIZABETH A. SHAW moistened slightly mucose, the mucus exuded as very small oblong to hemi: spherical bodies, one from each papilla; embryo notorrhizal, the cotyleduns usnally shorter than the rudicle and shortly stipitate, Plant anual, herbaccous, short-stemmed, prostrate, pubescent, including the sepals, with sessile or shurtly stipitate branched hairs; main stew almost always much reduced so terminal inflorescence appears basal: lateral stems usually very short and often amnch thickened, prostrate. bearing very crowded leaves, Basal leaves rosulate, erect oy spreading, more or Jess linear, pinmatisect, petiolate. Cauline leaves crowded an stems, otherwise as the basal leaves, Rout a slender taproot, Inflorescences ebracteate, terminud] on stems, initially denge ind elongating only slightly aftor anthesis; buds just before anthesis obovoid to spherical; flowering pedicels slender, spreading or descendent: fruiting pedicels usually stout, almost alwavs descendent and burying fruit in ground, sometimes horizontal and spreadiny. Cne species in semi-arid parts of Western Austria, Sonth Australia, New South Wales and Vietovia, Geecoecuy puvillus Drumm, ex Harv. Treated aya taxonomic svnouyn of Ch pusillne is G, fiedlori Sehenermann, Feddes Ney, 47 (139262, Relationships: Geococeus appears to be closely related ta no other Aus- Irulian genus. If it is elated te any, it is to Pachymitus which it resembles surmewhat it native of the fruit. Geocuceus pusillus Drurnm, ex Hary, ( pusillus = very small, the plant is.a small prostrate annual) Ditimm. ex Harv, Hook. }. Bat., Kew Mise, 7(1855)52; FyM., Pl. Col. Viet, 1 (1860-1862)223: Benth, Fl. Austrul. 1(1863)80; FvM., Fragm. 7( 1869) 1%: Fragm. 10(1876133; Fragm. 11(1878)6; FvM., Nat PL Vict. 1( 1879)36, Tate, Trans. Roy, Suc. S. Aust. 3(1880)5, 90; Tepper, Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 3( 1880) 175, 177; FwM., ‘I’tans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust, 3(1580)172; Fv. Kev Vict. PJ. 1(1$57-1888)131: I'vM., Sec, Census 1(1889)5; Tate, Fl S$. Austral, (1890)15, 17, 206; Tate, ‘Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Aust. 22(1898)122. 123, 124: Bailey. Qld. Flora 1(1899)49; Reader, Vict. Nat. 21(1905)177; fwart, Proc, Roy, Svc. Viet. 20(1907)79, 80; Maiden & Betche, Cens. N.S. Wales Pl. (1916)84; Black, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 41(1917)43; Black, Fl. S. Austral, (1924)248: Schulz, PHrch, 86( 1824 )256; Black, Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust. 58(1934)177; Black. Trans. Roy. Soc. $, Aust. 64(1940)373 in obs; Fl. S. Austral. ed, 2 (1948 )376; Troll, Die Infloresz. (1964 )497, Geococeus fiedleri Scheuermaun, Feddes Rep. 47(1939)262; Black, Travis. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 64(1910)372; Fl. S. Austral, ed. 2 (1948)377 (pro syn.), G. fedleri SMevermann is a taxonomic svnonvm of G. pusillus Drunim, ex Ttarv., betne hased on i different type. Fizures: Ewart, Proc. Roy, Soc, Vict. new ser, 20(1907) tt. LOA, 11; Black, ‘Trans, Roy, Soc, $, Aust, 64(1940)fig.2; ‘Troll, Die Infloresz, (1964) fie 472. 473; — Vigure 14. Description: Plant herbaceous prostrate annual, pubescent, including sepals aid, sometimes, the pistil, with sessile or shortly stipitate branched hairs; stems few to many, very shart and thickened, horizontal and spreading, often densely leaved. very often prodneing secondary stems. Basal leaves to 20 cin, but usually less than 10 cm, toe 2 em in width, usually more or less oblong and tapering proximally, pinnatifid, tu ca. 15 lobes per side, these linear to deltate, opposite or alternate, usually rovnded to subacute, sometimes acute, often bearme a AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFENAR 243 secondary lobe or toot in the sinus on the distal side of the lohe; terminal lobe orbicnlar to obovate, usually with one secondary tooth or lobe om a side; leaves always tapering into a slender petiole. Cauline leaves very crowded, vtherwise us busal leaves. Inflorescences tewlowered, inittally dense, elongat- iny very little atter anthesis, that of the main stem always appearing basal as u result of suppression of the stem: flowering pedicels to ca, 2 em lone, slender. spreading nr descendent; buds before anthesis obvyoid to spherical, Sepals pale geven, with a narrow hyaling margin, on abaxial side often sparsely pubescent, lateral sepals ca. O-5-L-1 min Jong, ca. 0°3-0°S mm wide, average ratio length to width 1-5:1, more or less ovate to deltate, apically acute ta sub- acute, basally nut saccate; median sepals ca. 0:6-1-2 mm long, va, O4-0-7 min wide, average ratio Jength ta width |-6;1, oblong to ubovate, subacnte to roimded, basally not saecate. Petals oa. 0-6-L-0 mm long, ca. 0: 2-0-4 mm wide, with oboyate to ovate blade gradually tapering into a more or less linear claw, or clawless, the entire petal then obovate to ovate, rather coarsely veined, margin entire, apically ronnded, white or ercam-colonred. Lateral stamens ca, 0-7 mm, filaments expanded. hasally, white or pale green anthers ca, 0-4 mm, oblang to square, rounded to truncate, yellow; diazonal stamens ca. 0-8 mm, filaments as those of the lateral stamens; anthers ca. Or3 mim, us those of the lateral stamens, Pistil ca, 0: 6-1-0 mm, not stipitate, more or less conical, tevete or slightly compressed dorso-ventrally: style very short (ea, 02 mm) or obsolete: stigma depressed-capitate, about sume width as. the style. Fruiting pedicels toca. tem long, but Jength variable on a single plant. horizontal to descendent, utton burying fruit in the ground, Frnit en. 0°3-1-5 em long, ea, 1:0-1-5 mm across the septum. epidermal cells of the septum usually oblong to fusiform, trol stipitate, msually linear, almost always latisept, xarely terete; valves usually almost flat usually with a distiner nerve and, when miture. a reticulum of secondary veins, proximally flared; style ca, 0-1-1'0 mm long, often obsolete: stigaud depressed-capitate. Seeds ca, 1-1-1-3 x 0-7-0-8 mm, usually biseriate, nsnally 2-12 per cell, sometimes only 2 or 3 as result of abortion of many oviles, oblong to obovate, plump, mucus narrow: embrya exactly notorrlizal, cotyledons sometimes shortly stipitate, aboul same Tength as the radicle, Tyre Locanry: “Mah, Northen: Distietss auongs a claster af Booredis” (a species oF Kuuaeguue-rut) hyles on the limestone part al Cunolly’s stalion . 2. J.D. Western Australia,” RGbaS Frys Between Moore and Miurehtse Rivers, W. AusLralia; 1833: J. Drinenond Isorvres (2); West Australia; (854: Drommond lid -- BM! Sour Avstiania:—TQ) miles §. Blinwau; 33)8.1963: Shaw J98 — AD: Koonanture: 14,8, 1956; Kichler 12451 — kK, L, P. Tl, UC, B, GH, AD: Baolerno Gentre; 30,7.1939; Brovky — ATW: Yorke: Peninsulay ?: teaper — MEL: 7 auiles cust uf Iron Knob; 25,5.1998; Cleland - AD: Fowler's Buy: *: Richards — MEL: Vietonia;—Terrick Pine Forest, E.S.E. of Pyrwnid Hill; 3.91945; Willis — MEL; Witehipen: Nov. 1903; Der — MEL: Calder Highway at Hattah, N.W, Victoria; 60.1941: Willis — MEL: Dimboola: 2: St. Blow D'ARon — MRLs You Yanuk: 1O1910; Pitcher — MEL: head of Bullocky Springs Gully, Tower Glenely River, fay S,W. Victoria (11 miles S.W, Winnap); 33, L0,1948; Willis — MEL: Naw Sownr Warns: -Trangic; 20.9.1981; Bidélescombe — CANB: Pulpalla near Cobar; Sept, 188+; Joseplison — MEL; Zara, Wanyunella: Sept. 1815; Officer — NSW 52535; ‘Vokspne Sta §, of Meoindie. NAW. 23.77.1960: Burbidge 659 — NSW 53537, CANB: Wesrenn Ausraanrai-Fraser Range; 98.3951; Royce 3514 — PERTH, CANB: between Kspevanee Bay and Fraser's: Rute; 1876; Denypater — MELs In all, seventy sheets were seen. Distribution; Occurs in semi-arid parts of Western Australia, South Aus- tralia. New South Wales ancl Vietoria. Tn Sonth Australia the greater part of 234 ELIMABETH A, SHAW the ealloctions are from the Flinders Ranges, but there are scattered ones from the Lake Frome basin, the Murray mallee avea, and from the Yorke and Eyre Peninsulas, The New South Wales collections are generally from the south-western part of the State, Those from Victoria are also from the western part of the State, where it las been collected near the coast, as well.as from near Melbourne. It is probably more widely distributed than these collections indicate, but il is inconspicuous and has probably been overlooked by collectors. — Map 9. Observations: This species has often been said to be a form of Pachymnitus curdaminoides, un idea which uriginated with Bentham (1863) who wrote; “This curious little plant, unknown fron any other locality [other than that wf the type] may possibly prove to be a condition of some species having iwually dimorphous flowers, in which the more perfect ones are net de- veloped. Lf so, it may very likely be a Blennoslia, of same species of which it has the radiea) Jeaves.” This suggestion was elaborated upon by several subsequent authors who werr reluctant to believe thut G. pusillus could be u distinet species. Tepper (USSU) wrote, “Geococeus pusillus is remarkable for being strongly suspected af having two widely different vrowth forms. The principal one pushes its fruit below the soil while perfecting and ripening; the other, generally a weaker dant. has an upright stalk, and resembles very much a Cardamine.” This “other Form’ to which Tepper refers is certainly P. cardaminoides. The waiter finds it difficult to understand how it was possible to consider these plants ta be forms of one species; they differ sharply in lwuhit, fruit and flowers, aud there appear to be no intermediate forms between them. Mueller (1888) was the first to definitely state that G. pusillus was a synonym of P. cardaminoides. Under Sisymbrium cardaminoides he described the "Geacooons-state” of this species in the following manner: “Dr in a stemless state of this plant [frults] very short, rather thick and turgid, singly forming on their stalks, and during maturation burying them- selves in the ground: the Aowers of this state very minute,” The following year in his Second Census Mueller wrote, “Geococcus pusil- lus = Sisymbrium cardaminoides™. In a note on Co pusillus for the Victorian Naturalist (1892), Mueller was apparently Jess sure of the identity of these two, remarking only that G. pusillus might be a stemless state of a plant norm- ally developing otherwise, and saying, “Its foliage is wot unlike the radicil leaves of Sisymbrinan cardaminoides. with which it is moreover not rarely associated,” Tate (1898) seemed to he somewhat uncertain of the status of G. pusillus. fly praised “Bentham’s perspicuity in regard to G. pusiilis, which subsequent investigations have proved him to be correct’. However, he continued ta remark that in the light of the fact that Blennodia (sensu Bentham) was repre- sented in Western Australia by only three species, B. trisectum, B. richardsii and B. brevipes, it was inconsistent to regard Drummond's plant as belonging to B. cardaminoides, pointing out that the “normal state” of this latter spevies was not known to occur in the area where Drummond's type was collected. Tate mentioned three collections of “so-called” G. pusillus from South Aus. tralia which he had seen, one from Ardrossin gathered hy Tepper, one from Mt. Remarkable made by Johneock, and one from Cradock, He admitted that altlieugh the foliage of these plants was like that of P. curdaminoides, the other plant parts did not agree with those of this species. AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CALUCIFENAE 235 Ue went on to say, “These marked differences must be related to the habit of dimorphism ....”, antl remarked that he had a collection of P. cardamunuides frinys Cooper's Creek whieh showed single-Howered stalks horizontal among the radical leaves and sug¢ested that this plant was showing a “slight passage to- wards a fully developed ‘geococusstate’.” T[lowever, this collection from Couper's Creek is Arabidella cremigena which often does have a few apparently basil flowers representing, the indorescenee of a supressed stem. The writer has seen two of the South Australian collections mentioned by Tate, those of Tepper und of Johueock (both AD), and these are ordinary G, jnisillus, Tate concluded that there exist “Ewe very dissimilar stutes of Bleanouin cerdaminoides, which have in common virtually only teaf fori”. FE. M. Reuder (1905) published in the Victorian Naturalist some nates on Gencocens pusillus in which he clearly pointed out that this species is distinct Fram P, cardaminvides. Ue had observed the growth of G. prsillys and noted that in favourable conditions it may produee short ascendent stems. However. fue was firm in maintaining it as au distinct species and Geococcus us a distinct ONUS. The Jast mention of this problem seems to have been made by Ewart (1907) wlio suggested that “Geucowcus pusilluy might possibly he a form of Sisyinbricim ciwtlaminoides, produced as the result of continual vrazing ar cropping”. Tlow- ever, Ewart concluded that G. pusillus shoud be maintained until such time as cultural experiments prowe it to be only a form of anather species. The writer has several times observed this species in the feld and has found ny evidence that it is a form of P. cardaminoides or of any other species, It shows a considerable variation in fruit shape and in the lobing of the Ieaves, hut it never approaches P. cardaminoides in habit or in nature of the fruit, It is true that the leaves may resemble the radical leaves of P. cardaminnnles, but this is the unly point of resemblance between them. Furthermore, the writer has. seen G. pusillus yyvowing Juxuriantly in areas where P. cardaminoides has never heen found. There are records of the oceur- regee of the latter specics I the northern purt of South Australia, but these are all based on collections of A, eremigena which has often heen confused with P. cardaminoides, Tt mast he emphatically stated that Geococets is a genus quite distinet from Pachymitus and there is no evidence that G. pusillus ever approaches P_ car- daminoides, Ve consistently has a different habit, much smaller flowers, Fritits which are smaller and differenily shaped, and slightly different nectaries, Variation: The most conspicuous variation is in the lobing of the leaves and in fruit shape, Usually there are no more than about nine lobes on u side although there do oceur plants bearing leaves with as many as fifteen, The lubes may be alternate ar opposite of mixed — often the lobes at the distal end of the Jeat are opposite while those toward the proximal end ate much smaller and altermite. Generally the leaves are less than 10 era Jong, but they may reach 20 om, A plant collected by the writer in the Vlinders Ranges (Siew 202 — AD) was 48 um in diameter when living. The fruit is linear but may vary in vatio of length to width. Usually ihe Frnit is 3 or 4 times as long as wide, but sume fruits are almost square, Noe unvommonly the Fruit is twisted or bent and this is especially true if the plant grew in a bard soil, The valves are flared at the proximal end and ij this respect do resemble those of P, cardaminoiies. 236 ELIZABETH A, SHAW In most eases the fruiting pedicels turn sharply downward so that the fruits are buried, but it is not unusual to see pedicels which are horizontal. The writer has seen only one plant with an aerial fruiting raceme (Willis sn. — MEL); the raceme is about 28 em long and bears fruit which do not differ nuticeably from those on the same plant which were buried. The cause of the apparent geotropism of the fruiting pedicels is not known. It seems. to be not a genuine geotropism for the writer suspended mpside down several plants which when brought from the field already had the pedicels turned sharply downward. During a period of almost a month in suspension the pedicels grew almost 2 cm in length, but did nat change from the direction in which they had originally been growing, It seems also to be not a case ot negative phototrapism for the pedicels of the suspended plants were growing toward the source of light. wenlogy and Biology: The writer has collected G. pusillis hoth on sand and on heavier soils. Usually the plants grow closely together and under favourable conditions may cover an area OF several square feet, Among the annotations are “sandy ereckbed” (Shate 18 — AD), “very common on rocky hillside” (Shaw 198 — AD). “clay soil” (Biddeseombe sm.— CANB) and “partially cleared area with low herbage on heavy soil” (Burbidge s.n. — NS\W 53537). Uses andi Common Names: No uses haye been recorded for G. pusillus, Sutton and St, Joh sm, (MEL) bears the annotation “Earth cress” but this seems to be not u commonly used name. Nore: G. fiedleri Seheuormaun (1939) was deserihed as having leaves with 12-14 lobes: per side and tent bcm Jong which are lanccelate and uepte. J, M, Black (1940) compared this description with the South Australian collections of Geococeus und decided that. they were all G. fiedleri. Tlowever, in the second eclition ef his Flora (1948) Black included them in CG. pusilla and vited CG. fiedlert us a synonym. The writer Tias seen the dioletype pf C. fiedlert (B); the collection is quite ordinary G. pusillus, perhaps larger than some, hut this may be attributahle to its having grown ander tyyourable conditions. Thos G. fiedlert Scheuermann must be treated as a tixonori¢ synonyin Of (Cl. prvillus Drom. ex Harv, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS My thanks are given to the curators and owners of the herbaria cited earlier for permission to examine material in their care; tu Miss B. Goss for assistuntt: with Latin translations, and to Mr, L, Dutkiewiez for preparation of the illus- trations. Particular thanks are due to Dr. Hj. Eichler for making available the facilities of the State Merbarium of South Australia and Miss C. M, Eardley and Dr. Kichler for their advice and encouragement during this work. REFERENCES Baitton, H,, 1872. Histuire des plantes 3, Piris. Bentuam, G., 1863. Flora Australiensis 1. London, Besitiam G., and Hooker, |. D. 1862. Genera Planturum 1, London. Buack, J. M., F917. Results of the Sonth Australian Museum Expecition to Strzelecki and Coopers Creeks, (0) Botany, Trans, Roy. Soc. $, Aust, 44, pp. 405-658, Biack. J. M., 1924, Flora of Sonth Australia, Part 2, Adelaide. Brace, J. M., 1937. Additions to the Flora of South Anstralia, No. 35. Trans. Ray, See, S. Aust, 61, pp. 241-249. pl. XIV. Brack, J. M., 1948. Flora of South Australia, ed. 2, Part 2. Adelaide. AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCTFERAR 237 ne Cannone, A. P., 1821, Systema naturale 3, Paris, Brown, 2B. 1649. In Srunv, C., Narrative of an Fepedition inte Central Australia: Botanient Appendix, London. Duuce, C., I9L7, Nomenclatorial Notes, Chiefly African and Australian, Rep, bat. (Soe.) Exeh. Cl. Manehy, (1916) Supph, 2, pp, 601-633. want, A. J.. 1907. Contributions to the Flora af Australia, Ne, 6, Proc, Roy. Soc. Viet, 20 (1s.), pp. 76-87, figs. 9-14, Ganoxen, C. 193L Emuneratio Plantarum Australize Oecidentalis, Perth, Tlanvey, W., 1855, Characters of some New Cenera of Flants Reocntly Discovered by Mr. Jinges Drunmnond in Western Australia. Hook. J. Bot. Kew Mise., 7, pp. 51-58, von Tlavek, A, 1911, Fntwort eines Craciferen-Systems aul plylovenetischor Grindlave. Beilu:ft. Bot. Centralbl., 27, pp. 127-325, fijgs. 8-12. Hrosucuen, E., 1886. Die Eiweissschluuche der Crucifturen amd verwandte Elemente in der Rhoeatlinenreihe. \itteil, Bot, Inst Graz, 1, pp, 1-92 (a.v.). aver, E., 1942, Das System der Cruciferen, Osterr. Hot, Zeitschrift, 91, pp, 1-28, Kocu, M., 1898. A List of Plants Collected on Met. Lyndhurst Run, 8, Anstralia, ‘Trans, Roy, Soe S. Aust. 22, pp. LO1-118. Kracse, BO. L., 1902. In Sromars, J., Flora vor Deutschland, ed. 2. 6. Stuttgart. Kowre, O., 1801. Revisiee Generton Plantarii, Fars. 11, Wurzburg, Lessing, C. 1. 1882. Synopsis generim Compositarum. Berlin. Meeuuen, F. 1853.) Dinguoses et deseriptiones plantanim novarim, ques in Nova Hol- Jandia australi praecipne in régionibns fiteri¢ibus cetexit et investigavit Ferd. Miller, Dr. Linnaea, 23, pp. 367-445. Mertiin, F,, 18395, Description of New Australian Phints Chiefly from the Colony of Victoria, By Dr. Ford. Mueller, Government Botanist. Trans. Vict, Inst, (1833), pp. 114-135. Miepunen, F., [855a. Descriptive Characters of Wew Alpine Plants, fram Continental Aus- tralia. ‘Trans. Phil. Sov. Viet, 1, pp. 96-111. Moruner, P1859. Enumeration of Plants, Collected by A. G, Gregory, Esq. alone and neat Coopers Hiver und its Tribntacies, in Sub-certral Australia. New South Wales. Votes and Procecdings of the Levislative Assembly during the Session of 1858-9, val, 2. Sydney. Motover, F. 1839a, Report.on the Plants Collected during Mr, Bubbuye’s Expedition into the Narth-Wostern Tnterior of South Australia in 1858. Melhotnrne, Murouen, b., (861. Framnenta Phytographiae Australize 2. Melbourne. Murrier, F., 1862. The Plants Tndigenous ta the Colony of Victoria 1, Melbourne, Murcnen, F., 1869. braymenta Phytographiac Australiae 7. Melbourne, Muecoen, FF. F877, Fragmenta Phytograpliae Australiae 10, Melbourne, Muriner, F., 1878. Fraenenta Phytagraphiac Australiac 11, Melhourne. Musnren, I, 1879. Frogimenta Phytopraphiae Australize 11, Melbourne, Muecien, F., 1879. The Native Plants ef Victoria, Melbourne. Murtien, F., 1852. Systematic Census of Australian Plants. Melbourne. Murnoen, F., 1885, Key to the System of Victorian Plants 2, Melhoorne. Pomrn, A., 1883. Contribution & la classification meéthodique des Crucileres, Alsiets- Tnhantse, K., 1880. Criciferuce, Pitan, 3 (2), pp. 145-206. Kraven, F. M,, 1905, ‘Contributions to the Flora of Victoria. No. 13. Notes on Geocooens pusillus, J. Drummond. Vict, Nat., 21, pp, 177-178, SeunvermMany, R., 1939, Bin neue adventiver Grodoctus (G. Fiedlert), Feddes Repertorium, AT, yp. 262. Senuuz, O. F., 1924, Cruciferae-Sisymibrieac. Pireich., 86, pp. 1-358, Scnunz, O. E., 1933, Kuran Notizen ther neve Gattungen, Sektionen amd Arton cer Crnei- feren. Enylers Bat, Jahrb., 66, pp. 91-103. Semuez, O, B., 1936. Cruviferae. Pilfun. ed, 2, 17b, pp, 227-658 ScHWwrmpnern, JTL, 1905. Die systematische Bedeutung der Eiweisi oder Myrosingellen det Cruciteren nebst Beitriigen zu ihrer anatonuseh-physiologischen Kenntnis. Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesellsvh,, 23, pp, 274-285, fig. 2. 238 ELIZABETH A, SHAW Tare, R., 1879. The Natural History of the Country around the Head of the Great Aus- tralian Bight. Trans. Phil. Soc. Adelaide (1879), pp. 94-128. Tare, R., 1885, Descriptions of New Species of South Australian Plants, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 7, pp. 6-71. Tare, R., 1890. A Handbook of the Flora of Estratropical South Australia, Containing the Flowering Phints and Ferns. Adelaide. Tare, R,. 1898. Dimorphism in twa South Australian Cruciferous Plants. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 22, pp. 122-124. TreLiune, A., 1913. Cruciferae in Hegi, Ilustr. Flor. Mitteleuropa, 4 (1913-1919), pp. 51-482. Trunnerc, C. P., 1784. Flora Japonica. Leipzig. Turczaninow, N., 1854. Animadversiones ad primam partem Herbarii Turczaninowiani, nunc Universitatis Caesareae Charkowiensis. Bull. Soc, Nat. Mose., 27/2, pp. 271-372. VeLenovsky, J., 1883. Uber die Honigdriisen der Cruciferen. Sitzungsber. { Abhandl.} der math.-nat. Kl. B6hm. Ges. Wissensch., 6. Folge XII. Sep. 1-58 (n.v.). WiLtoenow, C. L., 1800. Species Plantarum 3. Berlin. AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE INDEX TO NAMES (Bold type indivates newly deseribed taxa or new combinations; italics indicate synanynis. Numbers refer to the page on which the systematic treatment of a taxon begins or to that on which a name is cited in synonymy with another.) Arabilella (I'vM.)Schuly eremigena (FvM,)Shaw filifolia (FvM.)Shaw — - vlaucescens Shaw ~ nasturtium (F'vM.}Shaw procumbens (Tate)Shaw trisecta LF ya. \Schule - var. sehulz = - - var. hiybophera Schulv Blennodin R.Br. - - §Drabuastrum KwM, - alpestriy Ww - rachycarpa { Beuth, hlennodivides (FvM,)Dinee brevipes (PvM.)EvM. - canescens R.Br. - . vu. plerosperma Black eardaminoides Benth. - cunninghamii Benth, - eurcipes (FvM.)FvM., - erenuzena (FyM,)Benth filijolia (FvM.)Benth. - filifolia [non (fvM.) Benth, lasiocarpa (FvM.)Benth. Tucae (FvM.)Maid. et Betche vasturtioides: (FvM.) Benth. var. pinnatifula Benth. nasturtium (FyM.)Druce procumbens (Tate) Tate pterosperma (Black) Blick trisecta. (W'vM. ) Benth. var, brachycarpa Benth. Capsella Dlennodtu FyM, Driabastrun) (FVM. ) Schulz alpestre (Fv M,)Sehalz Erysimum §Arabidella FyM. - blennodes PvM. - - blennodia (FvM.)FwM, [Black blennodinum (FvM.) Kuntze Dlennadioides FyM. — - brevipes FvM.. - - capsellinum FvyM. - cardaminoides (FvM.) PSM, cunninghamii ( Benth.) fvM. eurcipes FvyM, - - 177 lay 188 184 191 200) 179 ih 179 168 223 224 206 214 169 173 227 206 221 197 188 184 flifolium FM, - - g S lasiocatpum (FyM.)FyM. - e lucae TFwM©. - - ~ - iisturtium FyM. . - - trisectitnnn PVM. = = - - Geocoeous Drumin. ex. Harv. < fedleri Scheuermann - : - pusillus Drumm. ex Hary. - - Ytarmsiodexa Scluly - - ~ hlennodivides (FvM.)Seholz ~ brevipes (FM. )Schuly - - var. major Shaw — - : cuonninghamti (Berth. ) Sells = puberala Shaw - t ; - Lemphoria Schulz - - - - procumbens (Tate )Schulz - Wierommystria Schulz - - - eremigena (FyM.)Sehul, — - - nasturtiun (FyM. Schulz — - - var. pinnatifida ( Benth, Schulz Pachymitus Sehulz - s _ 2 cardaminoides (PyM. Schulz + var. dasycatpus Suhule + “ fueae (FF yM.)Sebulz - = = Pseudarabidella Schulz - - filifulia (FeM. Schulz. - © 2 Seambopus Sehuiz - - - - eurvipes (PVM. Sclnil - - Sisyinbrium alpestre (FvM.)l’vM. - - blenianlia FvM. - 4 6 brachypodum Fy, - > 5 brevipes (EvM.)1'vM. - - vardaminaides FyvM. - - - eurvipes (PVM) FvM - PS erenigenum (FyM.)FwM. - = flifolium {FvMOF VM, - 5 losiocarpum (Fy\IFyM - 7 lucue (FVM. FVM. - - - nasturtioides FyM. - ~ - procumbens Tale - - - trisectat (iy M1. VM, + - 239 188 206 227 191 179 231 232 232 204 205 2 217 206 212 WT 200 177 197 192 200 226 237 228 337 177 18h 219 23] 224 169 214 215 297 23| 197 188 206 ews —nt 19] 200 179 Sd ELIZABEIH A. SHAW Pp A eid mm ! Al KL Viv, 1. Blennoelia canescens R.Br. A, frait, B, distal end of fruit; E, petal: F, lateral sepals G. lateral stamen: I, median sepal: I, diagonal stamen; J, pistil: K, seed: 1, seed—(A ex Ising 1192 — AD; B ex Cleland sn, — AD» others ex Hill 134 — AD), Blennodia pterusperma (Black) Black. C, fruit; D, distal end of fruit; M, seed— (Shaw 186 — AD). AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE Fig. 2. A, Arahidella trisecta (FvM.)Schulz— fruiting raceme (Sharrad 1328 — AD); B, Arabidella glaucescens Shaw — fruiting raceme (Shaw 231 — AD). ww bo ELIZABETH A. SHAW Fig. 3. Arabidella glaucescens Shaw. A, petal; B, median sepal; C, diagonal stamen; D, lateral sepal; E, lateral stamen; F, pistil; O, fruit; P, seed — (Shaw 231 — AD). Arabidella trisecta (FvM.) Schulz. G, petal; H, median sepal; J, diagonal stamen; J, lateral sepal; K, lateral stamen; L, pistil; M, fruit; N, seed — (Sharrad 1328 — AD), AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE Fig. 4. Arabidella filifolia (I'vM.)Shaw. A, fruiting raceme; B, petal; C, median stamen; D, diagonal stamen; E, lateral sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil; H, seed; I, fruit — Sharrad 1331 — AD). 244 ELIZABETH A. SHAW (XP tees aN, Fig. 5. Arabidella nasturtium (FvM.)Shaw. A, habit; B, C, D, petals; E, median sepal; I, diagonal stamen; _G, lateral sepal; H, lateral stamen; I, pistil; J, fruit; K, seed — (B, C, ex Constable s.n. — NT; all others ex Shaw 46 — AD). AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE Fig. 6. Arabidella eremigena (l’vM.)Shaw:.. A, habit; B, petal; C, median sepal; D, diagonal stamen; E, lateral. sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil; H, 1, fruit — (1 ex Everist 3529 — BRI; others ex MacGillivray sn. — ADW),. 246 ELIZABETH A. SHAW Fig. 7, Arabidella procumbens (Tate)Shaw. A, habit; B, petal; C, median sepal; D, diagonal stamen; E, lateral sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil; H, fruit; I, seed — (Ising sn. — AD). AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE Fig. 8. Harmsiodoxa blennodioides (¥vM.)Schulz. A, habit; B, C, D, petals; E, median sepal; F, diagonal stamen; G, H, lateral sepal; I, lateral stamen; J, pistil — (Williams sn. — AD). w 1 248 ELIZABETH A. SHAW Fig. 9. Harmsiodoxa puberula Shaw. A, habit; B, petal; C, median sepal; D, diagonal stamen; E, Jateral sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil — (Lothian 606 — AD), AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 249 Fig. 10. Harmsiodoxa brevipes (HvM.)Schulz. A, habit; B, petal; ©, diagonal stamen; 1, median sepal; E, lateral stamen; P, lateral sepal; G, pistil — (Lothian 1348 — AD). 250 ELIZABETH A. SHAW Fig. 11. Scambopus curvipes (FvM.)Schulz. A, habit; B, petal; C, median sepal; D, diagonal stamen; E, lateral sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil — (Murray 131 — AD). AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAE 251 2am a-F A Fig, 12. Drabastrum. alpestre (FvM.)Schulz. A, habit; B, petal; C, median sepal; D, diagonal stamen; E, lateral sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil; H, fruit; I, seed — (Thompson s.n. ~ NSW 53580), to la ELIZABETH A. SHAW Ni ae f LES oe \ if) yy yf \ ; } clio wn A oF C A B-F.H Fig. 13. Pachymitus cardaminoides (FvM.)Schulz. A, habit; B, petal; C, median sepal; D, diagonal stamen; E, lateral sepal; F, lateral stamen; G, pistil; H, fruit — (D’Alton 5 — MEL), AUSTRALIAN ENDEMIC GENERA OF CRUCIFERAR 2533 Fig. 14. Geovoecus pusillus Drumm, ex Hary. A, habit; B, petal; CG, lateral sepal; D, lateral stamen; E, median sepal; I, diagonal stamen; G, pistil: H, fruit; I, seed — (Eichler 12451 — AD). AN HYPOTHESIS ON THE ORIGIN OF THUCHOLITE MINERALIZATION AT THE WALLAROO-MOONTA MINING FIELD, SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY I. A. MUMME Summary Geological investigations during the period of active mining operations at this once-famous mining field showed that the distribution of Thucholite mineralization was predominantly associated with veins cross cutting the main bornite lodes (Jack, 1917). More recent geophysical investigations of the mine dumps showed the existence of a low but significant level of radioactivity which is above the normal level for the non-mineralized surrounding bedrock’. This fact strongly suggests the presence of minute quantities of a uranium mineral generally dispersed throughout the lode systems (Mumme, 1954; Woodrnansee, 1957). AN HYPOTHESIS ON THE ORIGIN OF THUCHOLITE MINERALIZATION AT THE WALLAROO-MOONTA MINING FIELD. SOUTH AUSTRALIA hy 1. A, Musiace* {Read 12 August 1965] Geological investigations during the period of active mining operations at this once-famous mining field showed that the distribution of Thucholite minera- lization was predominantly associated with veins cross cutting the main hornite lades (Jack, 1917). More recent geophysical investigations of the mine dumps. showed the existence of a low but significant level of radioactivity which is above the normal level for the non-mineralized surrounding bedrock. This fact strongly sugeests the presence of minute quantities of a uranium mincral generally dis- persed throughout the lode systems (Mumme, 1954; Woodmansec, 1957). The occurrences of thucholite mineralization at the Wallaroo-Moonta mining field in association with, the copper-bearing Jodes demonstrate a common origin for the minerals, Also, the occurrences of :thucholite are Found in a geological environment in which one would expect to encounter pitchblende as, for example, al the Hillside copper mine near Ardrossan. _ Petrological examinations showed thar the thucholite consists of hydro- carbons of variable composition which eontain minnté quantities of an intensely radivactive mineral which is probably uraninite or pitchblende. Mineragraphic investigations of this mineral suggest that the inclusions of the uranium mincral have in part been precipitated from hydrocarbon solutions (Davidsun «nd Bowie, 1951). These facts suggest that paragenesis of the thucholite was as follows. Initially it is believed that enrichment of nranium and probably thorium oecurred in a magna during progressive couliny and differentiation processes. Due to their low contentrations in the granite melt they would not form separate minerals at an early stage during the crystallization of the magma. During processes of enrichment, of thorium and uraniam at the pegmutitic stage in the presence of high concentrations of mineralizing solutions, including water vapour, it is believed that the uranium was not taken up in accessory minerals, such as zircon, titanite or allanite, but separation occurred according to 4 process postulated by Larsen and Phlair (1954). By this process, separa- tion of utanium is attributed to conversion of uranium to the hexavalent state during 2 late magmatic stage, whereby the soluble uranium compounds are readily carried of into the pegmatitic fluids and the thorium left behind to crystallize ont as an accessory mineral in the parent magma. The formation of the thucholite would appear to be due to polymerization of vases or liguid hydrocarbons by the action of alpha or heta activity due to the disintegration of uranium and its danghter products as suggested by Verandsky (1935). Trans. Roy, Soc, 8. Aust, (E965), Vol, 89, 256 1, AL MUMME recorded in the deeper workings in the Witwatersrand (Young, 1917) and else- where in deep mines in geologically old rock formations and remote from petro- liferous formations. After the deposition of the primary uranium mineral during the hydro- thermal stage of mineralization, it is believed that there was an introduction of gases and liquid hydrocarbons; the latter partially dissolving the primary uranium mineral. The solution of uranium in organic liquids particularly in the presence of mineral acids is well known (Davidson and Bowie, 1951). Following solution of the uranium in the polymerized hydrocarbon, it is belicved that cooling of the organic liquid occurred precipitating the uranium as minute inclusions and further polymerization due to bombardment by alpha and beta particles over a long period of geological time firadually hardened the hydrocarbon complex developing the characteristics of thucholite REFERENCES Davinson, C. F., and Bowie, S, H. U., 1951, On Thucholite and Related Hydroearbon- Uraninite Complexes, Bull. Geol. Surv. T. Britain, No. 3, pp. 1-19. Larsen, E, &., Jn., and Pua, Grorce, 1954. The Distribution of Uranium and Thoriuni in [gnegus Rocks, Nuclear Geology, pp. 77. H. Faul, ed. John Wiley and Sons Inc. Jack, R. L., 1917. The Geology of the Moonta and Wallaroo Mining District. Geol. Surv, §. Aust. Bull. No. 6. Muse, I, A., 1954, Ground Scintillometer Survey for Uranium Lodes in the Kadina Area. S.A. Dept. Mines, Geophys. Dept., No. 6/54. Veranpsky, W., 1935. Les Problemes de la Radio-geologie. Paris, Woopmansee, W. C., 1957. Radiometric Reconnaissance of Copper Mine Dunips—Northern Yorke Peninsula, S.A, Dept, Mines Review No, 102. Youna, R. B., 1917, The Banket, London, SOME MEDUSAE (MAINLY SCYPHOMEDUSAE) FROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS BY P, L. KRAMP Summary A review is made of 19 species of Australian jellyfish, classified as follows: Order Coronatae, family Linuchidae. 1 species; Order Semacostomeae, family Pelagiidae, 1 species, family Cyaneidae, 2 species, family Ulmaridae, 1 species; Order Rhizostomeae, family Cassiopeidae, 1 species, family Cepheidae, 2 species, family Mastigiidae, 3 species, family Lychnorhizidae, 1 species, family Catostylidae, 2 species; Order Leptomedusae, family Eirenidae, 3 species; Order Limnomedusae, family Olindiadidae, 2 species. The collection had been submitted from the South Australian Museum, rind was a representative collection of macroscopic material submitted in recent years, omitting only the order Cubomedusae; in many cases medical hail prompted the collection of the material. In the material studied were seven species which have not previously been recorded from Australian waters, including one new species of the family Olindiadidae, Gonionemus hamatus sp. nov., from St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia. Morphologic and taxonomic reviews are made where necessary, and zoogeographic distribution is discussed. Field observations are recorded, including one of an apparent association between the rhizostome Pseudorhiza haeckeli Haacke, 1884, and the leptomedusan Eirene menoni Kramp, 1953, several of the latter being observed sheltering under the exumbrella of the rhizostome, in St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia. SOME MEDUSAE (MAINLY SCYPHOMEDUSAE) FROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS by P. L, Knante (Zoological Museum, Copenhagen) (Communicated by BR. V. Southcott) [Read 14 October 1965] SUMMARY A review is made of 19 species of Avstralian jellyfish, classified as follows: Order Coronatae, family Linuchidae, 1 species; Orcler Semacostomeae, family Pelagiidae, 1 species, family Cyancidae, 2 species, family Ulnaridae, 1 species: Order Khizostumeac, family Cassippeidac, 1 species, family Cepheidac, 2 species. finvily Mastigiidac, 3 species, family Lychnorhizidae, 1 species, family Cato- stylidag, 3 species; Order Leptomedusae, family Eirenidge, 3 species; Order Limnomedusac, family Olindiadidae, 2 species. The collection had been sub- qiitted from the South Australian Museum, and was a representative collection of macroscopic niaterial submitted in recent years, omitting only the order Cubomedusae; in many eases medical problems had prompted the collection of the material. In the miterial studied were seven species whieh have net previously been recorded from Australian wuters, including One new species al the family Olindiadidae, Gonignemus hamatus sp, nov,, fram St, Vincent Gilf, South Ars- tralia, Morphologi: and taxonomic reviews are aide where necessary, and zoogeographic distribution i discussed. Field observations are recorded, includ- ing one of an apparent association between the rhizostome Pseudorhiza hueckeli Haacke, 1884, and the Jeptomedusan. Eirene menoni Kramp, 1953, several of the latter being observed sheltering: under the exambretla of the rhizestorme, in St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia, INTRODUCTION An interesting collection of Australian medusae was sent to me by Dr. R. V. Southcott, South Australian Museum, Adelaide, It has been a great pleasure to work up this collection, which contains 19 species, seven of which were not previously recorded from Australian waters. The majority of the species are Scyphomedusue (12 species), but there are also five species of Tydramedusae, one of which is a new species of the family Olindiadidae. Previous Australian records are quoted for each species, Only the most important other references are given; full references up to 1910 may be obtained trom A. G, Mayer (1910), and for the following period, up to 1959 or 1960. in P, L. Kramp (1961b). Some species require morphological and systematic discussion, but most of the Rhizostomene have been thoroughly treated in numerous papers by the: late Dr. G. Stiasny of Leiden, The localities, where the species were collected, are mentioned in succes- siun from west to east On the southern coasts, northwards along the eastern coasts, and westwards along the coasts from Cape York towards Darwin in the Northern Territory, It is a great pitv that we know so very little about the fauna off the coasts of the western half part of the Australian continent. Valu- able zoogeopraphic results might be obtained by comparing the occurrence of Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. (1965), Vol. $9. 254 Po. KRAME jellyiish and other pelagic animals in all Australian waters with the currents and other hydrographical conditions. It is remarkable that amoung the species represented in the present collection, aine have an entively tropical distribution in other regions (Linuche unguiculala, Cyanea buitendijki, Cassiopea nelrosia, Cophea octostyla, Netrostoma coenilescens, Mastigias papua, Mastigias vvellatus, Acromitaides purpurus, and the hydromedusa Helsicirrha dandnensis), and in Australia these species are restricted to the coasts of Queensland or the Northern Territory. Phyllorhiza punetata, which, outside Australia, is known with cer- tainty only from the Gulf of Siam, was taken in several Queensland localities. hut some specimens were also found near Fremantle in Western Australia: it was originally described from Port Jackson, New South Wales, by Lendeuteld (1854), Only two species of Rhizostomeae, Psetulirhiza haeckeli and Catostylns mosaicous, are widely distriluted and very common in Australian waters where both seem to be endemic. The three species of Semacostomeae, Pelagia nacti- luca, Cyanea eapillata and Aurelia aurita, which have an almost world-wide distribution, seem to occur in all Australian waters. The distribution of the three Hydromedusae, Mirene menoni. Phialonsis diegensis and Olindias singy- lavis. is dealt with in the text below. The collection was accompanied by a detailed list of the localities, in several cases With interesting additional remarks on the colours of the living specimens and their local occarrence and behaviour: 1 have taken great pleasure in quoting from these remarks, forwarded by Dr, Southcott. SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT CORONATAE Linuche unguicnlata (Swartz, 1755) Linuehe anguiculata schscholtz, 1828, p, 91. Linerges aqaeila 4 deacoe Haeckel, 1880, p. 496. Previous Australian Records: Maver, 1913, pp. 160, 174, ‘Torres: Strait. Material Examined: Tharsdav Island, December, 1961, 9 specimens. The specimens are 9-1] mm high and 12-15 mm wide, Pacifie specimens of Linuche have frequently been referred to a distinet species or variety, aquila Haeckel, differing in the arrangement of the wartlike protuberances on the subumbrella, well illustrated by Mayer (1910, p, 560. text fig, 356), the warts being urranged in three circles in the Atlantic form- nngniculate but in only two in the Pacific L. aquila, The validity of this distine- tion has been doubted by several authors, and T can state that the difference is quite accidental and independent sf geographical occurrence. In the present North Australian specimens the arrangement of the sinb- urabrellar warts is decidedly af the aquila-type. but with one exception it is the same in the numerous specimens deposited in the Zoological Museam of Jlupenhagen und derived from several lovalities, not merely in tropical Indo- Pacific waters, but also in samples from the western Atlantic, On the other hand, in a sample callected south-east of New Caledonia, thus in a Pacific locality (’Dana™ Stn. 3620), three of the speciinens (about 24 mm wide ) shaw an approximation towards the unauiculata-type, The two outer circles of warts wre as in all the other specimens examined by me, but an additional wart is present in the inner (proximal) part of each of the interradial spaces between MEDUSAE PROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 259 ilu gonads. It is. minute in two of the specimens, fairly large in the third one and in all a well-developed wart is also uttached to each of the gonads, as senvrally secu in the aquila-type. I may add that the type specimens of Linerges draco Uaeckel from the South China Sea, which are in our collection at Qopenhagen, are in no way dlistingnishable fram Linnche unguiculata, their yubumbrellar warts being cf the aquila-type. The same applies to cotypes of two other Haeckelian forms, Linerges petasus and Liniseus sandalopterus. We rniy thus safely state that the genus Linuche consists of only one species, Linuche unguiculata (Swartz) Geographical Distribution, Tropical pavts of the Indian and Pacifie Occans ane the western Atlantic. SEMAEROSTOMEAL Pelagia noctilnuea (Korskil) Svnenvions Fo panapyra Peron and Lesnenc, phosphara Hacekel ano. Previous Australian Records; Haeckel, 1880, p, 509. Lendenfeld, 1887, p. 18, Mayer, 1915, p, 178, Queensland, Stiasny, 1931b, p. 31, Port Jackson. Dakin ancl) Coletiay, tons, p. 198, New South Wales. Ranson, 1945, p, 315, Port Jack- som. Kramp, 1961a. p. 204, Green Island, Creat Barrier Reet. Pope, 1963, p, 193. Thomas, 1963, p. 208, cust Australia. Alaterial Examined; Off Syduev, New South Wales, at surface, 257,60, coll. J. Raeek, 7 specimen, diam. ca, 6 em. Circular Quay, Port Jackson, New South Wides. 12.v.60, coll. Maritime Services Board of New South Wales, 2 speci- mens, diam. 4-5-5 om, Turu Cay, North Quecrisland. mid-November, 1961. coll, V. Wells, 1 specimen, diam. 3 om, Several species of Pelagia live been deseribed, but it is now generally aareed Hat most of them are identical with the widely distributed Po noetilued (Vorskal). Specitnens from Pacific anc Mulayan waters have frequently been referred ta a separate species, P. panapyra (Peron and Lesueur), but studies hy Stiasny (1934, 1935 and 1940) and Bigelow (1938) liave rendered it highly probable that this form cannot be distinguished from 2. noctilica. In a recent paper, FS. Russell (1964) has found that specimens dram the Californian coast, formerly named P. nectiluce var. panopyra (Fox and Millott, 1954), belong te a separate ancl yalicd species, P. coloraéa Russell, Russell also maintains the Indo-Pacific species P. Hatcola Eschscholtz asa valid species, in agreement with Stiasny (1933), who had cxumined numerous specimens of this species from Amboina; the species had formerly been observed on only a few occasions, Tt was well deseribed and figured by Agassiz and Miyer (1902) as P. tahitiana: It is mainly characterized by very large und prominent, pointed nemutocyst warts on the exmmbrella, but it is also emphasized by the authers that the gonads are unusaully large even in small specimens. The specimens trom the two localities near Sydney, mentioned above, are typical P, noctiluca; their nematocyst warts are meomerous. small, round-oval, transversely wrinkled. and evenly distriluted over the exumbrella. The speci- men from northerm Queensland js also PF. nactilucea, but calls for some comment. Althongh if is only 30 mm. wide, its gonads are vemarkably voluminous, pro- lruding very far downwards below the subumbrella, but the eggs are small and immature: the mouth tube is short and broad, the lips indistinets the ex- uinbrella warts arc mumerous and they are very small. of exactly the same appearance as in the larger specimens from Svdnev. There is no reason, there- fare, ta presume that it might belong ta P. flaveola. Morenyer, the sliape al 260 P. L. BRAMP the umbrella is rather flattened, not highly vaulted as described in P. flaveolu, and the colour is light pink, not yellow. Geographical Distribution; Oceanic in the vpper strata of all warm and temperate seas, Cyanea capillata (L.) Previous Australian Records: > Cyanew rosea Quoy and Gaimard, 1824, p. 570, pl, 85, fgs..1,2, Great Barrier Reef. Cyanee annaskala v. Lendenteld, 1582- 1887. Port Philip. Victoria; Port Jackson, New South Wales. Cyanea muel- lerianthe Haacke, 1886, p. 605. pl. 36, figs. 1-4. St. Vincent Gulf, South Aus- tralia. Cyanea muellerianthe Stiasny, 1922, p. 521. south of Cape Howe, Victoria, Cyanea annaskala Pope, 1949, p, 14. Sydney. Cyanea capillata Pope, 1953b, p. ll. New South Wales. Cyaned sp. Barnes, 1960, p. 996, North Australia, Since the venus Cyanea was thoroughly revised by Stiasny and van der Maaden (1943), it is possible to determine the Australian species of this genus with certainty. With one exception (C. buitendijki. see below) all the speci- mens in the present collection belong to the widely distributed C. capillita, being very similar to specimens from northern Europe. We can safely state that C. annaskela von Lendenfeld and C, muellerianthe Waacke are synonyms of C. capillata. In all the present specimens the terminal branches of the lappet canals are numerous, densely set and with nu or very few anastomoses. C, roxed Quoy and Gaimard, which was described from the Great Barrier Reel, is an allogether doubtful species, it may have heen C. capilluta and, at any rate, this was the first record of a Cyaned im Australian waters. Material Examined: (1) Coffin Bay, South Australia, 10.ii.1960. Coll. S. A. Shepherd, 2 speci- mens, diam. 7-5-10-5 cm, (2) Port Lincoln, South Australia, about one mile out to sea, at surface. 27.11.1961, Coll. Miss R. M. Amott-Rogers. 4 specimens, diam 12, 13. 15, 17 em (see remarks below). (3) Part Lincoln, South Australia, from surface to 20 feet depth, Liii.1959. Coll. F. J. Mitche]] and T. D. Scott. 2 specimens, diam. 5-10 cm (see remarks below). (4) Pondalowie Bay, Yorke Peninsula, South Australia, 18.iv.1960, Coll. F. J. Mitchell. 1 specimen, diam. 14 cm. (3) Elwood Beach, Victoria, 21.1961. Coll. 5. Wiener. 3 specimens, diam. 3, 7, 8:5 em. (see remarks below). (G) Cairns, Queensland, 341.1960. Coll. G. Rowell. 1 specimen, diam. ca, 26 em. (see remarks helww). (7) Ellis Beach, Queensland, 181.1960. Coll. Fisher (sce remarks below). Remarks: Re (2), Port Lincoln; 27.1961. “. .. these medusae were very plentiful, The colour in life is browuish-yelluw, The medusue were scen at the surface down to visible depths of 7 to 8 feet. At the time of collection there was a §.E. breeze and a dodge tide. The species canses stings on contact . . . these jellyfish tend to congregate under jetties. Later in the season, that is in April to May, L96L, in quiet weather these jellyfish formed large, thick masses near the surface, these masses forming a mat of hundreds of specimens, and such a mat would be found every mile or so in sitiling.” MEDUSABR KROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 261 Re (3), Port Lincoln, 11,59; Mr. Mitchell states that in life these medusae are pinkish-orange, and that even the small ones have tentacles 9 feet (3 metres) long. The tentacles sting, forming a white elevated line or weal on the skin, about 3 mm across, and the resultant pain, itching and swelling Jasts abont half an hour. They were vexy abundant in Port Lincoln Harbour. . - Re (5), Elwood Bay, 2.1.61; Dr, Wiener reports that during this present summer these jellyfish have heen plentiful at Elwood Beach. “The tentacles of some specimens were 3-4 feet long. Many jellyfish had no or very short tentacles. ... the tentacles caused pain. itchiness ‘and erythema lasting for a few hows. [The medusae] are purple but the colour soon fades when they ure removed trom the sea.” Re (6), Cairns, 31,60. Dr. Barnes reports: “Collected near entrance to the shipping channel leading into Citirns Harbour, Similar jellyfish (of variable colouration) [were] very numerous at that time following strong south-wast winds ... Colours before preservation were greyish-white, semi-opaque disc with brown-hlack lappets; tentacles transparent. almost colourless (bluish); fine subumbrellar filaments dirty string colour.” Re (7). Ellis Beach, 161.60, Dr. Barnes reports: “Collected near the racks at the south end of Ellis Beach before midday on 1.1.60: Similar jellyfish had heen numerous in the area doring the previous few days. This specimen was stranded on, the sandy beach, and subjected ta wave damage. Colour before preservation was milky-white with dark chocolate markings on the dise.” It is remarkable how differently the colours of the living, jellyfish are de- seribed by the various observers: if may purlly depend on the size and the state of maturity of the specimens, but similar variations may also be observed tH European witters, As seen from the above, this jellwfish aeeurs in great numbers. along the coasts from South Australia eastwards and northwards to Queenslaud. There ure, unfortunately, no records of its being taken along the northern and westeru Coasts, Ccouraphieal Distributions Almost cosmupolituan in coastal waters, mamly in uretic and temperate seus, less frequent in wopical Leeians, Cyanea buitendijki Stiasny CG. vapillute var. buitendijki Stinsiy, WYI9, p. S&T, pl. 3) fie 10, CG, buitendijki Stiasny and yan der Manden, 1943, y. 254, figs. 12, 13. Material Examined: Darwin, Northern Territory, 9.xi1.1958. Coll. 1. Uickey. 1 specimen, diam. about S em. This species belong to the nosakii-zroup (Stiasny and van der Maaden- 1943). being closely related to Cyiwnea noxzakii Kishinonve and C. mjoeberuy Stiasny. In contradistinction to the capillata-group the nozikii-wroup is ehurac- terized by the rhopalar and the tentacular stomach pouches being connected Iv anistomoses through the gelatinous septa. whieteas these septa are uninterrupted in the species of the eapillata-group. separating the [6 stomach pouches vour pletely from cach other, Stiasny and van der Maadenu recognize three spceivs wk the nozekii-eroup, In C, nozakii, which) was described from Japan and das also been found in the Mergui Archipelago, rear Nbatrang in Vietnam, and near Surabaja in Java, the marginal lappets contain a dense network of anastormes- ing canals, whereas no anastromoases are seen in the lappets in the two other species. Ags distinguishing cliracters between C. mjvebergi, which was found in north-western Australi, and C. buitendijki, which up te now has only been 262, Bo, KRAMP observed near Amboina in the Banda Sea, the authors emphasize three points: (1) the lateral diverticula from the broad tentacular stomach pouches are irre- gulur, tree-like (“biumchenférmigen”) in C. mjoebergi, straight and undivided in buitendijki; in the present specimen they are straight, but their margins are vodulating. (2) The horse-shoe-shaped figures marking the insertions of the tentacles are narrower in buitendijki ( 2/1 or 3/1) than in mjoeberei (1-5/1), in the present specimen (1-7/1°3). In mjoebergi the radia) museular bands reach inwards halfway in between the sections of the circular muscle band, whereas in buitendijki the radial muscles are entirely outside the circular muscles; in this respect the present specimen is decidedly of the same type as in buitendijki. 1 do not hesitate therefore, to refer the north Australian specimen to Cyanca buitendijki Stiasny, though future examination of a more extensive range of material may possibly disclose a variability, which would make it necessary to unite the two foris, Further Distribution: Amboina in the Malavan Archipelago, not previously: recorded from Australia. Aurelia aurita (L.) (Figs. 1-2) Previous Australian Records; A. coerulea Lendenfeld, 1854, p. 280. Port Jackson, New South Wales, Stiasny, 1924c, p, 69. fig. 6. Port jackson and Port Hackiug, near Sydney, New South Wales, Dakin and Colefax, 1933, p. 195. Materio] Examined: (1) South Australia, ca. fine, 196], no other data available, 1 specimen. diam. 12 em. (2) Creek, Port Prive, Sonth Australia, 4,yii.1959. Coll. J. H. Bell, 1 speci- men, diam, 13 cr, (see remarky below). (3) Port Price, South Australia, L0.vil961. Coll. J. H. Bell, 2 specimens. diam, 12-15 em. (see remarks below). (4) Green Island, north Queensland, 18.xii.1955. Coll, W, Costa, per |. H. Barnes, 1 specimen, diam. 3:3 cm (see remarks below). (3) Swan River, near Perth, Western Australia, date not given, presumably stimmer-autumnl, 1957-58, Coll. F. Barrett-Lennard. 2 specimens, diam. 9-10 am. (shrunk). These specimens of Aurelia, and apparently all others from Australian waters, belong to a variety of Aurelia aurifa, which was first deseribed by Lendenfeld (1884) as A. coerulea. Most of the numerons species of Aurelia, which have been described, are local varieties of A, aurita (L.); only one or two other species are valid. A. limbata (Brandt, 1838) is a distinct species, occurring in the northern Pacifie and north-western Atlantic. and it is a bad mistake to identify it with A, Iabiata, as Mayer did (1910, p. 628). All the canals, except the eight adradial, are much and profusely Brana, with numerons Jateral diverticula forming numerous anastomoses. In the living condition the medusa is conspicuously yellow with a brown margin. A. solida Browne, 1905, has been recognized as a valid species by several authors. It is mainly characterized by the marginal sense organs pointing up- wards towards the exumbrella. The mouth-arms are thin, narrow hands, slightly folded, the canals slender with few anastomoses. Its geographical distribution is very peculiar (tropical Indian Ocean and the warm parts of the eastern MEDUSAE FROM AUSTRALIAN OOASTAL WATS Kid Athintic), and it seems very prubable that it cannot be retaiued as 4 valid species i even as a separate variety of A, aterila, The Indo-Pacifie A. labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt, 1820, is characterized by the umbrella margin being divided into 16 lobes, each of the eight primary lobes between the rhopalia being divided by a median cleft; the canal system is very similar to that in A. aurita. Most authors have considered it us separate species bot future studies may shaw that it carmot he regarded is specifically distinct from A. auvita, All other forms of Anrelia certainly belong 16 A. aurita (L.). The strict tiral differences between them are not very conspichous and are, moreover, subject to individual varfation and dependent on development or contraction Some characteristic features separating different varieties or races tnay, haw- every be paintecl out. Among characters withoul taxonomic value may be mentioned: (a) coluurs (b) thickness of the ily and degree of vawtiog of the uinbrella; (@) shape und size of the subgenitul pits, which may be changed in different ways dovine preservation: iW the vutio of the gonadal to the umbrella diameter is variahle within one and the same population, in the present Australian speciniens varyiny between 33/100 and 46/100, (e) much stress has been laid npon the number al eanitls arising from each genital sinus between adjacent interrhopalar radial canals; this is, however, dependent on the age aud developmental stuge of the individuals, the genital portico “swillowin: up” the basal pasts of the canals during its outward growth, so that the mumber of “eanzd roots” is eradually increased, frequently amounting to 5 ar 7. Some importance for distinguishing between varieties or ruces of A. anrite mity, however, be applied to the following characters; (i) The mouth-arrs; not their length, but the foldiny of their edges, fn var, maldicensis (Bigelow), which oceurs in the Indian Geean fram the Red Sea to the Malayan Archipelago, the structure of the mouth-arms is particularly complex, being large, curtuin-like, their base massive, solid, with complexly folded, meandrine lips surrounding the snouth opening and banging far down, while their distal parts are thin, slightly folded, Oi var. ¢olpefa (Brandt) the arms are broad, much folded and Jobed throughout their length, in their basal part very wide, with a deep incision, Mayer (1910) has identified the Australian var. coernled (Lendeufeld) with calpote, and Stiasny (1924e) likewise considers these two forms ag Closely related, which is a mistake; in cverulea the arms are salid, but their margins are thin, undulating. but not complextly folded, und there are no obvious basal incisions. In North Atlantic specimens of A. aurita the mouth-arms are likewise rather simple, their margins not conspicuously labuvd but more densely crenulated than in cvernlea. Gi) The branching of the canals. whether densely or sparingly branched, and to what extent anastomoses occur. In this regard there is u conspicuous difference between specimens from north-western Europe and the Atlantic ceast of North America, which in other respeets are very similar to each other; in the distal portions of the canals there are many more anastomoses in American than iv Rnropean specimens, in the various Indo-Pacific forms anastamoses seem to occur sparsely. (iii) Formation of adradial notches or jneisions in the umbrella margin. Such incisions are particularly conspicuous fu A. dabiate, it they may also. be observed in other forms of Aurefia, though ia greatly varying deuree, Bivelow {1913, p. 98) has shown that secondary indentations in the marvin of A. limbata are simply due to contraction of the umbrella. ‘The present author has seen living A. linbata swimming in the sea on the west coast of Greenland, the 264 PV. L. ARAMP mirgin being eight- or sixteen-lobed in rerular succession according to the expansion or contraction of the umbrella but the secondary notches disappeared completely when the specimens were preseryed in formalin. To a Iesser degree these secondary marginal notches may also appear in A. anrita, in Muropean as well us in vther populations: they are very Inconspicupus and are rarely seen in North Atlantic specimens, but it is interestiny to note that they are mentioned in the descriptions of all the Indo-Pacific forms, where they seem to be more inclined to remain afler preservation. On a lormer occasion (Kranip, 1942, pp. 109 et seg.) I have discussed these matters, The populations in northern Europe and on the Atlantic coast of North America are geographically separated and may be termed “geographical races”: but if the determinations and deseriptions in the literature are correct, the geographical areas of distribution of the Indo-Pacific forms are apparently more or less overlapplug, though the variety coerulea seems to be clintacturistic ot Australian waters. According to the literature, the Australian variety, coerulea, differs From the twpical north-east Athintio A, qurite mainly in the mouth-ains being broad. plump. and andy slightly crenulated, in the rbopalar marginal clefts being com- paratively deep and in mere or Jess conspicuous median notches in the eight primary marginal lappets. Examination of the specimens in the present collection (see Miy. 1) and direct comparison with specimens from Danish waters confirm these statements, The rhopalar clefts wre deeper in the Australian than in the Danish specimens. The difference in the mouth-armis is still more conspicnuus; in the European ypeciinensy the margin of the arms is much more densely cremulated than in the Anstralian (see Fig, 2); in both forms the edges of the mouath-arms are pro- vided with a row of numerous, minute tentaculae, which seem to be better developed in the Australian specimens, Median, adradial notches in the eight marginal lappets are clearly seen in the present specimens; they are seen only as fairly sliaht incurvations but it is remurkable that in all the specimens they lave been retained after the preservation of the animals. Lt is also remarkable that the radiating canals issuing from the wenital cavities are rather sparingly branched in their proximal portions, forming clongate furcations; eve in the largest specimen observed, 15 cm, wide (Fig. 1). there are only three “canil roots” arising from each venital sinus; in their distal parts the canals are mare densely branched, but there are no, or extremely few, anastomoses between them and then, at any rate. only in the immediate neighbourhood of the um- brella margin. The ratio of the gonidal to the umbrella diameter varies be- tween 33/10) and 46/L00: in the present state oF preservation the genital pits are small and cireuditr. Remarks onthe Ocenrrense of the Specimens, Re (2), Port Price, 4.viia9, Mr, Bell reports the specimen came from be- tween the surlace and 10 feet (3 metres) depth: the jellyfish oerut in large manbers, pulsating and swimming with the tide. Re (3). Part Price, 10.vi.61, surface to 20 feet depth. Mr. Bell aeamarks that this species way abundant, und the jellyfish were very slugeish, muking lally any attempt to swim, and were carried by the current, Re (4), Green Island, 18.ii.58. “2. . drifting.a few inches wider the surface Hepprosimately 100 feet (30 metres) of clear water off Opolu Cay, Bright sun- shine. no wind, calm sea, still alive. No other jellyfish seen in vicinity,” Ceouraphical Distribution: Aurelia anrite with its varieties has an almost vosmopolitan distribution in coastal waters. MEDUSAEK FROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 265 RHIZOSTOMEAE tassiopea ndrosia Agassiz and Mayer, 1899 Previous Australian Records: Stiasny, 1933, pp, 913-922, fig. 1, Hayman Islands, Whitsunday Group, Queensland. Material Examined: Wope Island, Queensland, no date. Coll. Mrs, Betts, 1 specimen, diam, 4-4 cm. ‘Thursday Island, North Queensland, 10.xii.61. from inside of sunken vessel, Coll, H. W. Cununings. 4 specimens, diam. 2-4 em. This species, originally described from the Fiji Islands (by Agassiz and Mayer, 1899), was dealt with in u special paper by Stiasny (1933), who examined two Australian specimens and stated that C, ndrosia is different from the West- Indian species, C. xamachana BR. P. Bigelow, 1899. The Australian localities are all om the coasts of Queeusland., Further Distribution: Fiji Islands and New Caledonia. Cephea octostyla (Forskal) Cephen octastyla L. Agassiz, 1862, p. 156. Cephen ectastyla Mayer, 110, p. 652, fig, 405, Cephea ectostyla Stiasny, 1921, p. 73. Material Examined: Green Island, Cairns, Queensland, 30.xii.59. Coll, Miss Jennifer Barnes. 1 specimen, diam. 3-0) cri. A young medusa, tuken off Rockhanrpton. Queensland, was, with some doubt, referred to this species by Stasny (1926, p. 251). According to Stiasny (1921, p, 73) Forskal’s Medusa octostyla is doubtful and not the same as Cephea octostyla L. Agassiz. The species is characterized by the presence of 4 to 12 long, tapering, wart-covered filaments in the middle region of the mouth-arms and cannot he confounded with C. cephed (Forskal). which on a former occasion has heen recorded from the Great Barrier Recf (Kramp. 1961a, p, 204), Further Distribution: Red Sea (Forskal), Philippines. Netrostoma coerulescens \Iaas. 1903 Netrostoma voerilescens Maas, 1903, p. 35, pl. 5, dus. a7, 46; pl. 11, figs. 97, 103; ph 12. fig. 109 Cephea oetastyla var. cocrulescens Mayer. 1910, p. 653. Netrostoma cocrulescens Stiasny, 1921, yp. 77. pl. 1, fig. 2: pl. 3, fies, 19, 20, textfigs, 3, 4. Previous Australian. Record: Stiasny, 1931b, p, 36, off Wilson Islet, Capri- com Group, Queensland, Material Examined: Tongue Reet (north side}, 301,60. at surface. Coll, T. Purcell. J specimen, diam. ca. LO cm, There are seven round-edged marginal lappets in each octant: the leneth af the month-arrn is 7 em. Further Distribution: Widely distributed from the Arabian Sea to the Philippines; Japan. 266 P. L. RRAMP Mastigias papua (Lesson 1829) Previous Australian Records: Mayer, 1915, pp. 160, 193, Torres Strait, Stiasny, 193la, p. 144, North Australia. Material Examined: (1) Sonth Mission Beach, near Tully, north Queensland, 16.xii.60. Coll. }. H. Barnes. 4 specimens, diam. 15-25 mim. (see remarks helow). (2) Cairns Inlet, 13.xii.61. Coll, W. Monro, 1 speciraen, diam. 17 mm, (3) Esplanade, Cairns, Queensland, 21.xii.61, Coll, J. Kells, E. Buckler. E, Adams. 1] specimen, diam, 24 mm. (4) Pebbly Beach, north Queensland. 97.59. Coll. J. Molden, per J. EL Barnes. | specimen, diam, 47 mm, (see remarks below). (5) Pebbly Beach, north Queensland, 124.59, Coll. J. Holden. per J. H- Barnes. 1 specimen, diam, 35 mm. (see remarks beluw). (6) Halfmoon Bay, north Queensland, 25.xi1.61. Coll. W. Kay. 1 specimen. diam. 18 mm, (7) Embley River, Weipa, Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland, 6.5.61. Coll. Mrs, Betts. 1 specimen, diam. 25 mm. This is the common and widely distributed Indo-Pacific species of Mastigias, characterized by the eight rhopalar canals being slender, wsually communicating with the adjacent parts of the intracircular mesh-work of canals, and by the wumber of canal-roots in each actant being less than teu, usually seven to eight. All Australian records np to new are from the northern trupical waters. Remarks on Occurrence and Colotrs: Re (1), near Tully, 18.sii.60, “Tide falling, water murky, sea smooth, wind light north-east. Medusae captured in 2 to 3 feet of water 50 yards offshore, over fine sand. All specimens seen were swimming within 6 inches of the surface, Colour before preservation—variable from dark blue in smaller speci- mens to light brown in the largest. Strongest coloration on umbrella which also consistently showed small circular whitish spots.” Re (4), Pebbly Beach, 9.1.59. “Upper surface of bell olive-green with dark blue spots. On each of the eight mouth-arms there hangs a_ three-edyed fiuwer-like process, which is a dark, mottled purple colour and shaped like a three-hladed propeller in transverse section. Some ‘fingers’ have been damaged und there appears to have been a process of re-growth.” Re (5), Pebbly Keach, 121.59, “... Before preservation the upper surface was brown with many small white spots. Eight Heshy creamy-white mouth- arms were present, which hore numerous small white clubs, bright blue at the tip,” it is very interesting to note the different records of the colours in living specimens before preservation; previous records in the literature likewise state that the colours are very variable in this medusa. Geographical Distribution: Widely distributed in tropical coastal waters in the Malayan Archipelago and western Pacific to the Fiji Islands and Japan, MEDUSAL) FROM ATISTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS Mastigias ocellatus (Modeer, 1791) Mustigias vecllata Mueckel, 1880, p, 623, Vervura palmate Hueckel, 1880, p. 606, pl, 40, figs. 9-12. Mustigias ocellata Mayer, 1910, p. 680. Mustigins ecellata Stiasny, 1922, p, B30, fiws, 4-6. Mastigivs ocelluta Stiasny, 1024a, p. 490, fiz. 2, 3. Muastivias ovellatus Kramp, 1961b, ». 358. Not previously recorded from Australia, ta a =i Material Examined: Clifton Beach, near Brisbane, Queensland, 29.xi.61, voll. L. Morrissey, 1 speciinen, diam, 26 mm. North Queensland, no other dita available, coll, C. Russell, 1962, 1 specimen, diam. 43 mm. Fanny Bay, Darwin, Northern Territorv, 10.v.59, coll. C, BP, Holman, 1 specimen, diam. 59 mm, Modern descriptions of this species are given by Stiasny (1922 and 1924a), who also found (1922, p. 538) that the type specimen of “Versura palmata’, Iacekel, 1580, was identical with Mastigias ovellatis, In eontradistinction to Mf. papud the rhopalw radial canals are broad, the four perradial being distinctly bottle-shaped without anastomoses with the intra- cirenlar meshwork of canals: there are many more canal roots, 15-20 in each octant; it is alsy distinguished by the small terminal appendages on its mouth- arms. Tlaeckel (1880) gave the number of marginal lappets ws 12 per octant, and this is repeated in Mayer (1910) and, unfortunately, also in my “Synopsis” (Kramp, 196Lb, p, 355). According ta various other authors the number of lappets is 6 or § per octant, though Stiasny (1924a) found 6 in some and 12-14 in other octants of one and the same specimen. In the present specimens | have counted 8-10 lappets per octant. From the time when “Medusa ocellata’ Modeer was referred to the genus Cephea (by Péron and Lesueur, 1809, and L. Agassiz, 1862), the specific name was generally written ocellate ut the correct spelling must be ocellatus. Mastigies andersoni Stiasny, which has similar, botUe-shaped rhopalar canals is discussed below. Further Distribution: Andaman Jslands and Mergui Archipelago, Malayan Archipelago, Philippines, Hongkong. Phyllorhiza punctata (Iendenfeld, 1884) Phillorhiza, punctala Lendenfeld, 1884, pp, 296, 307, pl, 4, fig. 1; pl, 5, figs, 1-4. Phyllorhiza punctata. Stiasivy, 19240, p. 56, figs. 1-4, Phitlorhiza punctata Stiwsny, 1926, p, 235. Phyllorhiza punctate Stiasny, WS1a, p, 144. Previous Australian Records: Recorded from uacar Port Jackson, New South Wales, in all the papers mentioned above. Material Examined; Cardwell, Queenslund, 21.155, E. M. Anthony, 5 speci- mens, diam. 19, 25, 29, 30 and 45 mm. Darwin Whart, Cairns, 25.xi.60, Bert Cummings. 1 specimen, diam. 27 mm. Esplanade, Cairns, 301,61, |, H. Barnes, 2 specimens, diam. 40 and 60 mm. Cairns Inlet, Queensland, 23,xi.61, 2 speci- meus, diam. 37 and 42 mm. Cairns, No. 2 Wharf, 13.xii/.61, 1 specimen, diam, 110 mm. Cairns Inlet, Queensland, 13.xii1.61, call, J. H. Barnes, 3 specimens, diam. 20, 30 and 45 min. Cairns Inlet, Queensland, 13.xii-61, coll. G, Rowell, 1 “68 P, L, RRAMP spécimen, diam. 45 mm, Cairns Inlet, Queensland. 24.xii.61, 1 specimen, diam, 40 mm. Green Island, Cairns, Queensland, 20.xi1.58, | specimen, diam, 30 mim, (see remarks below), coll. J. H. Barnes. Urquhart Point, Weipa, Queensland, 2x61, coll. G. Webster, 2 specimens, diam, 45 and 55 mm. Swan River, Western Australia, presumably summer 1957-8. coll, F. Barrett-Lennard. 6 specimens. diam. 20-55 mm. The genus Phyllorhiza has had a somewhat complicated history. Tbe name was introduced by L, Agassiz (1962, p. 158) for a Chinese medtisa, PF. chinensis, Haeckel (1880, p. 588) added a new species, P. ¢rifolium, and Lendenfeld (1884) described P. punctata from New South Wales, Australia. Maver (1910, p. 684) revarded the two first species as doubtful, but retained the generic name and placed P. punctata as the type species. Later on two more species were de- seribed, P. luzoni Mayer (1915) from the Philippines (by Stiasny, 1921 ane 1924e reyarded as doubtful) and Conlorhisoides pacifica Light, 1921; this latter species was referred to Phyllorhiza by Stiasny (1924c, p. 50), Stiasny (1924¢, p. 56, figs. 14) has examined new specimens irom Port Juckson, New South Wales, and given a new, detailed description and alsa (p. 65) a new diagnosis of the gemis Phyllorhisa. Additional specimens trom Port jackson were recorded by Stiusny (1926, p. 255), and finally he has examined Lenedonfeld's tvpespecimens (193la, p. 144). Though the diagnosis of the genus Phyllorliza seems to me to he ruther vague, ulmost equal to Mastigias, 1 think it advisable to retain the name of Phyllorhiza punctata for Lendenfeld’s medusa which. evidently, is a very conumon species in Australian waters not merely on the coasts of New South Wales. wheoce all previous records are derived. but also around Queensland and in Westem Australia, as seen from the present collection, As a matter of fact, when 1 first examined these numerans specimens | thought that they belonged to Mastigids and in many details they agreed with Mi, andersoni, which was described by Stiasny (1996, p. 252. fiz, 3) from tive specimens collected at Bowen Harbour, Port Denison, Queensland, sind one from Observation Island, Gulf of Carpentaria, { am inclined to think that all these specimens really belonged to Phyllorphiza punctata, and the same mas possibly also apply to the Australian specimens (from the Grewt Barrier Reef) of Mastigias albipunctita Stiasny, 1920, a species otherwise vecurring in the Malayan Archipelago. Phyllorhiza punctafa resembles Mastivias ocellatus in the configuration of the radial rhopalar canals. which are broud: the perradial rhopalar canals are botthshaped and without anastomoses to the intracircular mesh work of canials: (here are mamerous “canal roots”: hut the terminal appendages of the mouth- wrms are usually very long, frequently as Jong us the ianteter of the umbrella or more (ulsy seen in some of the present specimens), The mimber of marginal luppets in cach octant is almost regularly 6, the nwo median ones being broader than the others and with a median clefts (he same is emphasized im the ce- seviption of Masttetas anderson, In the present collection is also au specinen of Phyflorhiaa puneteati bon Alu Hin, Thailand (12°56’N., 100°02’E. ), collected [S.in.a8 by W. ]. S$. Themp- sol: it is 50 mm wide. A medusa, recorded from southern Japan by Uchida (1934. pp. 211. 216) as Phyllorhisa triformis Hacckel (1880) may possibly belous ta P. petata. Dy. J, H. Barnes says of the specimen collected at Green Island, Cairms. 20.xi1.55. ".. . Captured near the surface in & feet (about 2% metres ) of tlear water over a sandy botlom, near Green Island jetty. Tide low ancl MEDUSAE FROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 269 rising, wind light north-west, raising small ripples only. Hot, bright, cloudless day. Colour before preservation, umbrella brown with blue circular spots; mouth-arms milky; appendage (eluly) from mouth-arms colourless with blue extremity.” Further Distribution: Gulf of Siam; ? southern Japan, Pseudorhiza haeckeli (Ilaacke, 1884) Pseudorhiza haeckelti Haacke, 1884, p, 291. Monerhiza haeckelii Haacke, 1886, p. G14, pl. 37, fixs. 1-9, Pseudorhiza hueckelit Mayer, 1910, p, 658i. Pseudorhiza haeckelii Stiasny, 1921, p. 123. Psenlurhisa hacckeli Thiel, 1926, p, 223, pl. 3. Pseudorhiza haeckeli Stiasny, 193la, pp. 149, 153. Pseudorhiza haeckeli Kramp, 1961b, p. 367, Previous Australian Records: Haacke, 1984 and 1886, St, Vincent Gulf, South Australia. Thiel, 1926, south-west Australia. Material Examined: (1) Port Lincoln, South Australia, 1.759. Coll. F. J. Mitchell and T, D. Scott. 1 specimen, diam. 22 cm. (see remarks belaw), (2) Somerton, 5.A., on shore, 151.62. Coll. R. V. and Miss J. E. South- colt, One large specimen, fragmentary, determination uncertain (sce remurks below), (3) Off Marino Rocks, South Australia, 261.61, 50-300 yards from shore. Coll, Miss R. Wi. Amott Rogers, 12 specimens, diam. 1-2-8-5 cm. (4) Brighton, St. Vincent Gulf, $.A., 8.vi.57. Coll. R. V. Southcott. 1 speci- men, large, fragmentary, according to notes 11-12 inches (28-30 cm.) (see remarks below ). (5) Port Noarlunga Reef, $.A., 8.1.61, at surface. Coll, D. Cooper, 2 speci- mens, diam. 1-5 and 3 cm. (6) Aldmga Reef, South Australia, 12.41.61. Coll. Underwater Research Group. 2 specimens, diam. 10 and 14 em. (see remarks below). (7) Ammhem Land, Northern Territory, Sept, 196], Coll. V. Wells. 1 speci- men, diam. 6 ¢m. The genus Pseudorhiza was erected by Lendenteld (1852b, p, 380; 1884, p. 293, pl. 3) for a medusa, Pseudorhiza aurosa n. gen., 1. sp., collected near Port Philip (Victoria) and near Adeluide (South Australia), and never obscrved ugain; the description is insufficient and the figure probably misleading, As it was found in the same area where P_haeckeli Haacke occurs in considerable tuambers, it seems reasonable to presume that the two species até identical, but the identity can uever be ascertained with certainty. Stiasny (193la) has ex- amined the typc-specimen of P, auresa (from Port Philip), which was in poor condition and did not solve the question of the presumed identity of the two species. Tt scems to me advisable, therefore, to retain the name of P. haeckeli for the medusa, which was thoroughly described and elaborately figiwwed by Haacke (1584 and 1886). Later on, several details were described by Thiel (1926). who examined some specimens from three localities between Fremantle aid Bunbury on the west coast of Australia. 2ztt p, L. KRAMP The principal difference hetween the two species is the absence of filaments on the mouth-arms of P. atrosa in contradistinction to P. haeckeli, in which. moreover, one of the mouth-arms (and only one) carries One enormously Jong and stout appendage near its outer end: it is triangular in cross-section and frequently longer than the diameter of the umbrella. It is present even iu voung specimens and nearly always retamed after preservation, among 15 specimens in the present collection the appendix is lost in only three. Its length is variable as seen from the adjacent table:— a Diarn. of urtibrella Lingeth of appendage in Paeddortice hiterkel, mia. Cen ee i) ay 2h at 4) alt 6) 7 | sO YM | 1 | ‘Ss - - 7 oe “ Haacke (1886, pp. 624 #) gaye « detailed description of young stages of this medusa. Examination of young specimens, 15-25 mm, wide, in the present collection shows that his description is perfectly correct in almost all respects, { shall make only a few additional remarks. The appearance of the exumbrella is very similar to Taucke's fig, 7 (pl. 37), except that in the central area the nematocvst warts are not arranged in definite circles. In a specimen only 1} mm wide, Haacke found only four rhopalia; the present individuals all have eight. In the smallest specimen, 1 mm wide, the mouthi-arms are very similuy lo those in Haacke'’s fe, 6, though their edges are not perfectly smooth but already slightly frilled to some extent, and this is further developed in the slightly larger specimens: it is remarkable, however, that in_ these specbucis the atm carrying the large appendage and its neighbours on cither side are more densely frilled than those on the opposite side, Gastral filaments ure short and very numerous in these young stages; gonads are hardly distinguishable. The number of centripetal canals arising from the ring-canal is usually nine in each octant, rarely ten or eleven: they ate straight and windivided and all of equal length; in the youngest stage, 11 mm wide, Haacke found 4-5 centripetal canals, the median one longer than the others. As seen from the above table the large appendage on one of the mouth-anns may be longer than the diameter of the umbrella even iu sunall specimens. Remarks on Occurrence and Colours: Re (1), Port Lincoln, Lii.59. “.. . Apparently this species does not o¢cur far up Spencer Gulf...” “The jelly (mesogloea) is blue, the mouth-arins are translucent white, the surface of the bell carries a red reticular pattern.” Re (2), Somerton, 151,62. “Cast up on shore, In damaged condition, inactive; clear jelly with purple markings. There was no stinging effect on being handled.’ MEDUSAE FROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 271 Re (4), Brighton, §.vi.57. “Bell about 11-12 inches across and jelly substance about an inch thick. The bell was patterned with a purplish-red reticular marking, somewhat hexagonal, and other streaks of this colour led away from it. The medusa broke up when | picked it up im my hands off the sand.” Re (6), Aldinga Reef, 1241.61, “The smaller of these two specimens hil about 12 small jellyfish sheltering under the mantle. These were dispersed during efforts to guide the Scvphomedusan into a plastic bag, but several were snbsequently captured . , ,” (see below, Eirene menoni), Distribution: Pseudorhiza haeckeli is evidently a very common jellyfish on the coasts of South Australia, but a specimen was also taken at Arnhem Land on the north coast, and it is recorded from three localities, Rottnest Island, Cock- bury Sound, and Koombana Bay, between Fremantle and Bunbury on the west coast, It is known only from Australian waters, Acromitoides purpurus (Mayer, 1910) Cafastylus purpurus Mayer, 1910, p. 671, fig. 412. Acramitoides purparuy Stiasny, 1921, p. 136. Acromifoides purpurus Stitsny, 19241), pp. 30, fie. 1. Calostylus purpurns Southeatt, 1963b. p. 57, Material Examined: Normanton River, Gulf of Carpentaria, Queensland, 16.v.60, coll, P. F. Aitken, 4 specimens, diam, 12, 14, 16 and !8 em. (see remarks helow). Esplanade, Cairns, Queensland, 214159, coll, E, Coster, 1 spevimen. diam. 3 om, The genus Acromitoides differs frou. Catostylus in the intracircular anasto- mosing network being in direct communication with the ring canal and the inler-rhopalur canals only, while in Cutostyhis it communicates with the rhopalar canals as well, Remarks on the specimens from Normanton River, L6.y.60: “Mr. Aitken reports that these jellyfish were present in large numbers in the incoming tide: they were eallected by dip-net from a boat, Colour varied trom shades of light pink through light purple and light blue.” Further Distribution; Philippines: not previously recorded from Australia. Catostvlus mosaicus (Quoy and Gaimard. 1824) Crphea masaiva Quoy & Gaimard, 1824, p, 369, pl, 85. fiz. 3, Rhizostuma mosaica Muley, 1849, pp, 422, 452, pl. 38, fies, 26. 27) pl. 39, fey, 25-34, Catostylus mosaicus L, Agussiz, 1862, p. 152, Crambessa mousaivn Wacckel, 1880, p. 622, Crambesse niosated Lendenfeld, 1983-1588. Crambossa mosaica Agassiz & Maytr, 1898, p. 16. pls. 2, 3. Cutostyluy niosdieus Mayer, LYL0, p. 6G. Gataxtylus mosaicys Saydtheott, 1960, p. 21; 1963a, ys 57. Catastylus mosaionsy Kramp, 196Ub, p. 370, all reenrds, 1910-1953. Previous Australian Records: Quoy & Gaimard, 1824. and Huxley, 1849, Port Jackson, New South Wales, Haeckel, 1880, Lake Mawarra. New South Wales. Lendenteld, 1887, p, 30, and preceding papers, Port Philip, Victoria, Agassiz und Mayer, IS9S, p. 16, near Sydnev, New South Wales, and near Brishane, Caims ud Quoktown, Queensland. Maver. 1915, p. 190, Moreton Bay, near Brisbane, Queensland. Stiayny, 1922. p, 554, Port Macking, New South Wales, 272 PL. KRAMP Stiasny, 1924c, p. 66, Como, near Sydney. Stiasny, 1929, p, 214, Merauke, south coast of New Guinea. Stiasny, 1931b, p, 38, Port Curtis, Queensland, Pope. 1953a, pp. 16-21 (stinging). Sonthcott, 1960, p. 21 (stinging). Pope, 1963, p, 193 (stinging). Southeott, 1963a, p, 57 (stinging), Thomas, 1963, p. 208. Material Examined: Clifton Beach, Queensland, 29.xi.61, coll, L. Morrissey. J specimen, diam. 17 mim. Esplanade, Cairns, Queensland, 21.i1,59, coll, E. Coster, 2 specimens, diam. 75 and 80 mm. Newell Beach, north Queensland, Dec., 1960-Jan., 1961, coll. Mrs. Betts, | specimen, diam, 25 mm. This seems lo be a common Australian medusa, originally described from Australia by Quoy & Gaimard (1824) and later on recorded from several locali- ties from Melbourne northwards along the east coast to north Queensland and from. the south coast of New Guinea, It has not been found anywhere else, apart from a record from the Philippines which (Mayer, 1917, p. 215) is re- garded as uncertain by the author himself, Several Australian specimens have been examined by Stiasny (1921-1931); the present specimens fully agree with the descriptions given by this promiuent expert on Rhizostomeae, and we tay safely accept C. mosaicus as a valid species. Distribution: Australia; ? Philippines. LEPTOMEDUSAE Eirene menoni (Kramp, 1953) Phartis sp. Monon, 1932, p. 18. Phortis lactea Ling, 1937, p. 357, fizs, 9-10, Eirene menont Kramp, 1953, p, 286, pl. 2, fig. 6. Previous Australian Records; Kramp, 1953, p. 286. Great Barrier Reet. Kramp, 1965 (in press). Near Sydney. Material Examined: Aldinga Reef, South Australia, 2 niles offshore, surface. 12,1161. Coll. Underwater Research Group, South Australia. 4 specimens. The specimens are 13-17 mm, in diameter and have the following numbers of marginal tentacles: diam., mm. 13 15 16 17 tentacles 44 ca. 44 ca. 40) ea. 4 The length of the gonads is very variable in this species; in the present specimens they extend from very pear the ring-eanal to more than half the distance upwards towards the base of the peduncle. The tentacles are ill of almost equal leneth, without any young ones between the others. Further Distribution: S.E. Africa; India; Macassar Strait to Chekiang Coast in China; Cook Islands in Polynesia. Aelvicirvha danduensis (Bigelow, 1904) (Vig. 3) Kirene danduensis Bigelow, 1404, p. 254, pl. 1. fig, 5: pl 2. hu. 6. Helvioirrha danduensis Kramp, 1936, p. 255. Helvicirrha danduensiy Kramp. 196Ub, yy, 192. Not previously recorded from Australia, Io MEDUSAE FROM AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 73 Material Examined: Lamceroo Beach, Darwin, Northern Territory, 17.vi.62. Coll. R. V. Southeott. 1 specimen, diam. 5 mm.. netted between surface andl (5m, depth, at 0-10 mm. from shore. This is one of the two Indo-West Pacific species of Helgicirrhe, and it is distineuished from 1. malayensis (which oceurs on the Great Barrier Rect) by its very short oral lips, more elongated stamach, and by the greater distance between the tentacles. Direct comparison with specimens of both species fromm other localities has convinced me of the identity of the present specimen with H. danduensis. Jt is 5mm. in diamer (thns in a rather young stage, since the medusa may obtain a size of 23.mm.). The peduncle is 2 mm, long, conical in its basal part, distal part eylindrical; the gonads are narrow, linear, extending from the base of the peduncle three-fifths outwards towards the bell margin, There are 32 tentacles, eauh with oue pair of lateral cirri; between the tentacles there are two or three yery small papillae and asually one marginal vesicle, As in most other speeimens of Mf. danducusis examined by me ou former oceasians, the stomach is not particularly elongated, but the gastric tissue is continued somewhat up above the terminal constriction of the peduncle (Fig. 3). 1 cannot refer this specimen to the same species, A. malayensis, of which I have ex- amined numerous specimens from the Great Burrier Reef (Kramp, 1953, p. 286) and fram the Mergui Archipelga (Kranyp, 1958, p, 355); it certainly belongs ta Helvicirtha danduensis. Further Distribution, Maldive Islands; Nicobar Islands: a doubtful reeord from Vietnam. Phialopsis. diegensis (Torrey, 1909) Uhidlopsis diezensis Torrey, L009, p. 23, fig. 9. Phinlopsis diewensis Kramp, LY6Lb, p. 195 {all-referouees ). No previous recards from Australia. Material Examined: One mile north-east of uorthnywst point of Torrens Island, South Australia, from surface to depth of 3 feet 29.iv.61, coll. Po D. Grogan, 11 specimens. diam. $-12 mm. The apical jelly is uncommonly thick and vaulted; most of the marginal cirri are lost, and in most of the specimens the gonads are lost, but where present they ure of the structure typical of this species, Further Distribution: Mainly oceanic. Common in the Athintic Ocean, miinly in its eastern pacts, tram the Inminger Sea to the Cape of Good Hope: off the east coast of Afviea; California and south-west of the Galapagos Islands in the eastern Pacific, The occurrence in South Australia bridges the wap be- myeen the east Pacific and the western part of the Inclian Qoeean, LIMNOMEDUSAE Olindias singularis (Browne, 1905) Olindias singtlaris Browne, 1905. p. 737, pl. 56, fig, 2: ph 457. fig. 1. Olindias. sinzularis Bigelow, 1909, p. 109, pl. 4, fig Le pl. 31, figs. 1-102 pl. 32, fig, ® Qlindias sinaularis Kranp, L953, p, 295. Olindies singularis Kramp, 1956, p. 237. Olindias. yirigulariy Kramip, 19538, p, 366. Olindiay singularis Sonthcott, 19G3b, p. 20, fig. 3B- 2T4 PL, KRAMP Precious Australian Records: Stitsny, 1931b, p. 27. Michaelmas Reet, off Cairns, north Queensland. Kramp, 1953, p. 298, Great Barrier Reef. Kramp. W6la, p. 203, Greea Island, of Cairns. Southeott, 1963b. p. 20, fig. 3B, widely distributed in Australia, Material Bxamined: \farino Rocks, South Australia, surface to 3 feet depth, (8.1.61, coll, Miss R. M. Arnott-Royers, 5 specimens, Somerton, South Ans- tralia, 15,i,62, coll, R. V. Southeatt, 3 specimens. The localities are closely south of Adelaide oni the eastern side oF St. Vincent Gulf and on both meeasions the medusa was present in great numbers along the beach, right inte the waters edge. According to notes by Dr. Suutheatt, the stinging effect of this medusa is rather considerable, O. singultris is dis- tinguished by the presence of only one statoeyst at the base of each of the primary tentacles, oot a pair as in other species of Olindias, exceptions being rarely seen. This was stated by Bigelow (1909) and confirmed by the present writer in specimens from the Great Barrier Reef, the Nicobar Islands, Karachi in India, and the Jranian Cull (Kramp, 1953, 1956, 1958 and 196Ja). In the ten specimens mentioned above I have found a pair of statocysts at the base of only one tentacle in one individual and at two tentacles in another. The specimens, accordingly, turther coufrm the specific validity of this character. The present specimens examined by me ure fairly small, being 5-17 mm. iu diamer; the medusa may attain a much greater size, though rarely more than 36mm, The largest specimen ] have seen was 53 mm. wide and had 116 primary and 68 secondary tentacles and 56 centripetal canals (Iranian Gulf, Kranip, 1956). The specimens from Somerton have the following dimensions: nitmber of diam. number of tentacles centripetal mm, primary secondary “anals i 32 16 20 12 38 18 24 12 D7 20 14 16 38 26 28 7 42 31 36 The small specimeus from Marino Rocks, 5-11 mm, wide, are well preserved, with fully extended tentacles, the secondary tentacles up ta 33 mm, long in the preserved condition. Geographical Distribution: Widely distributed in the warm coastal waters of the Indian Occan from the Tranian Gulf to the Malayan Archipelago; the Philip- pines; Australia; Low Archipelago in Polynesia, abont 135° W. Gonionemus hamatus 1, sp. { Pigs. 4-6) Material Examined; Henley. South Australia, at jetty. 3.v.62. coll. Lo M. Thomas, 1 specimen, identification A4S3. Description of Holotype (figs. 4-6): Diameter 7 mm., height 8 mm., with i bluntly conical apical projection, lateral walls moderately thick. Stomach with a very broad base, quickly narrowing towards a short, prismatic mouth tube with four sharp ridges; four short, but distinct oral lips. the margins of which are densely provided with prominent warts of nemutocysts (Fig. 5). SIPDUSAE FROM AUSTRALIAN COASLAL WATERS 275 Genads (female with small eggs) along almost the entre length of the four nidial canads, cach gonad a laterally compressed. wavy band, uninterrupted in the free margin. Radial canals narrow, riugecanal fairly broad, velum very liroad, There are about 48 marginal tentacles of very unequal length, wp to about 3 mm. long in their present condition, long and short ones apparently without dny definite order (Fig. 4); the tentacles are hollaw. with a very narrow central canal. Each of these tentacles is smooth im about its proximal one-third, but in the grealer part of its length surrounded by densely set complete and rather prominent rings of mematoeysts, up to 60 rings in the longest tentacles. The terminal tip is sharply inwardly bent Jike a look. and just behind the hook is a half-moon-shaped, strongly developed adhesive: pad (Fig. 6); Jong and wel-esteuded tentacles may be more or less twisted, so that it may he difficult tu see whether the adhesive pad is adaxial or abaxial, but in the shorter tentacles the position of the pad is distinctly seen to be adaxial. The tentacles are in- serted at a short distance above the umbrella margin, and there is a well- developed round basal bully with nematoeysts just below the point of issue of the tentacle, Occasionally two tentacles issue from the same bulh: sometimes they are of abont equal size, but as a rule one of them is small, arising from the lateral side of the bulb; such small tentacles are not persistent dwarf ten- ticles, but simply young tentacles of the same structure as the long ones, though in their voungest stage they lack an adhesive pad which. however, is soon de- veloped. Only two of the eight tentacles placed in the four perradial and the four interradial points of the umbrella margin are retained, the others are lost, leaving a small basal stum, pointing upwards and placed at a. somewhat higher level than the other tentacles; the two wltch are retained (one of them long, perradial, the other 4 young one, interradial) are of the same structure as all the other tentacles of the medusa. There are oo ocelli, Only a few statocysts can be discerned, and they are adradially situated, which may be accidental; the question of the fill number of statoevsts must be left open. In the preserved condition the manubrium, radial canals, gonads and ten- lacle bulbs are faintly yellow. Remarks; The specimen was taken by Mr, J, M. Thomas in a plankton net with a light at night at the jetty at Menley on the castern shore of St, Vincent Gull, South Australia. SURVEY OF THE GENERA OF OLINDIADIDAE A. With centripetal canals: Olindias, Macotias, Olindioides, Eperetmus. B. Withont centripetal canals: 1. Tentucles without adhesive pads: Aglauropsis, Cossea, Craspedacnsta, Nuarchus. 2. Tentacles, some with and some without adhesive pads: Cubaia, Vallen- tinia. 3. All tentacles with udhesive pads: Gonionemus, Scolionema. For some time L wus inclined to think that the basal stumps of perradial and interradial tentucles which, mentioned above, are placed at a somewhat higher level than the other tentacles and are pointing upwards, might be the remniuits of another kind of tentacles, perhaps similar tu the tubular tentacles 276 P, L. KRAMP of Vallentinin; but when T found one perradial wid one interracial tentacle of exactly the same strncture as the numerqus ringed tentacles, T gave up that supposition, Aecording to the above survey of the genera the new species helongs to the Genionemys group, though in two inyportant points it. differs fram the other members of that group. lu Gonionemus vertens, the juvenile forin GC. cindobonensis, atid in Scolie- nema sueaense the adhesive pads of the tentacles are abaxial in position and separated. by a remarkable distance from the tip of the tentacles, which is straight-pointed. In the present species the adluesive pads are adaxial and placed immediately iuside the sharply hooked ends of the teutucles. This might induce one to regard this species as the representative Of ao mew genus: but to avoid the erection of another monotypic genus, based on a single individual, T should iucline, for the time being, to revard the distinguishiny chardeters as merely of specific value. This involves a slight alteration of the diagnoses of Gontonénes and Scolionema, omitting the word “abaxial” in con- nection with their adhesive pads. The two genera differ from each other only in the nmimber of statoevsts, “large and indefinite” m Gonionemus, “not excecd- ing 16° in Scolionema. This alsa séerns to he a character of specific importance only and J propose, theretore, to replace Scolioneima suerense: into the geuus Gonionemus, where it was originally placed by Agissiz and Mayer, 1899. The present new species then will find its natural position. within the genus Gonionenus, the generic diagnosis of which will be as Follows: Gonionemus A. Agassiz, 1862: Olindiadidae with four radial canals; without centripetal canals, with numerous uniforin tentacles, all with av adhesive pad near the outer end, and with rings of nematoevsts. Comprising. the fallowing species: C). vertens A, Agassiz, 1862. G, succensis Agassiz wid Mayer, 1599. C:. vindobonensis Jasepli, LOLs. C. hamatus 1. sp. REFERENCES AGasniz, A. and Maver, A. 6, L498. On sone Medusae fron Australia, Bull, Mfus, Conip. Zonk, Warvard Call., 32. Acassrz, Ay and Mayen, A, G., 1902. Meodusac. Rep. Set Res. Exped. ‘Lropieal Pacilte. US. Fish Comm, St, “Albatross”, 1899-1900. 10, Met. Mus, Comp. Zool Wars., 26. 3, pp. 139-76, pls. 1-3. J text-fig., 1 nap. Acasstz, L,, 1862. Contributions to the Natriral History of the Unitted States of Aitericu. 4, pp. 1-380, pls. 20-34, Banxes, J. HE, 1960. Observations on Jellyfish Stinuings inv North Queensland. The Medical Journ. of Australia, 2, pp. 993-0, Bicenow. H. B., 1904. Medusae front the Maldive stands. Bull, Mus. Corp. Zool, ius. 39 (9), pp. 245-69. Bicow, BL B., 1909. Rep. Sci. Res. Exped. Eastery Tropical Pacifie US. Fish Conn. St. “Albatross”, 1904-1905. AVI, Medusae, Mein, Mis. Comp. Zool Harv, 37, pp. 1-243, pls. 1-46, Bicenow, H, B., 1913. Medhasue and Sipltonophocie Collected by the U.S. Fisheries Steamer “Albatross” in the North-Western Pucifie, LOO. Proc, U.S, Nat. Mlus., 44, pp. 1-119, pls, 1-6, Kuecow, H. B., 1938. Plankton of the Bermuda Oceanographic Expeditions, VOL Medusace taken during the Yents 1929 and 1930. Zoologiva, N.Y., 23, pp. Y9-TSY, text-fies. 1-23, MEDUSAE FROME AUSTRALIAN COASTAL WATERS 7 Biiownk, kk. TL, L905, Hydromedasie, with «a Revislon of the Williaday and Petasidae. i a anil Geography of the Maldive ancl Liceadive Archipelagoes, (3), pp, 742-9, pls. 54-7, Dakey, W. J. and Goverax, A.. 1933. The Marine Plankton of the Coastal Waters of New South Wales. 1, The Chief Planktonio Forins and their Seasonal Distribution. Prue. Linn. Soe. N.S.W), 58, pp. 156-222, 1 pl, 7 text-figs, Bscuscuotrz. F., 1829. System der Aculephen, Eine austithchehe Beschreihimyp eile medusenartiven Strahltiere, pp. 1-190. Berlin. Fox, D. L., and Miccor, N., 1954. “he Pinnentation of the Jellyfish, Pelegia noactilnea (Porskil) var. panopyra Péron and Lesucur, Proce, Hay, Soc. B., 142, pp. 392-408, textfigs, LAI. Haadeke, W,. 1884, Pseudorhiza hueckelii, sp. n., der Endspross ces Diseomedusenstammes, Biol. Zhit., 4, pp, 291-4. Maackn, W., 1886, Uber die Ontogenie der Citbomedusin, Zool. Anz., 9, pp. 354-5. Harcke., E., I880. System der Acragpedén. Zweite Hallte des System der Medusen, pp. 361-672. 20 pls, Jena 1880. Wesiey, T. H.. 1849. On the Anatomy and Affinitics of the Family of the Medusae. Philos. Trins. Hoy. Sou. London, 1849. Kiavie, PL, 1936, On the Leptomedusae of the Genera Eirene Eschscholt, and Helgicirrha Hartlanh. Vicensk. Medd. dansk naturh. Foren. Kha. 99, pp. 239-62, Knasr, P. 1. 1953. Hydromedusae. Sei. Rep. Gr. Barrier Reef Exped,, 6 (4), pp, 289-322, text-ligs, 1-9. pls, T, 1. Knamr, P, L., 1956. Mednsae of the Iranian Chilf. Ihid,, 118. pp. 238-42, 7 map, kKnamp, P, L.. 1958. Hydromedusae in the Indiat) Museum. Ree. Indian Mus, 53, pp. 4339-76, text-figs. 1-5, Roan, P. lL. '9Gla. Some Meclusae from Northern Australia. ‘Vrans, Ray, Soc Senth Australia, 85, pp. 197-205, Kiam, PL. 1961b. Synopsis of tlle Medusee of the World. Journ. Mar. Biol. Ass. ULK.. 40. Kiar, 2. 1, 1965, Elydromedasae of the Taeica und Indian Oceans. Dana Nep. No, (i press], lLasvenreip, KH. vox, 1662a. Uber Covlenteraten dee Stidsee, J, Cyaned anhaskald, sp, 9. Z. wiss, Zool. 87, pp. 465-552. Lexpenveiy, Re von, 1882h, Uber eine Ubergangstorm vwischer Semostamen und Thizo- stamen (Pseudorhize. aurosa, g. et sp.) Zool, Aux, 5, pp. 380-3, Lanvenrinn. KR, von, 1884, The Seyplomedusae of the Southern Hemisphere, Prog, Lin, Sov. NvS.W., 9, pp. 155-69, 242-9. 259-306. Lennenrecn, R. ven, 1887. Descriptive Cataleyue of the Medusae af the Austrian Sea, The Australian Museum. 1887. Lose, S, W., 1937. Stuclies on Chinese Hydrozog. T, On some Aydromedusae from the Chekiang Coast. Peking Nat, Hist. Bull,, 2 (4), pp. 351-65, 21 text-figs. Maas, O., 1903. Die Seyphomedusen der Siboga Expedition. Siboga Exped., Monogr. 11, live, N,Q] pp., 12. pls. Mayen, A, G. 1910, Medusae of the World. Aydromedusae, I, 1, pp. 1-498, pls, 1-53. Seypheinedisac, TT, pp. 499-734, pls. 56-76. Washington. Pull. Carnes, Instn. No, 109. Maver, A. G., 1815. Medusae of the Philippines and of Torres Straits. Being a Report on the Seyphomedusac Collected by the U.S. Pisheries Bureait Steamer “Albatross” in the Philippine Islands and Malay Archipelago, 1907-1910, and upon the Medusace Collected by the Expedition of the Carnegie Institution of Washington to Torres Straits, Australia, in 1933. Pap. Tortugas Lab., 8, pp. 157-203, pls. 1-3. Maver, Ao G., 1917. Tepert upon the Seyphomedurae Colleeteclk hy the U.S, Borean of Fisheries Steamer “Albatross” in the Philippime Islands and Muay Archipelago. Bull. U.S, Nat, Mus, 100, pp, 171-233, Mixon, Me G, K., 1982. The Hydromednsuc of Madras. Bull. Madras Govt, Mus., N.S. Nat. Hist. Sect., 3 (2), pp, 1-32, 3 pls. Péron, F... and Lesurun, C. A., 1809. Histoire péndérale et partieuli¢re de tous Jes andi qui cormposent la famille des Meduses. Ann. Mus. hist. nat., 14, pp. 312-66. Porn, E, C,, 1949, A Large Medusa in Sydney Barbour. Austr, Mus. May, 10 (1), pp, 14-16, text-ies. Pore, FE. C., 195da. Sea Liee or Jellyfish? Ibid., 11 (1), pp. 16-21, 278 P. 1. KRAMP Perr, E. C., 1953b, Murine Stingers. Jhid., 11 (4), Dee. 1953, pp. Lit-15. Pore, Fan 1963. Jelly-fish Stings in the Siumner of 1962-63, Austral. Natural History. 14 he Quoy, J. R.C,, and Gamraiw, J. P., 1824. Voyage autour de monde . . . exécuté sur FUranic et la Physicienne, pendant . ,, 1817-20. Zoologie, 1V, + 712 pp. and atlas. Ranson, G., 1945. Les Seyphoméduses de Ja collection du Muséum National d'Histoire Naturelle Paris. I. Catalogue raisonné; origine des révoltés. Tbid., Ser. 2, Tame 17; pp. 312-20. Russenn, FL S.. 1964, On Scyphomedusay of the Genus Pelagia. J, mar. biol, Ass. U.K. 44, pp. 133-6, Sovracotr, A, ¥., 1960. Venomous Jellyfish, Good Health for South Australia, No, 113, pp. 18-23. Soutncerr, BR. V., 19630, Coelenieratus of Medical Importance. Venom. and Poison, Aninials, Pacifie Area. Pergarnon Press, 1963, SovTHcotr, K, V.. 1963b, Medical Effects of Jellyfish, Australian Skindivers’ Mag., 13 (7). pp. 16-21. Sriaswy, G., (919, Die Seyphomedusen-Sammilung des Naturhistorischen Reichsmuseunis in Leiden. Ul, Stauromedusen, Coronatae, Sermnueostomae, Zoolog, Meded: Deel 5, pp. 66-98, text-fizs., pls, 2-3. Sriasny, G,, 1921. Studien uber Rhizostomeen. Capita Zool. Decl 1 (2), pp. VII + 179, 4 pls., text-figs. Strasmy, G., 1922. Die Scyphomedusen-Sanmbing von Dr. Th. Mortensen nebst anderen Medusen ans dem Zoologischen Museum der Universitat in Kopenhagen. Papers from Dr, Th. Martensen’s Pacific Expedition, 1914-1916, XIII. Vidensk. Medd, dansk jaturh. Forea. Kbh., 73, pp. 513-55, 14 text-figs, Srrasmy, G., 19244. Seyphomednsen yon den Molukken und den Keiinseln. Papers from Dr, Th, Mortensen’s Pacific Mxpecition, 1914-16, XXIV. [bid., 77, pp. 485-99, text-figs. Strasny, G., 19246. Rhizostomeen von Manila, Zool. Meded., Deel 8, pp. 39-54, text-figs. Sorassy, G., 1924¢, Ueber einize Seyphomediysen yon Sydney (Port Jackson). Ibid., Deel $8, pp. 53-72, text-figs. Steasmy, G., 1926. Alte und neue Scyphomedusen you Australien, [bid., Deel 9, pp. 249-57- 3 text-figs. Sarasmy, G,, 1929. Ueber einige Seyphomedusen auy dem Zoologischen Museum in Am- sterdam. ITbid.. Deel 12, pp, 195-215, 15 text-figs. Stransy. G,, 193la. Die Rbizostomeen-Sammlung des British Museum (Natural History) in London. Jhid., Deel 14, pp. 137-78, 9 text-fgs. Sriassy, G., 1930h, Ueber einige Coelenterata yoo Australien. Ibid, Deel 14. pp. 2740, I test-fig, Siasmwy, G.. 1933, Chee Cassiapea sidrosia Ag. & May. aus den australischen Gewassern Proc. Acad, Sei, Amst., 86, pp. 913-22, 1 text-fig, Sriassy. G., 1934. Seyphomedusas. Discovery Rep. 8, pp. 329-96, 12 best-fies., 2 pls. srtasny. G., 1955. Die Seyphomecusen der Snellivsexpedition, Verli, Akad, Wet. Anise. Sect. 2. Deel 34, Pt. 6 pp, 1-44. 9 text-fies. 1 pl. Sriasny. C., 1940, Die Sevphomedusen. Dana Rep, No. 18, pp. 1-28, pls. Lb. 2. Stiaswy, G., and Maspen, A van pen. 2943, Uber Sevphomedusen aus can Ochotskisehen unl Kamtsehatka Meer nebst einer Kritik der Genera Cyunea and Devtmerme. Zool. Jb. Abt. Syst., 76, 3, pp. 227-66, Trier, M. EB. 1926, Seyphomedusae. da: Michamlken, Wo, andl TMartmeyer, Re Win Siud- West Auste., 5) pp, 223-47, text-figs.. 1 pl. niosras, L. RB. L963. Phallusoniue Larvae Associated with Medusae. Natture. London. 198 ‘Torney, H. B.. 1909.) The Leptomecisue of the Sa Diego Keston, Univer. Calif. Publ Zool, 6 (2). pp, LI-31. text-fies, Ueonpa, T., 1954, Distribution of Seyphoniecusace in Japanese anc ils Aclieent Waters J. Fao. Sei. Hokkaide Univ, Ser. 6, Zaol, 12, np, 209-19. P. L. Kramp PLATE I ate. Fig. 1. Aurelia aurita, South Australia, Oral view of umbrella. hs. Loe, 4 e . ¥ oc ee gS a ig “4 - Vig. 2. Aurelia aurita, South Australia. Mouth-arm. PLATE 2 P, L. Kramp , A483. men. Gonionemus hamatus n. sp. Type speci Fig. 4 P. L. Kramp Fig. 3. Helgicirrha danduensis, Darwin, Northern Territory. Stomach and lower portion of peduncle; dotted area denotes position of gonads. PLATE 3 we Fig. 5. Gonionemus hamatus n. sp. Oral lips, showing prominent warts of nematocysts. Fig. 6. Gonionemus hamatus n. sp. Terminal end of tentacle, showing adhesive pad and rings of nema- tocysts. TWO NEW SPECIES OF EMBADIUM (BORAGINACEAE) BY ERNEST H. ISING Summary Two new species, Embadium uncinatum and E£. johnstonii, are described and their characteristic details illustrated. The description of the genus Embadium is emended and a key provided to the three species of which the specimens preserved in Australian herbaria are enumerated, and the distribution is shown on a map. The position of Embadium within the genera of Boraginaceae is explained by quotations from letters of 1. M. Johnston and by a key to related genera in the South Australian flora. TWO NEW SPECIES OF EMBADIUM (BORAGINACEAE) by Frxnsr H. [sinc® (Communicated by Hj. Eichler) [Read 14 October 1965] SUMMARY Two new species, Embadinm uneinatum and I. johnstonii, are deseribed and their characteristic details Mlastrated, The description of the genus Em- badium is emonded and a key provided ta the three species of which the specimens preseryecl in Australian herbaria are enumerated, and the distribution is shown, on a map. The positlou of Embadium within the venera of Bora- winaccwe is explained by quotations from letters of I. M. Johuston amd by a key to related venera in the South Australian flrs. The genus Embudium Black was based on a collection by Miss B, J, Murray at Arcoona, west of Lake Torrens, South Australia, A specimen of this collec- tion had been sent to the late Dr, I. M. Johaston [Gray Herbarium (later Arnold Arboretum) Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A.], a well-known specialist of Boraginaceac, who considered it as a representative of the only species of a new genus, This was subsequently published by J. M. Black xs Embadium. stagnense, and Johnston's opinion on this plant was quoted. In u further letter to J, M, Black, Jolmston reiterates his views that the plant belongs to an undescribed genus with affinity with Omiphalodes Moench, As this communication of the 7th April, 1931, remained unpublished, bit its contents should be made available. it seems appropriate ta quote it here in full: “Dear Mr. Black, L have received your letter of March 2necd and the specimens of plants that you mention sending, The littke Borage that von sence is one of the must interesting that lis passed thenugh my hands for a long time. 1 haye worked at il ayer several different periods thiring the last few days arn) the more [ shidy it the amore Tam convineed that vou have nok only a very distinct undescribed species, but a reniarkable indeseribed gents as well! The fatts are that the plant is se distinct 1 aint quite: uncertain whore it beloiigs in, the scheme of genera in its family. On my first survey of the plant [ thonglit it imist belong to the Cynoglossear somewhere near Omphalades, A cose inspection of the plant, however, reverted the fact Uhat the wallet attachment is medial or subinedial, quite as it is in’ the Lrvtriehiete. 1 vaturally thoughre that it might be a eurions derivative ef your very «dts- tinctive Australian Leppula, DL. eonteued which Brand has placed (1 believe: with question- able reasons) i & mamoatepie genus Oniphalaleppula A statly of Lo eoridacd, however, showed jue that that species was tvpical gf Leppefe in the attachnent of its mtlets ane dlochidialks nudet appordag's, Your plant certainly is not closely related to. this Australan specivs Of Lappula. In fact, fits belongs to the f/ritriehieae, it mast be placed near Mackelia aul Fritvivhiune just where it keys Gut in my synopsis af the Ol World genera, From these two genern, if is, of course, unquestionably distioct. Althongl teclinicwl characters. place the plant with Haékelia and Eritrichauy in the Evitrichieae. 1 must still confoss that it does sugesl to me cach new time | examine it, the genus Oniphalodes in the Cynoglusseac, There is considerable resemblance in the erass hubit between your plant and stunted forms of * State Herbarium: of South Australia, Adelaide. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Aust. (1965), Vol. 89, 284 KE, H. ISING Omphalodes linifolia of Europe. The distinctive characters of your plant are as follows: (1) the nutlets with small medial dorsal attachments, uncinate pubescence, lack of glochidiate appendages, and above all, with the curious crenate, tumid margins and crest-like tumid medial dorsal keel, (2) small, pyramidal gynobase surmounted by a short style which does not equal the height of the nutlet; (3) recurved pedicels springing from the axiles of foliaceous bracts; (4) very small, unappendaged whitc flowers, and finally (5) herbaceous and distinctly annual habil, By all means ] should advocate your describing it as a new species and a new genus!” On 16.1X.1954 Johnston sent me a further note on Embadium, which may he of general interest, as follows: “TL have made a new study af Embadium, examining the more minute corolla structures, pollen, fruit-organisation, ctc. I am convinced that it is most closely related to Lappula fron which it differs in the medial rather than longitudinal nutlet attachment. The pollen agrees with that of Lappula and not at all clusely with cither Eritrichium or Hackelia, and not at all with Omphalodes. Like Lappula the oblong grains are slightly constricted at the equator and have 2 rows of pores, 3 aboye and 3 below the equator. The grains are small 13-16 x 10m.” t H On ee oc ree fe a ey ee ey a ee —7 es Map of South Australia showing the distribution of Embadium species: @ = E. stagnense Black; X = E, uncinatum Ising; O = E. johnstonii Ising. TWO NEW SPECIES OF LMBADIUM 285 This was written when Dr, Johnston had received my No. 3627 which 1 considered tu represent a new species, an vpinion confirmed by Dr, Johnston. He regarded Lobadium as u distinct genus and pointed out that it had affnities with Omphalodes Moench and [ritrichiun Opiz which are not Australian genera, They lick the tumid margin and crest-like tumid, medial, dorsal keel of Em- hadiwm (the crest-like keel is absent in Enebodiun jehnstonii), In Embadiun there ure no scales in the throat of the corolla which are present in Omphalolap- pula. Leppula, Omphalodes and Eritrichium. The nutlets of Hackelia arc spiny a ale in Bmabadium uncinatim. The mutlet areole is basal in Erifrichiwm and Lappula differing from the more ov less central position of the arcole in Em- hadinne ond Omphalalapprila. Thus it appears that Eimbadium is near ta Omphalodes in the reflexed marvin on the outer fee and the areule on the inner face of the nutlet and also near to Omphalolappula in the areole. Unfortmately, Dr. Johuston was not able ta deseribe the new species represented by my No. 3627 before he died, and thus | took up the examination of all the anaterial of the genus available from the Australian herbaria, Apart from two specimens fram Melbourne (MEL, uo specimens were received on low, AU other specimens were located at Adelaide (AD). The results ol ray investigation we presented herewnuder. All specimens placed in Emhadivm come trom South Australian Iycalities. Two new species awe recognized and make an emendiation of the generic deserip- tion necessary (see below). The kev to the venera of Boriginaveae in J. M. Black, FI.S,Austral. ed.2(1957)708, should be altered as follows: Replace the key between “D. Torus conical or convex, at least half as Tone as nutlet” and “D. Torus iluost flat...” by the following: (1) Gorally with scales in the throat Nutlety nsnilly # beset with prickles. (2) Nutlets conves or flatem che outer fier Cynuglossan (2) Nutlets with a tuberenlate Tollow inthe centre of the unter fcr. Omplielolappula (1) Corolle withoat seales tn the throat. Nutlets 2-4, with or withoat prickles, avoid te brigonaies. (3) Cymes Indieteate. Stina capitete. Nutlets 2. keeled alone upper part of inner face, (4) Nutlets 2-4, raitose, withart a tanid margins areole aeeupyme the lower pect at the immer fee, Plagiobatlirys (LE) Natlets -#, sintoth or ribbed, with a tomid rellexed margins areole amall, situated abont the middle of the inner Cave, Kmbaddiam (3) Cymes vhructeate, Aisinekia Kmbadium Black, Trans.Roy.Soe.$. Austral 55(1931)141: Rebertsou in Black, 11). Austral.ed.2(1957)7 16. Calyx S-scet fo almost free sepals: corolla 5-lobed, without scales in the throat, 5 oblong horizontal impressions on the outside below the lobes corres- ponding ti 5 pretuberunues inside the the: stamens 5, included in corulla, fila- ments short. curved; style inserted between the 4 Inbes of the oyary, shorter than nuflets, stigma enpitate: uutlets 4, oveid with a tumid margin ineurved or inrolled towards the centre of the outer face which is slightly concave; crest on outer fice medial, present or absent; areole fixed medially’ (just below the centre) to the pyramidal gynobasis, keeled above areole: embryo ovate, cotyledons broader und longer than the superior radicle. Annual herbs beset with hispid usually tuberculate bristles, Fruiting pedicely recarved— — Type species: EL sfaenense Black. 286 E, H. [SING Kev ro Spears (1) Crest on ttlet present. Stems — decumbent. few, i2) Crest inflated, oblong, entire and indulate at summit, wuiarmued. Nutlet with minute ; : mg, en uncinae on inner face, Stem leaves usually lanceolate, 1. EL stagnenise 6h) Grest not inflated, fat, compressed Jongthwise, divided into conical, contiguous sections with apical uncinae. Nutlet glabrous on iuner face, Stem leaves elliptic to ovale, 2, EF. unecinatium (1h) Crest absent. Steins nsually aseendings or creck, numerous, Stem leaves lancedlate to ovale, 3. FE. johostonii 1, Embadiun stagnense Black. Trans.Roy,Soc.S.Austral.53(1931)141, t6_ fig.7- Robertson in Black, FI-S.Austral.cd.2(1957)716, fig. 1002. Plant annual, slender, beset with hairs situated on tubercles. Stems tadical, 1-8, decumbent 5-16 cm long; lateral branches few. Radical leaves oblanceolate, 15-45 mm long including the petiole which is usually longer than the lamina, ubtuse; stem leaves elliptical, ovate to broad lanceolate, 5-15 mm long, + sessile, obtuse. Flowers sulitary, white, leaf opposed or not; pedicels 4-10 mm long. Calyx lobes ovate, 2mm long, acute, persistent. Corolla tubular, ca. 14 mm long: lohes obtuse, shorter than tube. Nutlets ca. 3 mm long, outer face almost \ram > o}e a7 ae {mm ARAN | | Fig. 1. Embadium staugnense Black — A: whole plant (B. J. Murray, isotype); B: nutlet outer face; C: nutlet inner face: D: transverse section of nutlet; E: lougitu- dina] section of nutlet; F: corolla pressed flat; G: corolla spread open showing inside, TWO NEW SPECIES OF EMBADIUM 287 glabrous: margin undulate; crest medial, inflated, unduilate, ca, as high as margin; inner face convex with sparse minute uncinze; keel short, situated above areole: arevle lancevlate, situated jast below middle of wmtlet (Fig. 1). Specimens examined: B. J. Murray 99; AD 96450111, 96450112 (holotype); MEL 7702: Areoona, west of Lake Torrens, South Australia; 18)1X,1927, 2. Embadium uncinatum E.H. Ising, spawy. Planta annus, graciles, pilis hispidis divarieatis vel erectis plermmqne cunt busi lata ornitiss canles radicales, 4-5, decumbentes, ad 30 em longi; rani laterales panei. Folia radicalin oblinecolata ca, 4 em longa, petiolo (amina aequilonga) includento. Folia cantina Wlliptica vel ovate-linecolata, 16-25 aio) longa et 3-9 mm Tata, plerumene. sessilia, distantia, tenuia, apieem versus in bracteas Janceolatas transeuutia, Flores solitarii, albi, (mon semper} folio oppositi, Culyeis segmenta ovata, 2-3 mm longa, persistentia. Corolla ca. 3 mm Tonga lobi obtusi, ca, 1 mm longi, Nueula ca. 4 mn longa: facies exterior cum paucis pilis minutis biberculatis ornata; margo lobis contiguis, conicis ornata; conicae in apici glo- chidittie; crista supra prominentem medialom posite, erecta, plana, longitudinaliter compressa. + Imm 2, try aes Fig, 2. Embadium uncinatum Tsing ~ A> whole plant (P. G, Wilson 151, holotype); B: nutlet outer face; C: nutlet inner fave: Ds trans- verse section of nutlet; E: longitudinal section of nuthet; F: coralla pressed flat; G: corolla spread open showing inside 284 Ih. H. LSING 4-3 lobuta Clobis marsiniy similibus); fucies interior gouveva glabra, nitida eynbitorma: wartnu piculain duplo brevior: areola lauceolata, brevis, vuewloe infra median alfixaes costue rarlinuites, pancae, Holotypus. PC. Wile 151: AD 95028067; Whyalla-Kimba Road, Kyre Peningila, South Australia; 2.%,1958, Plant annual, slender, beset with hispid usually broad-hased spreading to erect jinirs: stems radical, 4 to 5. decumbent, to 30 em long: lateral branches few, Leaves: radical, oblunceolate, ca, den long including petiole which is ahoat as long as lamina, ster, elliptic to ovate-lanceolite, 16 ta 25 mur long and 5-9 mm wide, usnally sessile, distant, thin, passing into lanceolate bracts, Flowers solitary, white, leaf-opposed or not, Calyx segments ovate, 2-3 mm fon. persistent. Corolla ca. 3 umm tong; lobes abtuse ca, L mm long: nitlet ca. bem long: outer face with a few miiute tuberculate hairs: margin decorated with conival, contiguous lobes with apical imeinae; erest situated on a medial ridge, erect, flat, compressed lengthwise, decorated with 4-5 lobes similar ta: those on the oomerciu: mer face convex, glabrous, shining, evinbiform, keel half as lou as puiblet: areole lanceolate, shart, situated below centre oF nutlet, ribs muctiuating. fis, (Pig. 2.) Ii is ndticeable tet tis species bas glochidiate appendages which adso avour in Crmoglossin, in some species of Hackeha, and one species i cach ut Omphalodes and Eritichinn, Bat these appendages do amt neeur in the other two species of Rarbarlinm. vie. EB. stagnense inl by johustonii. Virther speciiveus «amined: Rath 2. Beanieon sais MET. (brnits oly consisting of 2 fragments with pedicels, septs yunl 2 nutlets attached, aiel 2. Tense nirtletss nonpted pa euvdope with 7702): Near Quorn, southern end of Plineers Reto, South Australias Avytt Was— ©. 2 Ising S760: AD YOI5U1S> Crawler Hinge (sooth), Byte Pentnsnke oath Anstrabias 22,D5,1938 — id. STOO, AID SEIBOLO7: Wadinna, Bare Peninsali 231X193). — id, sao AD S6450108: Crawler Taree Csoeth. tesa Paney), Eyre Pentosohi 228, 13h), Specimens af hath ny iumbers 8760 antl 750 were sent lo Dr TM. Jobuston iu F955, bat oup te Che time of his death on G03.1960) ne reply hack heen cecedyed ror eortd the specimens, correspondence of ins. hotes wilh reauet to them which might possibly Taye hoot prepared hy him be traced at the Comy TMerbariiny and Arnold: Arboretim The epithe refers to the minute hooks at the apex of the appendayes on the note margin and crest. 3. Embadium johnstonii F.H. Ising, sp. nov, Planta, annua, gracilis, erecta, pilis hispidis albirlilis eyspresyis oenatis, basi tiberciilates vestittian Caules tadieales, aunnerosi, ascendentes vel erecti. Volia radicalia angurste, oblaneroluta, 35-40 mot loaga petiolo (laming aequilonga) includento. obtnsi. Folia canting oVatl vel kutceelstta, aupicem: versus dn bracteas transenntia, 12-20 muy longa, obtusa, sessilin. Mics sobtani, ubi (non semper) folio oppositl pedieellis 245 non longis. Calycis segments oviti, ex, Sami louga, atute. persistentia, Carola tubrlata, ea. 2 an lomea, plari-nervata. fol oltusi, tubo bievroves. Nudie Gt 2 nia Imus fieies exterior glabra, cargo integra, relly vel involwtey cristi ctbsens; facies taterioe convert, wlebra, nitida; carte rmeolien chinde brevior: areola lanceolate, brevis, nnculae dafre: oiedian atfivee: costae raciantes, paucae, Holatypus. 2. H. Psi 34-4; AD 96450103; Evelyn Downs, 90 iniles southavest ol Qodnudatta, South Austfalia: 24.0X.1959. Plant annual, slender, erect, beset with hispid, whitish appressed hairs situated on tubercles, Stems radical, numerous, ascending or erect. Leiuves: radical, narrow oblanceolate, 35-40 mm long including the petiole which is about ax dong as the lamina, obtuse; stem, ovate to lanceolate, reduced ta bracts in upper park of stem, 12 to 20 mm long, obtuse, sessile. Flowers solitary, white, leuf-opposed or not, pedicels 2-8 mm long. Calyx segments ovate, ca. 3 mm long, acute, persistent, Coralla tubular, ca. 2 mm long; lobes obtuse, shorter than tube; nerves several. Nutlet ca. 2 mm lou, outer face glabrous; marvin entire, reflexed or inrolled: crest absent: inner face convex, glabrous. shining. TWO NEW SPECIES OF EMRADIUM 289 keel half as long as nutlet; areole lanceolate, short, situated below the centre of the nutlot; ribs radiating, few, (Tig. 3.) Further specimens ecamined; 2. 1. Ising 38424: AD 96450L06; Evelyn Downs, via Oodnadatta, South Australia; 2.08.1955,— a, 8627, AD 96450105: Evelyn Downs; IX, X.1950 (Johnston commented on this mimber in his letter of I60X.1954: “Your collection, No, 3627, obviously has its Closest. relation with Kanbadiun stagnensy, but until proved other- = Wig, 3. Embadiom johuastonit Ising — Ar whole plant (B.A, Tsing 3842, holulype); Bs mutlet outer faews Cy outlet inner fave; D: (ransverse seetion pf nuthet; E: longitudinal section of mitlet; VP: corolla pressed flat: G: corolla spread open shawing insice, wise 1 cuntot believe that it is con-speciie wil that species, The difference iu nutlet orginisation between the two collevtions is tee ereat ta he passed over, If you care to » publish the plant as anew species by all means dose... "l— il. 4006: AD 96450104: Evelyn Downs; IX, X.1949-— T, RN. Lothian 2852; AD 96343136: Arkaringa Atmphi- theatre areca, ca, SO Jon south-west of Oodnadatta; 15,VIIT. 963. This species is named in honour of the late Dr. Ivan VM. Johnston, AcksowrlFnen ENTS My thanks are expressed to the olficers in charge of warions Australian State Herbarit for searching: fur specimens of Embadinm species or loaning specimens of cognate genera; aso to Dr Oj. Eichler for adviec und for facilities at the State Herbarium of South Australia daring the preparation of this report: ta Mr, P. G, Wilson for the Latin deserip- tions herein; and to Mr, L. Dutkiewiex for assistance with the cnawings. OBITUARY 291 Leonarp KreirH WARD, B.A., B.E., D.Sc,, 18.0. 1879-1964 Leonard Keith Ward died on the 30th September, 1964, after a long illness which had enforced his retirement from active participation in profes- sional affairs for some fifteen years. L, K. Ward was born in Sydney in 1879. After attending Sydney and Brisbane Grammar Schools, he entered Sydney University in 1897, graduating in Arts in 1900 and in Engineering in 1903, specializing in Geology. He was a pupil of Edgworth David, and a student contemporary of Douglas Mawson and W. G. Woolnough. Immediately after graduation Ward spent three years in Broken Hill with the Broken Hill Pty. Co. Ltd., and in 1903 accepted appointment as a lecturer in mineralogy, petrology and mining geology in the Western Australian School of Mines in Kalgoorlie, a position he held for four years. In 1907 he took up duty as Assistant Government Geologist and Inspector of Mines in Tasmania, and it is from this position that the first published record of his work emerges. He carried out investigations of the silver-lead fields of Mt. Farrell, the tin field of Dundas, the Zeehan silver-lead field and the Mt. Balfour copper field, reports of which appear in publications of the Geological Survey of Tasmania. At this stage also he contributed to the Royal Society of Tasmania. In 191], Ward was appointed Director of Mines and Government Geologist in South Australia, succeeding H. Y. L. Brown, who had been Government Geologist since 1882. With Ward's appointment came a re-organization of the Department, including the recognition that additional staff was necessary, and R. Lockhart Jack was appointed as Ward’s assistant, Ward undertook systematic examination of the State’s mineral and under- ground water resources, bringing to his natural interest in these matters an ability for systematic thinking and an unusual facility for clear writing. His reports and papers are outstanding for their lucidity, both to the scientific reader and to the layman. During the thirty-two years in which he occupied this office, Ward contributed many reports and papers in Government journals and in the proceedings of scientific societies. His interests ranged over mineral and hydrological investigations, petroleum exploration and the detailed exam- ination of the State’s coal resources, including the Leigh Creek field. The Bibliography of South Australian Geology contains some fifty references to. his published work, including the revision of the Geological Map of the State in 1914 and 1928. He served as a member of the Royal Commission on the Coal Industry in 1929-30 and on the Commonwealth Oil Advisory Committee. In 1926 Ward was awarded the degree of Doctor of Science for a thesis on the geology of Central Australia, part of which was published by this Society in Vol. 49 of the Transaction, 1925. In January, 1942, he was recognised in the Birthday Honours with the award of the Imperial Service Order. He retired in 1943, but continued to advise the Department of Mines in a consultant capacity. Dr. Ward's service to the Royal Society was outstanding. He was a member of the Council from 1924-27 and 1933-35; Vice-President 1927-28, and President 1928-30. He was elected an Honorary Fellow of the Society and awarded the Verco Medal in 1955. Although in his latter years he was prevented from attend- ing meetings of the Society, his interest in it and in all professional matters was maintained to the end. He was a man to whom pretence was anathema, he took quiet delight in cutting the self-important down to size, and in bringing to light the true facts of any situation. His wisdom and kindliness and his fortitude during long years of physical discomfort will long be remembered by all privileged to know him, IL. W. P. CONTENTS J. A. Prescorr: The Climatology of the Vine ( Vitis vinifera L.), The Cool Limits of Cultivation SF a ei Lee I Oy a Eee Pe Mary A. Topp: The Distribution of Eucalyptus Species in Portion of County Stanley, South Australia wee Wee ee ee ee B. B. Canropus, R. L. Specur and M. L, JAckMan:; The Vegetation of Koonamore Station, South Australia - - - - - - : I. B. Freyrac: Mount Toondina Beds — Permian Sediments in a Probable Piercement Structure + = z z 3 5 x = 2 N. H. Lupsroox: Revision of the Tate Molluscan Types, Pt. 3, Limopsidae, Glycymeridae, Arcidae, Cucullaeidae = = a - = e C. B. Wetts: Patterns in Soil Geography in and near Adelaide, South Australia - - : = 3 : E Z Y J. B. Firman: Late Cainozoic Sedimentation in Northern Spencer Gulf, South Australia - - : “ : : : 2 R. T. Lance: Growth Ring Characteristics in an Arid Zone Conifer - - D. Mermers and W. D. L. Rwe: Procoptodon goliah ( Macropodidae, Marsupialia) from Western Eyre Peninsula, South Australia - EvizasetH A. SHaw: A Critical Revision of some Endemic Australian Genera of Cruciferae- - — - : 3 . . : a ae I. A. Mumme: An Hypothesis on the wee of Thucholite Mineralization at the Wallaroo-Moonta Mining Field - Spe oe’ P. L. Kramp: Some Medusae (mainly Scyphomedusae) from Australian Coastal Waters - - = - a z= : ~ : a = E. H. Istnc: Two New Species of Embadium (Boraginaceae)- -~ - Obituary: Dr. L. K. Warp - - 4 SRN oe Aare tk ; Notiee. tn deniers >a Suet geet foe moe ee mn Revenue Account - - - - - = = = xs . cS Library Account, Balance Sheet, Endowment Fund - - “ 2 = Changes in Membership, 1964-65 -- =<... > Olu. List of Lectures and Exhibits, 1964-65 - 2 = 5 = < - Awards of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal - - - - - | . New Genera, Species and Varieties Described in this Volume - = - PAGE